礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
在《相应部》中· 《因缘品复注》巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Saṃyuttanikāye · Nidānavaggaṭīkā
1. 因缘相应复注
463 段
《缘起经》的注释巴利
1. Paṭiccasamuppādasuttavaṇṇanā
1 注疏师说“第一缘起经”,是因为第二经等也都是依照缘起的理路来宣说的。其中“tatra”这个词,是用来指明那些作为世尊“住”这一行为的修饰语而说出的地点和时间,为了显示这一点,注疏师说“当那时……(中略)……阐明”。因为“taṃ”这个词是对已说内容的指代,所以在这里,它应当指代地点或时间,而不是别的什么。以上是对“tatra”一词具有指代性质的初步释义。然而,在这类场合中,“tatra”一词能揭示出说法所特定的地点和时间,所以说“或在适于言说的处所与时间”。因此,“tatra”的意思是:世尊为了说法而召唤、开示比丘们的那个处所,或者那个时间。接着用“并非如此”等话来确立这个意思。巴利
1. Dutiyasuttādīnipi paṭiccasamuppādavaseneva desitānīti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasutta’’nti. Tatrāti padaṃ ye desakālā idha viharaṇakiriyāya visesanabhāvena vuttā, tesaṃ paridīpananti dassento ‘‘yaṃ samayaṃ…pe… dīpetī’’ti āha. Taṃ-saddo hi vuttassa atthassa paṭiniddeso, tasmā idha desassa kālassa vā paṭiniddeso bhavituṃ arahati, na aññassa. Ayaṃ tāva tatrasaddassa paṭiniddesabhāve atthavibhāvanā. Yasmā pana īdisesu ṭhānesu tatrasaddo dhammadesanāvisiṭṭhaṃ desaṃ kālañca vibhāveti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle’’ti . Tena tatrāti yattha bhagavā dhammadesanatthaṃ bhikkhū ālapi abhāsi, tādise dese, kāle vāti attho. Na hītiādinā tamevatthaṃ samattheti.
难道世尊不是曾经站在某个地方,用“现在还不是时候”等话拒绝了婆希亚的说法请求,而就在那条路中间,仍然站着为他宣说了佛法吗?这确实是事实。但这正是“在不应说法的时候不说法”的例子,所以他说“现在还不是时候”。至于那里所说的“我们已经进入村落了”,那也是为了说明那同样是不适合说法的时间。因为当时婆希亚由于长途跋涉的劳累,色身变得不堪受法;由于强烈欢喜的冲击,名身也不堪受法。世尊为了等待这两方面都平息下来,为了遮止戏论,才以“还不是时候”为理由间接地拒绝了。而“在不应说法的地方不说法”的例子,则有“那时,世尊离开道路,坐在某棵树下”,以及“从住处出来,坐在精舍阴凉处已敷设的座位上”等等,这些在此处都被“等”这个词所涵盖。在“诸比丘,那个愚人在这里造了恶业之后”这类句子中,“kho”这个词只是填补音节;在“不尊重、不顺从而住,实在是苦”这类句子中,是表示限定;在“贤友,究竟到什么程度,当导师住于远离时,弟子们却不修学远离呢”这类句子中,是表示初始时间,也就是作为句子的开端。其中,填补音节只是言辞上的修饰;表示初始时间,则只是作为句子的开端;而表示限定,则是显示一种规定。“因此他呼唤说”这样,就是在呼唤中显示了规定。巴利
Nanu ca yattha ṭhito bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’tiādinā bāhiyassa dhammadesanaṃ paṭikkhipi, tattheva antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitova tassa dhammaṃ desesīti? Saccametaṃ. Adesetabbakāle adesanāya hi idaṃ udāharaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’ti. Yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhamhā’’ti, tampi tassa akālabhāvasseva pariyāyena dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa hi tadā addhānaparissamena rūpakāye akammaññatā ahosi, balavapītivegena nāmakāye. Tadubhayassa vūpasamaṃ āgamento papañcaparihāratthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho’’ti pariyāyena paṭikkhipi. Adesetabbadese adesanāya pana udāharaṇaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi, vihārato nikkhamitvā vihārapacchāyāyaṃ paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti evamādikaṃ idha ādisaddena saṅgahitaṃ. ‘‘Sa kho so bhikkhave bālo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 3.248) padapūraṇamatte kho-saddo, ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati appatisso’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.21) avadhāraṇe, ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.31) ādikālatthe, vākyārambheti attho. Tattha padapūraṇena vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ kataṃ hoti, ādikālatthena vākyassa upaññāsamattaṃ, avadhāraṇatthena pana niyamadassanaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā āmantesi evā’’ti āmantane niyamo dassito hotīti.
为什么说“世尊是表示世间敬重”呢?前面不是已经说过“世尊”这个词了吗?虽然前面已经说过,但那一处是为了显示在前述地点安住时行为主体的殊胜,并不是针对称呼;而这里则是针对称呼,所以在经文中再次说出“世尊”,正是为了表达这个意思。为了说明这个意思,才说“世尊是表示世间敬重”。“堪闻法之人语”,是指对将要宣说的缘起教法堪能听闻之人的称呼。在四众之中,只有比丘才是这类教法特别合适的容器,为了显示他们以殊胜的方式成为教法的领受者,所以这里举出“比丘”;接着为了说明词义,又说“再者”。其中,“乞求者”就是比丘,意思是由于有乞求的习性、有乞求的法则,所以叫比丘。“已进入乞食行”,是因为也进入了佛陀等人所进入的乞食行、次第乞食行,依此而行、随此而行,所以是比丘。凡是舍弃了或多或少的财富,从在家出家成为无家者,他舍弃了以农耕、牧牛等方式谋生,仅仅因为接受出家形相就进入了乞食行,所以是比丘。或者因为生活依赖他人,即使是在精舍中吃集体供养的食物,也进入了乞食行,所以是比丘;又或者因为依靠乞讨一口一口的食物而活,对出家生起勇猛之心,所以进入了乞食行,因此是比丘。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pubbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padaṃ vuttanti? Yadipi pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ pana yathāvuttaṭṭhāne viharaṇakiriyāya kattuvisesadassanaparaṃ, na āmantanakiriyāya, idha pana āmantanakiriyāya, tasmā tadatthaṃ puna bhagavāti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti. Tassatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti āha. Kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacananti vakkhamānāya paṭiccasamuppādadesanāya savanayogyapuggalavacanaṃ. Catūsupi parisāsu bhikkhū eva edisānaṃ desanānaṃ visesena bhājanabhūtāti sātisayena sāsanasampaṭiggāhakabhāvadassanatthaṃ idha bhikkhugahaṇanti dassetvā idāni saddatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’ti āha. Tattha bhikkhakoti bhikkhūti bhikkhanasīlattā bhikkhanadhammattā bhikkhūti attho. Bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti buddhādīhipi ajjhupagataṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ uñchācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā anuṭṭhitattā bhikkhu. Yo hi koci appaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so kasigorakkhādīhi jīvikakappanaṃ hitvā liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā bhikkhu. Parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā vā vihāramajjhe kājabhattaṃ bhuñjamānopi bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāya pabbajjāya ussāhajātattā vā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhūti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
按照《分别论》里说到的方法,也就是“穿粪扫衣的人是比丘,破坏种种恶不善法的人是比丘,因为恶不善法已被破坏所以是比丘”这一类说法。“令知”是指在觉悟、了知当中,意思是证知。“乞食的习性”,是指以乞食为生的习惯,而不是以耕种、经商等方式为生的习惯。“乞食的性质”,就像“圣者们为了……而住”这样说的,是指乞食这一行为本身的体性,而不是乞求、欺骗的体性。“在乞食中善于行事”,是指忆念“应当振作起来,不要放逸”这句话,从而在那里不放逸。或者说,戒就是本性。但在这里,是指那样的决心。法是誓戒。另有一些人则这样解释:“戒就是以誓戒的方式受持。法就是世代相传的品行。善于行事就是恭敬行事、尊重行事。”巴利
Ādinā nayenāti ‘‘bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu, bhindati pāpake akusale dhammeti bhikkhu, bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 509) āgatanayena. Ñāpaneti avabodhane, paṭivedaneti attho. Bhikkhanasīlatā, na kasivāṇijjādīhi jīvanasīlatā. Bhikkhanadhammatā ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhantī’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) evaṃ vuttabhikkhanasabhāvatā, na yācanākohaññasabhāvatā. Bhikkhane sādhukāritā ‘‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’’ti (dha. pa. 168) vacanaṃ anussaritvā tattha appamajjatā. Atha vā sīlaṃ nāma pakatisabhāvo. Idha pana tathādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammoti vataṃ. Apare pana ‘‘sīlaṃ nāma vatavasena samādānaṃ. Dhammo nāma paveṇi-āgataṃ cārittaṃ. Sādhukāritā sakkaccakāritā ādarakiriyā’’ti vaṇṇenti.
“比丘们”这个称呼,是针对两类人说的:一类是虽然已经出家成为比丘,却因为出身等而心生骄慢、浮躁自大的人;另一类是以前在家时从不求人,因此把乞食维生看成极其低贱的人。对这两类人,“比丘们”这个词依次说明:一方面指出这种生活方式是卑贱的人、贫穷的人、穷到极点的人所采用的——他们靠到别人家里乞食过活,以此来压伏浮躁自大的心态;另一方面也指出这种生活方式是高贵的人所采用的——比如从拥有丰厚财富的刹帝利等家族出家的人,以及佛陀等为了清净活命而奉行的人,以此来压伏自卑怯弱的心态。应当这样联系起来理解。“比丘们”这个称呼,从它是呼唤语来看,是把对方叫到面前来;从上下文和它的功能来看,是为了让听者生起想听的意愿,并让他们认真听闻、如理作意。为了显示这个意思,所以接着说了“以此‘比丘们’”等话。巴利
Hīnādhikajanasevitavuttinti ye bhikkhubhāve ṭhitāpi jātimadādivasena uddhatā unnaḷā, ye ca gihibhāve paresu atthikabhāvampi anupagatatāya bhikkhācariyaṃ paramakāpaññaṃ maññanti, tesaṃ ubhayesampi yathākkamaṃ ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanena hīnajanehi daliddehi paramakāpaññataṃ pattehi parakulesu bhikkhācariyāya jīvikaṃ kappentehi sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti, adhikajanehi uḷārabhogakhattiyakulādito pabbajitehi buddhādīhi ājīvasodhanatthaṃ sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento dīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karotīti yojetabbaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanaṃ āmantanabhāvato abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ, pakaraṇato sāmatthiyato ca sussūsājananaṃ, sakkaccasavanamanasikāraniyojanañca hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhavoti iminā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“善加作意”指的是听闻时善加用心,作意时也善加用心。那么,听闻等行为怎样才算善加进行呢?就是怀着恭敬与尊重,心想“依这条修行道路,必定能掌握全部教法的成就”,并且在说法等场合远离轻蔑等过失。经中确实说过:“比丘们,具备五种法的人听闻正法,就能够趣入决定,在善法中进入正性。哪五种呢?不轻视说法,不轻视说法者,不轻视自己,心不散乱、专一专注地听闻正法,并且如理作意。比丘们,具备这五种法的人听闻正法,就能够趣入决定,在善法中进入正性。”(《增支部》5.151)因此说“因为教法的成就依赖于善加作意”。所谓教法成就,就是戒等的圆满;因为它在证悟之前最先生起;因为随顺导师的行持,通过实践戒等功德而达成;因为依三种乘道能够生起随法之行,所以成为一切教法的领受者。巴利
Tattha sādhukaṃ manasikārepīti sādhukaṃ savane sādhukaṃ manasikāre ca. Kathaṃ pavattitā savanādayo sādhukaṃ pavattitā hontīti? ‘‘Addhā imāya paṭipattiyā sakalasāsanasampatti hatthagatā bhavissatī’’ti ādaragāravayogena kathādīsu aparibhavādinā ca. Vuttañhi ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Na kathaṃ paribhoti, na kathikaṃ paribhoti, na attānaṃ paribhoti , avikkhittacitto dhammaṃ suṇāti ekaggacitto, yoniso ca manasi karoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahi dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammatta’’nti (a. ni. 5.151). Tenāha ‘‘sādhukaṃ manasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampattī’’ti. Sāsanasampatti nāma sīlādinipphatti. Paṭhamaṃ uppannattā adhigamavasena. Satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sīlādiguṇānuṭṭhānena. Tiṇṇaṃ yānānaṃ vasena anudhammapaṭipattisambhavato sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā.
“以近故”,是因为处在附近。“以近行故”,是因为一切时中都相随相伴。“如所教诫”,是随顺教诫,毫无遗漏地领受教诫,这就是它的意思。“有些比丘”,指那些专注于缘起法之教导的比丘。前面已经用“世尊的说法是普为一切大众的”等话,说明了只对比丘发出召唤的原因;现在为了说明召唤比丘而说法的用意,才提出“世尊究竟为了什么目的”这一质问。其中,“在想别的”,指心思放在别处。“心散乱”,指心没有得定。“在省察法”,指用心回忆昨天或之后几天听过的法。当召唤比丘而说法时,能够从一开始就专注地把握说法,为了以否定的方式说明这一点,才说“他们没有被召唤”等话。巴利
Santikattāti samīpabhāvato. Santikāvacarattāti sabbakālaṃ saṃvuttibhāvato. Yathānusiṭṭhanti anusāsaniyānurūpaṃ, anusāsaniṃ anavasesato paṭiggahetvāti attho. Ekacce bhikkhūti ye paṭiccasamuppādadhamme desanāpasutā, te. Pubbe ‘‘sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā’’tiādinā bhikkhūnaṃ eva āmantanakāraṇaṃ dassetvā idāni bhikkhū āmantetvā dhammadesanāya payojanaṃ dassetuṃ kimatthaṃ pana bhagavāti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha aññaṃ cintentāti aññavihitā. Vikkhittacittāti asamāhitacittā. Dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāti hiyyo tato paradivasesu vā sutadhammaṃ pati manasā avekkhantā. Bhikkhū āmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne ādito paṭṭhāya desanaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkotīti imamevatthaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘te anāmantetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“诸比库”这个说法,应当理解为连声规则中i音脱落,也就是“bhikkhavo iti”。这个iti一词确实有多种含义,可以表示原因、结束、词义异称、类别、确定、例示等。比如在“诸比库,因为它被破坏,所以称为‘色’”(《相应部》3.79)等句中,它表示原因;在“诸比库,因此你们要成为法的继承人,不要成为财食的继承人”(《中部》1.29)等句中,它表示结束;在“如此远离种种观看娱乐”(《长部》1.13)等句中,它表示“等”的意思;在“摩犍提,这就是那个婆罗门的称呼、共名、施设、言说、名称、命名、名号、言辞、音节、表达”(《大义释》73、75)等句中,它表示词义异称;在“诸比库,如是愚者有怖畏,智者无怖畏;愚者有灾祸,智者无灾祸”(《中部》3.124)等句中,它表示类别;在“阿难,若被问‘老死有此缘吗’,应回答‘有’;若再问‘老死以何为缘’,应回答‘以生为缘而有老死’”(《长部》2.96)等句中,它表示确定;在“迦旃延,‘一切有’这是一边,‘一切无’这是第二边”(《相应部》2.15;3.90)等句中,它表示例示。在这里也应当看作表示例示。“诸比库”是召唤的方式,这个iti一词正是指明这一点,即“召唤诸比库”。按照这个方法,在“尊者”等说法中,也应当根据适当情况理解iti一词的含义。巴利
Bhikkhavoti ca sandhivasena i-kāralopo daṭṭhabbo ‘‘bhikkhavo itī’’ti, ayañhi itisaddo hetuparisamāpanādipadatthavipariyāyapakārāvadhāraṇanidassanādianekatthapabhedo. Tathā hesa ‘‘ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.79) hetumhi dissati, ‘‘tasmātiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) parisamāpane, ‘‘iti vā evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.13) ādiatthe ‘‘māgaṇḍiyoti tassa brāhmaṇassa saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāro nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ nāmadheyyaṃ nirutti byañjanaṃ abhilāpo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 73, 75) padatthavipariyāye, ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito. Saupaddavo bālo, anupaddavo paṇḍito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124) pakāre, ‘‘atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṃ. Kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti ce vadeyya, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iccassa vacanīya’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.96) avadhāraṇe, ‘‘sabbamatthīti kho, kaccāna, ayameko anto, sabbaṃ natthīti ayaṃ dutiyo anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.15; 3.90) nidassane . Idhāpi nidassane eva daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāro tamesa iti-saddo nidasseti ‘‘bhikkhavoti āmantesī’’ti. Iminā nayena bhaddantetiādīsupi yathārahaṃ itisaddassa attho veditabbo.
前面已经说过“世尊召唤”,所以这里说“他们回应世尊”。这里的“世尊”是属格,但它所关联的其实是“召唤”这个动作本身,因此用意是“他们回应了世尊的召唤”。而“世尊”这个词,由于和“回应”相连,就成了与格。到这里,具备时间、地点、说法者、听众、宣示等条件的序言就算讲完了,这就是前后的连接关系。这里有人问:结集法和律的时候,为什么还要说序言呢?难道不是只结集世尊亲口说的内容就可以了吗?回答是:这是为了让开示能够长久住世、不被遗忘、令人信受。因为把开示和时间、地点、说法者、因缘、听众、宣示等绑在一起安立下来,它就能长久住世、不会忘失,也能让人生信,就像世间的裁决也要结合时间、行事者、作者、听众等因缘才能成立一样。正因为这样,大迦叶尊者问“阿难贤友,《缘起经》是在哪里说的”等等,询问说法地点等事时,持法藏的阿难尊者在回答这些问题时,就用“如是我闻”等语,说出了这部经的序言。巴利
Pubbe ‘‘bhagavā āmantesī’’ti vuttattā bhagavato paccassosunti idha bhagavatoti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanameva sambandhīantaraṃ apekkhatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosu’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatoti idaṃ pana paṭissavasambandhena sampadānavacanaṃ. Ettāvatā yaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitanti sambandho. Etthāha – kimatthaṃ pana dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakanimittaparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca, desakālakattusotunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva cāyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādasuttaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti āyasmatā ānandena imassa suttassa nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ.
另外,序言也是为了显示导师的成就圆满。因为如来、世尊并不是靠事先的筹划、比量、圣教或寻思,才成立为正自觉者。正自觉者本来就不需要事先筹划之类,因为他的智慧在一切所知法中无碍而行,对一切所知法都平等一如。同样,也因为不存在师传、吝法、偏袒弟子之类的嫌疑,才成立为漏尽者。漏尽者绝不会有这些情况,所以他利益他人的行为极为清净。这样一来,通过能显示那些毁坏戒成就、见成就等、作为说法者杂染的无明与渴爱彻底不存在,以及显示智慧成就与断除成就的自觉与清净,就成立了前两种自信;又因为对障碍法与出离法不再迷惑,就成立了后两种自信。因此,世尊具足四种自信,而他的自利利他之行,也通过序言显示出来:他在各处随顺当时在场大众的根机意乐,以应机而起的辩才开示教法。而在这里,则是通过二根本、远离两边、贯通三时、含摄四种理趣、甚深微妙的缘起来显示觉悟。应当这样理解。所以说“为了显示导师的成就圆满而说序言”。巴利
Apica satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sammāsambuddhabhāvasiddhi. Na hi sammāsambuddhassa pubbaracanādīhi attho atthi, sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ca ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasatthusāvakānurodhābhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Na hi sabbaso khīṇāsavassa te sambhavantīti suvisuddhā cassa parānuggahappavatti, evaṃ desakasaṃkilesabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampadādūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ accantābhāvasaṃsūcakehi ñāṇasampadāpahānasampadābhibyañjanakehi ca saṃbuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato eva ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo attahitaparahitapaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā hoti, tattha tattha sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, idha pana mūladvayavasena antadvayarahitassa tisandhikālabandhassa catubbidhanayasaṅkhepagambhīrabhāvayuttassa paṭiccasamuppādassa bodhiyā nidassanato cāti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
同样地,为了说明教法的圆满成就,而说这段序言。因为世尊的一切行为都被智慧和悲心所摄持,所以没有无意义的举动,也没有为了自身利益的行为。因此,正自觉者的一切身业、语业、意业,纯粹是为了利益他人而发起;当这些行为按其实际发生的样子被宣说时,就随其所宜地成为以现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益来教导众生的教法,而不是辞藻华丽的文学作品。这位导师的行仪,连同时节、地方、说法者和听众等因缘,在各处都通过相应的序言文句随宜彰显出来;而在这里,则是通过阐明十二支缘起的行相来彰显。因此说“为了说明教法的圆满成就而说序言”。巴利
Tathā sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā pavatti, attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃ eva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthucaritaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati, idha pana dvādasapadikapaccayākāravibhāvanena tena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
另外,通过说明导师本身就是权威,来显示教法具有权威性,所以有了这段序言,目的是让人看到导师的权威。应当知道,这种对导师权威的显示,是按照前面所说的方式,通过“世尊”这个词来表明的。而“世尊”这个词,通过说明如来已经断除贪、嗔、痴等一切烦恼污垢和恶行等过失,通过说明他具备不共的、极其清净的智慧和慈悲等殊胜功德,并由此说明他是一切众生中最尊贵、最殊胜的,这样一来,这个意思就完全清楚地显示出来了。这就是在这里对序言中用意所作的说明。巴利
Apica satthu pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañcassa pamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti ca iminā padena vibhāvitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca iminā tathāgatassa rāgadosamohādi-sabbasaṃkilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena vacanena anaññasādhāraṇasuparisuddhañāṇakaruṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena tato eva sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti. Idamettha nidānavacane payojananidassanaṃ.
“所安置的”就是指所开示的。因为开示就是把应当开示的戒等义理,安置在应受教化众生的心相续中,所以称为“安置”。因此,先说明世尊开示生起的类别,然后说“先审察经的安置方式,所说的就变得清楚明了”——当开示的生起被指出为“这里的开示是这样生起的”,由于正确了知经典的序分,注释就容易理解。接下来,下面有人责问“为什么世尊唯独以缘起的方式开始开示”,对此善巧地答辩说“这是随顺他人意乐的经典安置方式”。其中,无数百千种差别的经典,若按杂染分、清净分等主要纲要来统摄,都不超出十六种;若按自意乐等安置经典的方式,则成立为四种,所以说“有四种安置经典的方式”。在这里,自意乐与事缘,同随他意乐、随请问相结合,可以产生这样的分类:自意乐兼随他意乐、自意乐兼随问、自意乐兼随他意乐与随问、事缘兼随他意乐、事缘兼随问、事缘兼随他意乐与随问。这是因为意乐与请问能够相互结合而产生这些情况。同样,虽然事缘与意乐结合也能产生分类,但自意乐等在前面已经列出,事缘与它们的结合就不存在了。这里不可能有无遗余的详细分类方式,所以说“有四种安置经典的方式”。或者,因为其余可能成立的安置方式都含摄在内,所以以根本安置的方式显示为四种;在这里,应当把握这样的分类结合。巴利
Nikkhittassāti desitassa. Desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa vineyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccatīti ‘‘suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hotī’’ti sāmaññato bhagavato desanāya samuṭṭhānassa vibhāgaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etthāyaṃ desanā evaṃsamuṭṭhānā’’ti desanāya samuṭṭhāne dassite suttassa sammadeva nidānaparijānanena vaṇṇanāya suviññeyyattā vuttaṃ. Tato heṭṭhā ‘‘kasmā bhagavatā paṭiccasamuppādavaseneva desanā āraddhā’’ti kenaci codanāya katāya ‘‘parajjhāsayoyaṃ suttanikkhepo’’ti parihāro sukathito hoti. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipadhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro hi suttanikkhepā’’ti. Ettha ca yathā attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ‘‘attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko cā’’ti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisambhavato, evaṃ yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā ajjhāsayenapi saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati, attajjhāsayādīhi pana purato ṭhitehi aṭṭhuppattiyā saṃsaggo natthīti. Nayidha niravaseso vitthāranayo sambhavatīti ‘‘cattāro hi suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattārova dassitā, tathādassanañcettha ayaṃ saṃsaggabhedo gahetabboti.
这里要解释一下词义。“安置”就是被放置、被安放,所以叫 nikkhepo(安置);经本身就是安置,所以叫“经的安置”(suttanikkhepo)。另一种说法是:安放这个动作就叫“安置”,经的安放就是“经的安置”,意思就是“说经”。自己的意乐叫“自意乐”(attajjhāsayo);这种意乐是它的成因,所以叫“有自意乐的”;或者说,这部经以他自己的意乐为所依,所以叫“自意乐”。对“他意乐”(parajjhāsayo)也应按同样的方式理解。依着提问而生的法,具有这种性质,所以叫“随问者”(pucchāvasiko)。作为说经所依事由的义理之生起,叫“事缘生起”(atthuppatti);“事缘生起”本身就是“事缘”(aṭṭhuppatti);具有这种性质,所以叫“有事缘的”(aṭṭhuppattiko)。另一种说法是:经凭这个而被安立,所以它就是“经的安置”,也就是“自意乐”等本身。不过,在这个词义分别中,自己的意乐是“自意乐”,他人的意乐是“他意乐”;被询问就叫“提问”,也就是通过提问而应了知的义理。依着这种提问而生的、属于受法者的说法,就是“随问的”(pucchāvasikaṃ);而这个词因为与“安置”(nikkhepa)一词相呼应,所以用阳性说成“pucchāvasiko”。同样,“事缘生起”本身就是“有事缘的”(aṭṭhuppattiko)。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipīyatīti nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Atha vā nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo. Attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vasena pavattadhammo etassa atthīti, pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāya vatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppatti, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti suttanikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitvā ñātabbo attho. Tassa pucchāvasena pavattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikaṃ, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhuppatti eva aṭṭhuppattikoti evampettha attho veditabbo.
另外,在这里,因为不依赖他人根器成熟等条件,而纯粹以如来自心的意乐来说法、以安立正法,所以把“自意乐”单独列为一种经典安置方式,是合理的。至于“他意乐者”和“随问者”,既然是以他人的意乐和提问作为说法生起的因缘,并依此而说法,那么把它们归入“事缘”时,怎么会有冲突呢?或者说,对于“随问者”和“有事缘者”,因为它们是随顺他人意乐而生起的,怎么会在归入“他意乐”时产生冲突呢?这一点不应受到责难。因为所谓“事缘”,本来就是指脱离了他人誓愿、反复请问等因缘,纯粹作为说法生起原因而出现的事件,所以才会把“他意乐”和“随问者”单独分出来。就像《梵网经》《法嗣经》等,以褒贬、染着生起等作为说法的因由,这就称为“事缘”。如果不依靠他人提问,只以对方的意乐为因由而说法,那就是“他意乐者”;如果纯粹依随提问而说法,那就是“随问者”,这个道理很清楚。应当理解为:纯粹凭自己的意乐而说法,是为了安立正法。所谓“十力经藏”,就是《十力品》中依次列出的经典系列,比如《月喻经》等大经藏也是如此。巴利
Apicettha paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāladhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayaṃ eva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena eva desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭovāyamatthoti. Attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dasabalasuttantahārakoti dasabalavagge anupubbena nikkhittānaṃ suttānaṃ āvali, tathā candopamahārakādayo.
能令解脱成熟的法,是指信根等。意乐,是指倾向。忍,是指以见解洞察而安忍。心,是指心识。引导,是指誓愿。觉的状态,是指觉悟的自性,或者通达的方式。巴利
Vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā saddhindriyādayo. Ajjhāsayanti adhimuttiṃ. Khantinti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiṃ. Mananti cittaṃ. Abhinīhāranti paṇidhānaṃ. Bujjhanabhāvanti bujjhanasabhāvaṃ, paṭivijjhanākāraṃ vā.
略示即知者:所谓“略示”,就是以智慧来开显;意思是说,仅仅在智慧开显的当下,就能了知法。广说方知者:要了知被详细展开、被广说的义理,才叫广说方知者。应被引导者:需要靠略示等方法加以引导,所以叫应被引导者。文句为最者:把文句当作最高的追求,所以叫文句为最者。在开示的当下:指所开示的法在略说中被点出的那一刻。法现观:指以智慧与四谛法相契合。这被称为:如果有人能在以“四念处”等略说的方式安立纲要后,随顺教说而运用智慧,从而能够证得阿罗汉果,这种人被称为“略示即知者”。这被称为:如果有人能在略说安立纲要后,在详细分别义理时能够证得阿罗汉果,这种人被称为“广说方知者”。由略示:即由略示之因,意思是对于略示者或令略示者,也有“uddisato”的读法,意义相同。由遍问:即对于遍问者。次第而得法现观:即渐次证得阿罗汉果。不依此生而得法现观:依于那个有身,无法生起道、果,乃至连禅那或观都无从引发。这被称为:这种人因为把文句本身当作最高的追求而安住,所以被称为“文句为最者”。巴利
Ugghaṭitaññūti ugghaṭanaṃ nāma ñāṇugghaṭanaṃ, ñāṇena ugghaṭitamatte eva dhammaṃ jānātīti attho. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritameva atthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Byañjanapadaṃ paramaṃ assāti padaparamo. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāradhammassa uddese udāhaṭamatte eva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamāyogo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṃkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṃkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘vipañcitaññū’’ti vuccati. Uddesatoti uddesahetu, uddisantassa uddisāpentassa vāti attho, ‘‘uddisato’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Paripucchatoti paripucchantassa. Anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatti hoti. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ puggalo byañjanapadameva paramaṃ katvā ṭhitattā ‘‘padaparamo’’ti vuccati.
“独行者”,是指因为喜欢远离而独自居住的人。“双行者”,是指两个人志趣相投,以智慧之行等方式一起活动。其余的数目也照这样理解。通过开显七种空来说明空。正因为如此,它才是柔和、微细的。说了“世尊是随顺他人的意乐而开始讲这部经”之后,那些被称为“他人”的人又分两种:没有做过预备修行的人,以及已经善加清净了前分修行的人。为了用譬喻的方式说明佛陀对这两种人的修行示范,说了“譬如”等话。“不让色生起”,是指不像写字那样把它造作出来。“没有做过加行”,是指对观的修习没有做过精勤的用功。“戒……等等……成就”,应当这样搭配理解:把没有受持的戒配到“戒成就”,把极为清净的戒配到“定成就”,把不正的见和正业配到“见成就”。巴利
Ekacarāti vivekābhiratiyā ekavihārino. Dvicarāti dve ekajjhāsayā hutvā ñāṇacariyādivasena vicarantā. Esa nayo sesesu. Sattasuññatāpakāsanena suññataṃ. Tato eva saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ. ‘‘Paresaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhī’’ti vatvā te pana ‘‘pare’’ti vuttapuggalā aparikammikā suparisodhitapubbabhāgapaṭipadā cāti duvidhā, tadubhayesu satthu paṭipattiṃ upamāmukhena pakāsento yathā hītiādimāha. Rūpaṃ na samuṭṭhāpeti likhanavasena na uppādeti. Akatābhinivesanti vipassanābhāvanāya akatānuyogaṃ. Sīla…pe… sampadāyāti asamādinnasīlaṃ sīlasampadāya, suparisuddhasīlaṃ samādhisampadāya, anujukatadiṭṭhijukammaṃ diṭṭhisampadāya yojentoti yojanā.
“他们前往”是指向前分道的修行来说的。“戒”是指四种清净戒。“见”则是指业属己见和业道正见。“以三种方式”是指内、外、内外,这样按所缘境的不同而分为三类。如前所说的见清净,其殊胜助缘正是戒,戒也是修习的依止,所以说“依于戒,安立于戒”。巴利
Yanti yaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ sandhāya. Sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Diṭṭhi cāti kammassakatādiṭṭhi ceva kammapathasammādiṭṭhi ca. Tividhenāti ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā ajjhattabahiddhāti evaṃ visayabhāvato tippakārena. Yathāvuttadiṭṭhivisuddhiyā visesapaccayaṃ sīlaṃyeva bhāvanāya adhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti.
就像经过善巧锤炼、纯净无瑕的黄金,又像四方等形都已洗净、打磨得极为光滑的整块宝石。对于无明等缘法来说,它们对各自所生的缘所生法起到因缘等作用,这就是缘相。而这个缘相,从含义上说其实就是无明本身,所以说“缘起就是缘相”。因此才说“确实就是缘相”等等。巴利
Sudhantasuvaṇṇaṃ apagatasabbakāḷakaṃ. Caturassādidhoto suparimajjitamaṇikkhandho. Paccayadhammānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ tassa tassa paccayuppannassa hetupaccayādibhāvo paccayākāro. So pana atthato avijjā evāti āha ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayākāra’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘paccayākāro hī’’tiādi.
“vo”这个音,确实当它跟在词后面时,是表达相反或特殊含义的;但当它依附于名词时,就只是点明某个行为者、行为对象、工具等具体语法功能;而当它依附于小品词“hi”时,就纯粹只是说话上的修饰而已。所以经文说“vo……中间省略……dissatī”。“对那法的教导”,就是指对缘起的教导。因为在这里,它是被“ta”(那)这个词所指代的。“谛听”,既然是通过耳朵能识别的话语,那么所指的就不只是缘起。巴利
Kāmaṃ vo-saddo padaparaṭṭhito paṭiyogīatthavisesavācako, nāmaparabhūto pana taṃ taṃ kattukammakaraṇādisādhanavisiṭṭhameva pabodheti, hi-nipātaparabhūto pana vacanālaṅkāramattamevāti āha ‘‘voti…pe… dissatī’’ti. Taṃdesananti tassa paṭiccasamuppādassa desanaṃ. Sā hi idha ta-saddena paccāmasīyati. ‘‘Suṇāthā’’ti sotaviññeyyatāvacanato na kevalaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo.
这其实是同一个词义,因为加了“ka”音只是为了把词形拉长,所以对“sādhu”一词所作的解释,同样也适用于“sādhuka”一词,这就是这里的用意。“Sādhu bhante”是“我请求您,尊者”的意思,所以这里解释为“请求”。“Sādhu bhante”又可理解为“好的,尊者”,所以这里解释为“接受”。“Sādhu sādhu”是“好啊,好啊”的意思,所以说为“随喜”。“Sādhu dhammarucī”是“欲求福德者,善妙”的意思。“Paññāṇavā”是“有智慧者”。“Addubbho”是“不害者”。“Daḷhīkamme”是“令坚固”中,即“恭敬作事”中。“Āṇattiyaṃ”是“命令”中。因为说“Suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karotha”时,以“sādhuka”一词,犹如对听闻与作意之恭敬作事一样,那时命令也被说到了。应当知道,正如它有请求之义,它也有命令之义。巴利
Ekatthametaṃ padaṃ ka-saddena padavaḍḍhanamattassa katattā, tasmā sādhusaddassa kato atthuddhāro sādhukasaddassapi kato eva hotīti adhippāyo. Sādhu bhanteti yācāmahaṃ bhanteti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘āyācane’’ti. Puna sādhu bhanteti evaṃ bhanteti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchane’’ti. Sādhu sādhūti aho ahoti ayamettha atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sampahaṃsane’’ti. Sādhu dhammarucīti puññakāmo sundaroti attho. Paññāṇavāti paññavā. Addubbhoti adūsako. Daḷhīkammeti thirīkaraṇe sakkaccakiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. ‘‘Suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti hi vutte sādhukasaddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sakkaccakiriyā viya tadāṇāpanampi vuttaṃ hoti. Āyācanatthatā viya cassa āṇāpanatthatā veditabbā.
这里应当这样理解它们的连接方式,这就是它们的关联。防止耳根散乱,是把耳朵引向听闻,从而止住其他行为;因为“倾耳谛听”就是这个意思。防止意根散乱,是制止其他念头。“前面的”指“谛听”这个词。“在这里”指“谛听,作意”这两个词,或者指这个场合。防止颠倒执取文句,是因为它能挡住耳门方面的散乱;如实听闻的人,不会对声音产生颠倒执取。防止颠倒执取法义,是因为它能挡住意根方面的散乱;认真领受法义的人,不会对法义产生颠倒执取。用“谛听”这个词,是把人引向听闻佛法。“于受持与审察中”,这里仅凭“审察”一词,就已经包含了衡量、抉择等,以及由此达到的透彻理解。“具文”中,能表达所欲之义的,就是“文”,即自性之辞;与文句俱足,就是“具文”,意思是文句圆满。“应被敬奉、应被亲近的”就是“义”,指四遍清净戒等。与义俱足,就是“具义”,意思是义理圆满。“法甚深”等语境中,“法”指经典文本;“开示”指对以意安立的那部经典所作的宣说讲论;“义”指那部经典的含义;“通达”指对那部经典及其含义的如实了悟。又因为这些法、开示、义、通达,就像有美味的大海一样,对钝根者来说难以涉入、无法立足,所以是“甚深”的。因此说:“因为此法……请善作意。”巴利
Idānettha evaṃ yojanā veditabbāti sambandho. Sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanabhāvato, sotaṃ odahathāti hi attho. Manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Purimanti ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti padaṃ. Etthāti ‘‘suṇātha, manasi karothā’’ti padadvaye, etasmiṃ vā adhikāre. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhanivāraṇaṃ sotadvāre vikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi yāthāvato suṇantassa saddato vipallāsaggāho hoti. Atthavipallāsaggāhanivāraṇaṃ manindriyavikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ upadhārentassa atthavipallāsaggāho hoti. Dhammassavane niyojeti ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti vidahanato. Dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsūti ettha upaparikkhaggahaṇeneva tulanatīraṇādike diṭṭhiyā ca suppaṭivedhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabyañjanoti ettha yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti. Saha byañjanehīti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Araṇīyato upagantabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādiko. Saha atthenāti sāttho, atthasampannoti attho. Dhammagambhīrotiādīsu dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthapitāya tantiyā desanā kathanaṃ. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanāatthapaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāḷhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo…pe… sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti.
在这里应当知道:因为证悟很难做到,法和义的教导智慧也很难生起,所以教导难以深入;而证悟本身无法被产生出来,与之相关的智慧也难以生起,所以证悟也同样是难以深入的。所谓“开示”,是指概要性的宣说,类似于简要地展示。就像在《分别经》里,先说了“我将开示”,接着又说“我将演说”。对它的详细分别阐述就是“演说”,这里取的正是这个意思,所以说“我也将详细地为他演说,这是前面已经说过的”。或者,清晰明白的讲说也叫“演说”。巴利
Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya dukkhogāhatā, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ saṅkhepadassanasadisaṃ. Tathā hi vibhaṅgasutte ‘‘desessāmī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘bhāsissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassa niddisanaṃ bhāsananti idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Paribyattaṃ kathanaṃ vā bhāsanaṃ.
声音像舍利鸟一样,意思是说,就像舍利鸟的鸣叫声那样,甜美、悦耳、令人喜爱。应辩就是声音。宣说,就是被发出、被说出来的意思。当这样说的时候,生起了踊跃之心——也就是当听到“你们好好听,好好作意,我要说了”这样的话语时,大家心想:“看来导师不只是简略地开示,还会详细地演说。”于是生起了踊跃之心,变得欢喜兴奋。巴利
Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya ālāpo viya madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo. Paṭibhānaṃ saddo. Udīrayīti uccārīyati, vuccatīti attho. Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātāti evaṃ ‘‘suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘na kira satthā saṅkhepeneva desessati, vitthārenapi bhāsissatī’’ti sañjātussāhā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā.
“云何”这个词,从普遍共通的角度就能看出它是在提问,而不是从某个特定角度发问。为了说明它属于无差别的提问,就称之为“欲说之问”,并借此话题,按照释义的方式,把《大义释》中提到的所有提问种类都展示出来,即所谓“问有五种”等。其中,借这个问让未曾见过的人得以明了,就是“令未见者明了之问”;借这个问与已见者比对印证,就是“令已见者比对之问”。这里的“比对”就是通过讨论来作出决断。借这个问斩断疑惑,就是“断疑之问”。为征询许可而发问,就是“征询许可之问”。比如“诸比丘,你们意下如何?”这样的问,实际上就是在问“你们觉得怎样?”,也就是征询许可之问。“欲说之问”,则是出于想要宣说的愿望而发问。巴利
Katamoti tassa padassa sāmaññato pucchābhāvo ñāyati, na visesatoti tassa pucchāvisesabhāvaṃ kathento ‘‘kathetukamyatāpucchā’’ti vatvā teneva pasaṅgena mahāniddese āgatā sabbāpi pucchā atthuddhāranayena dasseti ‘‘pañcavidhā hi pucchā’’tiādinā. Tattha adiṭṭhaṃ joteti etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā. Diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandīyati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā. Saṃsandanañcettha sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimatiṃ chindati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchanaṃ anumatipucchā. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave’’tiādipucchāya hi ‘‘kā tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetukamyatā kathetukamyatāya.
问“相”是为了让人知道,所以问的是任何一种事物的自性。说“未曾知”,是指以任何一种智慧都还不曾知道的状态。说“未曾见”,是指以能见的智慧,就像用眼睛看一样,还不曾看到。说“未曾衡量”,是指以能衡量的智慧,还不曾判断过“它就只有这么多”。说“未曾审察”,是指以能审察的智慧,还不曾完成审察的作用。说“不显著”,是指对智慧来说还不明显。说“未被阐明”,是指还不曾被智慧弄清楚。巴利
Lakkhaṇanti ñātuṃ pucchito yo koci sabhāvo. Aññātanti yena kenaci ñāṇena aññātabhāvamāha. Adiṭṭhanti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena cakkhunā viya na diṭṭhataṃ. Atulitanti ‘‘ettakaṃ ida’’nti tulanabhūtena ñāṇena na tulitataṃ. Atīritanti tīraṇabhūtena ñāṇena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanataṃ. Avibhūtanti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhāvaṃ. Avibhāvitanti ñāṇena apākaṭīkatabhāvaṃ.
在五种提问中,诸佛完全不会遇到的那些问题,为了指出来,并归结出这里所要问的问题,所以说了“其中”等话。这很容易理解。如果缘起就是缘的作用方式,那么世尊在开示缘起时,为什么又说了诸行等缘所生法呢?因此说了“于此”等话。之所以也宣说缘所生法,是因为通过显示缘所生法,也就说明了缘法作为缘的状态。为了显示“缘的作用方式就是缘起”,而说了“食相应”等话。他把巴利经典下文所说的动词“生起”引过来连接上,否则就没办法理解为“诸行是由什么造成的”或者“诸行造作什么”。就流转而言,顺着次第说的“以无明为缘”等,就是顺次的缘起之说。巴利
Pañcasu pucchāsu yā buddhānaṃ sabbato na santi, tā dassetvā idhādhippetapucchaṃ nigametuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. Yadi paṭiccasamuppādo paccayākāro, atha kasmā bhagavatā paṭiccasamuppādadesanāya saṅkhārādayo paccayuppannā kathitāti āha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Paccayuppannampi katheti paccayuppannadassanena paccayadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvassa kathitabhāvato. Āhāravaggassātiādi ‘‘paccayākāro paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sambhavantī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ parato vuttaṃ kiriyāpadaṃ ānetvā yojeti, aññathā saṅkhārā kiṃ katāti vā karontīti vā na ñāyeyya. Pavattiyā anulomato ‘‘avijjāpaccayā’’tiādikā anulomapaṭiccasamuppādakathā.
“正是对无明”等这段话,则是从相反方向来讲的还灭之说。因为依靠它而对诸行彻底离染,所以叫离染,也就是道。“无余灭”是指没有剩余地灭尽,也就是断除。“如是灭”是指以这样的无生之灭而灭尽的诸行的灭。这样,通过宣说无明等的灭,就说明了阿罗汉果。“完整的”是指没有剩余的。“没有众生的”是指排除了他人所假想出来的生命。通过显示无生之灭的方式而使之回转,也就是使之逆转。巴利
‘‘Avijjāya tvevā’’tiādikā pana tassa vilomato paṭilomakathā. Accantameva saṅkhāre virajjati etenāti virāgo, maggo. Asesanirodhāti asesetvā nirodhā samucchindanā. Evaṃ nirodhānanti evaṃ anuppādanirodhena niruddhānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā. Iti avijjādīnaṃ nirodhavacanena arahattaṃ vadati. Sakalassāti anavasesassa. Sattavirahitassāti paraparikappitajīvarahitassa. Vinivattetvāti anuppādanirodhadassanavasena viparivattetvā.
心悦,是指心被喜悦和意乐所摄持。当处于这种状态时,就叫做心怀欢喜,所以说欢喜之心。在应随喜彼之说这句话里,随喜一词是赞同的意思。在随喜已这句话里,是接受的意思。但在这里,两种含义都适用,所以说他们既随喜又接受了。巴利
Attamanāti pītisomanassena gahitacittā. Tathābhūtā ca haṭṭhacittā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘tuṭṭhacittā’’ti. ‘‘Tassa vacanaṃ abhinanditabba’’nti ettha abhinandanasaddo anumodanattho. ‘‘Abhinanditvā’’ti ettha sampaṭicchanattho. Idha pana ubhayatthopi vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cā’’ti.
2. 《分别经》的注释巴利
2. Vibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
2 第二经的注释也如此。“也”这个字,意思是也在其他经中。虽然说了“在《清净道论》中已经讲过”,但为了指出其中一部分适合用在这里,所以说了“正如”等话。“此”指根本经文。“广说”是指为了显示“我将分别解说”这句话的含义而展开的分别解说。第一经中的略说,和顺次解说是相似的。所谓“再次显示轮回与还灭”,就是用“诸比丘,如是”等话来说明流转和还灭。最初已经通过略说和分别解说的方式显示了还灭,从那里也就通过遮遣的方式显示了还灭,所以再次举出。巴利
2.Dutiyepīti dutiyasuttepi. Pi-saddena tadaññesu suttesupīti attho. ‘‘Visuddhimagge vuttā evā’’ti vatvāpi tadekadesaṃ idha viniyogakkhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti mūlaṃ. Vitthāradesananti ‘‘vibhajissāmī’’ti padassa atthassa dassanavasena pavattaṃ vibhaṅgadesanaṃ. Uddesadesanā paṭhamasutte anulomadesanāsadisāva. Puna vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ dassentoti ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave’’tiādinā pavattiṃ nivattiñca dassento. Paṭhamaṃ uddesavasena vibhajanavasena vivaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ, tato eva byatirekanayena vivaṭṭampi dassitameva hotīti punaggahaṇaṃ.
对于“那些众生”这句话,是不区分任何类别,而以共同的方式涵盖一切众生来把握,因此说“简略地说……是解说”。所谓“依趣与生类”,就是依五趣来说;在那里,每一趣中又依刹帝利等、地居天等、象等生类来说。就像“心、意”等词,是作用的差别;像“意”等词,是意义相同而用词不同;像“净白”等词,是属性的差别;像“心所、心脏”等词,是所依的差别;像“心的住立”等词,是别的法不存在的状态差别;像“无贪”等词,是别的法不起作用的差别;像“无贪的状态”等词,是别的法不存在的差别——不考虑这些种种,而只说明法本身,这就是自性解说。衰老的事物以衰损的方式生起,这种行相就是衰损性,因此说这是行相解说。巴利
Tesaṃtesaṃ sattānanti idaṃ kiñci pakārato anāmasitvā sabbepi satte sāmaññato byāpetvā gahaṇanti āha ‘‘saṅkhepato…pe… niddeso’’ti. Gatijātivasenāti pañcagativasena, tatthāpi ekekāya gatiyā khattiyādibhummadevādihatthiādijātivasena ca. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano’’tiādīsu viya kiccavisesaṃ, ‘‘mānasa’’ntiādīsu viya samāne atthe saddavisesaṃ, ‘‘paṇḍara’’ntiādīsu viya guṇavisesaṃ, ‘‘cetasikaṃ hadaya’’ntiādīsu viya nissayavisesaṃ, ‘‘cittassa ṭhitī’’tiādīsu viya aññassa avatthābhāvavisesaṃ, ‘‘alubbhanā’’tiādīsu viya aññassa kiriyābhāvavisesaṃ, ‘‘alubbhitatta’’ntiādīsu viya aññassa abhāvatāvisesanti evamādikaṃ anapekkhitvā dhammamattaṃ vā dīpanā sabhāvaniddeso. Jiṇṇassa jīraṇavasena pavattanākāro jīraṇatāti āha ‘‘ākāraniddeso’’ti.
在时间流逝(衰老)这一环节,“作用解说”是指:从羯罗蓝(受孕初期的受精卵)阶段开始,先前的色法到达衰老的那一刻,随后生起的色法就与成熟之色相应,变得越来越成熟。这样次第发展,当极为成熟的色法到达完全成熟之时,就生起齿落等状态,所以“齿落”等说法,是在时间流逝中对衰老作用的解说。“自然解说”是指:以果的变异之自然状态来解说;或者说,衰老所应达到的果就是自然,对此加以解说。然而,衰老并不只是齿落等。就像在水流等经过的河道中,草木等被折断一样,在被称为“成熟之道”的圆满色法中所出现的齿落等,只应理解为衰老经过的痕迹,而不是衰老本身。巴利
Kālātikkame kiccaniddesāti kalalakālato pabhuti purimarūpānaṃ jarāpattakkhaṇe uppajjamānāni pacchimarūpāni paripakkarūpānurūpāni pariṇatapariṇatāni uppajjantīti anukkamena supariṇatarūpānaṃ paripākakāle uppajjamānāni khaṇḍiccādisabhāvāni uppajjantīti ‘‘khaṇḍicca’’ntiādayo kālātikkame jarāya kiccaniddesā. Pakatiniddesāti phalavipaccanapakatiyā niddesā, jarāya vā pāpuṇitabbaphalameva pakati, tassā niddesā, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarāti udakādigatamaggesu tiṇarukkhasaṃbhaggatādayo viya paripākagatamaggasaṅkhātesu paripuṇṇarūpesu labbhamānā khaṇḍiccādayo jarāya gatamaggāicceva veditabbā, na jarāti.
因为当人到了衰老的时候,寿命会减损,诸根也会变得衰弱,所以“寿命减损”等是就自然状态所作的说明,因此说“最后两种是就自然状态所作的说明”。由此又说“但以这些……”等等。巴利
Yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, indriyāni jajjarāni hontīti āyuhānādayo pakatiniddesā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘imehi panā’’tiādi.
宝珠等物、缓慢变化的十法组合以及每一个十法组合中,因为每一刹那都在衰老变异,这些变化很难被察觉,所以叫无间衰老。所谓“其他事物”,是指宝珠等之外的其他东西,比如菌类等,以及在有情一生所经历的幼年、少年、壮年、老年各个阶段中,或者在一日、两日、三日等时间流逝中的花等——这就是这段话的意思。因为在那些事物上,衰老的差别很容易看出来,所以叫有间衰老。巴利
Aviññāyamānantarattā avīcijarā maṇiādīsu mandadasakādīsu ekekadasakesu ca khaṇe khaṇe jiṇṇavikārādīnaṃ duviññeyyattā. Tato aññesūti maṇiādito aññesu ahicchattakādīsu, pāṇīnaṃ ekabhavapariyāpanne sakalaāyusmiṃ gahitataruṇayuvājarākālesu, ekadvittidivasātikkamesu pupphādīsu vāti attho. Tattha hi jarāvisesassa suviññeyyattā savīcijarā nāma.
依死没而言,就是依死没诸蕴而言。对于一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的死,死没本身就是死没性,所以说“以状态词显示其相”,意思是巴利圣典中所说的“死”,正是显示死的自性。坏灭生起,就是正在坏灭的状态。借此“坏灭”一词,就显示诸蕴正在坏灭、具有坏灭性。显示无处可住,就是显示在任何情况下都无安住。举陶罐为喻,是不相似的譬喻:譬如陶罐破碎后,还能得到碎片等残余部分;但死没诸蕴坏灭时,却没有任何差别残留下来。为了说明这一点,所以说“消失”。被称为魔的死,就是名为魔的死。人们称之为“时死”。作为相续彻底断灭、属于漏尽者的死,是断灭死。以“等”一词,也含摄刹那死。它的作用,就是终结者的作用,世间称之为“魔”,意思就是死。或者,死没的时刻本身因为不可逾越,所以特别称为“时”,那么它的作用,从意义上说就是死没诸蕴坏灭的过程本身。这里也可以不把“魔”和“死”组成复合词,而是:被称为“魔”的坏灭,本身就是死,在这里应当理解为“舍命”。巴利
Cavanakavasenāti cavanakānaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena. Ekacatupañcakkhandhāya cutiyā cavanameva cavanatāti āha ‘‘bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassana’’nti, pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cutī’’ti vuttassa maraṇassa sabhāvadassananti attho. Bhaṅguppatti bhijjamānatā. Tena ‘‘bhedo’’ti iminā khandhānaṃ bhijjamānatā bhedasamaṅgitā vuttāti dasseti. Ṭhānābhāvaparidīpananti kenacipi ākārena avaṭṭhānābhāvadīpanaṃ. Ghaṭassevāti hi visadisūdāharaṇaṃ. Yathā ghaṭe bhinne kapālādiavayavaseso labbhati, na evaṃ cutikkhandhesu bhaṅgesu, na koci viseso tiṭṭhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘antaradhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇanti maccusaññitaṃ maraṇaṃ. ‘‘Kālamaraṇa’’nti vadanti. Santānassa accantasamucchedabhūtaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ maraṇaṃ samucchedamaraṇaṃ. Ādi-saddena khaṇikamaraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa kiriyāti antakassa kiriyā, yā loke vuccati ‘‘maccū’’ti, maraṇanti attho. Cavanakālo eva vā anatikkamanīyattā visesena kāloti vuttoti tassa kiriyā atthato cutikkhandhānaṃ bhedapavattiyeva. ‘‘Maccu maraṇa’’nti vā ettha samāsaṃ akatvā yo ‘‘maccū’’ti vuccati bhedo, tameva maraṇaṃ ‘‘pāṇacāgo’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
依四蕴有,是指依四蕴有的存在状态而言。因为在那里并没有叫做色身的躯体可以被舍弃。虽然在一蕴有中也没有躯体的舍弃,但考虑到那里毕竟存在色身,所以说“依一蕴有而有躯体的舍弃”。而“依四蕴有”中的“ca”字,是在显示“依其余二有而有诸蕴的坏灭”这个道理,因为一切有中都有诸蕴的坏灭。“依其余二有”,就是依其余两种有的状态而有躯体的舍弃。虽然在一蕴有中存在色身,但并没有躯体的舍弃,所以只说“因为躯体存在”。由于在人趣等处确实有躯体的舍弃,所以这样连接理解:在人趣等处有躯体的舍弃。躯体被舍弃,这就是死,也就是躯体的舍弃。“Ekato katvā”,就是合在一起,仅仅以总括的方式把握。巴利
Catuvokāravasenāti catuvokārabhavavasena. Tattha hi rūpakāyasaññito kaḷevaro natthi, yaṃ nikkhipeyya. Kiñcāpi ekavokārabhavepi kaḷevaranikkhepo natthi, rūpakāyassa pana tattha atthitāmattaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vutto. Catuvokāravasena cāti ca-saddena ‘‘sesadvayavasena khandhānaṃ bhedo’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti sabbattheva khandhabhedasabbhāvato. Sesadvayavasenāti sesabhavadvayavaseneva kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Yadipi ekavokārabhave rūpakāyo vijjati, kaḷevaranikkhepo pana natthīti ‘‘kaḷevarassa sabbhāvato’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yasmā manussādīsu kaḷevaranikkhepo atthi, tasmā manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti yojanā. Kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipīyati etenāti maraṇaṃ kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ekato katvāti ekajjhaṃ katvā, ekajjhaṃ gahaṇamattena.
“以生的状态”等语,是为了通过处和生类这两种方式,把一切众生一一涵盖之后,来显示生。不过有些人说:“这两个词是就行为主体而说的。”然而,在“那些那些众生的生、再生”这一说法中,因为是以属格来说明行为主体,所以两种情形都是在说明状态。圆满的生,就是再生。明显的出生,就是再出生。“那些那些众生的……再出生”,因为是依众生而展开的,所以是随世俗的说法。巴利
Jāyanaṭṭhenātiādi āyatanavasena yonivasena ca dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘kattubhāvavasena padadvayaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ jāti sañjātī’’ti pana kattari sāminiddesassa katattā ubhayatthāpi bhāvaniddeso. Sampuṇṇā jāti sañjāti. Pākaṭā nibbatti abhinibbatti. Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ…pe… abhinibbattīti sattavasena pavattattā vohāradesanā.
在这里,“各处”是指:在一蕴有和四蕴有中,以及在其余两种色界中,应知是依结生刹那生起的五种处来归类;在欲界中,则依根残缺与根具足,按七处、九处、十处,以及再次十处、十一处来归类。关于“相续”,是指由那种业使诸蕴显现,因此是在业所造作的相续中。而这应当理解为就结生刹那而言。巴利
Tatra tatrāti ekacatuvokārabhavesu dvinnaṃ sesarūpadhātuyaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ pañcannaṃ, kāmadhātuyaṃ vikalāvikalindriyānaṃ vasena sattannaṃ navannaṃ dasannaṃ puna dasannaṃ ekādasannañca āyatanānaṃ vasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Santatiyanti yena kammunā khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo, tena abhisaṅkhatasantatiyaṃ. Tañca kho paṭisandhikkhaṇavasena veditabbaṃ.
业本身就是业有,因为“从它生起生有”。由于业所引生的自体投生方式而存在,所以叫“有”;同样,由各种方式产生的果报和所作色也是如此。不过,注释书里说“因为存在,所以叫有”,由于接下来要讲生有,所以说“业以果报的名义被称为有”。巴利
Kammaṃyeva kammabhavo ‘‘bhavati etasmā upapattibhavo’’ti katvā. Kammena niyyāditaattabhāvupapattivasena bhavatīti bhavo, tathā tathā nibbattavipāko kaṭattārūpañca. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘bhavatīti katvā bhavo’’ti upapattibhavassa vakkhamānattā ‘‘kammaṃ phalavohārena bhavoti vutta’’nti kathitaṃ.
众生用这种烦恼欲去执取,紧紧抓住不放。这里不只是工具格,也可以理解为行为主体格,所以说“或者自己”。“那”指的是所依的欲。它既是欲,因为具有可欲的含义;又是取,因为具有强取的含义,所以叫“欲取”。“这个”指的是“欲取”这个词。“再者,这个”指的是被称为欲取的那个东西。巴利
Upādiyanti sattā daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhanti etena kilesakāmena. Na kevalaṃ idha karaṇasādhanameva, atha kho kattusādhanampi labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ vā’’ti. Tanti vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmo ca so kāmanaṭṭhena, upādānañca bhusamādānaṭṭhenāti kāmupādānaṃ. Etanti kāmupādānapadaṃ. Puna etanti kāmupādānasaṅkhātaṃ.
“Sassato attā”这句话,是为了显示后一种见解正在执取前一种见解而说的。就像这种见解通过强化的方式,让后一种见解执取前一种见解一样,“没有布施”等见解也是如此。不过应当知道,“我执”即“我语取”,这里并不是在显示见取。而“世间”等,则是脱离了“我执”的执取,属于见取,应当知道这里是通过前一种见解和后一种见解的说法来表达的。巴利
Sassatoattāti idaṃ purimadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyamānaṃ uttaradiṭṭhiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā esā diṭṭhi daḷhīkaraṇavasena purimaṃ uttarā upādiyati, evaṃ ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikāpīti. Attaggahaṇaṃ pana ‘‘attavādupādāna’’nti idaṃ na diṭṭhupādānadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Loko cāti attaggahaṇavinimuttaggahaṇaṃ diṭṭhupādānabhūtaṃ idha purimadiṭṭhiuttaradiṭṭhivacanehi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
因为那种错误执著,他既受持牛戒、牛行等,也持续遵行它们,所以这里所说的就是指牛戒、牛行等这些。因此说“牛戒……中略……这些本身就是取”。关于“由于执著”:就是由于执著。巴利
Yena micchābhinivesena gosīlagovatādiṃ samādiyati ceva anutiṭṭhati ca, so gosīlagovatādīnīti adhippetāni. Tenāha ‘‘gosīla…pe… sayameva upādānānī’’ti. Abhinivesatoti abhinivesanato.
“我语取”的意思是:把“我”这种说法、安立和执取当成根源的那种见解。“仅仅是我语而已”是说:因为根本没有“我”这个东西,所以“我”这个说法就只是一句话而已。他们执取,就是牢牢地抓住。巴利
Attavādupādānanti ‘‘attā’’ti vādassa paññāpanassa gahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā diṭṭhīti attho. Attavādamattamevāti attassa abhāvā ‘‘attā’’ti idaṃ vacanamattameva. Upādiyanti daḷhaṃ gaṇhanti.
“在眼门等处生起”——这是说明渴爱之所以有“色爱”等不同形态的原因,因为六门所缘的诸法各有其固定的所缘对象。“在速行路中生起”——这是指出它生起的地方。就像竹子不能靠自身站立,必须依靠支撑物一样,由于所缘也是“取”的缘,所以所缘也被说成与此类似。“于色中”——这里的“于”是依处格,表示所缘对象。“那有三种”——这是关联说明。它成为“欲爱”,是因为以贪着欲乐滋味的方式生起。它们“如此地品味”——因为与常见一起生起,常见作为俱生、依止、相应、有、不离等缘而与它混杂,所以通过执著“恒常、稳固、永恒”的倾向来品味。与“有”共存的渴爱就是“有爱”。因为持有“它在一切时都存在、持续”的见解,省略了后面的词,就称为“有见”;同时也是因为以品味“有”的滋味而转起。依照这个道理,应当理解这里“无有爱”的含义。认为“它会消亡、断灭、毁灭”而生起的见解,省略了后面的词,就称为“无有见”。“如此,这些成为十八种”——即所说的六种欲爱、六种有爱、六种无有爱,这十八种渴爱行境都以渴爱为缘。“内的”——指在自己相续中。“外的”——指在自己相续之外。或者它们可以是过去所缘,也可以是其他所缘,但它们本身是过去的三十六种渴爱行境。剩下两句也依同样的道理理解。以“一百零八种渴爱行境”等语句来关联。现在,为了用另一种方式说明一百零八种渴爱行境,说了“对于内在的”等话。其中,“对于内在的”——指内在的五蕴。这里“对于”这个词是宾格用法,表示对象。“执取”——就是抓取。“我存在”——就是依于这内在的五蕴,以渴爱、慢、见的方式整体地执取,从而产生“我存在”的执取;这句话的意思是“当那个存在时”。但在这里,应当按色等所缘的方式来理解其含义。“我如此存在”——就是在刹帝利等当中,以“我是这样的”这种方式,通过渴爱、慢、见而产生;这是意思。以上这些是尚未加以比较的执取。巴利
Cakkhudvārādīsu pavattāyāti idaṃ taṇhāya rūpataṇhādibhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ chadvārārammaṇikadhammānaṃ paṭiniyatārammaṇattā. Javanavīthiyā pavattāyāti idaṃ tassā pavattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ. Sabhāveneva uṭṭhātuṃ asakkontassa veḷu viya nissayo ahutvā olumbhakabhāvena bhāvo upādānassa paccayabhāvato ārammaṇampi taṃsadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Rūpeti visaye bhummaṃ. Sā tividhā hotīti sambandho. Kāmataṇhā kāmassādabhāvena pavattiyā. Evaṃ assādentīti sassatadiṭṭhiyā sahajātanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatādipaccayabhūtāya saṃsaṭṭhattā niccadhuvasassatābhinivesamukhena assādentī. Bhavasahagatā taṇhā bhavataṇhā. Bhavati tiṭṭhati sabbakālanti hi bhavadiṭṭhi bhavo uttarapadalopena, bhavassādavasena pavattiyā ca. Iminā nayena vibhavataṇhāti ettha attho veditabbo. Vibhavati ucchijjati vinassatīti evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi vibhavo uttarapadalopena. Evaṃ tāni aṭṭhārasāti yā cha kāmataṇhā, cha bhavataṇhā, cha vibhavataṇhā vuttā, etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni taṇhāpaccayo. Ajjhattanti sakasantatiyaṃ. Bahiddhāti tato bahiddhā. Atītārammaṇāni vā hontu itarārammaṇāni vā, sayaṃ pana atītāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritānī’’tiādinā sambandho. Idāni aparenapi pakārena aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni dassetuṃ ‘‘ajjhattikassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ajjhattikassāti ajjhattikakhandhapañcakaṃ. Upayogatthe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Upādāyāti gahetvā. Asmīti hotīti yadetaṃ ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samudāyaggāhato asmīti gāho hoti, tasmiṃ satīti attho. Idha pana rūpādiārammaṇavasena attho veditabbo. Itthamasmīti hotīti khattiyādīsu ‘‘idaṃpakāro aha’’nti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena hotīti attho. Idaṃ tāva anupanidhāya gahaṇaṃ.
“如此等等”这句话里,“等”这个字涵盖了下面这些说法:“我是这样、我是别样、我将存在、我将是这样、我将是那样、我将是别样、我是常、我是无常、我或许存在、我或许是这样、我或许是这样、我或许是那样、但愿我存在、但愿我是这样、但愿我是那样、但愿我是别样。”
带着比较来执取,也分两种:从相等的角度来比较,或者从不相等的角度来比较。为了说明这一点,所以说了“我是这样”和“我是别样”。
其中,“我是这样”是从相等的角度来执取,意思是:就像这位刹帝利一样,我也是这样。“我是别样”则是从不相等的角度来执取,意思是:这位是刹帝利,而我跟他不同,要么比他低,要么比他高。
这四种是基于现在生起的渴爱活动。而“我将存在”等四种,则是基于未来说的,它们的意思应该按照前面那四句的方式去理解。
“我是常”是说:我是恒常存在的,这是“常”的另一种说法。“我是无常”是说:我不是恒常存在的,这是“无常”的另一种说法。这两句是基于常见和断见说的。
从这之后的“我或许存在”等四句,是基于疑惑和思索说的,它们的意思也应该按照前面那四句的方式去理解。而“但愿我存在”等四句,则是以“但愿我能成为”这种希求设想的方式说的,它们同样应该按照前面那四句的方式去理解。巴利
Evamādīnīti ādi-saddena ‘‘evamasmi, aññathāsmi, ahaṃ bhavissaṃ, itthaṃ bhavissaṃ, evaṃ bhavissaṃ, aññathā bhavissaṃ, asasmi, satasmi, ahaṃ siyaṃ, itthaṃ siyaṃ, evaṃ siyaṃ, aññathā siyaṃ, apāhaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ itthaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ evaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ aññathā siya’’nti etesaṃ saṅgaho. Upanidhāya gahaṇampi duvidhaṃ samato asamato vāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evamasmi, aññathāsmī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tattha evamasmīti idaṃ samato upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, evaṃ ahamasmīti attho. Aññathāsmīti idaṃ pana asamato gahaṇaṃ, yathāyaṃ khattiyo tato aññathā ahaṃ hīno vā adhiko vāti attho. Imāni tāva paccuppannavasena cattāri taṇhāvicaritāni. Bhavissantiādīni pana cattāri anāgatavasena vuttāni, tesaṃ purimacatukke vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Asasmīti sassato asmi, niccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Satasmīti asassato asmi, aniccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imāni dve sassatucchedavasena vuttāni. Ito parāni siyantiādīni cattāri saṃsayaparivitakkavasena vuttāni, tāni purimacatukke vuttanayena atthato veditabbāni. Apāhaṃ siyantiādīni pana cattāri ‘‘api nāmāhaṃ bhaveyya’’nti evaṃ patthanākappanavasena vuttāni, tānipi purimacatukke vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Evametesu –
两种以“见”为首,四种以“纯净”为首,还有以那些“首”为根本的;
这三类各自三个一组,一共应当理解为十八种。巴利
Dve diṭṭhisīsā cattāro, suddhasīsā sīsamūlakā; Tayo tayoti etāni, aṭṭhārasa vibhāvaye.
这些确实被称为两种“见之顶”,是依常见与断见而说的;“我是、我将是、我可能是、我愿是”这四种被称为“纯净之顶”;“我是这样”等三类,每类三种,应当知道这十二种被称为“以顶为根本”。在这里,经文中是依色所缘等而说渴爱的,所以说“依止于内在的色等”。应理解为引出了十八种渴爱行境。因为以这个“我是”——以“我是刹帝利”“我是灌顶将军”等为基础——从根本上有“我是”,所以成为“我是”。其余部分应依前面所说的方法理解。所谓“归纳”,是以简略方式归纳如前所说的渴爱分类时,进行归纳。“诸比丘,有这六种渴爱身”等是解说。“于色有渴爱,即色渴爱”等是解说的含义。“以欲贪的状态”等,以及“依止于内在的”等,是解说的详细展开。“于色等所缘中唯有六种”等,则是归纳。巴利
Ete hi sassatucchedavasena vuttā dve diṭṭhisīsā nāma, ‘‘asmi, bhavissaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ siya’’nti ete cattāro suddhasīsā nāma, ‘‘itthamasmī’’tiādayo tayo tayoti dvādasa sīsamūlakā nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Idha pāḷiyaṃ rūpārammaṇādivasena taṇhā āgatāti āha ‘‘ajjhattikarūpādinissitānī’’ti. Aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritānīti ānetvā sambandho. Iminā asmīti iminā abhisekasenāpaccādinā ‘‘khattiyo aha’’nti mūlabhāvato ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Saṅgaheti taṇhāya yathāvuttavibhāgassa saṃkhipanavasena saṅgaṇhane kariyamāne. ‘‘Chayime, bhikkhave, taṇhākāyā’’tiādi niddeso. ‘‘Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā’’tiādi niddesattho. ‘‘Kāmarāgabhāvenā’’tiādiko, ‘‘ajjhattikassupādāyā’’tiādiko ca niddesavitthāro. ‘‘Rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu chaḷevā’’tiādiko saṅgaho.
因为在眼门等每一门中,所生起的诸识各有多种,受也一样有多种,所以把它们按聚集的方式合在一起,说为“六受身”,因此注释说“受的聚集”。眼界等法,以依止的状态和生起之门的状态而成为种种不同的缘,它们就像用肚子怀藏、养育胎儿一样,所以称它们为受的“母亲”。“以眼触为因”,是指以依止等为缘的眼触。“这个”,是指这个受,以“眼触所生受”等共通的说法来说。“在这里”,是指在“受”这个词句中。“摄集一切”,是指依善、不善、异熟、唯作而摄集一切。虽然按照《分别论》中所述的方式共通地说了,但为了显示这里真正要说的受,所以又说“然而依异熟来说”等。“眼处的触”,是指依止于眼处而生起的触。其余各句也应这样理解。因为眼等法在《清净道论》的“蕴论”中,已从相等方面分别说明;在“处论”中,又从特相、共相以及词义之见等方面加以阐明,所以说“应当说的……都已经说了”。巴利
Yasmā cakkhudvārādīsu ekekasmiṃ dvāre uppajjanakaviññāṇāni viya anekā eva vedanā, tasmā tā rāsivasena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘cha vedanākāyā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vedanāsamūhā’’ti. Nissayabhāvena uppattidvārabhāvena nānāpaccayā honti cakkhudhātuādayo, tā kucchinā dhārentiyo viya posentiyo viya ca hontīti tāsaṃ mātusadisatā vuttā. Cakkhusamphassahetūti nissayādicakkhusamphassapaccayā. Ayanti ayaṃ vedanā ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā vedanā’’tiādinā sādhāraṇato vuttā. Etthāti etasmiṃ vedanāpade. Sabbasaṅgāhikāti kusalākusalavipākakiriyānaṃ vasena sabbasaṅgāhikā. Evaṃ vibhaṅge āgatanayena sādhāraṇato vatvāpi idhādhippetavedanameva dassetuṃ ‘‘vipākavasena panā’’tiādimāha. Cakkhumhi samphassoti cakkhumhi nissayabhūte uppannaphasso. Esa nayo sesesu. Yasmā cakkhādīni visuddhimagge khandhaniddese lakkhaṇādivibhāgato, āyatananiddese visesato, sāmaññato ca saddatthadassanādivasena vibhāvitāni, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ vattabbaṃ…pe… vuttamevā’’ti āha.
朝向所缘的特相:以朝向所缘的方式生起,具有朝向所缘的本性,因为离开所缘它就无法生起。变坏的特相前面已经说过。而受蕴只是受本身。所谓一切软弱的心,就是指五种识。有人问:在那里难道没有命根和心住吗?确实有,但它们的作用不像思等那样明显,所以在这里只从经典中举出它们。以那大种显现等为理由。在这里,即在这大种解说中。另一种抉择方式:从“词义”“聚”等,以及从特相等来抉择,还有另一种抉择方式。有人问:那不是已经在“四界差别”中说过,而不是在“色蕴解说”中说的吗?虽然是在那里说的,但因为以引用的方式说“在四界差别中所说的那些”,所以说成“在色蕴解说中说过”。依止,就是缘。因为依缘大种而生起的所造色,不舍弃大种,所以说“执取它们”。也有人说“依靠”,因为它们具有依止缘的状态。所谓前时动词,必定是期望后时动词的,这是用其余经文来说明含义。为了不通过语尾颠倒而显示含义,所以说“或者在聚集义中”等。在以属格叙述聚集的关联时,显示了聚集的含义,为了表明这一点,所以说“依止于聚集”。依照《法集论》中来的方式,说“二十三种”。因为在其中,心所依处并没有被指出,但由于《发趣论》中说“依止哪种色”,所以也把心所依处包括进来,以生起色的状态,把增长和相续合在一起,说“二十三种”。巴利
Namanalakkhaṇanti ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ hutvā namanasabhāvaṃ tena vinā appavattanato. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Vedanākkhandho pana ekāva vedanā. Sabbadubbalacittāni nāma pañcaviññāṇāni . Nanu tattha jīvitacittaṭṭhitiyo ca santīti? Saccaṃ, tāsaṃ pana kiccaṃ na tathā pākaṭaṃ, yathā cetanādīnanti te evettha pāḷiyaṃ uddhaṭā. Yena mahantapātubhāvādinā kāraṇena. Etthāti etasmiṃ mahābhūtaniddese. Añño vinicchayanayoti ‘‘vacanatthato kalāpato’’tiādinā lakkhaṇādinicchayato añño vinicchayanayo. Nanu so catudhātuvavatthāne vutto, na rūpakkhandhaniddeseti? Tattha vuttepi ‘‘catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānī’’ti atidesavasena vuttattā ‘‘rūpakkhandhaniddese vutto’’ti vuttaṃ. Upādāyāti paṭicca. Bhūtāni hi paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ upādārūpaṃ ‘‘tāni gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ avissajjanato. Nissāyātipi eke tesaṃ nissayapaccayabhāvato. Pubbakālakiriyā nāma ekaṃsato aparakālakiriyāpekkhāti pāṭhasesena atthaṃ vadati. Vibhattivipallāsena vinā eva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘samūhatthe vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samūhasambandhe sāminiddesena samūhattho dīpitoti taṃ dassento āha ‘‘samūhaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ (dha. sa. 584) āgatanayena ‘‘tevīsatividha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha hi hadayavatthu na niddiṭṭhaṃ, ‘‘yaṃ rūpaṃ nissāyā’’ti vā paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhāna. 1.1.8) āgatattā hadayavatthumpi gahetvā jātirūpabhāvena upacayasantatiyo ekato katvā ‘‘tevīsatividha’’nti vuttaṃ.
眼识,就是依靠眼而生起的识。这里是按它不共的因由来说明。在“行缘识”那句里,因为应当把一切世间的异熟识都包括进去,所以说这是三地异熟心的别名。巴利
Cakkhussa viññāṇanti vā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Asādhāraṇakāraṇena cāyaṃ niddeso. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ettha sabbalokiyavipākaviññāṇassa gahetabbattā ‘‘tebhūmakavipākacittassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ.
“造作的特相”是指它勤励运作的本性。“以驱动的方式”是指以身表来驱动,也就是以身表令其生起。“以言语的分别方式”是指以语表的产生,也就是以语表令其生起。为了说明如果不像这样,驱动就不会发生,所以说“独自坐在隐蔽处思考时”。“二十九种”在这里应当理解为:除去神通思,恰好有二十九种思,因为它不具备作为异熟识之缘的条件。巴利
Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇoti āyūhanasabhāvo. Copanavasenāti viññattisaṃcopanavasena, kāyaviññattiyā samuṭṭhāpanavasenāti attho. Vacanabhedavasenāti vacībheduppādavasena, vacīviññattiyā samuṭṭhāpanavasenāti attho. Evaṃ copanaṃ na bhaveyyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘raho nisīditvā cintentassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekūnatiṃsāti ettha abhiññācetanāvinimuttā eva ekūnatiṃsa cetanā veditabbā tassā vipākaviññāṇassa paccayattābhāvato.
在“于苦”这个说法里,即使只是一个依格(处格)的语词,也会通过接合、依止、所缘、遍摄这几种作用,打破它自身的单一性而具有多种用法,所以说“以四种原因”等等。因为即使只是一个语尾的说明,也会以多种方式起作用,就像在转义词和复合词中的情况一样。那(于苦的)就是无知。苦谛:就是具有心所依处这一特征的苦谛。它的:指无知的。以依止缘的方式:即以前生依止缘的方式。若是以俱生依止缘的方式,那就应当说成是与它俱生的触等。以所缘缘的方式:苦谛成为它的所缘,这样连接起来理解。苦谛:这里是业格单数。那:指那无知。它的:指苦谛的。为了说明“覆蔽”一词所说的覆蔽方式,所以说了“如实”等话。与智不相应的心,在某种程度上也能如实通达诸相,因此先说“以阻止如实通达”,然后说“此处不给予智的生起”。不过,前一句说明的是遮止通达智的生起,后一句说明的是遮止随觉智的生起。应当这样理解这里的意义。在此:即在苦谛中。巴利
Dukkheti ekampi idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ saṃsilesananissayavisayabyāpanavasena attānaṃ bhinditvā viniyogaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘catūhi kāraṇehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekopi hi vibhattiniddeso anekadhā viniyogaṃ gacchati yathā taddhitatthe uttarapadasamāhāreti. Tanti aññāṇaṃ. Dukkhasaccanti hadayavatthulakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ. Assāti aññāṇassa. Nissayapaccayabhāvenāti purejātanissayabhāvena. Sahajātanissayapaccayabhāvena pana taṃsahajātā phassādayo vattabbā. Ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena dukkhasaccaṃ assa ārammaṇanti yojanā. Dukkhasaccanti upayogaekavacanaṃ . Etanti aññāṇaṃ. Tassāti dukkhasaccassa. ‘‘Paṭicchādetī’’ti ettha vuttaṃ paṭicchādanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yāthāvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi ekadesena yāthāvato lakkhaṇapaṭivedho hotiyevāti ‘‘yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇenā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ñāṇapavattiyā cettha appadānenā’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Purimaṃ pana paṭivedhañāṇuppattiyā nisedhakathādassanaṃ, pacchimaṃ anubodhañāṇuppattiyā. Evamettha attho veditabbo. Etthāti dukkhasacce.
对于俱生的无知,集谛作为它的所依处,因为它是依止缘的状态,所以说了“从所依处来说”。从所缘来说,就是以所缘缘的状态。因为集谛是无知的所缘,所以说“于苦集有无知”,这就是意思。覆蔽在苦谛中已经按前面所说的方法解释了,但因为只有一种原因,对其他三谛不能成立,那么这唯一的原因是什么呢?所以说“以覆蔽故”。为了详细阐明这一点,说了“对于灭与道”等。缘于它:就是缘于它,以它为所缘。后二谛:就是灭和道。因为它们理趣甚深。难见:因为是极微细的法,自性本来就甚深,所以难见、难知、难通达。在那里:在前二谛中。成为盲目:就是成为黑暗。不能转起为所缘:就是无力把它作为所缘。以应被言说之义:就是以能说的状态如此呈现。由于自性相难见:从逼迫、聚集等方式来说,“这是苦,这是集”,这样如实地自性相难见、难知,所以前二谛甚深。在那里:在前二谛中。以颠倒执取的方式转起:就是以执取净等颠倒为缘的状态,无知转起。巴利
Sahajātassa aññāṇassa samudayasaccaṃ vatthu hoti nissayapaccayabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuto’’ti. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena. Yasmā samudayasaccaṃ aññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘dukkhasamudaye aññāṇa’’nti vuttanti attho. Paṭicchādanaṃ dukkhasacce vuttanayameva ekeneva kāraṇena itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ asambhavato, kiṃ pana etaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘paṭicchādanato’’ti. Idaṃ vitthārato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘nirodhapaṭipadānaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tadārabbhāti taṃ ārabbha taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Pacchimañhi saccadvayanti nirodho maggo. Tañhi nayagambhīrattā. Duddasanti saṇhasukhumadhammattā sabhāveneva gambhīratāya duddasaṃ duviññeyyaṃ duravaggāhaṃ. Tatthāti purime saccadvaye. Andhabhūtanti andhakārabhūtaṃ. Na pavattati ārammaṇaṃ kātuṃ na visahati. Vacanīyattenāti vācakabhāvena tathā upaṭṭhānato. Sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattāti pīḷanādiāyūhanādivasena ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayaṃ samudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 484; 3.104) yāthāvato sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā duviññeyyattā purimadvayaṃ gambhīraṃ. Tatthāti purimasmiṃ saccadvaye. Vipallāsaggāhavasena pavattatīti subhādiviparītaggāhānaṃ paccayabhāvavasena aññāṇaṃ pavattati.
现在,为了用另一种方式说明“于苦无知”等句子的含义,所以说了“再者”等话。其中,“仅以于苦”这一说法,指的是被称为无明的“于苦无知”这个范围。“以摄集”:即从总摄合并的角度。“以作用”:即从不能通达的作用角度。“犹如无知”:就像不能如实通达对境自性的作用一样。通过“于苦”等说法,无明就在那里活动,并且被特别指明了,因此为了说明在所有这些情况下都是同样无差别的自性,所以说了“但以无差别而言”等话。巴利
Idāni ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādīsu pakārantarenapi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dukkheti ettāvatāti ‘‘aññāṇanti vuccamānāya avijjāya dukkhe’’ti ettakena. Saṅgahatoti samodhānato. Kiccatoti asampaṭivedhakiccato. Aññāṇamivāti visayasabhāvaṃ yāthāvato paṭivijjhituṃ appadānakiccamiva. ‘‘Dukkhe’’tiādinā tattha avijjā pavattati, visesato niddiṭṭhaṃ hotīti katvā sabbattheva tathā avisiṭṭhasabhāvadassanaṃ idanti dassetuṃ ‘‘avisesato panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这里说的“灭”不是指刹那灭,因为刹那灭在这里并不是想表达的意思,也不成立;而且这里要着眼的是离贪等,是以对治的方式遮破无明等,所以这里所说的“灭”是指它们彻底不再生起,因此说“灭就是不再生起”。“无明在这里灭尽,就是无明灭;行在这里灭尽,就是行灭”——应当这样理解:通过所有这些“灭”的说法,宣说的就是涅槃。所以说“这就是涅槃”等等。所谓流转与还灭,就是流转和还灭。“以十二”这句应当分别配合:顺观以十二句显示流转,逆观以十二句显示还灭,这就是这里所展示的内容。巴利
Khaṇikanirodhassa idha anadhippetattā ayujjamānattā virāgaggahaṇato ca avijjādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena paṭibāhanaṃ idha ‘‘nirodho’’ti adhippeto, so ca nesaṃ sabbaso anuppajjanamevāti āha ‘‘nirodho hotīti anuppādo hotī’’ti. ‘‘Avijjā nirujjhati etthāti avijjānirodho, saṅkhārā nirujjhanti etthāti saṅkhāranirodho’’ti evaṃ sabbehi etehi nirodhapadehi nibbānassa desitattā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭanti vaṭṭañca vivaṭṭañca. ‘‘Dvādasahī’’ti idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘anulomato dvādasahi padehi vaṭṭaṃ, paṭilomato dvādasahi vivaṭṭaṃ idha dassita’’nti.
3. 《道经》注释巴利
3. Paṭipadāsuttavaṇṇanā
3 以错误的方式行持,因此称为邪行;这是轮回之道,因为它带来痛苦。那就是邪行。因此说“非出离之道”。那么,福行怎么会是邪行呢?意思是说,在成就的生存中,它确实是带来快乐的。说“轮转之首”,是因为它在属于轮回的这一方中是最上首的。说“至少”,是就最高限度而说的,不是就最低限度而说的。“愿我这份福成为证得涅槃的助缘”——这样发愿求涅槃之后所行的。“仅一把叶子那么大的布施”,就是仅一把菜叶那么大的布施。“未到达”,这里说的是内含之因,意思是“没有令到达”。或者,从行持的那一刻起就说“证得了阿罗汉果”,从那一刻起,能带来那个果的道也说“已到达”,所以说“未到达”。“依顺的方式”,就是依顺观缘起的方式。“依逆的方式”,这里也是同样的道理。“道被问及”,这句话也包含了“已开始要开示道”的意思,因为在这里,是以想要解说已经开始之义的提问而引入的。在顺观缘起的开示中,这里也以遮遣的方式说:无明灭则明生,行等不再生起,所以说“涅槃已被分别”。但就它自身的相状而言,那开示只是显明了流转。因为最后会说“流转与还灭都已宣说”。“于归结”,就是在结论处。“以果”:因为以所应证的果,显示了能使人到达那个果的道这个因。正如因有三种:能使人了知的因、能产生的因、能使人到达的因;果也有三种:应了知的果、应产生的果、应到达的果。因此,以所应证的涅槃果,显示了作为能使人到达那个果之因的道。所以说“以果显因”等。“这被称为”:如此,这个以涅槃为果的,就称为“正道”。“无余离贪、无余灭”:以断除之断,无明无余离染、无余灭尽。这两句说的都是无生灭。那即是涅槃。在第二种解释中,这里的意趣是:以那条道作为能作,才有无余灭尽;无明的无余灭,是依靠它而有的——为了显示那条道。如此,当这样分别涅槃的词义时,“具足威力的道已被分别”:能令无明无余灭尽的因之道,因为与那殊胜之力相应,所以在这里被分别显示为具足威力。因为在这里也以邪行的摄取而分别了流转,所以说“流转与还灭都已宣说”。巴利
3. Micchā paṭipajjati etāyāti micchāpaṭipadā, vaṭṭagāmimaggo dukkhāvahattā. Taṃ micchāpaṭipadaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aniyyānikapaṭipadā’’ti. So puññābhisaṅkhāro kathaṃ micchāpaṭipadā hotīti? Sampattibhave sukhāvahova hotīti adhippāyo. Vaṭṭasīsattāti vaṭṭapakkhiyānaṃ uttamaṅgabhāvato. Antamasoti ukkaṃsapariyantaṃ sandhāya vadati avakaṃsapariyantato. ‘‘Idaṃ me puññaṃ nibbānādhigamāya paccayo hotū’’ti evaṃ nibbānaṃ patthetvā pavattitaṃ. Paṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattanti sākapaṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattaṃ. Appatvāti antogadhahetu esa niddeso, apāpetvāti attho. Yadaggena vā paṭipajjanato arahattaṃ pattoti vuccati, tadaggena tadāvahā paṭipadāpi pattāti vuccatīti ‘‘appatvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Anulomavasenāti anulomapaṭiccasamuppādavasena. Paṭilomavasenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paṭipadā pucchitāti etena paṭipadā desetuṃ āraddhāti ayampi attho saṅgahito yathāraddhassa atthassa kathetukamyatāpucchāya idhāgatattā. Anulomapaṭiccasamuppādadesanāyampettha byatirekamukhena avijjādinirodhā pana vijjāya sati hoti saṅkhārānaṃ asambhavoti vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānaṃ bhājita’’nti. Sarūpena pana tāya vaṭṭameva pakāsitaṃ. Vakkhati hi pariyosāne ‘‘vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathita’’nti. Niyyātaneti nigamane. Phalenāti pattabbaphalena paṭipadāya sampāpakahetuno dassitattā. Yathā hi tividho hetu ñāpako, nibbattako, sampāpakoti, evaṃ tividhaṃ phalaṃ ñāpetabbaṃ, nibbattetabbaṃ, sampāpetabbanti. Tasmā pattabbaphalena nibbānena taṃsampāpakahetubhūtāya paṭipadāya dassitattāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘phalena hetthā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ vuccatīti evaṃ nibbānaphalā ayaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Asesavirāgā asesanirodhāti samucchedappahānavasena avijjāya asesavirajjanato asesanirujjhanato ca. Padadvayenapi anuppādanirodhameva vadati. Tañhi nibbānaṃ. Dutiyavikappe ayaṃ ettha adhippāyo – yena maggena karaṇabhūtena asesanirodho hoti, avijjāya asesanirodho yaṃ āgamma hoti, taṃ maggaṃ dassetunti. Evañhi satīti evaṃ padabhājanassa nibbānassa padatthe sati. Sānubhāvā paṭipadā vibhattā hotīti avijjāya asesanirodhahetupaṭipadā tattha sātisayasāmatthiyasamāyogato sānubhāvā vibhattā hoti. Micchāpaṭipadāgahaṇenettha vaṭṭassapi vibhattattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathita’’nti.
《毗婆尸经》的注释巴利
4. Vipassīsuttavaṇṇanā
4 “Vipphandantīti”是就眨眼说的。“Animisehīti”是没有眨眼,也就是一直睁着眼。因此《大本经》里这样说。“Etthāti”是在“毗婆尸”这个词里,或者是在“无眨眼者”等所引的这部经里。巴利
4.Vipphandantīti nimisanavasena. Animisehīti vigatanimisehi ummīlanteheva. Tena vuttaṃ mahāpadāne. Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘vipassī’’ti pade, etasmiṃ vā ‘‘animisehī’’tiādike yathāgate suttante.
大士因为不眨眼的眼睛而得到“毗婆尸”这个名称,这是说出的一个原因。针对“这不能成为原因,因为其他大士在最后一生也有不眨眼的眼睛”这一责难,先说了“然于此……”等话,接着为了显示另一种原因,又说了“再者……”等话。“Palāḷayamānassāti”:令喜悦的。“Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ”:这是表示不敬的属格。“Aṭṭassāti”:义利。巴利
Mahāpurisassa animisalocanato ‘‘vipassī’’ti samaññāpaṭilābhassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ akāraṇaṃ aññesampi mahāsattānaṃ carimabhave animisalocanattāti codanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādiṃ vatvā tato pana aññameva kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Palāḷayamānassāti tosentassa. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Aṭṭassāti atthassa.
“puññussayasaṅkhāto bhago assa atisayena atthīti bhagavā”的意思是:他具有由福德积聚而成的祥瑞,而且极为殊胜,所以称为“bhagavā”(世尊);这正是“bhāgyasampannassa”(具足祥瑞者)之意。“sammā”即完全地、如实地,也就是依理趣、依原因,所以说“nayena hetunā”(依方法、依因)。“saṃ”这个前缀与“sāmaṃ”同义,所以说“sāmaṃ paccattapurisakārenā”(自己、由自力),意思就是依自生智。“sammā”即自己依此而觉悟,因此称为“sambodho”(正觉),指的是道智;若按“bujjhati etenā”(依此而觉悟)来理解,那么这里也把一切知智包括在内了。趋向菩提的众生就是“bodhisatto”(菩萨),这是前词的后词省略,就像“sākapatthavo”那样。在“bujjhanakasatto”(觉悟的众生)这一说法中,他在大菩提行道上觉悟,所以是“bodhi”(菩提);又因为与殊胜的众生相关联,所以是“satto”(众生),合起来就是“bodhisatto”(菩萨)。发愿而行,就是生起“我何时才能证得大菩提”这样的欲求而修行。“dukkhaṃ”(苦)指以生等为根本的苦。虽然从死没再生的角度说,死亡与出生也可以成立,但这里先说了“jāyati mīyatī”(生、死),又说“cavati upapajjati”(死没、再生),并不是要把它们限定在同一世中,而是为了显示:这是把属于不同世的它们合在一起来说的,所以说“idaṃ……pe……vuttaṃ”(这……等……已说)。所谓“tassa nissaraṇaṃ”(它的出离),说的就是那老死的出离。因为大士是看见衰老、疾病、死亡之后才出家的,所以对他来说,老死从一开始就显现出来了。巴利
Puññussayasaṅkhāto bhago assa atisayena atthīti bhagavāti ‘‘bhāgyasampannassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sammāti sammadeva yāthāvato, ñāyena kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘nayena hetunā’’ti. Saṃ-saddo ‘‘sāma’’nti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘sāmaṃ paccattapurisakārenā’’ti, sayambhuñāṇenāti attho. Sammā, sāmaṃ bujjhi etenāti sambodho vuccati maggañāṇaṃ, ‘‘bujjhati etenā’’ti katvā idha sabbaññutaññāṇassapi saṅgaho. Bodhimā satto bodhisatto, purimapade uttarapadalopo yathā ‘‘sākapatthavo’’ti. Bujjhanakasattoti ettha mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya bujjhatīti bodhi ca so sattavisesayogato satto cāti bodhisatto. Patthayamāno pavattatīti ‘‘kudāssu nāma mahantaṃ bodhiṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti sañjātacchando paṭipajjati. Dukkhanti jātiādimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ. Kāmaṃ cutupapātāpi maraṇajātiyo, ‘‘jāyati mīyatī’’ti pana vatvā ‘‘cavati upapajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ na ekabhavapariyāpannānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ, atha kho nānābhavapariyāpannānaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ…pe… vutta’’nti. Tassa nissaraṇanti tassa jarāmaraṇassa nissaraṇanti vuccati. Yasmā mahāsatto jiṇṇabyādhimate disvā pabbajito, tasmāssa jarāmaraṇameva ādito upaṭṭhāsi.
以方便作意:意思是依靠方便、方法、理路、途径而使作意生起,所以叫方便作意。获得了结合:意思是依靠如实通达而获得了相应。如理作意:这是表示原因的离格,所以他在表示原因时用工具格,说成“以如理作意”。有生时便有老死:菩萨在探寻老死的原因——“到底有什么存在,才有老死?以什么为缘,才有老死?”——他这样推究:“如果这个存在,那个就发生;如果这个不存在,那个就不发生,那么,这个就是它的原因。”通过这样把握那不变异、随生而起的原因,名为“有生时便有老死,以生为缘而有老死”的、把握老死之因的慧就生起了。当这慧生起时,他就获得了现观与通达。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Upāyamanasikārenāti upāyena vidhinā ñāyena manasikārena pathena manasikārassa pavattanato. Samāyogo ahosīti yāthāvato paṭivijjhanavasena samāgamo ahosi. Yoniso manasikārāti hetumhi nissakkavacananti tassa ‘‘yoniso manasikārenā’’ti hetumhi karaṇavacanena āha. Jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇanti ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti jarāmaraṇe kāraṇaṃ pariggaṇhantassa bodhisattassa ‘‘yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, asati ca na hoti, taṃ tassa kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ abyabhicārajātikāraṇapariggaṇhanena ‘‘jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti yā jarāmaraṇassa kāraṇapariggāhikā paññā uppajji, tāya uppajjantiyā cassa abhisamayo paṭivedho ahosīti attho.
“如此”这个词,是指对前面所说的那种方式的把握。“确实”只是一个小品词。“此”是指以现前直观的方式把握前面所说的流转,所以说“如此此”。“在这里,因为已经提到了无明的集,所以就说‘在十一个处所’。”“把集总合起来”,就是把行等的集合在一起把握。因为观集的智慧一次又一次地生起,所以有“集、集”这样重复的说法。或者,“如此成为集”并不只是为了显示生起;就像“缘起”这个词是通过缘起的门径来说的,这里“集”这个词则是通过生起的门径来说明缘的作用。而且,这里所指出来的识等缘法,不论有多少,他都以共相、以想要遍说的意乐来总摄,说“集、集”。因此说“以无明为缘,行等之集生起”。以“见”的意义而称为“眼”,因为现前直观地见到集的状态就是眼。以“已知”的意义,就是以所了知的状态。以“了别”的意义,就是依“无明、行等乃至缘法的运转,就是这苦蕴的集”这样的行相来了别。以“通达”的意义,就是“这无明等缘法,由于是那行等的缘,所以是集”这样通达的意义。以“照亮”的意义,就是驱散覆盖集之状态的愚痴黑暗与烦恼黑暗,使之显现光明。而这就是以“眼”等词所说的智。在“灭”的环节中,也就是在逆观的环节中。因为那是通过“什么灭则老死灭”这样称说灭而引出的。巴利
Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Hīti nipātamattaṃ. Idanti yathāvuttassa vaṭṭassa paccakkhato gahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evamida’’nti. Idha avijjāya samudayassa āgatattā ‘‘ekādasasu ṭhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Samudayaṃ sampiṇḍetvāti saṅkhārādīnaṃ samudayaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā. Anekavārañhi samudayadassanavasena ñāṇassa pavattattā ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti āmeḍitavacanaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘evaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti idaṃ na kevalaṃ nibbattidassanaparaṃ, atha kho paṭiccasamuppādasaddo viya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena idha samudayasaddo nibbattimukhena paccayattaṃ vadati. Viññāṇādayo ca yāvanto idha paccayadhammā niddiṭṭhā, te sāmaññarūpena byāpanicchāvasena gaṇhanto ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti avoca. Tenāha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārānaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti samudayassa paccakkhato dassanabhāvo cakkhu. Ñātaṭṭhenāti ñātabhāvena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘avijjāsaṅkhārāditaṃtaṃpaccayadhammapavattiyā etassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo’’ti pakārato vā jānanaṭṭhena. Paṭivedhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘ayaṃ avijjādi paccayadhammo imassa saṅkhārādikassa paccayabhāvato samudayo’’ti paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena. Obhāsanaṭṭhenāti samudayabhāvapaṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa kilesandhakārassa vidhamanavasena avabhāsanavasena. Taṃ panetaṃ ‘‘cakkhu’’ntiādinā vuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Nirodhavāreti paṭilomavāre. So hi ‘‘kissa nirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho’’ti nirodhakittanavasena āgato.
5-10. 《尸弃佛经》等经的注释巴利
5-10. Sikhīsuttādivaṇṇanā
5-10 不这样搭配:不是用“尸弃佛也……”这类说法,以总摄的方式这样搭配。为什么?为了说明其中的原因,说了“何以故”等话。因为不是在同一座上说过的,为了让已经说过的这个意思更清楚,所以说了“确实在多处”等话。虽然这些经是各自分别说出来的,但义理注释却是一样的,因为它们的义理没有差别。“诸佛已出现于世”并不是由别人告诉他的,这就是这里的搭配。因为大菩萨在最后一生中,并不需要靠别人的教导。他们正是沿着已经走过的道而前往,也就是说,最后身大菩萨是依实行前行而走过的道前往,这就是这里的常法。“而行”指的是他们把心安立在四念处上,如实修习七觉支,以彻底现证圆满正觉的方式而进行。然而,为了说明他们最初是如何趣入毗婆舍那,所以说了“一切菩萨……”等。诸佛之观,或为了佛果的观,即是佛观。巴利
5-10.Naevaṃ yojetvāti ‘‘sikhissapī’’tiādinā samuccayavasena evaṃ na yojetvā. Kasmātiādinā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadati. Ekāsane adesitattāti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘nānāṭhānesu hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadipi tāni visuṃ visuṃ vuttabhāvena desitāni, atthavaṇṇanā pana ekasadisā tadatthassa abhinnattā. ‘‘Buddhā jātā’’ti na añño ācikkhatīti yojanā. Na hi mahābodhisattānaṃ pacchimabhave paropadesena payojanaṃ atthi. Gatamaggenevāti paṭipattigamanena gatamaggeneva pacchimamahābodhisattā gacchanti, ayamettha dhammatā. Gacchantīti catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu patiṭṭhitacittā satta bojjhaṅge yāthāvato bhāvetvā sammāsambodhiyā abhisambujjhanavasena pavattantīti attho. Yathā pana tesaṃ paṭhamavipassanābhiniveso hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbabodhisattā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Buddhabhāvānaṃ vipassanā, buddhatthāya vā vipassanā buddhavipassanā.
《食经》的注释巴利
1. Āhārasuttavaṇṇanā
11 “带来”是指把它们引生出来、使它们生起,意思是支持。“已生”是指已经产生、已经出现。“已生者”这个说法,是因为从结生那一刻开始,在世间就有了“已出生”的称呼;不过,从结生那一刻起直到从母胎出来,这期间都还叫“求有者”。这是就胎生众生而言,对“已生”和“求有”所作的区分。对其他种类的众生,则是按第一心等来划分的。这里“sambhava”这个词,对胎生众生来说,意思是“产生”;对其他众生来说,意思是“再生”。因为在第一心、第一种威仪路的那一刹那,他们只是在寻求、趋向再生,那时还不能叫“已生者”,因为他们在再生中还没有稳固。只有诸漏已尽的人,才因为彻底断除了对一切再有的寻求,而真正成为“已生者”。“不再有”这个决定性的说法,显示的是排除未来再生的意思。而在“时已到,为已生者”这类句子中,应当知道“已生”一词指的是诸漏已尽的人。这里的“或”字是总括的意思,就像“以火或水”等说法中的“或”一样。巴利
11.Āharantīti ānenti uppādenti, upatthambhentīti attho. Nibbattāti pasutā. Bhūtā nāma yasmā tato paṭṭhāya loke jātavohāro paṭisandhiggahaṇato pana paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchito nikkhanto, tāva sambhavesino, esa tāva gabbhaseyyakesu bhūtasambhavesivibhāgo, itaresu pana paṭhamacittādivasena vutto. Sambhava-saddo cettha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena pasūtipariyāyo, itaresaṃ vasena uppattipariyāyo. Paṭhamacittapaṭhamairiyāpathakkhaṇesu hi te sambhavaṃ uppattiṃ esanti upagacchanti nāma, na tāva bhūtā upapattiyā na suppatiṭṭhitattā, bhūtā eva sabbaso bhavesanāya samucchinnattā. Na puna bhavissantīti avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dasseti. Yo ca ‘‘kālaghaso bhūto’’tiādīsu bhūta-saddassa khīṇāsavavācitā daṭṭhabbā. Vā-saddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho ‘‘agginā vā udakena vā’’tiādīsu viya.
食物以各自的缘力维持有情的身体,这里要说的就是食物应当提供的资助。因此论中说:“这只是说法上的差别……其实是一回事。”所谓“有情已生的诸法”,指的是有情相续中已经生起的诸法。就像说“住立百年”时,意思是依着不断相续而持续下去;同样,“为了住立”也就是依着不断相续而持续,意思是为了不让它中断,所以说“为了不令断绝”。因为相续中的法不断生起,有情的相续才算是得到了资助,所以说“为了让未生起的生起”。以上这些是关于住立和资助的说法。这两者都要从两方面来理解,不能只按字面上的搭配去理解。巴利
Yathāsakaṃ paccayabhāvena attabhāvassa paṭhapanamevettha āhārehi kātabbaanuggaho hotīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vacanabhedo…pe… eko yevā’’ti. Sattassa uppannadhammānanti sattassa santāne uppannadhammānaṃ. Yathā ‘‘vassasataṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vutte anuppabandhavasena pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhitiyāti anuppabandhavasena pavattiyāti attho, sā pana avicchedoti āha ‘‘avicchedāyā’’ti. Anuppabandhadhammuppattiyā sattasantāno anuggahito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘anuppannānaṃ uppādāyā’’ti. Etānīti ṭhitianuggahapadāni. Ubhayattha daṭṭhabbāni na yathāsambandhato.
食物中所含的食素,要连同食物本身一起被吞咽下去,所以经中说“应被吞咽的食”。至于已经产生的食素,后面则会说“段食带来以食素为第八法的色法”。所谓粗大,是因为食素少,而不是因为食物本身体积大或质地硬。因此,哪种食物中食素少,它就是粗大的。蛇之类的食物,因为会引发痛苦,应当知道是粗大的。牛角之类的东西被丢弃三年后腐烂变软,人们说那是柔软。但真正的柔软,是因为沾了狼的唾液才变成那样。这是食物的法性。兔子的食物微细,因为它吃的是幼嫩的草和谷物。鸟的食物微细,因为它吃的是草籽之类。边地人的食物微细,因为他们吃的是豆子、绿豆粥之类。所谓“他们的”,是指他化自在天等天人的食物。说“就是微细的”,并不是相对什么而说,而是说它本身就是最微细的,因为再没有比它更微细的食物了。巴利
Vatthugatā ojā vatthu viya tena saddhiṃ ajjhoharitabbataṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhoharitabbako āhāro’’ti, nibbattitaojaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatī’’ti vakkhati. Oḷārikatā appojatāya na vatthuno thūlatāya kathinatāya vā, tasmā yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ parittā ojā hoti, taṃ oḷārikaṃ. Sappādayo dukkhuppādakatāya oḷārikā veditabbā. Visāṇādīnaṃ tivassachaḍḍitānaṃ pūtibhūtattā mudukatāti vadanti. Taracchakheḷatemitatāya pana tathābhūtānaṃ tesaṃ mudukatā. Dhammasabhāvo hesa. Sasānaṃ āhāro sukhumo taruṇatiṇasassakhādanato. Sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo tiṇabījādikhādanato. Paccantavāsīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo māsamuggakurādibhojanattā. Tesanti paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ. Sukhumotvevāti na kiñci upādāya, atha kho sukhumoicceva niṭṭhaṃ patto tato paramasukhumassa abhāvato.
这里,按照所依来区分食物的粗与细,而这种粗细应当根据所含食素的少与多来理解。为了说明这一点,就说了“在此处,又”等话。所谓“危难”,是指因饥饿而生起、折磨身体的苦痛。“驱除”,是说所依的食物只能驱除这个危难而已。然而“不能守护”,是说不能维持身体,因为食素太少,无法滋养身体。不能驱除危难,是因为胃没有被填满。巴利
Vatthuvasena panettha āhārassa oḷārikasukhumatā vuttā, sā cassa appojamahojatāhi veditabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Parissayanti khudāvasena uppannaṃ vihiṃsaṃ sarīradarathaṃ. Vinodetīti vatthu tassa vinodanamattaṃ karoti. Na pana sakkoti pāletunti sarīraṃ yāpetuṃ nappahoti nirojattā. Na sakkoti parissayaṃ vinodetuṃ āmāsayassa apūraṇato.
“六种”这句话,是用来说明没有任何一种触被遗漏。在这里,触等之所以排在第二等位置,只是依照说法的次第,并不是因为别的什么原因,所以说“这只是开示的次第”等等。为了表明这是“意的思”而不是“有情的思”,就像说“心的住立、心解脱”那样,所以说“意思就是思”。所谓“心”,就是指任何一种心。“汇成一类”就是把它们合在一起取来,不加区分,意思是以共通的方式把握。为了显示其中可得的执受等区别,才说了“段食”等。它们不能成办食的意义,因为那样的食不被取来。即使那时,也是在分裂、消失的时候。有些人说,这被称为执受食。然而,这不为诸阿阇梨所认可,因为那时执受色根本不存在。与结生心俱生起的,这是相的特征语,是为了显示一切业生色所摄的汁液存在而不断绝持续生起的道理。第七,从生起之日算起,直到第七日。它以血脉相续的方式保护色相续。正是这个,是业生汁液。然而,缘业生汁液而生起的汁液,因为不是业生的,应当知道就是非执受食。应当知道非执受的触等。这样连接起来。出世间触等如何说呢?所以说“出世间者则依惯例而说”。因为那些善法没有“具有”的类别,所以异熟法根本没有“执受”的类别,因此“非执受”的类别也是依惯例而说的,应当这样理解。巴利
Chabbidhopīti iminā kassaci phassassa anavasesitabbatamāha. Desanakkamenevettha phassādīnaṃ dutiyāditā, na aññena kāraṇenāti āha ‘‘desanānayo eva cesā’’tiādi. Manaso sañcetanā na sattassāti dassanatthaṃ manogahaṇaṃ yathā ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti, cetovimutti cā’’ti āha ‘‘manosañcetanāti cetanāvā’’ti. Cittanti yaṃ kiñci cittameva. Ekarāsiṃ katvāti ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vibhāgaṃ akatvā, sāmaññena gahitāti attho. Tattha labbhamānaṃ upādiṇṇakādivibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āhāratthaṃ na sādhentīti tādisassa āhārassa anāharaṇato. Tadāpīti bhijjitvā vigatakālepi. Upādiṇṇakāhāroti vuccantīti keci. Idaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ na ruccati tadā upādiṇṇakarūpasseva abhāvato. Paṭisandhicitteneva sahajātāti lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ, sabbāyapi kammajarūpapariyāpannāya ojāya atthibhāvassa avicchedappavattisambhavadassanattho. Sattamāti uppannadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva sattamadivasāpi. Rūpasantatiṃ pāleti paveṇighaṭanavasena. Ayamevāti kammajaojā. Kammajaojaṃ pana paṭicca uppannaojā akammajattā anupādiṇṇaāhārotveva veditabbo. Anupādiṇṇakā phassādayo veditabbāti ānetvā sambandho. Lokuttarā phassādayo kathanti āha ‘‘lokuttarā pana ruḷhīvasena kathitā’’ti. Yasmā tesaṃ kusalānaṃ upetapariyāyo natthi, tasmā vipākānaṃ upādiṇṇapariyāyo natthevāti anupādiṇṇapariyāyopi ruḷhīvasena vuttoti veditabbo.
前面已经说过“食就是缘”,如果“缘”的意思就是“食”的意思,那么有人就会这样责难:为什么只举出这四种呢?回答是:为什么只说这四种。连起来的意思是:正因为它们是特殊的缘,所以才只说这些是食。“因为是特殊的缘”,这句话是在说明:其他缘法虽然对它们所生起的法来说也是缘,但这些法在同样是缘的情况下,还以某种方式成为额外的、更殊胜的缘,因此说“被称为食”。现在为了说明那种殊胜的缘性,就说“因为它是特殊的缘……”等。段食对色身是特殊的缘,因为它有支持的作用。因此注释书中说:“由于对色法和非色法都有支持的作用,这四种食能带来帮助,所以是食缘。”(《清净道论》2.608;《发趣论注》缘广说释)因为,即使非色法的食以及食生色、等起色的食有生起的作用,但如果没有支持的作用,食就没有生起的作用,所以支持的作用才是主要的。因为食在生起的同时,也是以不间断的方式在支持,所以支持的作用本身就是食的作用。触对受是特殊的缘,因为经中说“以触为缘而有受”。由于说“以行为缘而有识”,所以思对识是特殊的缘。因为说“思能生起三种有”。又由于说“以识为缘而有名色”,所以识对名色是特殊的缘。因为如果没有入胎识,名色就不可能产生。正如经中说:“阿难,如果识不入母胎,名色能在母胎中形成吗?”等等。为了用经文证明上面所说的道理,就说“如经所说”等。巴利
Pubbe ‘‘āhārāti paccayā’’ti vuttattā yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭhotiādinā codeti, atha kasmā ime eva cattāro vuttāti atha kasmā cattārova vuttā. Ime eva ca vuttāti yojanā. Visesappaccayattāti etena yathā aññe paccayadhammā attano paccayuppannassa paccayāva honti, ime pana tathā ca hoti aññathā cāti samānepi paccayatte atirekapaccayā honti, tasmā ‘‘āhārāti vuttā’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Idāni taṃ atirekapaccayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesapaccayo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Visesappaccayo rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro upathambhakabhāvato. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘rūpārūpānaṃ upathambhakattena upakārakā cattāro āhārā āhārapaccayo’’ti (visuddhi. 2.608; paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā). Upathambhakattañhi satīpi janakatte arūpīnaṃ āhārānaṃ āhārajarūpasamuṭṭhānakarūpāhārassa ca hoti, asati pana upathambhakatte āhārānaṃ janakattaṃ natthīti upathambhakattaṃ padhānaṃ. Janayamānopi hi āhāro avicchedavasena upathambhayamāno eva janetīti upathambhakabhāvo eva āhārabhāvo. Vedanāya phasso visesapaccayo. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti vacanato viññāṇassa manosañcetanā. ‘‘Cetanā tividhaṃ bhavaṃ janetī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti pana vacanato nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ visesapaccayo. Na hi okkantaviññāṇābhāve nāmarūpassa atthi sambhavo. Yathāha ‘‘viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, mātukucchismiṃ na okkamissatha, api nu kho nāmarūpaṃ mātukucchismiṃ samuccissathā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.115). Vuttamevatthaṃ suttena sādhetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
虽然“食”的意思就是“缘”,但这四种之所以被称为“食”,是因为它们是特殊的缘。前面已经总体说明了它们作为特殊缘的性质,现在为了分别说明,就开始提问:“那么在这里,什么是特殊的缘?”等等。食物只是放到嘴里,即使还没有咀嚼,仅凭这一点就已经成为内部食物的缘了。所以说“令八种色生起”。能带来乐受的,就是乐受食。“一切种类”,是指依眼触等各种方式。触有多少种差别,触食就有多少种,相应地带来三种受,没有不起食的作用的。巴利
Evaṃ yadipi paccayattho āhārattho, visesapaccayattā pana imeva āhārāti vuttāti taṃ nesaṃ visesapaccayataṃ avibhāgato dassetvā idāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘ko panetthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mukhe ṭhapitamatto eva asaṅkhādito, tattakenāpi abbhantarassa āhārassa paccayo hoti eva. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Sukhavedanāya hito sukhavedanīyo. Sabbathāpīti cakkhusamphassādivasena. Yattakā phassassa pakārabhedā, tesaṃ vasena sabbappakāropi phassāhāro yathārahaṃ tisso vedanā āharati, anāhārako natthi.
在这里也一样,应当依照在触食部分已经说明的方式,来理解它的含义。依三种相续,就是依身十法、性十法、心处十法这三种相续。依俱生等缘的方法,就是依俱生缘等缘的规则。因为结生识对自己俱生的名法,是通过俱生缘、相互缘、异熟根缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘这些缘来作为缘的,所以就在食缘的意义上说它滋养那些名法。但对于俱生的色法,则要除去心处的相应缘,改用不相应缘来关联;对其余色法,也要除去相互缘,再按其余诸缘来配合说明。那些,是用中性词来表达的,因为即使不是中性词的法,也可以和中性词一起说。这里特别提出有漏的善思和不善思,是为了显示它们作为特殊缘的地位,因此说但就一般而言等等。结生识正是所说的,在这里也同样适用。正如它们对各自的果以特殊的方式成为缘,因而具有食的意义,同样对一般的果也具有食的意义。为了说明这一点,才说就一般而言等等。其中,与那些相应的、由那些等起的诸法,是指与那些触等相应的法,以及由它们等起的色法。这里,相应的说法应按适当情况来理解,等起的说法则是就一般而言。巴利
Sabbathāpīti idhāpi phassāhāre vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tisantativasenāti kāyadasakaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ vatthudasakanti tividhasantativasena. Sahajātādipaccayanayenāti sahajātādipaccayavidhinā. Paṭisandhiviññāṇañhi attanā sahajātanāmassa sahajātaaññamaññavipākindriyasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hontoyeva āhārapaccayatāya taṃ āhāreti vuttaṃ, sahajātarūpesu pana vatthuno sampayuttapaccayaṃ ṭhapetvā vippayuttapaccayena, sesarūpānaṃ aññamaññapaccayañca ṭhapetvā itaresaṃ paccayānaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā. Tānīti napuṃsakaniddeso anapuṃsakānampi napuṃsakehi saha vacanato. Sāsavakusalākusalacetanāva vuttā visesapaccayabhāvadassanaṃ hetanti, tenāha ‘‘avisesena panā’’tiādi. Paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yathā tassa tassa phalassa visesato paccayatāya etesaṃ āhārattho, evaṃ avisesatopīti dassetuṃ ‘‘avisesenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānanti tehi phassādīhi sampayuttadhammānañceva taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammānañca. Tattha sampayuttaggahaṇaṃ yathārahato daṭṭhabbaṃ, samuṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ pana avisesato.
在支撑的时候,它成就了食的作用——意思是,正是在支撑的时候,它就生起了色法;正是通过生起以食素为第八法的色法,它的支撑作用才得以成就。说“正是在触及时”,意思是在履行触的作用时。说“正是在努力时”,意思是在思惟时、在汇集时。说“正是在了别时”,意思是以构想再生(投生)的方式了别时,成就食的作用——这是句子的连贯理解。在一切情况下,成就食的作用,就是因为它们是受等生起的因,从而维持有身(生命体)的持续运转。那么,为什么说“令身住立”呢?难道不是由业等所生的色法,由业等来使其持续运转吗?为了回应这一诘难,才说“即使是业所生……”等等。巴利
Upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti upatthambhento eva rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ojaṭṭhamakasamuṭṭhāpaneneva panassa upathambhanakiccasiddhi. Phusantoyevāti phusanakiccaṃ karonto eva. Āyūhamānāvāti cetayamānā eva abhisandahantī eva. Vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantameva āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti yojanā. Sabbattha āhārakiccasādhanañca tesaṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya attabhāvassa pavattanameva. Kāyaṭṭhapanenāti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu kammajādirūpaṃ kammādināva pavattatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kammajanitopī’’tiādi.
依靠对执取色相续的支撑,也就成立了对时节生色和心生色两种色相续的支撑,所以说“两种色相续”。正是就这种支撑而说“成为随护者”。因为维持和守护就是色身持续存在的因。说“作为乐等的所依处”,就是成为乐等生起的依处。其实,所缘也以作所缘的方式安住于此,那些以它为所缘的法,就称为“处”。说“正是在触及时”,是因为触以接触为本质。因为诸法没有自己的本质就不能生起,没有受的生起,众生就不能流转,所以说“乐等……成为……”。在这里讲有想生存时,不应显示无想生存,因为即使无想生存的存续,也只是以作为其因的受的生起为依据,而此因并未完全涵盖。因此说“意思……导致有的根本产生,成为众生存续的因”。正因为如此,说“识正是在了别时”,这是依据再生的构想而说“正是在了别时”的意思。巴利
Upādiṇṇarūpasantatiyā upatthambhaneneva utucittajarūpasantatīnampi upatthambhanasiddhi hotīti ‘‘dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Upatthambhanameva sandhāya ‘‘anupālako hutvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Rūpakāyassa ṭhitihetutā hi yāpanā anupālanā. Sukhādivatthubhūtanti sukhādīnaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Ārammaṇampi hi vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena tadārammaṇā dhammāti vatthūti vuccati. Phusantoyevāti idaṃ phassassa phusanasabhāvattā vuttaṃ. Na hi dhammānaṃ sabhāvena vinā pavatti atthi, vedanāpavattiyā vinā sattānaṃ sandhāvanatā natthīti āha ‘‘sukhādi…pe… hotī’’ti. Na cettha saññībhavakathāyaṃ asaññībhavo dassetabbo, tassāpi vā kāraṇabhūtavedanāpavattivaseneva ṭhitiyā hetuno abyāpitattā, tathā hi ‘‘manosañcetanā…pe… bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hotī’’ti vuttā. Tato eva viññāṇaṃ vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantamevāti vuttovāyamattho.
应当从阐明过患的角度来看待四种恐惧。所谓“欲贪”,就是渴望,这里是针对味爱而说的。因为味爱在段食中特别强烈,所以这里特别加以限定。由于它而害怕,所以叫恐惧;欲贪本身就是恐惧,因为它是巨大祸害的根源。所谓“趋近”,是指在被感知对象、感官和识之中,以及在被感知对象和识相结合的情况下,以流转的方式发生;由于它是受等生起的原因,所以被称为“恐惧”。限定的用意如前所说,其余两种也是如此。所谓“积集”,就是累积,也有人说是安排;由于它是投生受生的原因,所以被称为“恐惧”。所谓“堕入”,是指识在种种生存中,以结生执取的方式生起;由于它是一切以投生受生为因的种种祸害的根本原因,所以被称为“恐惧”。现在,为了详细说明欲贪等的可怖性,开始说“是什么缘故”等。其中,“生起欲贪”的意思是产生执著,也就是生起渴爱。“以寒冷等为前导”,意思是站在寒冷等前面,也就是被寒冷等所逼迫。巴利
Cattāri bhayāni daṭṭhabbāni ādīnavavibhāvanato. Nikantīti nikāmanā, rasataṇhaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sā hi kabaḷīkāre āhāre balavatī, tenevettha avadhāraṇaṃ kataṃ. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, nikantiyevabhayaṃ mahānatthahetuto. Upagamanaṃ visayindriyaviññāṇesu visayaviññāṇesu ca saṅgativasena pavatti, taṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Avadhāraṇe payojanaṃ vuttanayameva. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Āyūhanaṃ abhisandahanaṃ, saṃvidhānantipi vadanti. Taṃ bhavūpapattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinipāto tattha tattha bhave paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena viññāṇassa nibbatti. So bhavūpapattihetukānaṃ sabbesaṃ anatthānaṃ mūlakāraṇatāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Idāni nikantiādīnaṃ sappaṭibhayataṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ kāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nikantiṃ katvāti ālayaṃ janetvā, taṇhaṃ uppādetvāti attho. Sītādīnaṃ purakkhatāti sītādīnaṃ purato ṭhitā, sītādīhi bādhiyamānāti attho.
正在生起触的人,就是在让眼触等各类触运转起来。贪著于触之味的人,是指习惯通过身触去品味那被称为触所缘的对象。为了说明众生正是依靠身触才生起对触所缘的渴爱,在讲解触食的过患时,便引出了以触所缘为主题的经文——“对他人所守护、所保护的……”等等。或者,“贪著于触之味的人”意思就是贪著于触食之味。因为只有当触食存在时,众生才会对触所缘产生贪味,没有触食就不会有,所以说“以触味为根本”等等。巴利
Phassaṃ upagacchantāti cakkhusamphassādibhedaṃ phassaṃ pavattentā. Phassassādinoti kāyasamphassavasena phoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātassa assādanasīlā. Kāyasamphassavasena hi sattānaṃ phoṭṭhabbataṇhā pavattatīti dassetuṃ phassāhārādīnavadassane phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ uddhaṭaṃ ‘‘paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesū’’tiādinā. Phassassādinoti vā phassāhārassādinoti attho. Sati hi phassāhāre sattānaṃ phassārammaṇe assādo, nāsati, tenāha ‘‘phassassādamūlaka’’ntiādi.
因为生起相所带来的怖畏,是以坠落的本质被执取的,所以说“以彼为根”,意思是“业之造作相”。“一切怖畏”,是指二十五种怖畏、三种大怖畏,以及其他一切怖畏。由于作为怖畏依止的有身得以产生,这些怖畏就必然到来。巴利
Jātinimittassa bhayassa abhinipātasabhāvena gahitattā ‘‘tammūlaka’’nti vuttaṃ. Kammāyūhananimittanti attho. Bhayaṃ sabbanti pañcavīsati, tividhamahābhayaṃ, aññañca sabbabhayaṃ āgatameva hoti bhayādhiṭṭhānassa attabhāvassa nipphādanato.
“坠落”就是再生。因为众生最初再生到各处如同炭坑一样的生存状态里,正像坠落一样。以它为根,就是以名色的生起为根。对一切怖畏的畏惧,其实正是对坠落的畏惧;因为是从它产生畏惧,所以称为怖畏。巴利
Abhinipatatīti abhinibbattati. Paṭhamābhinibbatti hi sattānaṃ tattha tattha aṅgārakāsusadise bhave abhinipātasadisī. Tammūlakattāti nāmarūpanibbattimūlakattā. Sabbabhayānaṃ abhinipātoyeva bhayaṃ bhāyati etasmāti katvā.
“令进入”的意思是:由于因是果获得自身的条件,所以因就像是在把果交付出去。“它”指果。“从彼处”指从因。“这些”指诸食。“如所说”指依照前面“令果产生”等所说的那种含义。“于一切句”指在“由受灭”等一切句子当中。巴利
Appeti viyāti phalassa attalābhahetubhāvato kāraṇaṃ, taṃ niyyādeti viya. Tanti phalaṃ. Tatoti kāraṇato. Etesanti āhārānaṃ . Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘phalaṃ nidetī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena atthena. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘vedanānirodhenā’’tiādīsu sabbesu padesu.
“以结生为起点”,就是以结生的那一刹那为起点。说到“称为有身的食”,这是针对已被执取的食而说的。因为它们从究竟意义上讲,确实是以渴爱为因。对于诸根完整的有情,是依七种相续来说的,也就是眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、性根、心所依处这七种相续。对于其余诸根不完整的有情,如盲人、聋人、无性根者等,则是依有所欠缺的相续来说的。所谓“有所欠缺的相续”,就是缺眼、缺耳、两者都缺、或缺性根等有所欠缺的相续。在结生时生起的,就叫“结生者”。至于“初有分心刹那等”中的“等”字,应当知道是包含了彼所缘心。巴利
Paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvāti paṭisandhikkhaṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā. Upādiṇṇakaāhāre sandhāya ‘‘attabhāvasaṅkhātānaṃ āhārāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Te hi nippariyāyato taṇhānidānā. Paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ sattānaṃ sattasantativasenāti paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ sabhāvakānaṃ cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo bhāvo vatthūti imesaṃ sattannaṃ santatīnaṃ vasena. Sesānaṃ aparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ andhabadhiraabhāvakānaṃ. Ūnaūnasantativasenāti cakkhunā, sotena, tadubhayena, bhāvena ca ūnaūnasantativasena. Paṭisandhiyaṃ jātā paṭisandhikā. Paṭhamabhavaṅgacittakkhaṇādīti ādi-saddena tadārammaṇacittassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
应当这样连接:他也了知渴爱是它的因。也有“渴爱是因”这样的读法。所谓“显示了轮转”,是指从自体和理路两方面,完整地显示了整个轮转。现在,为了详细阐明这个含义,才说出“而且在这个地方”等话。所谓“作了朝向过去的开示”,是指从现有生命开始,作趋向过去诸法、以过去诸法为对象的开示,并以这样的方式来说明。所谓“通过过去显示轮转”,是指通过过去的存在,显示了业、烦恼和果报的轮转。这里的“有身”是指现在的有身。如果这样,为什么又说“通过过去显示轮转”呢?这并没有过失,因为并没有限定“只通过过去”;而且这样一来,是以渴爱为首要,由无间的关系,把握了能令有身生起的业。因为如果没有业,渴爱作为“有的引导”便不成立。巴利
Taṇhāyapi nidānaṃ jānātīti yojanā. Taṇhānidānantipi pāṭho. Vaṭṭaṃ dassetvāti sarūpato nayato ca sakalameva vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘imasmiñca pana ṭhāne’’tiādimāha. Atītābhimukhaṃ desanaṃ katvāti paccuppannabhavato paṭṭhāya atītadhammābhimukhaṃ tabbisayaṃ desanaṃ katvā tathākāraṇena. Atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassetīti atītabhavena kammakilesavipākavaṭṭaṃ dasseti. Attabhāvoti paccuppanno attabhāvo. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassetī’’ti vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso ‘‘atītenevā’’ti anavadhāraṇato, evañca katvā atītābhimukhaggahaṇaṃ janakakammaṃ gahitaṃ, taṇhāsīsena nānantariyabhāvato. Na hi kammunā vinā taṇhā bhavanetti yujjati.
“那个业”,是以渴爱为首而说的业。“为了显示”,是为了显示那个过去的有身。“那个有身的能造业”,就是能造作上文所说的那个有身的业。从那之后,也是为了显示造作了另一有身的业才这样说的。无明也像渴爱一样,属于业的范畴,所以只取了业。“在两种情况下”,是指取食和取受等这两种情况。“有身”指的是现在的有身和过去的有身。再说“在两种情况下”,是指取渴爱和取无明、行这两种情况。应当这样连接:“其能造者”,就是说能造作现在和过去有身的业已经被说到了。在这里,通过取业,作为造业之处的过去生实际上就显示出来了。由此,显示了轮回的无始性。所谓“简略”,就是说通过简略的方式,也把握了因分五支和果分五支。因为作为因和果而被包含的诸法种类繁多,能够简要地把握,也就是简略而已。巴利
Taṃ kammanti taṇhāsīsena vuttakammaṃ. Dassetunti taṃ atītaṃ attabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ. Tassattabhāvassa janakaṃ kammanti tassa yathāvuttassa attabhāvassa janakaṃ. Tato parampi attabhāvaṃ āyūhitaṃ kammaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Avijjā ca nāma taṇhā viya kammattāti kammasseva gahaṇaṃ. Dvīsu ṭhānesūti āhāraggahaṇena vedanādiggahaṇenāti dvīsu ṭhānesu. Attabhāvoti paccuppannakāliko atītakāliko ca attabhāvo. Puna dvīsūti taṇhāggahaṇe avijjāsaṅkhāraggahaṇeti dvīsu ṭhānesu. Tassa janakanti paccuppannassa ceva atītassa ca attabhāvassa janakaṃ kammaṃ vuttanti yojanā . Kammaggahaṇena cettha yattha taṃ kammaṃ āyūhitaṃ, sā atītā jāti atthato dassitā hoti. Tena saṃsāravaṭṭassa anamataggataṃ dīpeti. Saṅkhepenāti saṅkhepena hetupañcakaphalapañcakaggahaṇampi hi saṅkhepo eva hetuphalabhāvena saṅgahetabbadhammānaṃ anekavidhattā.
如果只是通过过去那一分显示了流转,那么缘起法门就成了“有剩余”的教示。为了显示并非如此,才说“在这里,于此……”等文。因为虽然此处没有直接从体性上显示未来那一分流转,但从理趣上也已经把它显示出来了,所以缘起的开示恰恰是“无剩余”的。现在,为了用譬喻阐明这个道理,而说“正如……”等语。所谓“卧于水上”,是指借着水流躺卧。“对面部分”指另一端的部分。“从此方看”指从另一边望过去。“不完整”指肢节有缺。“如此具足”等,是把譬喻与所喻的法义配合起来。巴利
Yadi atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ sati sappadesā paṭiccasamuppādadhammadesanā hotīti dassento ‘‘tatrāya’’ntiādimāha. Tena hi yadipi sarūpato anāgatena vaṭṭaṃ idha na dassitaṃ, nayato pana tassapi dassitattā nippadesā eva paṭiccasamuppādadesanāti dasseti. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Udakapiṭṭhe nipannanti udakaṃ pariplavavasena nipannaṃ. Parabhāganti parauttamaṅgabhāgaṃ. Oratoti tato aparabhāgato olokento. Aparipuṇṇoti vikalāvayavo. Evaṃsampadantiādi upamāya saṃsandanaṃ.
就像脖子是支撑身体、连接筋腱的根本部位一样,渴爱也是支撑生命体的诸行的根本,所以经文说“见颈之时”。就像生命体是由受等许多部分组成的集合体一样,背脊也是由肋骨、脊椎骨等许多部分组成的集合体,所以说“见背……其……之时”。“所谓渴爱”:是就渴爱而说的。在这里,应当知道无明和行是教法的缘,所以说“如同见尾根之时”。因为经文的结尾处确实作了“应见尾根”的譬喻。应当从理路上理解其圆满性。在经典中,未来的缘之流转也以因的方式或果的方式呈现,其圆满性只能略见一斑,因此开头是果与因的联结,中间是因与果的联结,末尾也是果与因的联结。这样,通过三重联结,只显示了四要略的流转。巴利
Yathā hi gīvā sarīrasandhārakakaṇḍarānaṃ mūlaṭṭhānabhūtā, evaṃ attabhāvasandhārakānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ mūlabhūtā taṇhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘gīvāya diṭṭhakālo’’ti. Yathā vedanādianekāvayavasamudāyabhūto attabhāvo, evaṃ phāsukapiṭṭhikaṇḍakādianekāvayavasamudāyabhūtā piṭṭhīti ‘‘piṭṭhiyā…pe… tassa diṭṭhakālo’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāsaṅkhātanti taṇhāya kathitaṃ. Idha desanāya paccayā avijjāsaṅkhārā veditabbāti ‘‘naṅguṭṭhamūlassa diṭṭhakālo viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pariyosāne ‘‘naṅguṭṭhamūlaṃ passeyyā’’ti upamādassanaṃ kataṃ. Nayato paripuṇṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatassāpi paccayavaṭṭassa hetuvasena phalavasena vā paripuṇṇabhāvassa mukhamattadassanīyattā ādito phalahetusandhi, majjhe hetuphalasandhi, antepi phalahetusandhīti evaṃ tisandhikattā catusaṅkhepameva vaṭṭaṃ dassitanti.
2. 莫利亚颇求那经的注释巴利
2. Moḷiyaphaggunasuttavaṇṇanā
12 就在这个地方:先以“比丘们,有这四种食……”这样从实质上说明了四种食,然后以“比丘们,这些……是为了……”这种总结的方式显示出来,就在这同一个地方。他在这里结束了开示:只是以提纲的方式结束了对四种食分别解说的阐明,之后便省察一番,默然坐着。“与教说之连结相应者”:为令接下来的教说得以增长,而与先前所开示的教说之连结如此相应努力者。“见取行者”:因为执持我见而成为见取行者。“最胜香所熏”:因为被自性成就的栴檀香以及其他各种香气所熏染,所以是最胜香所熏。“以宝箧之最胜”:就是用宝石制成的最上宝箧。“连结开示之次第者”:将如所开示的开示之次第连结起来,使接下来的开示得以增长,如此努力者。“摄取识食者”:在关于那摄取作用的所问中,将那见取拔除,而说“凡对此……或受用者”。巴利
12.Imasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti ‘‘cattārome bhikkhu…pe… āhārā’’ti evaṃ cattāro āhāre sarūpato dassetvā ‘‘ime kho bhikkhave…pe… anuggahāyā’’ti nigamanavasena dassite imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne. Desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi catuāhāravibhāgadīpakaṃ desanaṃ uddesavaseneva niṭṭhāpesi, upari āvajjetvā tuṇhī nisīdi. Diṭṭhigatikoti attadiṭṭhivasena diṭṭhigatiko. Varagandhavāsitanti sabhāvasiddhena candanagandhena ceva tadaññanānāgandhena ca paribhāvitattā varagandhavāsitaṃ . Ratanacaṅkoṭavarenāti ratanamayena uttamacaṅkoṭakena. Desanānusandhiṃ ghaṭentoti yathādesitāya desanāya anusandhiṃ ghaṭento, yathā uparidesanā vaddheyya, evaṃ ussāhaṃ karonto. Viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretīti tassa āhāraṇakiriyāya vuttapucchāya taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppāṭento ‘‘yo etaṃ…pe… bhuñjati vā’’ti āha.
在识食这里,既然它是被想要的东西,那就一定得有享用它的人,所以“那到底是谁呢?”这个问句的用意就在这里。“时节”指的是出胎的时候。因为那只是时节里极短暂的一刻,所以才那样说。“别让卵被水冲走”,于是从大海里出来。就像兀鹫的雏鸟靠食思维持生命一样,那些龟卵也是靠意思食来维持,这是那位长老的主张。虽说这是他的主张,但不论在触食还是意思食上,这位长老的主张到底站不站得住脚呢?对于“这个问句”——也就是“尊者,谁在享用识食?”这个问句——他并不是依据上面所说的那种主张来问的,而是依据对“有情”的执著来问的,这就是其用意所在。他,就是持邪见的人。不应该去驳斥他,因为他就像疯子一样,在不明白问句用意的情况下就发问了。因此世尊说:“我不说‘有享用者’”等等。巴利
Viññāṇāhāre nāma icchite tassa upabhuñjakenapi bhavitabbaṃ, so ‘‘ko nu kho’’ti ayaṃ pucchāya adhippāyo. Utusamayeti gabbhavuṭṭhānasamaye. So hi utusamayassa mattakasamayattā tathā vutto. ‘‘Udakena aṇḍāni mā nassantū’’ti mahāsamuddato nikkhamitvā. Gijjhapotakā viya āhārasañcetanāya tāni kacchapaṇḍāni manosañcetanāhārena yāpentīti ayaṃ tassa therassa laddhi. Kiñcāpi ayaṃ laddhīti phassamanosañcetanāhāresu kiñcāpi therassa yuttā ayuttā vā ayaṃ laddhi. Imaṃ pañhanti ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretī’’ti imaṃ pañhaṃ etāya yathāvuttāya laddhiyā na pana pucchati, atha kho sattupaladdhiyā pucchatīti adhippāyo. Soti diṭṭhigatiko. Na niggahetabbo ummattakasadisattā adhippāyaṃ ajānitvā pucchāya katattā. Tenāha ‘‘āhāretīti nāhaṃ vadāmī’’tiādi.
当我说了“受用”这句话,也就是当我说“受用”时,这个问句——“尊者,谁受用识食?”——才可能是合理的。这样提问时,不是站在有情的执见上,而是纯粹从法的运作方式,以“以何法为缘”来问。所谓“就以那个识”,是指与结生识一同生起的名色,因为过去世中持邪见的人,未来还会再生起后有,这就是这里要表达的意思。当名色生起之后,以此为缘,六处就产生了。巴利
Tasmiṃ mayā evaṃ vutteti tasmiṃ vacane mayā ‘‘āhāretī’’ti evaṃ vutte sati. Ayaṃ pañhoti ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretī’’ti ayaṃ pañho yutto bhaveyya. Evaṃ pucchite pañheti sattupaladdhiṃ anādāya ‘‘katamassa dhammassa paccayo’’ti evaṃ dhammapavattavaseneva pañhe pucchite. Teneva viññāṇenāti teneva paṭisandhiviññāṇena saha uppannaṃ nāmañca rūpañca atītabhave diṭṭhigatikassa vasena āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti idhādhippetaṃ. Nāmarūpe jāte satīti nāmarūpe nibbatte tappaccayabhūtaṃ bhinditvā saḷāyatanaṃ hoti.
这里对缘的分别如下:这里所说的“名”,指的是受等三蕴;而“色”则是指属于有情相续的色法,具体就是四大种、六种所依、命根和食。
其中,异熟名在结生的刹那,作为心所依的伴侣,对第六意处,通过俱生、相互、依止、相应、异熟、有、不离这七种缘而成为它的缘。不过在这里,有些是以因缘,有些是以食缘,应当了知其中有增上、中等、下等种种差别。
对于其余的五处和四大种,异熟名作为伴侣,通过俱生、依止、异熟、不相应、有、不离这六种方式成为缘。这里有些是以因缘,有些是以食缘,一切都和前面一样。
在转起的过程中,异熟名对异熟的第六处,按照前面所说的方式,以七种缘成为缘;而非异熟名对非异熟的第六处,则去掉异熟缘这一项,以其余的方式成为缘。对于眼处等,无论是当下现起的以眼净色等为所依的,还是其他的,异熟名都通过后生、不相应、有、不离这四种方式成为缘;非异熟名也应当这样理解。
从色方面来说,依处色在结生时对第六处,通过俱生、相互、依止、不相应、有、不离这六种方式成为缘。而四大种对眼处等五处,则通过俱生、依止、有、不离这四种方式成为缘。色命根则通过有、不离、根这三种方式成为缘。以上就是简要的说明,详细内容应当从《清净道论》中获取。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ paccayavibhāgo – nāmanti vedanādikhandhattayaṃ idhādhippetaṃ, rūpaṃ pana sattasantatipariyāpannaṃ, niyamato cattāri bhūtāni cha vatthūni jīvitindriyaṃ āhāro ca. Tattha vipākanāmaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe hadayavatthuno sahāyo hutvā chaṭṭhassa manāyatanassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttavipākaatthiavigatapaccayehi sattadhā paccayo hoti. Kiñci panettha hetupaccayena kiñci āhārapaccayenāti evaṃ ukkaṃsāvakaṃso veditabbo. Itaresaṃ pana pañcāyatanānaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ sahāyo hutvā sahajātanissayavipākavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena chadhā paccayo hoti. Kiñci panettha hetupaccayena kiñci āhārapaccayenāti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Pavatte vipākanāmaṃ vipākassa chaṭṭhāyatanassa vuttanayena sattadhā paccayo hoti, avipākaṃ pana avipākassa chaṭṭhassa tato vipākapaccayaṃ apanetvā paccayo hoti. Cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ cakkhupasādādivatthukampi itarampi vipākanāmaṃ pacchājātavippayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi catudhā paccayo hoti, tathā avipākampi veditabbaṃ. Rūpato pana vatthurūpaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ chaṭṭhassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayavippayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi chadhā paccayo hoti. Cattāri pana bhūtāni cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ sahajātanissayaatthiavigatapaccayehi catudhā paccayo hoti. Rūpajīvitaṃ atthiavigatindriyavasena tidhā paccayo hotīti ayañhettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 2.594) gahetabbo.
“给问题让出机会”是指:给“尊者,到底是谁在触?”这个属于见行者的问题让出机会。他的意思是,想借此把它剥离出来。“在一切语句中”,是指在见行者和世尊所说的语句中。“有情”,就是指自我。而且,即使是持断灭论的人,在还没有断灭之前,也还是主张“自我确实存在”,更何况持常见论的人呢。“存在者”,是指实有。“已成就者”,是指已经完成。他执持的主张是:现在再也不需要成就什么了。“从此缘而有此”,就是从识食这个缘,而有这个名色。“又从此缘而有此”,就是从名色这个缘,而有这个六处。因为世尊在许多地方都这样说过,所以他已经接受了这样的说服:依缘而生的,不过就是这些行而已。“也以那个”,就是指也以这个已经被说服的心。把问题捆成一块,是指把它并成一团,让发问没有插进去的空隙。已经登上教说,是指从六处这一句开始,以“六处缘触”等这样的方式,教说就已经进入了缘起的次第。就抓住那一句,是指就抓住六处这一句。避开,是指把它撇开。他这样说道,是指对于“只是六……”等这样宣说的内容,他说:“应受调伏的人能通达。”识食是未来再有之生的缘,因为像这样从过去有对未来有,既作为缘,也作为根本因来宣说,所以说“识与名色之间有一个连接”。应当看到,这里通过提到识,也把行作识一并提到了。巴利
Pañhassa okāsaṃ dentoti ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatī’’ti imassa diṭṭhigatikapañhassa okāsaṃ dento. Tato vivecetukāmoti adhippāyo. Sabbapadesūti diṭṭhigatikena bhagavatā ca vuttapadesu. Sattoti attā. So pana ucchedavādinopi yāva na ucchijjati, tāva atthevāti laddhi, pageva sassatavādino. Bhūtoti vijjamāno. Nipphattoti nipphanno. Na tassa dāni nipphādetabbaṃ kiñci atthīti laddhi. Idappaccayā idanti imasmā viññāṇāhārapaccayā idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Puna idappaccayā idanti imasmā nāmarūpapaccayā idaṃ saḷāyatananti evaṃ bahūsu ṭhānesu bhagavatā kathitattā yathā paccayato nibbattaṃ saṅkhāramattamidanti saññattiṃ upagato. Tenāpīti saññattupagatenāpi. Ekābaddhaṃ katvāti yathā pucchāya avasaro na hoti, tathā ekābaddhaṃ katvā. Desanāruḷhanti yato saḷāyatanapadato paṭṭhāya ‘‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’tiādinā desanā paṭiccasamuppādavīthiṃ āruḷhameva. Tamevāti saḷāyatanapadameva gahetvā. Vivajjentoti vivaṭṭento. Evamāhāti ‘‘channaṃtvevā’’tiādiākārena evaṃ desite, ‘‘vineyyajano paṭivijjhatī’’ti evamāha. Viññāṇāhāro āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyāti evaṃ purimabhavato āyatibhavassa paccayavasena mūlakāraṇavasena ca desitattā ‘‘viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadaminā viññāṇaggahaṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassāpi gahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 《沙门婆罗门经》的注释巴利
3. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
13 13. 那些能在诸缘聚合之中,以那种自体如实通达诸谛的人,即使他们处在外道的范围里,也正因为他们在那里同样具备这种能力,并且考虑到他们未来将止息已造的恶法,所以仍然被认可为沙门、被认可为婆罗门。为了否定他们,才说“不能通达诸谛”。所谓“以苦谛的角度”,就是以苦圣谛的角度。否则,外道难道不知道老是苦、死是苦吗?有些人说,因为没有宣说圣谛,所以才说“与渴爱一起”;这种说法不对。因为在各处诸有中的第一次结生,这里指的就是“生”,而那个生从相续来说就是渴爱本身,渴爱就是那个生。而这里的“老死”显然是通常所说的老死,不是刹那意义上的老死,因此,应当看到,有渴爱才有生老死的集起,这是符合事实的说法。应当这样连接理解:从集圣谛的角度,他们不能了知。同样的道理也适用于其余各句。所谓“在一切句中”,是指那些应当以渴爱作为限定来说的所有语句。由于具足了什么,一个人才在究竟义上被称为沙门、婆罗门,那就是沙门性、婆罗门性,所以说“圣的沙门性……婆罗门性”。因为沙门这个词和婆罗门这个词,是依据其作用的特征而在各自的本义上固定下来的,凭这一点,即使对方并未通达,也可以随顺所化众生的根机,分成两种来说,因此说“在两种情况下也都”。在十一个地方宣说了四谛,因为没有去除无明之集。巴利
13. Ye paccayasamavāye tenattabhāvena saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ samatthā, te bāhirakaliṅge ṭhitāpi teneva tattha samatthatāyogena bhāvinaṃ samitabāhitapāpataṃ apekkhitvā samaṇasammatāyeva brāhmaṇasammatāyevāti te nivattetuṃ ‘‘saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dukkhasaccavasenāti dukkhaariyasaccavasena. Aññathā kathaṃ bāhirakāpi jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhanti na jānanti. Saccadesanābhāvato ‘‘saha taṇhāyā’’ti vuttanti keci. Taṃ na suṭṭhu. Yasmā tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbatti, idha jātīti adhippetā, sā ca taṇhā eva santānena, taṇheva sā jāti. Jarāmaraṇañcettha pākaṭameva adhippetaṃ, na khaṇikaṃ, tasmā sataṇhā eva jātijarāmaraṇassa samudayoti bhūtakathanametaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samudayasaccavasena na jānantīti yojanā. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Sabbapadesūti yattha taṇhā visesanabhāvena vattabbā, tesu sabbapadesu. Yena samannāgatattā puggalo paramatthato samaṇo brāhmaṇoti vuccati, taṃ sāmaññaṃ brahmaññañcāti āha ‘‘ariya…pe… brahmaññañcā’’ti. Yena hi pavattinimittena samaṇa-saddo brāhmaṇa-saddo ca sake atthe niruḷho, tassa vasena abhinnopi veneyyajjhāsayato dvidhā katvā vattuṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayatthāpī’’ti. Ekādasasu ṭhānesu cattāri saccāni kathesi avijjāsamudayassa anuddhaṭattā.
第二沙门婆罗门经注疏巴利
4. Dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
14 在“ime dhamme katame dhammeti”这句话里,“iti”这个词是表示引述的意思。因此,它把“这些法,哪些法”这几个词收摄在一起。因为这几个词是针对老死等共通的情况而说的,是这部开示中展开的部分,所以论师说“作了这么多展开而说,开示是依于个人的意欲”。通过这一点,就是取了那些老死等,依个人的意欲,从一开始就以“这些法”等方式,以通于一切词的方式开始了开示。因为经教是随顺开示的,而不是随顺法的开示。巴利
14.Imedhamme katame dhammeti ca ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘imesaṃ dhammānaṃ katamesaṃ dhammāna’’nti imesaṃ padānaṃ saṅgaho. Etāni hi padāni jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvena vuttāni imissā desanāya papañcabhūtānīti āha ‘‘ettakaṃ papañcaṃ katvā kathitaṃ, desanaṃ…pe… ajjhāsayenā’’ti. Iminā tāneva jarāmaraṇādīni gahetvā puggalajjhāsayavasena ādito ‘‘ime dhamme’’tiādinā sabbapadasādhāraṇato desanā āraddhā. Yathānulomasāsanañhi suttantadesanā, na yathādhammasāsananti.
《迦旃延族姓经》的注释巴利
5. Kaccānagottasuttavaṇṇanā
15 15. 在这里,无论是知道的人还是不知道的人,外道也好,佛教内部的人也好,都会依据传闻或者亲身经验说“正见”。所以,世尊取多数人的说法,用重复的方式说:“正见,正见,尊者,被称为。”这种重复的用法,是为了显示前面已经指出的那种情况。这里的意思是:“别人也说这是正见,但这样说的正见,从含义和特征来看,尊者,到底怎样才算正见呢?”不过,注释书里说,对于“正见”这个词,只有智者才是权威,愚者不算,所以说了“智者”等话。它有两个组成部分,所以叫“二”,也就是两种邪见执取的对象;以邪见执取的方式依赖、执著,所以叫“依赖二者”。因此说“依赖两个部分”。以那种邪见,持常见的人执取“这整个世间存在、有、一切时候都能找到”,那种见就是“存在性”,由于它执取“世间永远、一切时候都存在”,所以是常见,那就是“常”。以那种邪见,持断见的人执取“这整个世间不存在、没有、会断灭”,那种见就是“不存在性”,由于它执取“会断灭”,所以是断见,那就是“断”。所谓“世间”,指的是行世间,因为要在那里执取。“以正慧”:以不颠倒的慧、以如实之慧。因此说“与观俱之道慧”。“在已生起的诸法中”:指如缘所生的色法与无色法。“正在被了知时”:指以相续系属的方式正在被了知时。“若不存在”:如果那种断见,因为众生在那里那里被断灭、被毁灭,所以认为没有哪个众生或法真正停留,这样的断见会在行世间生起。即使正在生起的“没有化生众生”这种邪见,也是以那样生起的行作为对象。那种断见不存在:当以正慧看见依业、无明、渴爱等种种因缘而有的行世间的生起时,那种断见就不存在、不转起,因为看见诸行不间断地生起。“世间灭”:指行世间的刹那灭。因此说“诸行的坏灭”。“若存在”:以因果相续不断、执为一相的方式,在行世间生起的常见,认为世间一切时候都存在。那种常见不存在:因为看见一一生起者的坏灭、以及新的新的生起,所以那种常见不存在。巴利
15. Yasmā idha jānantāpi ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vadanti ajānantāpi bāhirakāpi sāsanikāpi anussavādivasenapi attapaccakkhenapi, tasmā taṃ bahūnaṃ vacanaṃ upādāya āmeḍitavasena ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti, bhante, vuccatī’’ti āha. Tathāniddiṭṭhatādassanatthaṃ hissa ayaṃ āmeḍitapayogo. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ‘‘aparehipi sammādiṭṭhīti vuccati, sā panāyaṃ evaṃ vuccamānā atthañca lakkhaṇañca upādāya kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, sammādiṭṭhi hotī’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vacane yasmā viññū eva pamāṇaṃ, na aviññū, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ paṇḍitā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dve avayavā assāti dvayaṃ, duvidhaṃ diṭṭhigāhavatthu, dvayaṃ diṭṭhigāhavasena nissito apassitoti dvayanissito. Tenāha ‘‘dve koṭṭhāse nissito’’ti. Yāya diṭṭhiyā ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko atthi vijjati sabbakālaṃ upalabbhatī’’ti diṭṭhigatiko gaṇhāti, sā diṭṭhi atthitā, sā eva sadā sabbakālaṃ loko atthīti pavattagāhatāya sassato, taṃ sassataṃ. Yāya diṭṭhiyā ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko natthi na hoti ucchijjatī’’ti diṭṭhigatiko gaṇhāti, sā diṭṭhi natthitā, sā eva ucchijjatīti uppannagāhatāya ucchedo, taṃ ucchedaṃ. Loko nāma saṅkhāraloko tamhi gahetabbato. Sammappaññāyāti aviparītapaññāya yathābhūtapaññāya. Tenāha ‘‘savipassanā maggapaññā’’ti. Nibbattesu dhammesūti yathā paccayuppannesu rūpārūpadhammesu. Paññāyante svevāti santānanibandhanavasena paññāyamānesu eva. Yā natthīti yā ucchedadiṭṭhi tattha tattheva sattānaṃ ucchijjanato vinassanato koci ṭhito nāma satto dhammo vā natthīti saṅkhāraloke uppajjeyya. ‘‘Natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti pavattamānāpi micchādiṭṭhi tathāpavattasaṅkhārārammaṇāva. Sā na hotīti kammāvijjātaṇhādibhedaṃ paccayaṃ paṭicca saṅkhāralokassa samudayanibbattiṃ sammappaññāya passato, sā ucchedadiṭṭhi, na hoti, nappavattati avicchedena saṅkhārānaṃ nibbattidassanato. Lokanirodhanti saṅkhāralokassa khaṇikanirodhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅga’’nti. Yā atthīti hetuphalasambandhena pavattamānassa santānānupacchedassa ekattaggahaṇena saṅkhāraloke yā sassatadiṭṭhi sabbakālaṃ loko atthīti uppajjeyya. Sā na hotīti uppannuppannānaṃ nirodhassa navanavānañca uppādassa dassanato, sā sassatadiṭṭhi na hoti.
世间从它生起,所以叫“世间集”,这里说的是“随顺的缘的方式”。因为缘法对自己的果具有缘的作用,这就是随顺的缘的方式。把“逆的缘的方式”也带进来连接:从某某因的灭,就有某某果的灭,这就是逆的缘的方式。无明等缘法作为因等缘的作用,就是毫无保留的世间集。这是就缘所生的诸行等而说的。“见无断”:就是见无断的原因。这里不只是从刹那的角度来导出生成与坏灭的方式,也是从缘的角度来导出生成与坏灭的方式。巴利
Loko samudeti etasmāti lokasamudayoti āha ‘‘anulomapaccayākāra’’nti. Paccayadhammānañhi attano phalassa paccayabhāvo anulomapaccayākāro. Paṭilomaṃ paccayākāranti ānetvā sambandho. Taṃtaṃhetunirodhato taṃtaṃphalanirodho hi paṭilomapaccayākāro. Yo hi avijjādīnaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ hetuādipaccayabhāvo, so nippariyāyato lokasamudayo. Paccayuppannassa saṅkhārādikassa. Anucchedaṃ passatoti anucchedadassanassa hetu. Ayampīti na kevalaṃ khaṇato udayavayanīharaṇanayo, atha kho paccayato udayavayanīharaṇanayopi.
渴爱以“趋近”的意思而成为“近”。见也同样成为“近”。正是这个道理,借此指出取等法与近、近取并无不同。而且在这里,它们被执取为两种。难道不是在别处说了四种取吗?确实说了,但从意义上看,它们只有两种,所以这里才这样说。虽说“我、我的”是按不顺的次第说的,但理解意义时应按顺次来理解。“等”字也应包括前后、净、不净等。“那些法”指三地之法。“定居”指以变异而住,也就是倾向的意思。“以彼”指以渴爱和见。“被异绑”指以变异绑缚,或以无从解脱的方式被限定而绑缚。巴利
Upagamanaṭṭhena taṇhāva upayo. Tathā diṭṭhupayo. Eseva nayoti iminā upayehi upādānādīnaṃ anatthantarataṃ atidisati. Tathā ca pana tesu duvidhatā upādīyati. Nanu ca cattāri upādānāni aññattha vuttānīti? Saccaṃ vuttāni, tāni ca kho atthato dve evāti idha evaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti ayathānukkamena vuttaṃ, yathānukkamaṃyeva pana attho veditabbo. Ādi-saddena paroparassa subhaṃ asubhantiādīnañca saṅgaho veditabbo. Te dhammeti tebhūmakadhamme. Vinivisantīti virūpaṃ nivisanti, abhinivisantīti attho. Tāhīti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi. Vinibaddhoti virūpaṃ vimuccituṃ vā appadānavasena niyametvā baddho.
所谓“倾向”,是指近与取在生起方式上的特殊差别,所以说“那既是近也是取”。“心的”,指不善心的。“作为依处”,指作为基础。即使是以嗔和痴而转起的不善心,也完全是以渴爱、见、倾向为近依,所以说渴爱与见是不善心的所依。“在那之中”,指在不善心中。“倾向”,以“这是我的”“这是我的我”等方式产生倾向,令之转起。“随眠”,变得强有力,以未被断除的状态而随眠。“那两者”,指渴爱与见这两者。“不接近”,不以“这是我的”等方式,不通过渴爱和见的方式去接近、黏着。“不取”,不执取强固的执取。“不依止”,不以渴爱和见的执取为依止而转起。所谓“我所执”,是在有我执存在时才有的,所以说“我的我”。这种对苦的执取依于取蕴,若没有那些蕴就没有苦,所以说“唯苦,即唯五取蕴”。正如所说:“简略地说,五取蕴是苦。”“不产生疑惑”,即不生起疑惑,因为疑已被彻底断除。巴利
‘‘Abhiniveso’’ti upayupādānānaṃ pavattiākāraviseso vuttoti āha ‘‘tañcāyanti tañca upayupādāna’’nti. Cittassāti akusalacittassa. Patiṭṭhānabhūtanti ādhārabhūtaṃ. Dosamohavasenapi akusalacittappavatti taṇhādiṭṭhābhinivesūpanissayā evāti taṇhādiṭṭhiyo akusalassa cittassa adhiṭṭhānanti vuttā. Tasminti akusalacitte. Abhinivisantīti ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’tiādinā abhinivesanaṃ pavattenti. Anusentīti thāmagatā hutvā appahānabhāvena anusenti. Tadubhayanti taṇhādiṭṭhidvayaṃ. Na upagacchatīti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā taṇhādiṭṭhigatiyā na upasaṅkamati na allīyati. Na upādiyatīti na daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhāti. Na adhiṭṭhātīti na taṇhādiṭṭhigāhena adhiṭṭhāya pavattati. Attaniyagāho nāma sati attagāhe hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘attā me’’ti. Idaṃ dukkhaggahaṇaṃ upādānakkhandhāpassayaṃ tabbinimuttassa dukkhassa abhāvāti vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhamevāti pañcupādānakkhandhamattamevā’’ti. ‘‘Saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 1.120; 3.373; vibha. 190) hi vuttaṃ. Kaṅkhaṃ na karotīti saṃsayaṃ na uppādeti sabbaso vicikicchāya samucchindanato.
“不是靠他人”是指不因为相信别人。“混合正见”这句话,是因为从名色分别开始就说了正见,所以这里说的是世间和出世间混合的正见。“低劣的”是指下劣的尽头。因为“nikūṭa”这个词就是下劣的同义词,所以说“低劣的”。“第一”里的“ka”这个音表示呵责。“一切都没有”是指:就像有为法因为生起又坏灭所以根本不存在一样,一切都不存在、都断灭、都毁坏,这是它的意趣。“一切都有”则是指:就像无为法存在、有,一切时候都能证得,这是它的意趣。这里说的“一切”应当理解为有身相关的一切,就像《一切法根本经》等里面那样。因为这个“一切”是遍知智的所缘。“iti”这个词是用来举例说明的。举例说明什么呢?就是由“存在”这个词所说的“有性”,也就是恒常性。在这里,常见执著被当作第一边,断见执著是第二边,而脱离这两者的,就是缘起。在这里,因为说了生起和灭去,所以不落常见;又因为说了灭去的诸法在没有涅槃可证时还会随着因缘再次结生,所以也不落断见。世尊就是这样以中道、以缘起的方式来说法。因此说“这些……极端”等等。巴利
Na parappaccayenāti parassa asaddahanena. Missakasammādiṭṭhiṃ āhāti nāmarūpaparicchedato paṭṭhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā vuttattā lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ avoca. Nikūṭantoti nihīnanto. Nihīnapariyāyo hi ayaṃ nikūṭa-saddo. Tenāha ‘‘lāmakanto’’ti. Paṭhamakanti ca garahāyaṃ ka-saddo. Sabbaṃ natthīti yathāsaṅkhataṃ bhaṅguppattiyā natthi eva, sabbaṃ natthi ucchijjati vinassatīti adhippāyo. Sabbamatthīti ca yathā asaṅkhataṃ atthi vijjati, sabbakālaṃ upalabbhatīti adhippāyo. Sabbanti cettha sakkāyasabbaṃ veditabbaṃ ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) viya. Tañhi pariññāñāṇānaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ. Iti-saddo nidassane. Kiṃ nidasseti? Atthi-saddena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthita’’nti niccataṃ. Sassataggāho hi idha paṭhamo antoti adhippeto. Ucchedaggāho dutiyoti tadubhayavinimuttā ca idappaccayatā. Ettha ca uppannanirodhakathanato sassatataṃ, nirujjhantānaṃ asati nibbānappattiyaṃ yathāpaccayaṃ punūpagamanakathanato ucchedatañca anupagamma majjhimena bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti idappaccayatānayena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ete…pe… ante’’tiādi.
《说法者经》的注释巴利
6. Dhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
16 “为了厌离”:是为了获得厌离随观。因为这种随观,是以厌离的方式,在所说以老死为首的诸有为法上生起的。“为了离染”:是为了获得离染随观。“从戒开始”:是从依止出离的持戒开始。具足入流支、安住在依出离之戒上的在家居士,也叫做正行道者,更何况是安住在四遍净戒上的比丘呢。因此说:“应当知道,他是如此修行,直到阿拉汉道为止。”“为涅槃法”:是指带来涅槃的圣道。“成为相应之本性”:是指成为证得涅槃的相应本性。“厌离”:用这个词,他指出以出起为终点的观。“离染”和“灭”:这两个词指出圣道,另一个词指出果。“在此”:是在这部经中。“以一种方式”:是以第一种方式。因为在这里,世尊被那位比丘问及说法者的特征时,把它推到了顶点来回答。因为能把观、道教导到无取解脱的人,才是纯粹的说法者。因此说:“说法者的提问已被解答。”“以两种”:是以第二和第三种方式。“彼”:是指那个提问。“特化”:是作出殊胜化。不只是宣说所问的内容,还显示没有问到的义理,把法随法行导向称为无取解脱的殊胜境界。因为世尊就像被求少许却给予众多的大丈夫一样,被问说法者的特征时,通过缘起之门,不仅解说了那个特征,还进一步解说了法随法行和无取解脱。其中,以“为厌离……乃至……说法”这一句,显示说法属于习行分位;以“为灭而行道”这一句,显示属于抉择分位;以“成为无取解脱”这一句,显示说法属于无学分位。因此说:“有学与无学之地已被指出。”巴利
16.Nibbindanatthāyāti nibbidānupassanāpaṭilābhāya. Sā hi jarāmaraṇasīsena vuttesu saṅkhatadhammesu nibbindanākārena pavattati. Virajjanatthāyāti virāgānupassanāpaṭilābhāya. Sīlato paṭṭhāyāti vivaṭṭasannissitasīlasamādānato paṭṭhāya. Sotāpattiyaṅgehi samannāgato vivaṭṭasannissitasīle patiṭṭhito upāsakopi pageva catupārisuddhisīle patiṭṭhito bhikkhu sammāpaṭipanno nāma. Tenāha ‘‘yāva arahattamaggā paṭipannoti veditabbo’’ti. Nibbānadhammassāti nibbānāvahassa ariyassa maggassa. Anurūpasabhāvabhūtanti nibbānādhigamassa anucchavikasabhāvabhūtaṃ. Nibbidāti iminā vuṭṭhānagāminipariyosānaṃ vipassanaṃ vadati. Virāgā nirodhāti padadvayena ariyamaggaṃ, itarena phalaṃ. Etthāti imasmiṃ sutte. Ekena nayenāti paṭhamena nayena. Tattha hi bhagavā tena bhikkhunā dhammakathikalakkhaṇaṃ pucchito taṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā vissajjesi. Yo hi vipassanaṃ maggaṃ anupādāvimuttiṃ pāpetvā kathetuṃ sakkoti, so ekantadhammakathiko. Tenāha ‘‘dhammakathikassa pucchā kathitā’’ti. Dvīhīti dutiyatatiyanayehi. Tanti pucchaṃ. Visesetvāti visiṭṭhaṃ katvā. Yathāpucchitamattameva akathetvā apucchitampi atthaṃ dassento dhammānudhammapaṭipattiṃ anupādāya vimuttisaṅkhātaṃ visesaṃ pāpetvā. Bhagavā hi appaṃ yācito bahuṃ dento uḷārapuriso viya dhammakathikalakkhaṇaṃ pucchito paṭiccasamuppādamukhena tañceva tato ca uttariṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipattiṃ anupādāvimuttañca vissajjesi. Tattha ‘‘nibbidāya…pe… dhammaṃ desetī’’ti iminā dhammadesanaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ katvā dassesi. ‘‘Nirodhāya paṭipanno hotī’’ti iminā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, ‘‘anupādāvimutto hotī’’ti iminā desanaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ katvā dassesi. Tenāha ‘‘sekkhāsekkhabhūmiyo niddiṭṭhā’’ti.
7. 裸行迦叶经的注释巴利
7. Acelakassapasuttavaṇṇanā
17 17. “以相为裸形者”,是指以出家的相状而成为裸形者。他是通过这种裸形的修行方式而成为裸形者,并不是仅仅因为没有衣服穿,这里要显示的就是这个意思。“以名字”,是指以家族姓氏而称为迦叶。“宣说”,就是阐明、让人知道;因为能去除疑惑,所以叫“宣说”,也就是决断的根据,因此说“某个地方”等等。因为它能去除疑惑,所以就是原因。“场所”,是指可以停留的地方,所以说“瞬间、时刻”。“村内”,是指房屋之内。因为其中有房屋,所以叫“村内”,也就是村庄的内部。“无论你想”,就是随你所愿。就这样,世尊以一切智者的自恣来行自恣,开许提问,因此说“随你所愿”。“无论你想”,迦叶,就是随你所愿;即使你三次推辞,仍然请问吧,也就是说,你想问什么就只管问——这就是它的意思。巴利
17.Liṅgenaacelakoti pabbajitaliṅgena acelako. Tena acelakacaraṇena acelo, na niccelatāmattenāti dasseti. Nāmenāti gottanāmena kassapoti. Deseti pavedeti saṃsayavigamanaṃ etenāti deso, nicchayahetūti āha ‘‘kiñcideva desa’’ntiādi. So hi saṃsayavigamanaṃ karotīti kāraṇaṃ. Okāsanti avasaṃsandanapadesaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khaṇaṃ kāla’’nti. Antaragharaṃ antonivesanaṃ. Antare gharāni etassāti antaragharaṃ, antogāmo. Yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃ ākaṅkhasi. Iti bhagavā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāreti. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ icchasī’’ti. Yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, kassapa, tikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipantopi pucchasi, yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, tameva pucchāti attho.
因为经文说“乃至第三次拒绝”,所以就应该有“第三次确实……”这样的文句。不过要明白,这只是按义理脉络作的简略说法。为了说明世尊为什么让裸形外道请求三次之后才为他说法,所以说了“然而为何……”等话。他之所以拒绝到第三次,是为了让对方生起恭敬心,并激发他想听法的渴求,因为诸佛世尊都敬重法。为了等待众生的智慧成熟,才让他请求三次。把这个词按词形变化理解为通用表达,再结合迦叶的情况,就应该解为“以这段时间”。巴利
‘‘Yāvatatiyaṃ paṭikkhipī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘tatiyampi kho’’tiādinā pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. So pana nayavasena saṃkhittoti daṭṭhabbo. Yena kāraṇena bhagavā acelakassa tikkhattuṃ yācāpetvā cassa pañhaṃ kathesi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Gāravajananatthaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ paṭikkhipi tañca dhammassa sussūsāya. Dhammagarukā hi buddhā bhagavanto. Sattānaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpetīti vibhattivipariṇāmavasena sādhāraṇato padaṃ yojetvā puna ‘‘ettakena kālenā’’ti kassapassa vasena yojetabbaṃ.
“莫”是禁止词。“说”这个动词,是以重复述说的方式来表达,意思是“不要这样说,不要这样讲”。而“世尊如此说”这句话,是结集者的话。“苦是自作的”,是指一个人正在生起的苦,说它是由自己造作的,是因为以前他自己所累积的业成了那个原因。这种理解方式没有过失。但那位执持邪见的人,设想出一个脱离五蕴、恒常不变、具有造作者和感受者特征的“我”,然后依那个“我”来问“苦是自作的”。世尊为了阻止这种见解,就说“切莫如此”。因此注疏说“不应该说苦是自作的”等等。在这里,假如外道所设想的那种“我”真的存在,而且是恒常的,那么由于它没有变化,由于它不舍弃先前的形态,就无法对任何人做出任何特别的改变。这样一来,为了让人远离不利、转向有利而给予教导,对主张有“我”的人来说就毫无意义了。那样的教导又怎么能进行呢?因为它没有变化。这样一来,对主张有“我”的人来说,布施等行为、伤害等行为都不可能存在,就像虚空不会变化一样。同样,对主张有“我”的人来说,感受快乐和痛苦的关联也说不通,因为没有业的束缚。又因为没有生等,哪里来的解脱呢?假如有人说“只是法在他那里生起又消灭,行为就是依据这些法来说的”,这样也说不通。因为那个“我”如果不舍弃先前的形态、稳固不变,就不可能把它当作仅仅是法。再者,那些法是他的状态,那么这些状态与“我”是不同的还是相同的?如果不同,那么即使那些法在他那里生起,他本身也没有任何差别。然而所承许的造作、感受、死去、投生等,正是需要这一点,所以这样解释就有刚才说的过失。而且安立这些法的概念也就没有意义了。如果相同,那么具有生灭变化的状态与“我”没有差别,“我”也就同样有生灭,这样“我”是恒常的说法就完全没有余地了。或者,那些状态也像“我”一样变成恒常,那么业的束缚和解脱就都不可能存在。所以这种主张有“我”的理论根本站不住脚。因此说“这表示,没有任何一个所谓的我是苦的制造者”。“由他”云云,在“苦由他所造”等其余三种问难方式中,也应当同样理解。“无因生”,就是没有原因、随意地,不依靠任何因缘,或者不依靠任何先前的原因就生起。因此注疏说“没有因,随意地生起”。他为什么这样问呢?意思是接下来他会这样问。这里的“他的”,是指那位裸形外道的。“此”,是指世尊。“净化问题”,是说这位裸形外道自行净化自己的问题,想显示自己所问的问题很纯粹,其目的是为了遮止那种认为“苦是自作的”错误执着。巴利
Māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Bhaṇīti punavacanavasena kiriyāpadaṃ vadati. Mā evaṃ bhaṇi, kathesīti attho. ‘‘Iti bhagavā avocā’’ti pana saṅgītikāravacanaṃ. Sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti purisassa uppajjamānadukkhaṃ, tena kataṃ nāma tassa kāraṇassa pubbe teneva kammassa upacitattāti ayaṃ nayo anavajjo. Diṭṭhigatiko pana pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ niccaṃ kārakavedakalakkhaṇaṃ attānaṃ parikappetvā tassa vasena ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti pucchatīti bhagavā ‘‘mā heva’’nti avoca, tenāha ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti vattuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’tiādi. Ettha ca yadi bāhirakehi parikappito attā nāma koci atthi, so ca nicco, tassa nibbikāratāya, purimarūpāvijahanato kassaci visesādhānassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ahitato nivattanatthaṃ, hite ca vattanatthaṃ upadeso ca nippayojano siyā attavādino. Kathaṃ vā so upadeso pavattīyati? Vikārābhāvato. Evañca attano ajaṭākāsassa viya dānādikiriyā hiṃsādikiriyā ca na sambhavati, tathā sukhassa dukkhassa ca anubhavanabandho eva attavādino na yujjati kammabandhābhāvato. Jātiādīnañca asambhavato kuto vimokkho. Atha pana ‘‘dhammamattaṃ tassa uppajjati ceva vinassati ca. Yassa vasenāyaṃ kiriyāvohāro’’ti vadeyya, evampi purimarūpāvijahanena avaṭṭhitassa attano dhammamattanti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ. Te vā panassa dhammā avatthābhūtā, tato aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā. Yadi aññe, na tāhi tassa uppannāhipi koci viseso atthi. Yo hi karoti paṭisaṃvedeti cavati upapajjati cāti icchitaṃ, tasmā tadattho eva yathāvuttadoso. Kiñca dhammakappanāpi niratthikā siyā. Atha anaññe, uppādavināsavantīhi avatthāhi anaññassa attano tāsaṃ viya uppādavināsasambhavato kuto niccatāvakāso. Tāsampi vā attano viya niccatāpattīti bandhavimokkhānaṃ asambhavo evāti na yujjatevāyaṃ attavādo. Tenāha ‘‘attā nāma koci dukkhassa kārako natthīti dīpetī’’ti. Paratoti ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’ntiādike parasmiṃ tividhepi naye. Adhiccasamuppannanti adhicca yadicchāya kiñci kāraṇaṃ kassaci vā pubbaṃ vinā samuppannaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘akāraṇena yadicchāya uppanna’’nti. Kasmā evamāhāti evaṃ vakkhamānoti adhippāyo. Assāti acelassa. Ayanti bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sodhentoti sayaṃ visuddhaṃ katvā pucchitamatthaṃ eva attano pucchāya suddhiṃ dassento. Laddhiyā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti micchāgahaṇassa paṭisedhanatthāya.
他说“他造作”,意思就是那个人造业。他说“他感受”,这句话的重点是要说明造作者和感受者是同一个人,并不是要说明造业和感受果报发生在同一时间。“iti”这个不变词是用来举例示明的,“kho”是用来强调确定的。通过它们,就表明了“就是那个人”这个意思。因为这些不变词本来就是用在不确定的指称上。“从一开始”这句话,是在说最初的时候。因为持有“苦是自己造的”这种见解,所以首先就会生起“他造作、他感受”这样的想颠倒和心颠倒。从想颠倒产生心颠倒,从心颠倒产生见颠倒,因此注疏说:“这样一来,后来就会形成‘苦是自己造的’这种见解。”当想颠倒和心颠倒不断增长时,就会形成一种顽固的错误执著,也就是“苦是自己造的”这种见解。为了让人舍弃这种邪恶的见解,所以指出这一点。因此世尊说:“苦是自己造的……就会走向这个结论。”这里说的是轮回之苦,因为一般性地提到了“存在”。它显示并向外人阐明常见,而持有这种见解的人也会牢牢抓住常见不放。那是针对持有这种见解的人。那种以“苦是自己造的”这种方式生起的颠倒看法,就是执取常见。所谓“走向”,就是趋近。因此说“造作者以及……含义”。所谓“只执取为一个”,是说即使事物本身有差别,由于不如理地生起,就把它当成一个来执取。巴利
So karotīti so kammaṃ karoti. So paṭisaṃvedayatīti kārakavedakānaṃ anaññattadassanaparaṃ etaṃ, na pana kammakiriyāphalānaṃ paṭisaṃvedanānaṃ samānakālatādassanaparaṃ. Itīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Khoti avadhāraṇe. ‘‘So evā’’ti dassito. Aniyatādesā hi ete nipātā. Āditoti bhummatthe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘ādimhiyevā’’ti. ‘‘Sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā pageva ‘‘so karoti, so paṭisaṃvedayatī’’ti saññācittavipallāsā bhavanti. Saññāvipallāsato hi cittavipallāso, cittavipallāsato diṭṭhivipallāso, tenāha ‘‘evaṃ sati pacchā sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti ayaṃ laddhi hotī’’ti. Evaṃ sati saññācittavipallāsānaṃ brūhito micchābhiniveso, yadidaṃ ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhi. Tasmā paṭinissajjetuṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti dasseti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ…pe… etaṃ paretī’’ti. Vaṭṭadukkhaṃ adhippetaṃ avisesato atthīti ca vuttattā. Sassataṃ sassatagāhaṃ dīpeti paresaṃ pakāseti, tathābhūto ca sassataṃ daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhātīti. Tassāti diṭṭhigatikassa. Taṃ ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ viparītadassanaṃ. Etaṃ sassataggahaṇaṃ. Pareti upeti. Tenāha ‘‘kārakañca…pe… attho’’ti. Ekameva gaṇhantanti satipi vatthubhede ayoniso uppajjanena ekameva katvā gaṇhantaṃ.
这里,在“从一开始”这一句中,应当依照前面讲“苦是他作”等见解时所说明的道理来理解它的含义。这里的连接是这样的:依“苦是他作”的见解,先出现“一个人造作,另一个人感受”这样的想颠倒和心颠倒,这一切都应当按前面所说的方式连接起来。当如是微细的断灭颠倒最初生起时,随后就产生了“苦是他作”这种见解,这就是其中的关联。“作者”指业的造作者。“由他所作”指由业的造作者所造。因为以业来称呼果,是依不分别的转喻而说的。“如是”指与邪见相伴的感受,其本性是乐,却因烦恼的燃烧等而有怖畏、有忧恼,就是这样。“先于其他”指被所说的感受所折磨、所刺痛的人。说完“应依所述之理连接”之后,为了显示那种连接,才说了“在此”等语。“断灭”指对存在的有情而言的断灭、毁灭,就是不存在。因为对不存在的东西不可能有毁灭,所以断灭是建立在“存在”这一观念上的。譬如,以因果状态持续运行的自性法,虽然属于同一个相续,但对于因相续中断而分离的因果,由于在胜义上它们并非绝对不相离,若像对待相续中断而分离者那样,以绝对别异的决定去错误地执取“差别”之理,这就是执著断灭的原因。同样,为了显示:对于作为因果的诸法,虽然自性有别,但由于属于同一个相续,若以“同一”之理执取为绝对无别,这也是原因,所以在经文中说了“有情的”。依相续而存在的诸蕴,由于没有作密集的剖析,以执取为一为基础就产生了对有情的执著,又以执取有情为实有为基础就产生了断灭的执著,因为执取“只要这个我未被断灭,它就存在”,所以这里所说的“断灭”意指随灭尽而来的毁灭,因此说“断灭”。殊胜地毁灭、破坏,就是不存在。而它只是超越了肉眼和慧眼的所见范围,所以说“不见”。因为在世间,看不见时就惯用“灭”这个词。自性的离去、自性的消失,就是非有。凡是随灭尽而断灭的,它便不以其自性而住立。巴利
Idha ‘‘ādimhiyevā’’ti pade. ‘‘Paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā pagevātiādinā hettha vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Ayañhettha yojanā – ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā pageva añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedayatīti saññācittavipallāsā bhavantīti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ satīti evaṃ muduke ucchedavipallāse paṭhamuppanne sati pacchā ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hotīti sambandho. Kārakoti kammassa kārako. Tena katanti kammakārakena kataṃ. Kammunā hi phalassa vohāro abhedopacārakattā. Evanti diṭṭhisahagatā vedanā sātasabhāvā kilesapariḷāhādinā saparissayā saupāyāsā, evaṃ. ‘‘Pageva itare’’ti vuttavedanāya abhitunnassa viddhassa. ‘‘Vuttanayena yojetabba’’nti vatvā taṃ yojanaṃ dassento ‘‘tatrāya’’ntiādimāha. Ucchedanti sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ, vibhavanti attho. Asato hi vināsāsambhavato atthibhāvanibandhano ucchedo. Yathā hetuphalabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ satipi ekasantānapariyāpannānaṃ bhinnasantatipatitehi visese hetuphalānaṃ paramatthato avinābhāvattā bhinnasantānapatitānaṃ viya accantabhedasanniṭṭhānena nānattanayassa micchāgahaṇaṃ ucchedābhinivesassa kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ hetuphalabhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ vijjamānepi sabhāvabhede ekasantatipariyāpannatāya ekattanayena accantābhedagahaṇampi kāraṇamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ. Santānavasena hi vattamānesu khandhesu ghanavinibbhogābhāvena ekattagahaṇanibandhano sattaggāho, sattassa ca atthibhāvaggāhanibandhano ucchedaggāho, yāvāyaṃ attā na ucchijjati, tāvāyaṃ vijjatiyevāti gahaṇato nirudayavināso idha ucchedoti adhippetoti ‘‘uccheda’’nti vuttaṃ. Visesena nāso vināso, abhāvo. So pana maṃsacakkhupaññācakkhūnaṃ dassanapathātikkamoyeva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adassana’’nti. Adassane hi nāsasaddo loke niruḷhoti. Sabhāvavigamo sabhāvāpagamo vibhavo. Yo hi nirudayavināsena ucchijjati, na so attano sabhāvena tiṭṭhati.
这些被称为“二”的,就是当你问我“苦是自己造作的吗”时,我用“他造作,他感受”等说法,以及“另一人造作,另一人感受”等说法所否定的、被称为常见和断见的两种极端,它们就是二边,这是句子的连接。或者,“这些被称为二”是指:在这里,许多外道因为没有积累智慧资粮,不能了知那极其深奥、微细、精妙的空性,沉没在常见和断见里,连头都抬不起来,他们不接近这二边,这是句子的连接。说法是指:首先,在修行实践上,以智慧的力量安住于中道;在言教法上,以慈悲的力量安住于中道而说法。这里的“hi”字表示原因。因为从原因……已被指出,所以安住于中道而说法,这是句子的连接。从原因显示结果,这是句子的连接,因为语法上的性和数要随所表达的内容而定。“它的”指果的。没有任何造作者或感受者被指出,反而被否定了,因为只显示纯粹的因果关系,只把握苦蕴。到此为止,是以“这些,迦叶……这整个苦蕴的息灭”这一句为限。其余的问题是指“苦是自己造作还是他人造作”等剩下的四个问题。而在注释书里,“难道没有苦吗,乔达摩尊者”这个问题在经文中以其本身的形式被否定了,所以没有引用。被否定了:第三个问题在第一个和第二个问题被否定时就已经被否定了,因为那个问题可以通过分别否定和一并否定来否定。因此说“两个……都被否定了”。在这里,如果有人意许有一个造作或感受的我,那么他就承认了我是变易法。若是如此,由于法的次第转起,如同色法等、乐受等一样,这个我也会因依于缘而具有生起性。若有生起,就必有灭,所以常恒性没有立足处。对于他,否定第一个“自作”的问题,是为了随后建立起他自己所熟悉的集起,如同之前一样,或如同之后一样。其余的问题是指第三个问题等。第三个问题被否定了,应这样理解第三个问题被否定:通过“以无明为缘而有行”等,显示了苦恒常不断地依于缘,从而否定了苦的无因生起,由此也否定了对它的无知。因此世尊说:“这样,这整个苦蕴就有了集起。”巴利
Ete teti vā ye ime tayā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti ca puṭṭhena mayā ‘‘so karoti, so paṭisaṃvedayatī’’tiādinā, ‘‘añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedayatī’’tiādinā ca paṭikkhittā sassatucchedasaṅkhātā antā, te ubho anteti yojanā. Atha vā ete teti yattha puthū aññatitthiyā anupacitañāṇasambhāratāya paramagambhīraṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ appajānantā sassatucchede nimuggā sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na visahanti, ete te ubho ante anupagammāti yojanā. Desetīti paṭhamaṃ tāva anaññasādhāraṇe paṭipattidhamme ñāṇānubhāvena majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito, karuṇānubhāvena desanādhamme majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito dhammaṃ deseti. Ettha hīti hi-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā kāraṇato…pe… niddiṭṭho, tasmā majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito dhammaṃ desetīti yojanā. Kāraṇato phalaṃ dīpitanti yojanā, abhidheyyānurūpañhi liṅgavacanāni honti. Assāti phalassa. Na koci kārako vā vedako vā niddiṭṭho, aññadatthu paṭikkhitto hetuphalamattatādassanato kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhagahaṇatoti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘ete te, kassapa…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti ettakena tāva padena. Sesapañhāti ‘‘sayaṃkatañca paraṃkatañca dukkha’’ntiādikā sesā cattāro pañhā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bho gotama, natthi dukkha’’nti pañho pāḷiyaṃ sarūpeneva paṭikkhittoti na uddhato. Paṭisedhitā hontīti tatiyapañho, tāva paṭhamadutiyapañhapaṭikkhepeneva paṭikkhitto, so hi pañho visuṃ visuṃ paṭikkhepena ekajjhaṃ paṭikkhepena ca. Tenāha ‘‘ubho…pe… paṭikkhitto’’ti. Ettha ca yassa attā kārako vedako vā icchito, tena vipariṇāmadhammo attā anuññāto hoti. Tathā ca sati anupubbadhammappavattiyā rūpādidhammānaṃ viya , sukhādidhammānaṃ viya cassa paccayāyattavuttitāya uppādavantatā āpajjati. Uppāde ca sati avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti anavakāsā niccatāti. Tassa ‘‘sayaṃkata’’nti paṭhamapañhapaṭikkhepo pacchā ce attano niruḷhassa samudayo hotīti pubbe viya anena bhavitabbaṃ, pubbe viya vā pacchāpi. Sesapañhāti tatiyapañhādayo. Tatiyapañho paṭikkhittoti evañca tatiyapañho paṭikkhitto veditabbo – ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā satataṃ samitaṃ paccayāyattassa dīpanena dukkhassa adhiccasamuppannatā paṭikkhittā, tato eva tassa ajānanañca paṭikkhittaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.39-40; mahāva. 1; udā. 1).
受持别住之后而住,这是句义上的连接。所谓言辞通顺,是指那位乞求“愿我能在世尊座下出家、受具足戒”的人,为了使自己所说的话流畅,才这样表述。入村等,以“等”字统摄了以下这些内容:不过午返回、不以妓女等处为行境、在同梵行者的事务中善巧、对诵经等有强烈意欲、听到说外道不好时内心欢喜、听到说佛等不好时内心不喜、听到说外道好时内心不喜、听到说佛等好时内心欢喜(《大品》87)。八种行法,是指圆满奉行这八种外道行法。其中,不过早入村,在那里以清净的身语行仪乞食后不过午返回,这是一个行法。巴利
Yaṃ parivāsaṃ samādiyitvā parivasatīti yojanā. Vacanasiliṭṭhatāvasenāti ‘‘bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ labheyyaṃ upasampada’’nti yācantena tena vuttavacanasiliṭṭhatāvasena. Gāmappavesanādīnīti ādi-saddena nātidivāpaṭikkamanaṃ, navesiyādigocaratā, sabrahmacārīnaṃ kiccesu dakkhatādi, uddesādīsu tibbacchandatā, titthiyānaṃ avaṇṇabhaṇane attamanatā, buddhādīnaṃ avaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanatā, titthiyānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanatā, buddhādīnaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇane attamanatāti (mahāva. 87) imesaṃ saṅgaho. Aṭṭha vattānīti imāni aṭṭha titthiyavattāni pūrentena. Ettha ca nātikālena gāmappavesanā tattha visuddhakāyavacīsamācārena piṇḍāya caritvā nātidivāpaṭikkamananti idamekaṃ vattaṃ.
这里所说的“经文”是指:在《迦叶经》中,这段就是经文。“在其他地方”是指在《狮子吼经》等经中。“磨擦后锤打”的意思是:就像黄金经过磨擦、再用试金石锤打之后,只取无瑕的部分;同样,通过奉行别住行来磨炼,通过检验是否清净来锤打,只有确实清净的曾为外道者,在这里才被接受。“强烈的意欲”是指:进入教法之后,对梵行生活生起极为强烈、坚固的好乐。“吩咐某位比丘”是指:世尊吩咐了一位名姓不显著的比丘,因为他没有以“善来比丘”的方式获得具足戒的资格。“坐在僧众中”是指:比丘们按各自的座位,在世尊跟前坐成僧众。巴利
Ayamettha pāṭhoti etasmiṃ kassapasutte ayaṃ pāṭho. Aññatthāti sīhanādasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 1.402-403). Ghaṃsitvā koṭṭetvāti yathā suvaṇṇaṃ nighaṃsitvā adhikaraṇiyā koṭṭetvā niddosameva gayhati, evaṃ parivāsavattacaraṇena ghaṃsitvā suddhabhāvavīmaṃsanena koṭṭetvā suddho eva aññatitthiyapubbo idha gayhati. Tibbacchandatanti sāsanaṃ anupavisitvā brahmacariyavāse tibbacchandataṃ daḷhatarābhirucitaṃ. Aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesīti nāmagottena apākaṭaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ āṇāpesi ehibhikkhuupasampadāya upanissayābhāvato. Gaṇe nisīditvāti bhikkhū attano santike pattāsanavasena gaṇe nisīditvā.
《丁跋路迦经》的注释巴利
8. Timbarukasuttavaṇṇanā
18 18. 因为丁跋路迦持有“受就是我,我本身就在感受”这样的见解,所以他依据这个见解说“苦乐是自己造的”。为了驳斥这一点,世尊才说了“那受……”等话。因此说:“‘那受……’等话,是为了否定‘苦乐是自己造的’这个见解而说的。”这里“也”字,指的是在这部经里也是如此。“其中”,指的是所说的“那受……乃至苦乐……”那段文句。“从一开始”,这里的“从”用的是处格,所以“to”这个词并不是从格。用“eva”这个词,则表明“kho”这个词是限定之意。然而在这里应当说的,在紧接着的经中已经说了。不过在那里,被驳斥的是持有“受之外另有我,是受的造作者”这种见解的邪见者的主张;而在这里,则是持有“受就是我”这种见解的人的主张,这就是差别。因此说:“这样存在时,受就是由受所作的”等等。“此受的”,是指苦乐由之而作的受,即此受的。“此前也”,是指从常见的方式而言此前也。“先前的义”,是指紧接着的经中所说的义。“在义注中”,是指在古义注中。“那”,是指先前经中所说的义。“此经的”,是指这部经的。因为丁跋路迦执取“受就是我”,所以说“我就是那受……乃至不说”。巴利
18. Yasmā timbaruko ‘‘vedanā attā. Attāva vedayatī’’ti evaṃladdhiko, tasmā tāya laddhiyā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti vadati, taṃ paṭisaṃharituṃ bhagavā ‘‘sā vedanā’’tiādiṃ avoca. Tenāha ‘‘sā vedanātiādi sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkhanti laddhiyā nisedhanatthaṃ vutta’’nti. Etthāpīti imasmimpi sutte. Tatrāti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sā vedanā…pe… sukhadukkha’’nti, tasmiṃ pāṭhe. Ādimhiyevāti ettha bhummavacanena ‘‘ādito’’ti to-saddo na nissakkavacane. Eva-kārena kho-saddo avadhāraṇeti dasseti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ anantarasutte vuttameva. Tattha pana ‘‘vedanāto añño attā, vedanāya kārako’’ti laddhikassa diṭṭhigatikassa vādo paṭikkhitto, idha ‘‘vedanā attā’’ti evaṃladdhikassāti ayameva viseso. Tenāha ‘‘evañhi sati vedanāya eva vedanā katā hotī’’tiādi. Imissāti yāya vedanāya sukhadukkhaṃ kataṃ, imissā. Pubbepīti sassatākārato pubbepi. Purimañhi atthanti anantarasutte vuttaṃ atthaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyanti porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Tanti purimasutte vuttamatthaṃ. Assāti imassa suttassa. Yasmā timbaruko ‘‘vedanāva attā’’ti gaṇhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ sā vedanā…pe… na vadāmī’’ti.
在“其他的受”等语句中,应当说明的内容,和紧接着的前一部经里所说的方法完全一样。“作者之受”,就是指作为造作主体的受。“受之苦乐”,说的是受本身作为苦乐,而不是轮回层面的苦乐。因为经中有“自作苦乐”等说法,所以这里说的是“只有异熟苦乐在轮回流转”。巴利
Aññā vedanātiādīsupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ anantarasutte vuttanayameva. Kārakavedanāti kattubhūtavedanā. Vedanāsukhadukkhanti vedanābhūtasukhadukkhaṃ kathitaṃ, na vaṭṭasukhadukkhaṃ. ‘‘Vipākasukhadukkhameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’ntiādivacanato.
第9篇 愚者与智者经的注释巴利
9. Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
19 19. 无明盖:无明会阻挡和遮盖有等过患,所以叫无明盖;因为被无明遮住,所以说“被无明遮蔽的人”。此身:对于烦恼尚未断除的愚者,他把当前这个生命体当作保护,由于无明遮住了过患,使他不能如实看见,于是心被渴爱抓住,便造作出导向各种存在的诸行。又因为这些行,生命体得以再生,所以说这个身也是由无明生起的。他的:指愚者的。此义:应当说明“此身就是所谓名色”这个意思,这是从这些法被取蕴和六处所包含的角度来说的。如是此二者:就是这样,因为被无明遮蔽、又被渴爱系缚,所以存在于自他相续中的有识之身,就称为“二者”。别处:指其他经中。比如“缘于眼和色,眼识生起,三者和合就是触”等说法,是把内处和外处分开之后,说缘于眼与色等二法而有眼触等生起;但在这里并没有把六内外处分开,而是说“缘于二法而有触”,所以这其实叫“大二法”,因为它毫无遗漏地涵盖了内外处。而所谓内外处,这里也已经把六处都包括进去了。触之因:就是触生起的诸缘。依彼:这只是显示原因的表述,所以说“由那些成为触之因的”。触本身就是碰触的作用,不是触处,所以说“由触而触”。以圆满的方式:即以不缺不减的方式。处不圆满时,它们就是触的低劣之因,比这些更差的,所以说“或由这些中的某一个”。在身生起等中:有识之身的生起就是身生起,或者身由此而生起就是身生起,也就是烦恼与诸行。由“等”字,包括了触、六处等。特别地努力、运用,就叫作特别努力,是殊胜之因,所以说“特别努力”。巴利
19. Avijjā nīvaraṇā bhavādi-ādīnavassa nivāritapaṭicchādikā etassāti avijjānīvaraṇo, avijjāya nivutoti āha ‘‘avijjāya nivāritassā’’ti. Ayaṃ kāyoti bālassa appahīnakilesassa paccuppannaṃ attabhāvaṃ rakkhaṃ katvā avijjāya paṭicchāditādīnave ayāthāvadassanavasena taṇhāya paṭiladdhacittassa taṃtaṃbhavūpagā saṅkhārā saṅkharīyanti. Tehi ca attabhāvassa abhinibbatti, tasmā ayañca avijjāya kāyo nibbattoti. Assāti bālassa. Ayaṃ atthoti ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo nāmarūpanti ca vutto’’ti attho dīpetabbo upādānakkhandhasaḷāyatanasaṅgahato tesaṃ dhammānaṃ. Evametaṃ dvayanti evaṃ avijjāya nivāritattā, taṇhāya ca saṃyuttattā evaṃ saparasantānagatasaviññāṇakakāyasaṅkhātaṃ dvayaṃ hoti. Aññatthāti suttantaresu. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425-426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 4.60-61; kathā. 465, 467) ajjhattikabāhirāyatanāni bhinditvā cakkhurūpādidvayāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā, idha pana abhinditvā cha ajjhattikabāhirāyatanāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā ‘‘dvayaṃ paṭicca phasso’’ti, tasmā mahādvayaṃ nāma kiretaṃ anavasesato ajjhattikabāhirāyatanānaṃ gahitattā. Ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanānīti etthāpi hi saḷāyatanāni saṅgahitāneva. Phassakāraṇānīti phassapavattiyā paccayāni. Yehīti hetudassanamattanti āha ‘‘yehi kāraṇabhūtehī’’ti. Phasso eva phusanakicco, na phassāyatanānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘phassena phuṭṭho’’ti. Paripuṇṇavasenāti avekallavasena. Aparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ hīnāni phassassa kāraṇāni honti, tesaṃ viyāti ‘‘etesaṃ vā aññatarenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāyanibbattanādimhīti saviññāṇakassa kāyassa nibbattanaṃ kāyanibbattanaṃ, kāyo vā nibbattati etenāti kāyanibbattanaṃ, kilesābhisaṅkhārā. Ādisaddena phassasaḷāyatanādisaṅgaho. Adhikaṃ payasati payuñjati etenāti adhippayāso, visesakāraṇanti āha ‘‘adhikapayogo’’ti.
世尊是我们生起的根源,是我们根本的依处,所以这些法是以世尊为根本的。所谓“这些法”,指的是这些作为因的法。正是因为这些因法,我们虽然是愚者或智者,却能在身体的生成等方面看出差别,所以经文说“往昔由迦叶正自觉者所令生起”等等。“遍知”,就是当面、直接地了知。“通达”是它的同义词,意思是证得。“引导者”,就是引导到我们相续中的人。“调伏者”,就是以殊胜的方式引导,使圣智见得以成就殊胜,或者通过彼分调伏等方式调伏。“随顺引导者”,就是随顺地引导。对于种种如法施设所施设的诸法,随顺其理而作开示,因此说“如实性……乃至……开示者”。对于现前到来的诸法,世尊是归依处、是汇集处,所以这些法是世尊为归依处的法。因此说“四地诸法”等等。归依、通达,就是归依处,因此以通达之义,世尊是这些法的归依处,所以这些法是世尊为归依处的法。因此说“又复”等等。触生起,就是以通达之义,触来到智的现前,当触来到现前时,它本身就好像在问“我叫什么名字”,而世尊在为它命名,所以说“我是世尊”等等。“现前”,就是现前于智。“唯愿世尊显现”,就是愿它成为世尊的部分,愿世尊将它作为自己的部分而加以分别,其义如此;世尊的部分,即宣说此法,而我们的部分,则是听闻,这是此处的意趣。这样才与声相论相符。然而有些人说“显现”之义,即依智而可见、可开示之义。因此说“请你们自己为我宣说,其义如此”。巴利
Bhagavā amhākaṃ uppādakabhāvena mūlabhāvena bhagavaṃmūlakā. Ime dhammāti ime kāraṇadhammā. Yehi mayaṃ bālapaṇḍitānaṃ samānepi kāyanibbattanādimhi visesaṃ jāneyyāma, tenāha ‘‘pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā’’tiādi. Ājānāmāti abhimukhaṃ paccakkhato jānāma. Paṭivijjhāmāti tasseva vevacanaṃ, adhigacchāmāti attho. Netāti amhākaṃ santāne pāpetā. Vinetāti yathā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso hoti, evaṃ visesato netā, tadaṅgavinayādivasena vā vinetā. Anunetāti anurūpaṃ netā. Antarantarā yathādhammapaññattiyā paññāpitānaṃ dhammānaṃ anurūpato dassanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘yathāsabhāvato…pe… dassetā’’ti. Āpāthaṃ upagacchantānaṃ bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā dhammā. Tenāha ‘‘catubhūmakadhammā’’tiādi. Paṭisarati paṭivijjhatīti paṭisaraṇaṃ, tasmā paṭivijjhanavasena bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Tenāha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi. Phasso āgacchatīti paṭivijjhanakavasena phasso ñāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, āpāthaṃ āgacchantoyeva so atthato ‘‘ahaṃ kinnāmo’’ti nāmaṃ pucchanto viya, bhagavā cassa nāmaṃ karonto viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Upaṭṭhātūti ñāṇassa paccupaṭṭhātu. Bhagavantaṃyeva paṭibhātūti bhagavato eva bhāgo hotu, bhagavāva naṃ attano bhāgaṃ katvā vissajjetūti attho, bhagavato bhāgo yadidaṃ dhammassa akkhānaṃ, amhākaṃ pana savanaṃ bhāgoti ayamettha adhippāyo. Evañhi saddalakkhaṇena sameti. Keci pana paṭibhātūti atthaṃ vadanti ñāṇena dissatu desīyatūti vā attho. Tenāha ‘‘tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho’’ti.
无明和渴爱,是愚者和智者身体生起的条件。因此说:“业……已灭尽。”“令速行后”:就是让已取到的速行变得有力,能够牵引结生,这样去做。如果已经灭尽,为什么说未断呢?为了回答这个问题,所以说“然而又如……”等。因为对于相似的事物也可以用同一个名称来称呼,比如“就是那只鹧鸪,就是那些药草,由这同一业的异熟残余所致”。“为苦尽”:是为了说明此中特殊的含义,所以说“为灭尽之义”。“结生身”:指以结生为开端的身。经文中“由愚者”是具格,表示来源,所以说“从愚者”。与未来的结生相伴的,就是“有结生”。然而,如果有情能凭那有身证得阿拉汉果,相对于未来的结生而言,他就是“无结生”;为了作区分,所以说“有结生”。虽然这样说,但只要他还没有踏入圣者之地,就仍然具足愚者的状态,因此说“一切凡夫都是愚者”。确实,“无结生的漏尽者是智者”,这是用“漏尽者”一词来限定无结生者。如果是这样,有学圣者又怎么说呢?所以说“入流者”等。因为他们还没有达到智慧圆满的究竟,所以不能像漏尽者那样被称为智者;但又因为强有力的愚者法已经断除,所以也不能像凡夫那样被称为愚者。然而以现观四圣谛为依,他们归入智者一边,不归入愚者一边,就是上面所说的理由。巴利
Bālassa paṇḍitassa ca kāyassa nibbattiyā paccayabhūtā avijjā ca taṇhā ca. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ…pe… niruddhā’’ti. Javāpetvāti gahitajavanaṃ katvā, yathā paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ samatthaṃ hoti, evaṃ katvā. Yadi niruddhā, kathaṃ appahīnāti vuttanti āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Bhavati hi taṃsadisepi tabbohāro yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī, tāneva osadhāni, tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesenā’’ti ca. Dukkhakkhayāyāti tadatthavisesanatthanti āha ‘‘khayatthāyā’’ti. Paṭisandhikāyanti paṭisandhigahaṇapubbakaṃ kāyaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bālenā’’ti karaṇavacanaṃ nissakketi āha ‘‘bālato’’ti. Bhāvinā saha paṭisandhinā sappaṭisandhiko. Yo pana ekantato tenattabhāvena arahattaṃ pattuṃ bhabbo, so bhāvinā paṭisandhinā ‘‘appaṭisandhiko’’ti, tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘sappaṭisandhiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi vuttaṃ, so ca yāva ariyabhūmiṃ na okkamati, tāva bāladhammasamaṅgī evāti katvā ‘‘sabbopi puthujjano bālo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘appaṭisandhiko khīṇāsavo paṇḍito’’ti khīṇāsava-saddena appaṭisandhiko visesito. Yadi evaṃ sekkhā kathanti āha ‘‘sotāpannā’’tiādi. Te hi sikhāpattapaṇḍiccabhāvalakkhaṇābhāvato paṇḍitāti na vattabbā khīṇāsavā viya, balavatarānaṃ pana bāladhammānaṃ pahīnattā bālātipi na vattabbā puthujjanā viya. Bhajiyamānā pana catusaccasampaṭivedhaṃ upādāya paṇḍitapakkhaṃ bhajanti, na bālapakkhaṃ vuttakāraṇenāti.
第10章 缘经的注释巴利
10. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
20 一切有为法,没有不依缘而生起的。所以,缘法也是依靠自身的缘法而成为缘所生法;同样地,缘所生法也是依靠自身的缘所生法而成为缘法。诸法各自按适当的情况,具有缘与缘所生的性质。对于那些容易受教的众生来说,单单宣说缘起就很容易被他们理解,世尊就针对他们,详细地分别、宣说缘起。但对于另一些容易受教的众生来说,要把这两者分开宣说,他们一听到分别开示,就能证得法现观。世尊想到这些人,就把这两者分开显示,而开始了这场开示:“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说缘起以及缘所生诸法。”为了阐明这个含义,注释者才说了“导师在这部经中”等话。缘的存在状态就是缘性,也就是由缘所生的性质。这种性质在非真实法上找不到,所以说为“真实法”。问:生、老、死并不是真实法,只有那些被生、老、死所依附的诸蕴才是真实法,那为什么在教导中把它们也包括进去呢?答:这没有过失。因为生、老、死不过是缘所生的真实法所呈现的变化相,而不是别的什么,所以也被包括在内。所谓“无论如来出世或不出世”:这并不意味着像所化众生的道果生起那样,是依靠如来出世才有的;以生为缘而有老死的生起,并不是依于如来出世;然而,这种生起无论如来出世或不出世,都一直存在。所以,它虽然不是恒常的,犹如无为界,但用“常恒”这个词,显示从生缘而有老死的生起。因此,世尊说:“生就是老死的缘。”所谓“从生为缘”,就是以生为缘。在因上用“从”格。那个界是常住的,即这个“此缘性”是生对于老死的缘性,因为它没有变异。现在,任何时候生都不会不是老死的缘,而必定是缘,这就确定了老死的缘性。通过这两者,显示凡有如上所说的缘性之处,必定已经确立。因此,世尊说:“那个界是常住的。”用两句话来说。“安住”者,就是诸法依之而安住,这个“此缘性”就是法住性。“法”者,指缘所生之法。“确定”者,就是分别、特殊化。因为因与果的特殊和合,正是法性的决定,就是这样。巴利
20. Sabbampi saṅkhataṃ appaṭicca uppannaṃ nāma natthīti paccayadhammopi attano paccayadhammaṃ upādāya paccayuppanno, tathā paccayuppannadhammopi attano paccayuppannaṃ upādāya paccayadhammoti yathārahaṃ dhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannatā. Yesaṃ vineyyānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadesanāyeva subodhato upaṭṭhāti, tesaṃ vasena suṭṭhu vibhāgaṃ katvā paṭiccasamuppādo desito. Yesaṃ pana vineyyānaṃ tadubhayasmiṃ vibhajja sute eva dhammābhisamayo hoti, te sandhāya bhagavā tadubhayaṃ vibhajja dassento ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi paṭiccasamuppanne ca dhamme’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhīti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘satthā imasmiṃ sutte’’tiādimāha. Paccayassa bhāvo paccayattaṃ, paccayanibbattatā. Asabhāvadhamme na labbhatīti ‘‘sabhāvadhamme’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca jāti jarā maraṇañca sabhāvadhammo na hoti, yesaṃ pana khandhānaṃ jāti jarā maraṇañca, te eva sabhāvadhammā, atha kasmā desanāya te gahitāti? Nāyaṃ doso, jāti jarā maraṇañhi paccayanibbattānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ vikāramattaṃ, naññesaṃ, tasmā te gahitāti. Uppādā vā tathāgatānanti na vineyyapuggalānaṃ maggaphaluppatti viya jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇuppatti tathāgatuppādāyattā, atha kho sā tathāgatānaṃ uppādepi anuppādepi hotiyeva. Tasmā sā kāmaṃ asaṅkhatā viya dhātu na niccā, tathāpi ‘‘sabbakālikā’’ti etena jātipaccayato jarāmaraṇuppattīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘jātiyeva jarāmaraṇassa paccayo’’ti. Jātipaccayāti ca jātisaṅkhātapaccayā. Hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ. Ṭhitāva sā dhātu, yāyaṃ idappaccayatā jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayatā tassa byabhicārābhāvato. Idāni na kadāci jāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hoti hotiyevāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayabhāve niyameti. Ubhayenapi yathāvuttassa paccayabhāvo yattha hoti, tattha avassaṃbhāvitaṃ dasseti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’ti. Dvīhi padehi. Tiṭṭhantīti yassa vasena dhammānaṃ ṭhiti, sā idappaccayatā dhammaṭṭhitatā. Dhammeti paccayuppanne dhamme. Niyameti viseseti. Hetugatavisesasamāyogo hi hetuphalassa evaṃ dhammatāniyāmo evāti.
另一种理解方式:所谓“那个界就是如此安住”,指的是老死的此缘性,也就是“缘于生而有老死”这条规律,这个界就是这种自性。在如来出世之前,它没有被证知;在如来出世之后,它也没有被证知;在如来出世期间,它被证知,但它并不是由如来所造作出来的。而是只要老死存在,它在一切时候都以生为缘而存在,所以说“那个界就是如此安住”。不过,只是因为如来以自然智现等觉此法,并宣说“此法为如来所现等觉”,如来才被称为“法主”,而不是因为造作了未曾有之法。因此说“那个界就是如此安住”。正是这个界,因为“缘于生而有老死”此处无有颠倒,所以对于如此通达此自性者,或者因为其因同样如此存在,故说安住性为法住性;或者说,生是老死的生起住立、转起、积集、结合、障碍、集起、因缘的住立,因此以彼生起等状态而安住,称为“法住性”,这是就果而言,从能力上说,其实是在说因本身。或者说,法是被诸缘所持,因为依彼而住,所以果的住立就是住,法的住立就是法住。或者说,法是因,因为它以缘的状态持果,它的住立就是自性,而从法之外别无自性,所以说法住,即缘。因此说“于缘的观察之慧是法住智”。法住本身就是法住性。正是这个界,因为“缘于生而有老死”此自性或其因无有变异,又因为对于被了知为“非缘于生而有老死”者,其彼状态不存在,所以是决定性、确定状态,称为法决定性。或者说,对于果老死,生存在时则有生起,这是因在法上安住,故说法住性;不存在时则不生起,是法决定性。如此以果说明因,这就是以“那个界就是如此安住”等所说。对于这些老死等的缘性,所谓此缘性,他现等觉,以现前作证而通达,如实证知,因此现等觉,现前到达,从最初宣说而告知,开示,这是意思。使那开示达到究竟而宣说。以如所开示之量,以详说方式,以各种方式令知而安立。以各种方式建立而安立。以如所详说者,以随详说方式,开显、分别。对于已开显、已分别之义,以因与譬喻的显示令明显,而阐明。阐明者,令其成为现前,以总结方式说“你们看”。巴利
Aparo nayo – ṭhitāva sā dhātūti yāyaṃ jarāmaraṇassa idappaccayatā ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti, esā dhātu esa sabhāvo. Tathāgatānaṃ uppādato pubbe uddhañca appaṭivijjhiyamāno, majjhe ca paṭivijjhiyamāno na tathāgatehi uppādito, atha kho sambhavantassa jarāmaraṇassa sabbakālaṃ jātipaccayato sambhavoti ṭhitāva sā dhātu, kevalaṃ pana sayambhuñāṇena abhisambujjhanato ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo tathāgatena abhisambuddho’’ti pavedanato ca tathāgato ‘‘dhammasāmī’’ti vuccati, na apubbassa uppādanato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’ti. Sā eva ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti ettha vipallāsābhāvato evaṃ avabujjhamānassa etassa sabhāvassa, hetuno vā tatheva bhāvato ṭhitatāti dhammaṭṭhitatā, jāti vā jarāmaraṇassa uppādaṭṭhiti pavattaāyūhana-saṃyoga-palibodha-samudaya-hetupaccayaṭṭhitīti taduppādādibhāvenassā ṭhitatā ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā’’ti phalaṃ pati sāmatthiyato hetumeva vadati. Dhārīyati paccayehīti vā dhammo, tiṭṭhati tattha tadāyattavuttitāya phalanti ṭhiti, dhammassa ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti. Dhammoti vā kāraṇaṃ paccayabhāvena phalassa dhāraṇato, tassa ṭhiti sabhāvo, dhammato ca añño sabhāvo natthīti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayo. Tenāha ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 4). Dhammaṭṭhiti eva dhammaṭṭhitatā. Sā eva dhātu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti imassa sabhāvassa, hetuno vā aññathattābhāvato, ‘‘na jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti viññāyamānassa ca tabbhāvābhāvato niyāmatā vavatthitabhāvoti dhammaniyāmatā. Phalassa vā jarāmaraṇassa jātiyā sati sambhavo dhamme hetumhi ṭhitatāti dhammaṭṭhitatā, asati asambhavo dhammaniyāmatāti evaṃ phalena hetuṃ vibhāveti, taṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’tiādinā vuttaṃ. Imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayatāsaṅkhātaṃ idappaccayataṃ abhisambujjhati paccakkhakaraṇena abhimukhaṃ bujjhati yāthāvato paṭivijjhati, tato eva abhisameti abhimukhaṃ samāgacchati, ādito kathento ācikkhati, uddisatīti attho. Tameva uddesaṃ pariyosāpento deseti. Yathāuddiṭṭhamattaṃ niddisanavasena pakārehi ñāpento paññāpeti. Pakārehi eva patiṭṭhapento paṭṭhapeti. Yathāniddiṭṭhaṃ paṭiniddesavasena vivarati vibhajati. Vivaṭañhi vibhattañca atthaṃ hetūdāharaṇadassanehi pākaṭaṃ karonto uttānīkaroti. Uttānīkaronto tathā paccakkhabhūtaṃ katvā nigamanavasena passathāti cāha.
在“缘于生而有老死”等语句中,说的是生等法作为老死等法之缘的状态。所谓“以彼彼诸缘”,意思是:只要果生起时所需的那些缘完整无缺,果就从这些缘生起,而不是从缺少或多余的缘生起。因此说“以不增不减的缘”。就像眼识依眼、色、光明、作意等缘而生起一样。由此表明:在成就种种果时,那些缘的和合具有这样的性质,所以称为“如是性”。和合就是聚集、会合的意思。无有不能发生,就是没有不生起的情况。因为,即使有这样的缘和合,若果不生起,那它就会有不如是性。所谓“以其他法之缘”,是指以其他果法之缘。所谓“其他法不生起”,是指从那些缘中其他果法不生起。因为,眼、色、光明、作意等缘任何时候都不可能生起耳识。如果有,那么那种和合就会有变异,而这是不存在的,所以说“无变异”。所谓“以缘”,是指以缘的状态。所谓“以缘聚”,在这里也是同样的道理。缘于此者本身就是“缘于此性”,这里的“此”字是用来增补词语的,就像“天本身就是天神”一样;缘于此者之聚就是“缘于此性”,这里的“此”字是聚集之义,就像“人之聚就是人群”一样。针对这个意思,他说“然而这里的相应当从声论文典而知”。巴利
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādīsūti jātiādīnaṃ jarāmaraṇapaccayabhāvesu. Tehi tehi paccayehīti yāvatakehi paccayehi yaṃ phalaṃ uppajjamānārahaṃ, avikalehi teheva tassa uppatti, na ūnādhikehīti. Tenāha ‘‘anūnādhikehevā’’ti. Yathā taṃ cakkhurūpālokamanasikārehi cakkhuviññāṇassa sambhavoti. Tena taṃtaṃphalanipphādane tassā paccayasāmaggiyā tappakāratā tathatāti vuttāti dasseti. Sāmagginti samodhānaṃ, samavāyanti attho. Asambhavābhāvatoti anuppajjanassa abhāvato. Tathāvidhapaccayasāmaggiyañhi satipi phalassa anuppajjane tassāvitathatā siyā. Aññadhammapaccayehīti aññassa phaladhammassa paccayehi. Aññadhammānuppattitoti tato aññassa phaladhammassa anuppajjanato. Na hi kadāci cakkhurūpālokamanasikārehi sotaviññāṇassa sambhavo atthi. Yadi siyā, tassā sāmaggiyā aññathatā nāma siyā, na cetaṃ atthīti ‘‘anaññathatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paccayatoti paccayabhāvato. Paccayasamūhatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatāti tā-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ yathā ‘‘devoyeva devatā’’ti, idappaccayānaṃ samūho idappaccayatāti samūhattho tāsaddo yathā ‘‘janānaṃ samūho janatā’’ti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabba’’nti.
不是恒常、不是永恒,所以叫无常。老死并不是无常,因为它是诸行的变坏状态,不是完成品;尽管如此,这里还是以一种引申的方式说它为无常。对有为法等也是同样的道理。由诸缘聚集而造作,因为只有依靠和合的诸缘才能生起,就像依其自性那样,诸缘齐集、共同造作,由缘所作,所以叫有为。适合缘、依靠缘,不能没有缘;唯由和合的、聚集的缘而生起,所以叫缘所生。因此说依缘而生。以灭为性,就是以坏灭为性。以离去为性,就是以从自性中离去为性。以离染为性,就是以崩解为性。以灭尽为性,就是以刹那坏灭为性,是坏灭的实质。依前所说的方法,就是依前面关于老的说法。能生缘等,指业等诸缘。在作用行相的刹那中,这里所谓作用行相,是指缘现起时其果就生起,如此现起的状态;也就是缘现起的那个刹那。这段话的意思是:在某个刹那,缘正致力于令自己的果生起,就在这个刹那,如果色法等诸法能够被获得,而在那之前和之后都不可得,就可以断定它们是由那个缘而生起的。同样,对于生,也应当这样断定它在那一个刹那中可得。如果这样的话,生从某处生起就应当以直接的方式成立,那为什么说以一种方式呢?因为正在生起的诸法是以变坏的状态被获得的。如果生像完成品那样可以被获得,那么它从某处生起就应当以直接的方式成立,但它并不是这样被获得的,而是因为不是完成品,所以以变坏的状态被获得。因此说在这里无常等以一种方式是成立的。但在老死上不是这样,因为在能生缘的作用行相的刹那中,它不可获得。正因为如此,才说在这里无常……乃至无常名为生。巴利
Na niccaṃ sassatanti aniccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ na aniccaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vikārabhāvato anipphannattā, tathāpi ‘‘anicca’’nti pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Esa nayo saṅkhatādīsupi. Samāgantvā kataṃ sahiteheva paccayehi nibbattetabbato yathāsabhāvaṃ samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katanti saṅkhataṃ. Paccayārahaṃ paccayaṃ paṭicca na vinā tena sahitasametameva uppannanti paṭiccasamuppannaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccaye nissāya uppanna’’nti. Khayasabhāvanti bhijjanasabhāvaṃ. Vigacchanakasabhāvanti sakabhāvato apagacchanakasabhāvaṃ. Virajjanakasabhāvanti palujjanakasabhāvaṃ. Nirujjhanakasabhāvanti khaṇabhaṅgavasena pabhaṅgusabhāvaṃ. Vuttanayenāti jarāya vuttanayena. Janakappaccayānaṃ kammādīnaṃ. Kiccānubhāvakkhaṇeti ettha kiccānubhāvo nāma yathā pavattamāne paccaye tassa phalaṃ uppajjati, tathā pavatti, evaṃ santassa pavattanakkhaṇe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmiṃ khaṇe paccayo attano phaluppādanaṃ pati byāvaṭo nāma hoti, imasmiṃ khaṇe ye dhammā rūpādayo upalabbhanti tato pubbe, pacchā ca anupalabbhamānā, tesaṃ tato uppatti niddhārīyati, evaṃ jātiyāpi sā niddhāretabbā taṃkhaṇūpaladdhatoti. Yadi evaṃ nippariyāyatova jātiyā kutoci uppatti siddhi, atha kasmā ‘‘ekena pariyāyenā’’ti vuttanti? Jāyamānadhammānaṃ vikārabhāvena upaladdhabbattā. Yadi nipphannadhammā viya jāti upalabbheyya, nippariyāyatova tassā kutoci uppatti siyā, na cevaṃ upalabbhati, atha kho anipphannattā vikārabhāvena upalabbhati. Tasmā ‘‘ekena pariyāyenettha aniccātiādīni yujjantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na pana jarāmaraṇe, janakappaccayānaṃ kiccānubhāvakkhaṇe tassa alabbhanato. Teneva ‘‘ettha ca aniccanti…pe… aniccaṃ nāma jāta’’nti vuttaṃ.
“具有观”这里,“具有”这个词是在说明它不是主要成分,就像“有蝇、有蚊”这类说法里那样。因为观不是主要的,真正在遍知的是如实见的道慧。“前际”如果只说“前际”,也可能把现在的情况包含进去,所以就说“前际是过去”。关于“存在与不存在”:依靠常见,他怀疑“我在过去时存在吗?”——这是对过去自己的存在起疑。依靠无因生的见解,他怀疑“自从有我以来,在那之前我是不是不存在?”——这是对过去自己的不存在起疑。为什么?因为疑以两种行相为所缘。然而,由于已取疑的过去事,依止常见、无因生两种行相这一点已经显示过了。对于到处游走、流转、现起的疑,为什么说它是不能超越的因呢?不应考察,为了显示这一点,说“不应说是什么原因”。或者,应见疑的原因是作意不如理,那是盲愚凡夫的状态,以及不见圣者。关于“种姓、相貌、投生”:是刹帝利、婆罗门等种姓,在家、出家等相貌,天、人等投生。“依”是依止的意思。那时,以那个相续为中量,与它相应的就是有量;由于没有那个,或者由于更多,应知是“无量”。 “某些人”是指舍罗娑摩娑诸论师。他们说:他们这样思惟:“是怎么样的呢?”是由自在者、或梵天、或前所作、或无缘而生的。因为即使希望无缘而生,也只是执取因而已。“传”是前后转起。“世”是时间的代名词,而那个应见为依处格的宾格。关于“存在与不存在”:依靠常见,他怀疑“我将在未来时存在吗?”——这是对未来自己的存在起疑。依靠断见,他怀疑“在哪个自体上有断的怀疑,从那之后我将存在吗?”——这是对未来自己的不存在起疑。应如下文所说那样连接。巴利
Savipassanāyāti ettha saha-saddo appadhānabhāvadīpano ‘‘samakkhikaṃ, samakasa’’ntiādīsu viya. Appadhānabhūtā hi vipassanā, yathābhūtadassanamaggapaññā pajānāti. ‘‘Purimaṃ anta’’nti vuccamāne paccuppannabhāvassapi gahaṇaṃ siyāti ‘‘purimaṃ antaṃ atīta’’nti vuttaṃ. Vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañcāti sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’nti atīte attano vijjamānataṃ, adhiccasamuppattiāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yato pabhuti ahaṃ, tato pubbe na nu kho ahosi’’nti atīte attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kasmā? Vicikicchāya ākāradvayāvalambanato. Tassā pana atītavatthutāya gahitattā sassatādhiccasamuppattiākāranissitatā dassitā eva. Āsappanaparisappanapavattikaṃ katthacipi appaṭivattihetubhūtaṃ vicikicchaṃ kasmā uppādetīti na vicāretabbametanti dassento āha ‘‘kiṃkāraṇanti na vattabba’’nti . Kāraṇaṃ vā vicikicchāya ayonisomanasikāro, tassa andhabālaputhujjanabhāvo, ariyānaṃ adassāvitā cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jātiliṅgupapattiyoti khattiyabrāhmaṇādijātiṃ, gahaṭṭhapabbajitādiliṅgaṃ, devamanussādiupapattiñca. Nissāyāti upādāya. Tasmiṃ kāle yaṃ santānaṃ majjhimaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tena yutto pamāṇiko, tadabhāvato adhikabhāvato vā ‘‘appamāṇiko’’ti veditabbo. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā. Te hi ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho’’ti issarena vā brahmunā vā pubbakatena vā ahetuto vā nibbattoti cintetīti vadanti. Ahetuto nibbattikaṅkhāpi hi hetuparāmasanamevāti. Paramparanti pubbāparappavattiṃ. Addhānanti kālādhivacanaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañcāti sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhāna’’nti anāgate attano vijjamānataṃ, ucchedāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yasmiñca attabhāve ucchedanakaṅkhā, tato paraṃ nu kho bhavissāmī’’ti anāgate attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhatīti heṭṭhā vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ.
“现在之世”:因为这里指的是世的现在性,所以说“以结生为始”等等。由于不断生起“这是怎么回事?那是怎么回事?”这样的念头,所以称为疑;具有这种疑的人,就是有疑者。因此说“有疑者”。这里有什么可思量的呢?意思是:前面已经说过,这样的人就像疯子一样的愚痴凡夫。“剃发者”:因为剃了头发,在清醒时无法强行度化;人们依照族姓习俗剃去头发,就像某些在家苦行者那样。也有说是因为畏惧国王的缘故。“成为清凉”:这是为了说明达到清凉状态的缘由。也有读作“成为白色”的,意思是因长久停留在水中而变成白色。巴利
Paccuppannaṃ addhānanti addhāpaccuppannassa idhādhippetattā ‘‘paṭisandhimādiṃ katvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ kathaṃ, idaṃ katha’’nti pavattanato kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā, sā assa atthīti kathaṃkathī. Tenāha ‘‘vicikicchī’’ti. Kā ettha cintā? Ummattako viya bālaputhujjanoti paṭikacceva vuttanti adhippāyo. Taṃ mahāmātāya puttaṃ. Muṇḍesunti muṇḍena anicchantaṃ jāgaraṇakāle na sakkāti suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ kuladhammavasena yathā ekacce kulatāpasā. Rājabhayenāti ca vadanti. Sītibhūtanti idaṃ madhurakabhāvappattiyā kāraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Setabhūta’’ntipi pāṭho, udake ciraṭṭhānena setabhāvaṃ pattanti attho.
他怀疑自己是不是刹帝利种姓,就像迦尔纳自认为是车夫之子一样;所谓“自认为是车夫之子”,就是自认为是太阳天子的儿子。当他的出身被揭示出来时,他仍然执取“我”,因此针对他执取自己出身这一点,说“也可能有这样的疑惑”。而“人们也像国王一样”,意思是也有某些人像国王一样。所说的方法就是前面讲过的那样,即“依据形貌、姿态”等等。“在此处”指的是“我究竟是怎样”这一句。内在的“命我”,说的是他人所虚构的内在自我。“十六分等”中的“等”字,包含了身体大小、拇指量、大麦量、极微量等等。有情施设以命我为对象,这只是邪见者的想象;但从胜义上说,它是以有身为对象,所以说“有身的来处、去处和住处”——意思是从哪里来、将去哪里,而那里就是它的住处。这里说的是入流者,因为他已经由见而断除了疑;其余三种人也没有被排除在外。因为“而此……中略……善见”这句话,显示了他已经无余地现观了真理。巴利
Attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī, sūtaputtasaññīti sūriyadevaputtassa puttasaññī. Jātiyā vibhāviyamānāya ‘‘aha’’nti tassa attano parāmasanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘evampi siyā kaṅkhā’’ti. Manussāpi ca rājāno viyāti manussāpi ca keci ekacce rājāno viyāti adhippāyo. Vuttanayameva ‘‘saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāyā’’tiādinā. Etthāti ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti pade. Abbhantare jīvoti paraparikappitaṃ antarattānaṃ vadati. Soḷasaṃsādīnanti ādi-saddena sarīraparimāṇaaṅguṭṭha-yavaparamāṇuparimāṇatādike saṅgaṇhāti. Sattapaññatti jīvavisayāti diṭṭhigatikānaṃ matimattaṃ, paramatthato pana sā attabhāvavisayāvāti āha ‘‘attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhāna’’nti. Yatāyaṃ āgato, yattha ca gamissati, taṃ ṭhānanti attho. Sotāpanno adhippeto vicikicchāpahānassa diṭṭhattā. Itarepi tayoti sakadāgāmīādayo avāritā eva. ‘‘Ayañca…pe… sudiṭṭhā’’ti nippadesato saccasaṃpaṭivedhassa jotitattā.
《十力经》的注释巴利
1. Dasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
21 第一经其实只是第二经的简略版本,因为第二经是把第一经里简略说过的义理,用详细展开的方式讲出来的。而且,世尊先是以简略的方式讲了第一经,之后又在那个基础上详细讲了第二经。或者说,最初是顺着喜欢简略的人的根性意乐,用简略的方式讲;后来则是随自己的喜好,用详细展开的方式讲。因为诸佛世尊都像狮子一样行事,他们随自己的喜好说法时,就是在展示自己的力量来说。所以,这里要依第二经来做义理注释;第二经注释好了,第一经也就等于注释好了,这就是这里的用意。巴利
21.Paṭhamaṃdutiyasseva saṅkhepo paṭhamasutte saṅkhepavuttassa atthassa vitthāravasena dutiyasuttassa desitattā, tañca pana bhagavā paṭhamasuttaṃ saṅkhepato desesi, dutiyaṃ tato vitthārato. Paṭhamaṃ vā saṃkhittarucīnaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena saṅkhepato desesi, dutiyaṃ pana attano ruciyā tato vitthārato. Sīhasamānavuttikā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te attano ruciyā kathentā attano thāmaṃ dassentāva kathenti, tasmā dutiyasuttavasena cettha atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma, tasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇite paṭhamaṃ saṃvaṇṇitameva hotīti adhippāyo.
第二部《十力经》的注释巴利
2. Dutiyadasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
22 这里说的“在那里”,是指第二部经。“以十力”,是指以十种不共的智力;因为它们是如来的力,所以称为如来力。虽然这些力在某些声闻弟子身上也会生起,但像佛陀的处非处智等那样的力,绝不会在其他人身上生起。“随象种”,是指随顺接下来要说的象种。“属象种”这个说法,是为了配合“种”这个词而用中性来表达。其余地方也照此理解。“自然的象种”,是指那些在山地、水边、森林等不同地方觅食的、名为属象种的所有大象,论力量都只是普通的象种。“十个人”,是指十个中等体力的人。“一位如来的身力”,是把前面这些合起来,与一位如来的身力相联系。说“一位”,也是顺着下文论述的脉络,依照教说的流传而说的。“那罗延那聚合之力”:这里“那罗”指光线,因为许多各种各样的光从它产生,所以叫“那罗延那”,也就是金刚;因此“那罗延那聚合之力”就是金刚聚合之力的意思。“如来的身力”,是指如来平常的身体力量。这不算在如来十力之内,因为它本身不具备力的性质,正因如此,它被看作外在的、低劣的。为了说明这两者的原因,才说了“因为依此”等话。“其他”,是指与身力不同的、另外的。在十种处所、十种应知之事上,因为能如实通达,自己不动摇,也使具备这种能力的应调伏之人变得强而有力,所以说“以不动摇之义和以支持之义”。巴利
22.Tatthāti dutiyasutte. Dasahi balehīti dasahi anaññasādhāraṇehi ñāṇabalehi, tāni tathāgatasseva balānīti tathāgatabalānīti vuccanti. Kāmañca tāni ekaccānaṃ sāvakānampi uppajjanti, yādisāni pana buddhānaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇādīni uppajjanti, na tādisāni tadaññesaṃ kadācipi uppajjantīti. Hatthikulānusārenāti vakkhamānahatthikulānusārena. Kāḷāvakanti kulasaddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Esa nayo sesesupi. Pakatihatthikulanti giricaranadicaravanacarādippabhedā gocariyakāḷāvakanāmā sabbāpi balena pākatikā hatthijāti. Dasannaṃ purisānanti thāmamajjhimānaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ. Ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalanti ānetvā sambandho. Ekassāti ca tathā heṭṭhākathāyaṃ āgatattā desanāsotena vuttaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti ettha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā ito uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Tathāgatassa kāyabalanti tathāgatassa pākatikakāyabalaṃ. Saṅgahaṃ na gacchati attano balābhāvato, tato evassa bāhirakatā lāmakatā ca. Tadubhayaṃ panassa kāraṇena dassetuṃ ‘‘etañhi nissāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññanti kāyabalato aññaṃ tato visuṃyeva. Dasasu ṭhānesu dasasu ñātabbaṭṭhānesu. Yāthāvapaṭivedhato sayañca akampayaṃ, puggalañca taṃsamaṅgiṃ neyyesu adhibalaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘akampanaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena cā’’ti.
“处与非处”就是指因与非因。因为果依靠因而成立,是依于因才生起并持续运作的,所以因被称为“处”;反过来,非因就应当理解为“非处”。世尊以那种智慧如实了知这两类情况:哪些法对哪些法的生起是因、是缘,那就是“处”;哪些法对哪些法的生起不是因、不是缘,那就是“非处”。针对这一点,所以说“处……智是一”。“业秉持”是指造作并受持了善业和不善业,或者业本身就是业秉持。“处而因”是从缘和因两方面来说的。其中,趣、依、时、功用是果的“处”,业是“因”。“一切趣行之道智”是指了知通往一切趣以及不通往一切趣的修行之道。比如许多人一起杀害一个众生时,能了知“这个人的思将导向地狱,这个人的思将导向畜生道”——就像这样,对于同一件事中由善或不善的思所构成的各种行道,能毫无颠倒地了知其真实本性。“多界种种界世间智”是指以眼界等或欲界等种种界,以及这些界各不相同、种种差别,来了知蕴、处、界的世间。“他众生”是指其他众生。“种种胜解智”是指了知由低劣等不同胜解而形成的种种胜解状态。“正是他们”是指正是对其他众生。“根上下智”是指了知信等诸根的殊胜与不殊胜,也就是它们的增长与衰退。“禅、解脱、定、等至”是指初禅等四种禅,以及“有色者见诸色”等八种解脱,有寻有伺等三种定,还有初禅等至等九种次第等至。“杂染、清净、出起智”是指对退分、胜分以及“清净也是出起,从各种定中出起也是出起”这样所说的熟练禅那,还有有分和果等至的了知。因为较下层的熟练禅那会成为较上层禅那的所依,所以清净也被称为“出起”。而有分则是从一切禅那中出起。果等至则是针对从灭尽定中出起,才说“从各种定中出起”。“宿住智”是指以宿住随念智了知过去已灭的诸蕴。“死生智”是指如实了知众生的死亡与投生。这里只是简略说明,详细内容应当依照《清净道论》中所说的方式来了知。“漏尽智”就是漏尽智,意思是道智。至于这些内容在何处详细出现并加以解释,为了显示它们,论师说了“然而在阿毗达摩中”等话。巴利
Ṭhānañcaṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Vipariyāyena aṭṭhānanti akāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ bhagavā yena ñāṇena ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ, ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhānanti pajānāti. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ṭhānañca…pe… jānanaṃ eka’’nti. Kammasamādānānanti kammaṃ samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammaññeva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ca hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu. Sabbatthagāminīpaṭipadājānananti sabbagatigāminiyā agatigāminiyā ca paṭipadāya maggassa jānanaṃ, bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ hanantesu ‘‘imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa tiracchānayonigāminī’’ti iminā nayena ekavatthusmimpi kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipattīnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvajānanaṃ . Anekadhātunānādhātulokajānananti cakkhudhātuādīhi kāmadhātuādīhi vā bahudhātuno, tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ viparītatāya nānappakāradhātuno khandhāyatanadhātulokassa jānanaṃ. Parasattānanti paresaṃ sattānaṃ. Nānādhimuttikatājānananti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvassa jānanaṃ. Tesaṃyevāti parasattānaṃyeva. Indriyaparopariyattajānananti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvassa aparabhāvassa vuddhiyā ceva hāniyā ca jānanaṃ. Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānajānananti hānabhāgiyassa, visesabhāgiyassa ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttapaguṇajjhānassa ceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattīnañca jānanaṃ. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā vodānampi ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānameva sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Pubbenivāsajānananti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena nivuṭṭhakkhandhānaṃ jānanaṃ. Cutūpapātajānananti sattānaṃ cutiyā upapattiyā ca yāthāvato jānanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Āsavakkhayajānanaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇanti attho. Yattha panetāni vitthārato āgatāni saṃvaṇṇitāni, tāni dassento ‘‘abhidhamme panā’’tiādimāha.
因为愚痴和怖畏而寻求皈依处,这种带有恐惧的状态就是“有畏”;而愚痴和怖畏本身就是“畏”。已经远离了这种畏的人,就是“离畏”,也就是无所畏惧;这种状态就是“无畏”。不过,这种无畏是依靠智慧成就、断除成就、教说殊胜成就和安稳这四种观察智而生起的。因此说“于四处”等等。“于四处”,就是指在他人所设想的事情上,或者指在他人所设想的、仅仅作为指责理由的那些事情上。对于自称“我是正自觉者”的你来说。这些法,如“这是第五圣谛”、“这是第六取蕴”、“这是第十三处”之类,这些法是未被正觉、未通达的。巴利
Byāmohabhayavasena saraṇapariyesanaṃ sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ. Vigato sārado etassāti visārado, tassa bhāvo vesārajjaṃ. Taṃ pana ñāṇasampadaṃ pahānasampadaṃ desanāvisesasampadaṃ khemaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ catubbidhaṃ paccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catūsu ṭhānesū’’tiādi. Catūsūti paraparikappitesu vatthūsu. Paraparikappitesu vā vatthumattesu codanākāraṇesu. Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānatoti ‘‘ahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti evaṃ paṭijānantena tayā. Ime dhammāti ‘‘idaṃ pañcamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ chaṭṭho upādānakkhandho, idaṃ terasamaṃ āyatana’’nti veditabbā ime dhammā. Anabhisambuddhā appaṭividdhattāti.
这里说的“于此”,是指在那个被称为“未完全觉悟之法”的指责依据上。“任何人”,是指除了沙门等之外的其他任何人。“如法地”,就是“有理由地”。这里的“法”这个词,像“法辨析”等用法里那样,是“因”的另一种说法。而“因”应当理解为能令事物生起的成因,不是造作者,也不是令到达者。“相”就是原因,在这里指的就是那个指责依据本身。从正自觉者的身份来看,我完全看不到有这样的依据。“达到安稳者”,是指对于那看似不安稳的指责,已达到无损害,达到不动摇的状态。“达到无畏者”,是指已获得无畏之状态;其余诸项也是同样的道理。但这里有一个差别——“这些漏”,是指欲漏等之中,所称的漏并未完全灭尽——以“漏尽”的说法,此处是指一切烦恼的断除。因为不存在那样的烦恼:在一切漏已尽时,它仍不断除。“障碍”,是指能造成障碍者,指对证得天界与解脱造成障碍。凡是能从杂染中出离的法,便被称为“出离法”。当法出离时,具足该法的人就被称为出离者;为了驳斥那种认为他不出离的说法,所以说“他不出离”。那么,教法为何被称为“出离”呢?因为其意义在于出离,所以以不区分的方式说它“出离”。或者,由于所说“法”是指圣法,因此没有任何矛盾。巴利
Tatrāti tasmiṃ anabhisambuddhadhammasaṅkhāte codanāvatthusmiṃ. Kocīti samaṇādīhi añño vā yo koci. Saha dhammenāti saha hetunā. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu viya hetupariyāyo idha dhamma-saddo. Hetūti ca uppattisādhanahetu veditabbo, na kārako sampāpako vā. Nimittanti kāraṇaṃ, taṃ panettha codanāvatthumeva. Na samanupassāmi sammāsambuddhabhāvato. Khemappattoti akhemappattarūpāya codanāya anupaddavaṃ patto niccalabhāvappatto. Vesārajjappattoti visāradabhāvappatto. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ime āsavāti kāmāsavādīsu ime nāma āsavā na parikkhīṇāti āsavakkhayavacanenettha sabbakilesappahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Na hi so kileso atthi, yo sabbaso āsavesu khīṇesu nappahīyeyya. Antarāyikāti antarāyakarā, saggavimokkhādhigamassa antarāyakarāti attho. Dhammo hi yo saṃkilesato niyyāti, so ‘‘niyyāniko’’ti vutto. Dhamme niyyante taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo niyyānikoti voharito hotīti tassa paṭikkhipanto ‘‘so na niyyātī’’ti āha. Kathaṃ pana desanādhammo niyyātīti vuccati? Niyyānatthasamādhānato, so abhedopacārena ‘‘niyyātī’’ti vutto. Atha vā ‘‘dhammo desito’’ti ariyadhammassa adhippetattā na koci virodho.
“属于牛王”就是“牛王的”。因为无所畏惧,所以像牛王一样,因此称为“牛王”,也就是最殊胜的境地——一切知。过去诸佛因为安住在牛王的境地,所以称为“牛王”。他们因为宣说一切知而面朝大众走去,或者四众前来亲近,所以称为“牛王”。因为四众确实是面朝佛陀而站,不会背对着站。“此”也是指“牛”这个词。“他的”是指牛王的。那些以力量生起和安住为特征的人,依此而安立在牛王的境地;更殊胜的,则依此而成为牛王的境地,应当这样理解。世间中任何用来比喻佛德的譬喻,全都是低劣的。即使没有站立,他也自称站立,这就是认可。巴利
Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ, asantasanaṭṭhena āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ, seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaññutaṃ. Āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyitāya āsabhā nāma pubbabuddhā. Sabbaññutapaṭijānanavasena abhimukhaṃ gacchanti, catasso vā parisā upasaṅkamantīti āsabhā. Catassopi hi parisā buddhābhimukhā evaṃ tiṭṭhanti, na tiṭṭhanti parammukhā. Idampīti ‘‘usabho’’ti idampi padaṃ. Tassāti nisabhassa. Yesaṃ baluppādāvaṭṭhānānaṃ vasena usabhassa āsabhaṇṭhānaṃ icchitaṃ, tato sātisayānaṃ eva tesaṃ vasena āsabhaṇṭhānaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci loke upamaṃ nāma buddhaguṇānaṃ nidassanabhāvena vuccati, sabbaṃ taṃ nihīnameva. Tiṭṭhamāno cāti atiṭṭhantopi tiṭṭhamāno eva paṭijānāti nāma. Upagacchatīti anujānāti.
“这八种”这句,是为了显示无畏智的威力。就像一位善巧的说法者走进聪慧的大众中,凭能令智者心生欢喜的言谈,显出他作为说法师的善巧;同样,面对这八种众,导师无畏智的威力就变得明显。因此说“于众中”。“刹帝利众”,就是刹帝利们聚集的团体。其余各处也是同样的道理。“魔众”,就是魔天众生聚集的团体。与魔同类、属于魔的众,就是魔众。这所有的众,都是依其威势逼人的表现而说的。人只要听到“国王坐在这里”,连平常的话都说不出来,腋下冒汗——刹帝利众就是这样威势逼人;婆罗门精通三吠陀,居士擅长各种技艺和文字之学,沙门擅长自宗他宗的义理——在他们中间说法,实在是极其艰难。诸天的威势逼人就更不用说了。只要一说“非人”,人的全身就会颤抖,看见他们的形貌、听到他们的声音,众生甚至会昏过去。非人众就是这样威势逼人。因此,这些众都是依其威势逼人的表现而说的。那么,这里为什么不取焰摩天等众呢?因为他们极度贪著欲乐,缺乏如理作意。焰摩天等享受极其殊胜的欲乐,深深贪著其中,自然不会生起听法的心;只有被大菩萨和诸佛的威神力牵引时,才偶尔在大集会中做亲近等事。正因如此,以他们为因缘的天宫说法也没有很多。“最胜吼”,是指以某种不可阻挡的方式发出的最上等的吼声。“无畏吼”,是指因具备无畏而无论从何处都无所畏惧的吼声。“狮子吼经”,是指《蕴品》中所出的《狮子吼经》。“忍”,是堪忍的意思。“杀”,是摧毁、消灭的意思。“如同……”等句,是对简略所说的“发出如同狮子吼一样的吼声”这一含义加以说明。巴利
Aṭṭhakho imāti idaṃ vesārajjañāṇassa baladassanaṃ. Yathā hi byattaṃ parisaṃ ajjhogāhetvā viññūnaṃ cittaṃ ārādhanasamatthāya kathāya dhammakathikassa chekabhāvo paññāyati, evaṃ imā aṭṭha parisā patvā satthu vesārajjañāṇassa balaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘parisāsū’’ti. Khattiyaparisāti khattiyānaṃ sannipatitānaṃ samūho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Māraparisāti mārakāyikānaṃ sannipatitānaṃ samūho. Mārasadisānaṃ mārānaṃ parisāti māraparisā. Sabbā cetā parisā uggaṭṭhānadassanavasena gahitā. Manussā hi ‘‘ettha rājā nisinno’’ti vutte pakativacanampi vattuṃ na sakkonti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, evaṃ uggā khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇā tīsu vedesu kusalā honti, gahapatayo nānāvohāresu ca akkharacintāya ca kusalā, samaṇā sakavādaparavādesu kusalā, tesaṃ majjhe dhammakathākathanaṃ nāma ativiya bhāriyaṃ. Devānaṃ uggabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Amanussoti hi vuttamatte manussānaṃ sakalasarīraṃ kampati, tesaṃ rūpaṃ disvāpi saddaṃ sutvāpi sattā visaññitāpi honti. Evaṃ amanussaparisā uggā. Iti cetā parisā uggaṭṭhānadassanavasena vuttā. Kasmā panettha yāmādiparisā na gahitāti? Bhusaṃ kāmābhigiddhatāya yonisomanasikāravirahato. Yāmādayo hi uḷāruḷāre kāme paṭisevantā tatthābhigiddhatāya dhammassavanāya sabhāvena cittampi na uppādenti, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana buddhānañca ānubhāvena ākaḍḍhiyamānā kadāci nesaṃ payirupāsanādīni karonti tādise mahāsamaye. Teneva hi vimānavatthudesanāpi taṃnimittā bahulā nāhosi. Seṭṭhanādanti kenaci appaṭihatabhāvena uttamanādaṃ. Abhītanādanti vesārajjayogato kutoci nibbhayanādaṃ. Sīhanādasuttenāti khandhiyavagge āgatena sīhanādasuttena. Sahanatoti khamanato. Hananatoti vidhamanato viddhaṃsanato. Yathā vātiādi ‘‘sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttassa atthassa viññāpanaṃ.
所谓“此”,就是指“梵轮”这个词。“由慧所成”,是由长时间修习的波罗蜜慧和观慧所生起的。“由悲所成”,是由“这个世间确实陷入了苦难”等这样运作的大悲所生起的。正如从出家那时起,大菩萨就没有任何妨碍证得圣道的修行;从兜率天住生、从获得决定授记以来也是如此——这第二和第三种说法也应这样理解。“在果刹那”,是指在最高的果刹那。因为通达已经圆满,阿罗汉道智就像金刚一样,是殊胜的通达,所以说“在果刹那生起”。由它获得的教学智,其作用只是通过让他人觉悟来完成,所以说“在憍陈如证得入流时……在果刹那转起”。从此以后直到般涅槃,教学智持续转起;就像已转起的转轮圣王的轮宝安住一样,应当知道这就是已转法轮的安住。“两者”,通过“也”这个字,把世间教学智和其他不共功德的相同之处总摄在一起。“从胸生”,因为是从如来胸中所生,所以叫亲生智。巴利
Etanti ‘‘brahmacakka’’nti etaṃ padaṃ. Paññāpabhāvitanti cirakālaparibhāvitāya pāramitāpaññāya vipassanāpaññāya ca uppāditaṃ. Karuṇāpabhāvitanti ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinayappavattāya mahākaruṇāya uppāditaṃ. Yathā abhinikkhamanato pabhuti mahābodhisattānaṃ ariyamaggādhigamanavirodhinī paṭipatti natthi, evaṃ tusitabhavanato niyatabhāvāpattito ca paṭṭhāyāti dutiyatatiyanayā ca gahitā. Phalakkhaṇeti aggaphalakkhaṇe. Paṭivedhaniṭṭhattā arahattamaggañāṇaṃ vajirūpamatāyeva sātisayo paṭivedhoti ‘‘phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena paṭiladdhassapi desanāñāṇassa kiccanipphatti parassa bujjhanamattena hotīti ‘‘aññāsikoṇḍaññassa sotāpatti…pe… phalakkhaṇe pavattanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ pana yāva parinibbānā desanāñāṇappavatti, tasseva pavattitassa dhammacakkassa ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ pavattitacakkassa cakkavattino cakkaratanassa ṭhānaṃ viya. Ubhayampīti pi-saddena lokiyadesanāñāṇassa itarena anaññasādhāraṇatāvasena samānataṃ sampiṇḍeti. Urasi jātatāya uraso sambhūtanti orasaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
这里“如是色”中的“如是”一词,是为了毫无遗漏地显示色的自相,所以通过“这是色”这句话,从共相和自相两方面来显示。说“到此为色”,是用它来说明毫无遗漏——“在此之上没有别的色”,也就是没有其他任何相状。现在为了详细显示这个含义,就说“以恼坏为自性……”等等。其中,“恼坏”是指冷等相违的缘聚合时,产生不同的状态。“等”字则包含内、外等分类。以相……中略……而观,就是依硬等相、依持等味、依领受等现起、依四大种等所缘而观。这样把握之后,是指从共相和相等方面这样把握。“以无明集”:由无明的生起,即由无明的存在,这是意思。因为存在是与灭相违的,所以灭不存在时,存在就存在;因此,在前世已成的无明存在时,此世色的集起、色的生起,就是意思。“以爱集、以业集”在这里也是同样的道理。又,因为无明等三者是过去时的,所以应知与它们共同作助缘的取也被包含在内了。在生起的诸缘中,因为段食的力量强,所以只取了它;然而,由“以食集”所取的,仅以生起缘的程度,时节、心等也被包含在内了,因此应见为:从十二种生起来看色的缘,也是应当有的。以“生起相”等,从时间方面说明了生起之见。其中,依大种方面在道上见生起而住立的人,在这里依相续方面次第地依刹那而见。“以无明灭故色灭”:以最上道智使无明不再生起而灭,因此未来的不再生起而灭,因为缘不存在故不存在。“以缘灭”:以称为无明的缘的灭尽。“以爱灭”在这里也是同样的道理。“以食灭”:因为生起缘的段食不存在。“色灭”:由它所生的色不存在。其余应依前面所说的方法了知。“以变异相”:从有时期方面显示两种因。因此,依所缘方面先见而住立的人,在这里依相续方面见后,次第地依刹那而见。巴利
Iti rūpanti ettha iti-saddo anavasesato rūpassa sarūpanidassanatthoti tassa ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti etena sādhāraṇato ca sarūpanidassanamāha. Ettakaṃ rūpanti etena anavasesato ‘‘ito uddhaṃ rūpaṃ natthī’’ti nimittassa aññassa abhāvaṃ. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘ruppanasabhāvañcevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ruppanaṃ sītādivirodhipaccayasamavāye visadisuppatti. Ādi-saddena ajjhattikabāhirādibhedaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Lakkhaṇa…pe… vasenāti kakkhaḷattādilakkhaṇavasena sandhāraṇādirasavasena sampaṭicchanādipaccupaṭṭhānavasena bhūtattayādipadaṭṭhānavasena ca. Evaṃ pariggahitassāti evaṃ sādhāraṇato ca lakkhaṇādito ca pariggahitassa. Avijjāsamudayāti avijjāya uppādā, atthibhāvāti attho. Nirodhavirodhī hi atthibhāvo hoti, tasmā nirodhe asati atthibhāvo hoti, tasmā purimabhave siddhāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave rūpassa samudayo rūpassa uppādo hotīti attho. Taṇhāsamudayā kammasamudayāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Avijjādīhi ca tīhi atītakālikattā tesaṃ sahakārīkāraṇabhūtaṃ upādānampi gahitamevāti veditabbaṃ. Pavattipaccayesu kabaḷīkāraāhārassa balavatāya, so eva gahito, ‘‘āhārasamudayā’’ti pana gahitena pavattipaccayatāmattena utucittānipi gahitāneva hontīti dvādasasamuṭṭhānikaṃ rūpassa paccayato dassanampi bhavitabbamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbattilakkhaṇantiādinā kālavasena udayadassanamāha. Tattha bhūtavasena magge udayaṃ passitvā ṭhito idha santativasena anukkamena khaṇavasena passati. Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhoti aggamaggañāṇena avijjāya anuppādanirodhato anāgatassa anuppādanirodho hoti paccayābhāve abhāvato. Paccayanirodhenāti avijjāsaṅkhātassa paccayassa nirodhabhāvena. Taṇhānirodhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Āhāranirodhāti pavattipaccayassa kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāvā. Rūpanirodhāti taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpassa abhāvo hoti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇanti bhavakālavasena hetudvayadassanaṃ. Tasmā taṃ padaṭṭhānavasena pageva passitvā ṭhito idha santativasena disvā anukkamena khaṇavasena passati.
“如是受”等句,也应按照前面所说的方式理解其含义。所谓“乐等差别”,就是乐、苦、不苦不乐等的区分。所谓“色想等差别”,就是色想、声想、香想、味想、触想、法想等的区分。所谓“触等差别”,就是触、思、作意等的区分。所谓“依相……等”,就是依领纳可爱之相等相,依受用可爱行相之味等味,依身体乐受等现起,依可爱所缘等足处。由于经中说“触已而受,触已而想,触已而思”,所以对受等三蕴,应当说“以触为集”。由于经中说“识缘名色”,所以对识蕴,应当说“以名色为集”。所谓“依它们”,就是像“无明灭则受灭”等那样,依无明等而配合说明。巴利
Iti vedanātiādīsupi vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Sukhādibhedanti sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhādivibhāgaṃ. Rūpasaññādibhedanti rūpasaññā, sadda… gandha… rasa… phoṭṭhabba … dhammasaññādivibhāgaṃ. Phassādibhedanti phassacetanāmanasikārādivibhāgaṃ. Lakkhaṇa…pe… vasenāti iṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇādilakkhaṇavasena iṭṭhākārasambhogarasādirasavasena kāyikaassādādipaccupaṭṭhānavasena iṭṭhārammaṇādipadaṭṭhānavasena. ‘‘Phuṭṭho vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vacanato tīsu vedanādīsu khandhesu phassasamudayāti vattabbaṃ. Viññāṇappaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti vacanato viññāṇakkhandhe nāmarūpasamudayāti vattabbaṃ. Tesaṃyeva vasenāti ‘‘avijjānirodho vedanānirodho’’tiādinā tesaṃyeva avijjādīnaṃ vasena yojetabbaṃ.
通过“取蕴的集与灭”这一角度,已经开示了外道所不能触及的、有范围的狮子吼。现在,要从顺向和逆向两个方面,以略说和广说的方式,开示无范围的、不共他者的缘起行相领域,所以经文说:“这也是另一种狮子吼。”这里的“此”,是指“此有故”等略说的缘起经文。在这里,通过“此有故彼有,此灭故彼灭”——也就是无明等存在则行等存在,无明等灭则行等灭——在前面的缘相中显示了决定规律:“此有才是有,不是无此而有;此生才是生,不是不从此生;此灭才是灭,不是不从此灭。”因此应当知道,这里所说的缘起之相已经含摄了决定规律。“灭”是指无明等的离贪、离去,未来不再生起、不再现行。正如经文所说:“无明无余离贪灭故……”等等。与灭相反的是生起,因此以生起和灭的区分来说“此灭故彼灭”。他借此表明:“如果没有灭,就没有所谓的生起,而这里的生起就是‘有’。”“此有故彼有”正是这个相。换一种说法,“此生故彼生”,是用后者来限定前者。因此,说“此有故”并不是只指正在发生的,而应知道它的自性不是道所能灭的。又因为世尊在解释“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”这双重举出的相时,以“无明无余离贪灭故,行灭”等只说了灭,所以“无”也就是灭,由此显示与“无”相违的“有”就是不灭。以这个不灭的“有”来限定生起。因此,这里所意谓的生起并不只是“有”而已,而是以“不灭”为名的“有”——这个意思已经被阐明。这样,应当知道这二相之语,以相互限定和被限定的关系而具有意义。那么,这个所谓的“不灭”是什么呢?就是被称为“有”和“生起”的?这里简要地说,就是未断除的状态,以及以未生果的状态而具备生果的能力。详细解释则应按照《胜义显示·优陀那注》中所说的方式了知。巴利
Upādānakkhandhānaṃ samudayatthaṅgamavasena titthiyānaṃ avisayopi sappadeso sīhanādo dassito. Idāni nippadeso anulomapaṭilomavasena saṅkhepato vitthārato paccayākāravisayo anaññasādhāraṇo dassīyatīti āha, ‘‘ayampi aparo sīhanādo’’ti. Tassāti ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttapaṭiccasamuppādapāḷiyā. Ettha ca ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujhtī’’ti avijjādīnaṃ bhāve saṅkhārādīnaṃ bhāvassa, avijjādīnaṃ nirodhe saṅkhārādīnaṃ nirodhassa kathanena purimasmiṃ paccayalakkhaṇe niyamo dassito ‘‘imasmiṃ sati eva, nāsati, imassa uppādā eva, nānuppādā, nirodhā eva, nānirodhā’’ti. Tenedaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ antogadhaniyamaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādassa vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirodhoti ca avijjādīnaṃ virāgā vigamena āyatiṃ anuppādo appavatti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā’’tiādi. Nirodhavirodhī ca uppādo, yena so uppādanirodhavibhāgena vutto ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘asati nirodhe uppādo nāma, so cettha atthibhāvoti vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti idameva hi lakkhaṇaṃ. Pariyāyantarena ‘‘imassa uppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vadantena parena purimaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Tasmā na vattamānaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho maggena anirujjhanasabhāvañcāti viññāyati. Yasmā ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti dvidhāpi uddiṭṭhassa lakkhaṇassa niddesaṃ vadantena bhagavatā ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nirodhova vutto, tasmā natthibhāvopi nirodho evāti natthibhāvaviruddho atthibhāvo anirodhoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tena anirodhasaṅkhātena atthibhāvena uppādaṃ viseseti. Tato idha na kevalaṃ atthibhāvamattaṃ uppādoti attho adhippeto, atha kho anirodhasaṅkhāto atthibhāvo cāti ayamattho vibhāvito hoti. Evametaṃ lakkhaṇadvayavacanaṃ aññamaññaṃ visesanavisesitabbabhāvena sātthakanti veditabbaṃ. Ko panāyaṃ anirodho nāma, yo ‘‘atthibhāvo, uppādo’’ti ca vuttoti? Appahīnabhāvo ca anibbattitaphalabhāvena phaluppādanārahatā cāti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paramatthadīpaniyaṃ udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1). Vuttanayena veditabbo.
“以分别五蕴等”:就是以分别五取蕴和十二支缘起的方式。因为在这部《十力经》里,所开示的法相只是五蕴缘起这个程度,所以说“五蕴缘起法”。由于没有像阿阇梨握拳那样隐藏,所以从义理和文句两方面都没有被遮盖、没有翻转朝下,因此说“不覆”。开显就是明了,所以说“开显而安立”。照亮就是用智光照射、点燃,所以说“照亮、照明”。“拖出”就是拉出的意思。“驱散”就像驱散秕糠一样。在每一处破裂损坏的地方。缝合打结:就是穿线缝合,在无法缝合的地方就用线打结。法没有破布,因为那破布没有破裂损坏,所以显示“这里没有”等语。穿着的下衣和上衣就是摄取。自己生起辩才,增长自己的宗义。“沙门尘垢”:因为持沙门形相而像沙门,所以是沙门的尘垢。由于自己的色身流转,说它是箱、是腹、是恶、是骗子,所以是“箱鸦”,即破戒者。那个箱鸦。“驱逐”:就是赶出。“尘垢”:就是沙门的污垢。“除去”:就是拖走,意思是拿走。“驱散”:像驱散秕糠一样。因为无稻米精华、像谷物的只有糠秕程度的东西被称为秕糠,同样,无戒等精华、像沙门的东西就像秕糠一样,所以是秕糠,即破戒者。那些秕糠。“运走”:就是拿走。“具念”:就是以强盛之念而具念。巴利
Pañcakkhandhavibhajanādivasenāti pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ dvādasapadikassa paccayākārassa vibhajanavasena. Imasmiñhi dasabalasutte dhammassa desitākāro pañcakkhandhapaccayākāramatto. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakkhandhapaccayākāradhammo’’ti. Ācariyamuṭṭhiyā akaraṇena vibhūto, so pana atthato ca saddato ca pihito heṭṭhāmukhajāto vā na hotīti āha ‘‘anikujjito’’ti. Vivaṭoti vibhāvito. Tenāha ‘‘vivaritvā ṭhapito’’ti . Pakāsitoti ñāṇobhāsena obhāsito ādīpitoti āha ‘‘dīpito jotito’’ti. Tattha tattha chinnabhinnaṭṭhāne. Sibbitagaṇṭhitanti vākaṃ gahetvā sibbitaṃ, sibbituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭhāne vākena gaṇṭhitañca. Chinnapilotikābhāvena vigatapilotiko dhammo, tassa chinnapilotikassa paṭilomatā chinnabhinnatābhāvenāti dassento ‘‘na hetthā’’tiādimāha. Nivāsanapārupanaṃ pariggahaṇaṃ. Sayaṃ paṭibhānaṃ kappetvā. Vaḍḍhentā attano samayaṃ. Samaṇakacavaranti samaṇavesadhāraṇavasena samaṇapaṭirūpatāya samaṇānaṃ kacavarabhūtaṃ. Attano rūpapavattiyā karaṇḍaṃ kucchitaṃ dhuttaṃ vāti pavattetīti kāraṇḍavo, dussīlo. Taṃ kāraṇḍavaṃ. Niddhamathāti nīharatha. Kasambunti samaṇakasaṭaṃ. Apakassathāti apakaḍḍhatha nanti attho. Palāpeti palāpasadise. Tathā hi taṇḍulasārarahito dhaññapaṭirūpako thusamattako palāpoti vuccati, evaṃ sīlādisārarahito samaṇapaṭirūpako palāpo viyāti palāpo, dussīlo. Te palāpe. Vāhethāti apanetha. Patissatāti bāḷhasatitāya patissatā hothāti.
依信心而出家的人:是指没有被国王等的灾祸所逼迫,怀着“我要这样战胜已经陷入生等轮回怖畏”的心,为了出离轮回而依信心出家的人。行为良家子:是因为行为端正而出身良好。因此说“无论从何处”等。出身良家子:是因为出身殊胜而出身良好。善士所称叹的诸支:作为正勤支分,以及不顾恋身体与生命而发起精进——依这样生起的精进力,所以说一支是“皮肤”;其余各支的道理也是这样。精进应当安立在九处:即“依时间有五处,依威仪有四处”,应当这样在九处安立并转起精进。巴利
Saddhāya pabbajitenāti rājūpaddavādīhi anupaddutena ‘‘evañhi taṃ otiṇṇaṃ jātiādisaṃsārabhayaṃ vijinissāmī’’ti vaṭṭanissaraṇatthaṃ āgatāya saddhāya vasena pabbajitena. Ācārakulaputtoti ācārena abhijāto. Tenāha ‘‘yato kutocī’’tiādi. Jātikulaputtoti jātisampattiyā abhijāto. Viññuppasatthāni aṅgāni sammāpadhāniyaṅgabhāvena, kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhabhāvena vīriyaṃ ārabhantassa tathāpavattavīriyavasena ‘‘taco ekaṃ aṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Navasu ṭhānesu samādhātabbanti ‘‘kālavasena pañcasu, iriyāpathavasena catūsū’’ti evaṃ navasu ṭhānesu vīriyaṃ samādhātabbaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.
懈怠的人住在苦里,意思是:在能引导人出离的教法中,他不发起精进,因此没能证得沙门的真正利益,所以住在苦里。或者把“自己的利益”里的 ka 改成 da,读成“己利”。为了从根本上说明懈怠者利益的损减,才说了“六门”等话。因为一坐下就压坏座椅,所以叫“压座者”,这是对他的贬称;意思是说,他什么利益也保持不住,纯粹成了座椅的负担。在别处则说成“压地者”,那里的意思是:因为悭吝,看到别人布施的地方就嫉妒眼;“满粪者”是指饱食充腹后,便充塞厕所之人。巴利
So dukkhaṃ viharatīti kusītapuggalo niyyānikasāsane vīriyārambhassa akaraṇena sāmaññatthassa anuppattiyā dukkhaṃ viharati. Sakaṃ vā atthaṃ sadatthaṃ ka-kārassa da-kāraṃ katvā . Kusītassa atthaparihāyanaṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘cha dvārānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nisajjāvasena pīṭhamaddanato pīṭhamaddano, nirassanavacanaṃ tassa, kassacipatthassa adhāraṇato kevalaṃ pīṭhabhārabhūtoti adhippāyo. Aññattha pana ‘‘makhamaddano’’ti vuccati, tattha dānamicchāya paresaṃ makhaṃ passantoti attho. Laṇḍapūrakoti kucchipūraṃ bhuñjitvā vaccakuṭipūrako.
说到“已发起精进”等句时,应当按前面“懈怠的人”那里所说的相反意思来理解,这是以表达赞叹的方式在称赞。“已发起精进”就是指已经提起精进的人。“心已送出”就是指把心导向涅槃的人。由此显示了弟子们的正行道,以及礼敬导师的功德。巴利
‘‘Āraddhavīriyo’’tiādīsu ‘‘kusīto puggalo’’ti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo, āsīsāya vasena thomito. Āraddhavīriyeti paggahitavīriye. Pahitatteti nibbānaṃ patipesitacitte. Etena sāvakānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ satthuvandanānisaṃsañca dassesi.
“低劣的”:指依止轮回的法。因此说“以低劣的信”等。“最胜的”:指依止出离的殊胜法;即使只有一点点,也因为远离了杂染的浑浊、具有精华之义,所以即使是有净信的人也不应饮用像酒之类的东西。“教法”:指具备教、行、证三种特征的教法。“清净的”:因为远离了过失污垢,并且能让人生起净信。“应饮的”:就像用钵器一样能快乐地享用;并且因为远离了恶行、一切烦恼、杂秽、泥沼等过失。巴利
Hīnenāti vaṭṭanissitena dhammena. Tenāha ‘‘hīnāya saddhāyā’’tiādi. Aggenāti seṭṭhena vivaṭṭanissitena dhammena, īsakampi katakālusiyavigataṭṭhena maṇḍaṭṭhena ca pasannampi surādi na pātabbaṃ. Sāsananti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhalakkhaṇaṃ sāsanaṃ. Pasannaṃ vigatadosamalattā pasādaniyattā ca. Pātabbañca pattena viya sukhena paribhuñjitabbato duccaritasabbakilesakasāvamalapaṅkadosarahitattā ca.
已经成了醍醐的菩提分法教说,也是“教说醍醐”。而领受这唯一的教说醍醐的人,是那些善修正行、没有过失的四众弟子,这叫“领受醍醐”。道与梵行,因为都趋向于它,所以整个菩提分法聚也是“梵行醍醐”。因此说“什么是教说醍醐”等等。其中,“了知者”是指已经证悟诸谛的人。正如开头所说的“开示四圣谛”等等。在预备阶段,通过“有此世”等说法,去除了对此世和他世的迷惑,生起的胜解就是“胜解醍醐”。舍弃,是指以断除的方式舍弃、灭除。对于属于四地的信根,以胜解醍醐使其成为醍醐的胜解。以“等”字,收摄“策励醍醐是精进根,懈怠是它的污垢”等经文的剩余部分。这里,是指在这教法中,或者说“在醍醐中”这句话。这是原因格,由此显示“导师现前”的现前修习能带来无犹豫的果报。因此说“不现前”等等。量,是指与药相应的量。吐出,是指药的呕吐、下泻,或者依它而使病素界呕吐、下泻。同样地,正如人们面对医生无犹豫地喝下药醍醐,同样地,以“导师现前”而无犹豫地精进,喝下醍醐般的教法,这是连接。以证得神通与等至而有利益。以证得道果而增长。他利,是指由于自己见到的随行所生起的过失,对于如此正确修行者的他人之利,在这里应当这样理解其义。巴利
Maṇḍabhūtā bodhipakkhiyadhammadesanāpi desanāmaṇḍo. Tassa ekasseva pana desanāmaṇḍassa paṭiggāhakā suppaṭipannā dosarahitā catasso parisā paṭiggahamaṇḍo. Maggabrahmacariyaṃ taggatikattā sakalopi bodhipakkhiyadhammarāsi brahmacariyamaṇḍo. Tenāha ‘‘katamo desanāmaṇḍo’’tiādi. Tattha viññātāroti saccānaṃ abhisametāvino. Tathā hi ādito ‘‘catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pubbabhāge ‘‘atthi ayaṃ loko’’tiādinā idhalokaparalokagatasammosavigamena pavatto adhimokkhova adhimokkhamaṇḍo. Chaḍḍetvā samucchedavasena vijahitvā. Catubhūmakassa saddhindriyassa adhimokkhamaṇḍena maṇḍabhūtaṃ adhimokkhaṃ. Ādi-saddena ‘‘paggahamaṇḍo vīriyindriyaṃ kosajjakasaṭa’’ntiādiṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Etthāti etasmiṃ sāsane, ‘‘maṇḍasmi’’nti vā vacane. Kāraṇavacanaṃ, tena ‘‘satthā sammukhībhūto’’ti sammukhabhāvanāyogo nirāsaṅkaphalāvahoti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘asammukhā’’tiādi. Pamāṇanti anurūpaṃ bhesajjassa pamāṇaṃ. Uggamananti bhesajjassa vamanaṃ virecanaṃ, tassa vā vasena dosadhātūnaṃ vamanaṃ virecanaṃ. Evamevāti yathā bhesajjamaṇḍaṃ vejjasammukhā nirāsaṅkā pivanti, evameva ‘‘satthā sammukhībhūto’’ti nirāsaṅkā vīriyaṃ katvā, maṇḍapeyya sāsanaṃ pivathāti yojanā. Abhiññāsamāpattipaṭilābhena sānisaṃsā. Maggaphalādhigamanena savaḍḍhi. Paratthanti attano diṭṭhānugatiāpattiyā, tathā sammāpaṭipajjantānaṃ paresaṃ atthanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
3. 《近依经》注释巴利
3. Upanisasuttavaṇṇanā
23 “知者、见者”:这里所说的“见”,是指以慧眼而见,不是以肉眼而见,所以说“这两个词含义相同”。即便如此——虽然这两个词含义相同,但就智的特征、智的威力所行及的领域而言,这样“见”的状态与“知”并不矛盾,这就是它的意思。因此说“因为智的特征就是知”等等。“智的威力”,是指以智的力量,智的作用照亮其对象领域。因此说“以智照见离系之法”。而“知者、见者”这一说法,是以“知”和“见”为切入点,以人为中心来展开的教导,所以说“基于智的特征”等等。或者,“知者”是指以前分智而了知,“见者”是指以后分智而亲见。或者,说了“知者”之后,这里所指的并不是靠传闻、推论或仅以寻思的方式来了知,而是为了说明:就像以色识看见色法那样,把色法等以及它们的集起等亲自现前之后而见,所以说“见者”。这里也可以这样理解。巴利
23.Jānato passatoti ettha dassanaṃ paññācakkhunāva dassanaṃ adhippetaṃ, na maṃsacakkhunāti āha ‘‘dvepi padāni ekatthānī’’ti. Evaṃ santepīti padadvayassa ekatthattepi ñāṇalakkhaṇañāṇappabhāvavisayasssa tathādassanabhāvāvirodhanāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇa’’ntiādi. Ñāṇappabhāvanti ñāṇānubhāvena ñāṇakiccavisayobhāsanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ñāṇena vivaṭṭe dhamme passatī’’ti. Jānato passatoti ca jānanadassanamukhena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā pavattāti āha – ‘‘ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādāyā’’tiādi. Jānatoti vā pubbabhāgañāṇena jānato, aparabhāgena ñāṇena passato. Jānatoti vā vatvā na jānanaṃ anussavākāraparivitakkamattavasena idhādhippetaṃ, atha kho rūpāni viya cakkhuviññāṇena rūpādīni tesañca samudayādike paccakkhe katvā dassananti vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘passato’’ti vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha attho.
“诸漏的灭尽”,就是诸漏被彻底断除。而那就是诸漏不再生起的灭,是完完全全、彻底的不存在。所以说“不生起、已尽的状态、不存在”。为了说明“漏尽”这个词出现在“已尽的状态”等语境中的地方,才说了“由诸漏的灭尽……”等话。“随顺正直之道的人”,是指通过断除烦恼的歪曲、身体的歪曲等而变得正直,并随念那包含观智的下层道法的人,因为他那些烦恼确实已经灭尽。在灭尽上,第一个智生起;“此后,另一智无间生起”——这是说,在称为灭尽的最上道那一刹那,包含在该道中的智首先生起;紧接着,另一智,也就是阿罗汉果智,无间地生起。虽然偈颂中只说了“在灭尽上”,但依彻底断除之义,“诸漏已尽之道,称为尽”,所以说“道被称为漏尽”。“沙门”,这里指的是已息灭诸恶的人,而他就是漏已尽的人。“由诸漏的灭尽”,这里指的是果;但从另一种角度说,漏尽之道也被称为漏尽,因为果是由它证得的。由此也应理解,涅槃也被说为漏尽的体性。巴利
Āsavānaṃ khayanti āsavānaṃ accantappahānaṃ. So pana tesaṃ anuppādanirodho sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvo evāti āha ‘‘asamuppādo khīṇākāro natthibhāvo’’ti. Āsavakkhayasaddassa khīṇākārādīsu āgataṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ujumaggānusārinoti kilesavaṅkakāyavaṅkādīnaṃ pahānena ujubhūte savipassanāheṭṭhimamaggadhamme anussarantassa. Yadeva hissa parikkhīṇaṃ. Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tato aññā anantarā’’ti khayasaṅkhāte aggamagge tappariyāpannameva ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppajjati, tadanantaraṃ pana aññā arahattanti. Yadipi gāthāya ‘‘khayasmiṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ, samucchedavasena pana ‘‘āsave khīṇe maggo khayo’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘maggo āsavakkhayoti vutto’’ti. Samaṇoti samitapāpo adhippeto, so pana khīṇāsavo hotīti. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā’’ti idha phalaṃ, pariyāyena pana āsavakkhayo maggo, tena pattabbato phalaṃ. Eteneva nibbānassapi āsavakkhayabhāvo vuttoti veditabbo.
对于了知者、对于看见者,才是这样——这里要成立的就是这个决定性的规律,而不是别的样子;因为如果没有这种区分,就没有殊胜可言,也不是所主张的。为了显示这个规律的结果,才说“不是对不了知者,不是对没看见者”。因此他说:“如果有人不了知、没看见,我们就不对他说,这就是意思。”以此显示:对诸蕴的遍知,是漏尽的决定性原因。“以此”:就是指“不是对不了知者,不是对没看见者”这句话。那些被否定的人是谁呢?就是持这种主张的人:“愚者和智者流转轮回之后,都会终结苦”;“众生无因无缘而得清净”等等说法。在他们当中,有些人承认仅凭出身高贵、转生投胎就能使轮回清净;另一些人则主张是由自在天、生主等因所致。应当知道,这一切都已被“由轮回等”这一句涵盖在内。“用前面两个词”:就是用“了知者、看见者”这两个词。已经说了“方法”,因为重点是“漏尽”。“以此”:就是用“不是对不了知者,不是对没看见者”这两个词。对于漏尽的灭尽来说,这就是没有方法,也就是对五蕴没有遍知。正是通过“了知者、看见者”这个决定性的表述,实际上也间接否定了没有方法。应当知道,之所以作这样的解释,正是为了说明这一点在意义上已经被表明。巴利
Jānato eva passato evāti evamettha niyamo icchito, na aññathā visesābhāvato aniṭṭhāpannovāti tassa niyamassa phalaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no ajānato no apassato’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘yo pana na jānāti, na passati, tassa no vadāmīti attho’’ti. Iminā khandhānaṃ pariññā āsavakkhayassa ekantikakāraṇanti dasseti. Etenāti ‘‘no ajānato, no apassato’’ti etena vacanena. Te paṭikkhittāti ke pana teti? ‘‘Bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karissanti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.228) ahetū appaccayā sattā visujjhantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.101, 227) evamādivādā. Tesu keci abhijātisaṅkantimattena saṃsārasuddhiṃ paṭijānanti, aññe issarapajāpatikāraṇādivasena. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ saṃsārādīhīti ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimena padadvayenāti ‘‘jānato passato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Upāyo vutto ‘‘āsavakkhayā’’ti adhikārato. Imināti ‘‘no ajānato, no apassato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Anupāyo hoti esa āsavānaṃ khayassa, yadidaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ apariññāti ‘‘jānato passato’’ti imināva aniyamavacanena anupāyapaṭisedhopi atthato bodhito hotīti. Tameva hi atthato bodhitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ evaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“具有达跋(质直)之性的人”,就是指具有达跋特质的人。因为在“实有(drabya)”“实有坏灭,非实有不坏灭”等说法中,那个人就被称为“实有(drabya)”。或者,“具有达跋之性的人”是指本质坚实的人,意思是具有与自身相应的戒行和行为。正如经中所说:“达跋啊,质直之人不会这样纠缠不休。”(《波罗夷》384) “站在事务的前头去做”,就是把义务当作最上、最首要的职责来做。如果一位活命清净的比丘,为了那些不知道怎么做事的同梵行者,或者为了自己遮挡雨季的风雨等,而制作伞盖等物品,这就叫作“站在事务的前头去做”。不能说“这不成为立足处”,因为以作为依怙法的状态,它成为证得道果的亲依止缘。经中确实说过:“对于同梵行者们各种大小事务,他都能干。”(《长部》3.345) “如此,对于了知的人”:这样一来,因为了知医术等工作,以邪命为缘,欲漏等诸漏只会增长,而不会断除。“如此……诸漏灭尽”这段经文,应当理解为就是指阿拉汉果,因为以果来表述,其因便不言自明地成立了。因此说:“由于在漏尽时生起之故”。巴利
Dabbajātikoti dabbarūpo. So hi ‘‘drabyo’’ti vuccati ‘‘drabyaṃ vinassati nādrabya’’ntiādīsu. Dabbajātiko vā sārasabhāvo, sāruppasīlācāroti attho. Yathāha ‘‘na kho dabba dabbā evaṃ nibbeṭhentī’’ti (pārā. 384). Vattasīse ṭhatvāti vattaṃ uttamaṃ dhuraṃ katvā. Yo hi parisuddhājīvo kātuṃ ajānantānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ attano vā vassavātādipaṭibāhanatthaṃ chattādīni karoti, so vattasīse ṭhatvā karoti nāma. Padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbaṃ nāthakaraṇadhammabhāvena maggaphalādhigamassa upanissayabhāvato. Vuttañhi ‘‘yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiccakaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hotī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.345). Evaṃ jānatoti evaṃ vejjakammādīnaṃ jānanahetu micchājīvapaccayā kāmāsavādayo āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva, na pahīyanti. ‘‘Evaṃ kho…pe… āsavānaṃ khayo hotī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā arahattasseva gahaṇaṃ yuttaṃ phalaggahaṇena hetuno avuttasiddhattā. Tenāha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayante jātattā’’ti.
“来”就是来源,能带来它的,就叫能引生来源的,也就是前分行道。“在灭尽上”这个说法,是依“以体显体之相”而用的处格;而“于灭尽”则是指对境。因此说“在称作诸漏灭尽的”。“果依止于此”,所以因就叫亲依止。这是就最上义来说,也就是阿拉汉果的解脱。“那”指解脱;“它的”指省察智的。不过,对于倾向于厌离的心,也可能有无间亲依止缘等各种缘,所以说“应依可能发生的情况来理解它的缘性”。巴利
Āgamanaṃ āgamo, taṃ āvahatīti āgamanīyā, pubbabhāgapaṭipadā. Khayasminti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ, khayeti pana visaye. Tenāha ‘‘āsavakkhayasaṅkhāte’’ti. Upanisīdati phalaṃ etthāti kāraṇaṃ upanisā. Arahattaphalavimutti ukkaṭṭhaniddesato. Sāti vimutti. Assāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Manasmiṃ vivaṭṭanissite pana anantarūpanissayāpi paccayā sambhavantīti ‘‘labbhamānavasena paccayabhāvo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.
依此而从一切行中离染,所以叫离贪,也就是道。依此而厌离,所以叫厌离,也就是强力观。因此说“依此”等。以“简择随观也属于欲解脱分”的意图,所以说“这是四种智的别称”。因为依据“只要还没到道非道智见清净,在那之前都还是弱观”的说法,所以从脱离随烦恼的坏灭随观智之后,才是强力观。对于色法和无色法各自的特性和共通性,即种种自性、如其自性,了知它,就是如实性智。那也就是见。以现前亲证之义,知遍知和审察遍知都已被包含在内。因此说“是弱观”等。行抉择智,说的是名色分别智。度疑也被称为缘摄受、法住智。以理观等为开端的随观智,就是思惟智。道非道智,是指确定了道与非道之后安住其上的智。因为那种作为基础的禅那定,是弱观的缘。经中确实说过:“入定者如实了知、如实照见。”巴利
Virajjati asesasaṅkhārato etenāti virāgo, maggo. Nibbindati etāyāti nibbidā, balavavipassanā. Tenāha ‘‘etenā’’tiādi. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanāpi muccitukamyatāpakkhikā evāti adhippāyena ‘‘catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yāva maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi, tāva taruṇavipassanā’’ti hi vacanato upakkilesavimuttaudayabbayañāṇato paraṃ balavavipassanā. Rūpārūpadhammānaṃ visesabhūto sāmaññabhūto ca yo yo sabhāvo yathāsabhāvo, tassa jānanaṃ yathāsabhāvajānanaṃ. Tadeva dassanaṃ. Paccakkhakaraṇatthena ñātapariññā tīraṇapariññā ca gahitā hoti. Tenāha ‘‘taruṇavipassana’’ntiādi. Saṅkhāraparicchedeñāṇanti nāmarūpapariggahañāṇaṃ vadati. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇaṃ paccayapariggaho dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇantipi vuccati. Nayavipassanādikaṃ anupassanāñāṇaṃ sammasanaṃ. Maggāmaggeñāṇanti maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā ṭhitaṃ ñāṇaṃ. So hi pādakajjhānasamādhi taruṇavipassanāya paccayo hoti. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5.; 4.99; 5.1071) hi vuttaṃ.
前分乐,是指与近行定相应的乐。焦热的止息,是指欲贪等烦恼焦热的平息。为了说明“比丘们,我说乐是有缘由的”这句话里所指的乐,所以说“安止前分的乐”。至于“身轻安者感受乐”这句所说的安止乐,它是轻安的缘,这自然不必多说。“乐”在这里也是同样的道理。强力喜,是指达到了遍满特征的喜。因为这样的喜,以寻、伺、乐、定等为缘而得到,镇伏了五盖,平息了以五盖为因的焦热与热恼。因此说“它即是焦热止息的缘”。弱喜,是指稚弱之喜。因此说“它即是强力喜的缘”。信,是指以信解三宝功德与业果而生起的胜解,然而它因为在自己的境界中反复生起,并非只生起一次,所以说“一再生起的信”。因为信解者对于可信解之事感到欢喜,所以说“它即是弱喜的缘”。由于苦苦等一切苦都含摄在轮回苦中,而这里所指的也正是那种苦,所以说“苦是指轮回苦”。有人说“老死苦”,另一些人说“愁等”。因为两者都含摄在内,所以第一种义理是恰当的。因为受苦者信解业的果报,并对三宝生起净信,所以说“它即是反复生信的缘”。因为“从师长处听闻法后,思惟运转之苦”的人,会生起“这法必定能超越此苦”的信。因此说“闻法后于如来处获得信”等。有变异,是指以生起的变异而有变异的蕴生起,以生的意义。然而若没有生,则于各处有中都没有苦的生起,所以说“它即是轮回苦的缘”。业有,是指业有等三种业有。因为它是有有的缘。如此等义,故说“以此方法”。其余诸句,是指取等句。随顺智,因为属于行舍智的范畴,所以被涅槃的执取所摄;种姓智,是初道的转向。因为它以观智作某些殊胜之处,所以不触及它,而说“厌离为近因的离贪”,即只说“离贪”。巴利
Pubbabhāgasukhanti upacārajjhānasahitasukhaṃ. Daratha paṭippassaddhīti kāmacchandādikilesadarathassa paṭipassambhanaṃ. ‘‘Sukhaṃpāhaṃ, bhikkhave, saupanisaṃ vadāmī’’ti ettha adhippetasukhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appanāpubbabhāgassa sukhassā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.466;3.359; a.ni. 1.3.96) vuttaappanāsukhassa passaddhiyā paccayatte vattabbameva natthi. Sukhanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Balavapītīti pharaṇalakkhaṇappattā pīti. Tādisā hi vitakkavicārasukhasamādhīhi laddhappaccayā nīvaraṇaṃ vikkhambhantī taṃnimittaṃ darathaṃ pariḷāhaṃ paṭipassambheti. Tenāha ‘‘sā hi darathappassaddhiyā paccayo hotī’’ti. Dubbalapītīti taruṇapīti. Tenāha ‘‘sā hi balavapītiyā paccayo hotī’’ti. Saddhāti ratanattayaguṇānaṃ kammaphalassa ca saddahanavasena pavatto adhimokkho, sā pana yasmā attano visaye punappunaṃ uppajjati, na ekavārameva, tasmā āha ‘‘aparāparaṃ uppajjanasaddhā’’ti. Yasmā saddahanto saddheyyavatthusmiṃ pamudito hoti, tasmā āha ‘‘sā hi dubbalapītiyā paccayo hotī’’ti. Dukkhadukkhādibhedassa sabbassapi dukkhassa vaṭṭadukkhantogadhattā tassa ca idhādhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkha’’nti. Jarāmaraṇadukkhanti keci, sokādayo cāti apare. Tadubhayassapi saṅgaṇhanato paṭhamo evattho yutto. Yasmā dukkhappatto kammassa phalāni saddahati, ratanattaye ca pasādaṃ uppādeti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tañhi aparāparasaddhāya paccayo hotī’’ti. Yasmā ‘‘ācariyānaṃ santike dhammaṃ sutvā pavattidukkha’’nti cintayato ‘‘ekantato ayaṃ dhammo imassa dukkhassa samatikkamāya hotī’’ti saddhā uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.191). Savikārāti uppādavikārena savikārā khandhajāti jāyanaṭṭhena. Jātiyā pana asati tattha tattha bhave natthi dukkhassa sambhavoti āha ‘‘sā hi vaṭṭadukkhassa paccayo’’ti. Kammabhavoti kammabhavādiko tividhopi kammabhavo. So hi upapattibhavassa paccayo. Evamādiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘etenupāyenā’’ti. Sesapadānīti upādānādipadāni. Anulomañāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāpakkhikattā nibbānaggahaṇena gahitaṃ, gotrabhuñāṇaṃ paṭhamamaggassa āvajjanaṃ. So hi tena vipassanāya kiñci kiñci visesaṭṭhānaṃ kayiratīti taṃ anāmasitvā nibbidūpaniso virāgoti ‘‘virāgo’’icceva vuttaṃ.
水冲裂之后形成通道的地方,就叫峡谷。山腹也是就水说的。水像往低处流那样,以回旋的方式流动,所以也叫河曲。因为受冬夏季节影响,持续八个月出现的地面裂缝,就叫地裂。小小的引水沟像树枝一样,所以叫枝;小水坑,是把 o 音改成 u 音,叫小水坑。正是如此等等,是把“诸比丘,譬如……”等引来的譬喻和所比喻的东西对应起来,为了显示它们的连接,才说“应视无明为山”等等。其中,无明因为在相续中长久流转,又很难被多数人断除,所以说为山。诸行因为遍及三界、不断流注,所以像雨云。应视诸行为雨云,这是把它们关联起来说。其余两项也是这样。识等流转因为随顺轮转、又以辗转之缘为缘,所以像峡谷等。解脱因为只有一味、没有增减,所以像大海。这就是譬喻的对应。巴利
Kena udakena vidārayitvā gatapadesoti katvā kandaro. Nitambotipi udakassa. Yathā ninnaṃ udakaṃ pavattati, tathā nivattanabhāvena nadīkuñchotipi vuccati. Hemantagimhautuvasena aṭṭha māse pavatto pathavīvivaroti katvā padaro. Khuddikā udakavāhiniyo sākhā viyāti sākhā, khuddakā sobbhā kusubbhā o-kārassa u-kāraṃ katvā. Evameva khotiādi ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’tiādinā upanītāya upamāya upameyyena saṃsandananti, taṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjā pabbatoti daṭṭhabbā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjā ca santānavasena ciraṃtanakālappavattanato pacurajanehi duppajahanato ‘‘pabbato’’ti vuttā. Lokattayābhibyāpanato abhisandanato ca abhisaṅkhārā meghasadisā. Abhisaṅkhārā meghoti daṭṭhabbāti ānetvā sambandho. Tathā sesapadadvayepi. Viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ anupavattito paramparapaccayato ca kandarādisadisā. Vimutti ekarasattā, hānivuddhiabhāvato ca sāgarasadisāti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ.
在这里,因为先已成立:有无明才有行,没有无明就没有行,所以那些行就像发生在高山上一样,因此说“应知无明……乃至降雨”。“愚痴无闻”等,是对前面所说之义加以证明。以“对渴爱生起希求”这一句,说明一切由行而生起的过患,因为渴爱被称为“爱染”。对最后有者来说,产生最后有的行没有到达涅槃,就像触及大海边缘而停住的那一部分,触及涅槃而停住一样,所以用“犹如触及大海而停住之时”来作譬喻说明。虽然圆满了识等流转,这里也显示的是最后有者的识的转起。因为此后识等流转就不存在了,所以应说它“已圆满”。对已生的人,因以生为缘而有流转之苦受,所以应希求闻法。这虽然在这部经里没有出现,但在其他经里确实有,为了显示应从那里引来说明,所以说“然而,佛语……”。这是依声闻和菩萨而作的教说,因此这样说。若依其他人来说,则没有必要引证其他经,所以说“因为,若……”。依巴利文所取,就是把简要说的义理详细展示出来。“生起”:指正在生起的诸蕴被执取,所以说“有所作”。“由显示无常相等”:是由相所引。“业与非业”:是抉择。“无结缚”:即无缠结,是清净之义。巴利文中说“于地遍等处着手修业”等,是显示以止为前行的观,因为这样才能有欢喜等。“天”指雨云。这里为什么说“应知漏尽者……乃至停住之时”呢?前面不是说以天为依处的行吗,而不是说漏尽者的行吗?这没有过失,因为是以因的假说来称说果。以行为根本的诸蕴相续,在诸蕴相续被断除的联系中,就称为漏尽者。巴利
Tattha yasmā purimasiddhāya avijjāya sati abhisaṅkhārā, nāsati, tasmā te uparipabbate pavattā viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjā…pe… vassanaṃ veditabba’’nti. Assutavā hītiādi vuttasseva atthassa samatthanaṃ. Taṇhāya abhilāsaṃ katvāti etena sabbassapi abhisaṅkhāravuṭṭhitemanatthaṃ dīpeti. Taṇhā hi ‘‘sneho’’ti vuttā. Antimabhavikassa antabhavanibbattako abhisaṅkhāro nibbānaṃ na patto, tadantassa bhāgassa nibbānaṃ āhacca ṭhito viya hotīti ‘‘mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitakālo viyā’’ti upamānidassanaṃ kataṃ. Viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ pūretvāpi imināpi hi antimabhavikasseva viññāṇappavatti dassitā. Sā hi pūritāti vattabbā tato paraṃ viññāṇādivaṭṭasseva abhāvato. Jātassa puggalassa jātipaccayavaṭṭadukkhavedanāya dhammassavanaṃ icchitabbaṃ, taṃ pana yadipi imasmiṃ sutte na āgataṃ, suttantaresu pana āgatamevāti tato āharitvā taṃ vattabbanti dassento ‘‘buddhavacanaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Tayidaṃ sāvakabodhisattānaṃ vasenāyaṃ desanāti katvā vuttaṃ. Itaresaṃ pana vasena vuccamānaṃ suttantaraggahaṇatthaṃ payojanaṃ natthīti ‘‘yā hī’’tiādimāha. Pāḷiyā vasena gahitamevāti saṅkhepato vuttaatthassa vitthārato dassanaṃ. Nibbattīti nibbattamānā khandhā gahitāti āha ‘‘savikārā’’ti. Aniccatālakkhaṇādidīpanato lakkhaṇāhaṭaṃ. Kammākammanti vinicchayaṃ. Nijjaṭanti niggumbaṃ, suddhanti attho. Pathavīkasiṇādīsu kammaṃ ārabhatītiādi pāḷiyaṃ samathapubbaṅgamā vipassanā dassitāti katvā vuttaṃ . Evañhi pāmojjādidassanaṃ sambhavatīti. Devassāti meghassa. Kasmā panettha ‘‘khīṇāsavassa…pe… ṭhitakālo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, nanu pubbe devaṭṭhāniyo abhisaṅkhāro vutto, na abhisaṅkhāro khīṇāsavoti? Nāyaṃ doso, kāraṇūpacārena phalassa vuttattā. Abhisaṅkhāramūlako hi khandhasantāno khandhasantāne ca ucchinnasaṃyoge khīṇāsavasamaññāti.
4. 《外道经》的注释巴利
4. Aññatitthiyasuttavaṇṇanā
24 “So”指的是舍利弗长老。如果他那时还没进去,为什么说“他进去了”呢?所以回答说“我将进去”等等。这是要表明:对于必然会发生的事,就像对已经发生的事实一样,可以用这种说法来指称。现在为了用譬喻说明这个意思,就说“譬如什么”等等。“时日尚早便已外出之日”,是说比平时托钵的时间早得多,就从精舍出去的那一天。“他心生此念”,就是生起了“时间还早”这样的想法。“在南门处”,是指他在王舍城南门和竹林之间,所以心想“我要去他那里”,这就是他的用意。“持何论”,是说在四种论中,你持哪一种论?“何所教”是它的同义词。“说什么”则是笼统地涵盖四种论,用中性词来表达,就像问“你是什么性别?”一样。这里的“什么”是中性代词。依此而说,就是“论”,即见解。针对这一点说“在这里……见什么而问”。“法无碍解”等中的“法”字有原因的意思,所以说“所说的原因,就是它的随因”。论说的语言生起,就是论的转起。巴利
24.Soti sāriputtatthero. Yadi na tāva paviṭṭho, kasmā ‘‘pāvisī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘pavisissāmī’’tiādi. Tena avassambhāvini bhūte viya upacāro hotīti dasseti. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento ‘‘yathā ki’’ntiādimāha. Atippagoyeva nikkhantadivasoti pakatiyā bhikkhācaraṇavelāya ativiya pāto eva vihārato nikkhantadivasabhāgo. Etadahosīti etaṃ ‘‘atippago kho’’tiādikaṃ cintanaṃ ahosi. Dakkhiṇadvārassāti rājagahanagare dakkhiṇadvārassa veḷuvanassa ca antarā ahosi, tasmā ‘‘tenupasaṅkamissa’’nti cintanā ahosīti adhippāyo. Kiṃ vādīti catūsu vādesu kataraṃ vādaṃ vadasi. Kimakkhāyīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Kiṃ vadatīti pana cattāro vāde sāmaññato gahetvā napuṃsakaliṅgena vadati yathā kiṃ te jātaliṅgaṃ. Sabbanāmañhetaṃ, yadidaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ. Vadati etenāti vādo, dassanaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kiṃ ettha…pe… dassananti pucchantī’’ti. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu viya dhamma-saddo hetuatthoti āha ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ, tassa anukāraṇa’’nti. Vādassa vacanassa anuppatti vādappavatti.
这段话是指“我说有一”等说法。那“有些沙门婆罗门是业论者”这样展开的言论。值得弹指赞叹,所以叫稀有。未曾有这个词,应当按词源的方式理解它的词形成立。一切论,是指所有四种论。其中第一种是常见论,第二种是断灭论,第三种是一分常论,第四种是无因生论。为了破斥这一切,就说了破斥的理由。或者说,宣说缘起,因为这是一般人的智慧难以立足的地方,所以甚深;又因为它能照显、能在心中现起,所以是甚深与照显。那正是这个词:只取触这个词作为开头。巴利
Idaṃ vacananti ‘‘ekamidāha’’ntiādivacanaṃ. Sāti ‘‘eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā kammavādā’’ti evaṃ pavattakathā. Accharaṃ aṅguliphoṭanaṃ arahatīti acchariyaṃ. Abbhutanti niruttinayena padasiddhi daṭṭhabbā. Sabbavādānanti sabbesaṃ catubbidhavādānaṃ. Paṭhamo hettha sassatavādo, dutiyo ucchedavādo, tatiyo ekaccasassatavādo, catuttho adhiccasamuppannavādo, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ paṭikkhepato paṭikkhepakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādakittanaṃ vā pacurajanañāṇassa alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhatāya gambhīrañceva, tathā avabhāsanato cetasi upaṭṭhānato gambhīrāvabhāsañca karonto. Tadeva padanti phassapadaṃyeva ādibhūtaṃ gahetvā.
《地经》的注释巴利
5. Bhūmijasuttavaṇṇanā
25 在“之前的经”中,指的是紧挨着的前一部经。应当依照已经说过的道理来理解词义;这里没有指出与前面不同的特别之处,为了说明其余的含义,就说“然而这是差别”等话。并非只由触缘生起,而是以触作为助缘,还有其他缘共同作用才生起。“以身”指能推动的身体,意思是身表。确实,在《发趣论》所说的二十四种缘中,身表并不是思的任何一种缘。但是,只有身体存在时,才有所谓的身业;没有身体就不会有。因此,身表作为身业得以成立的俱集条件,是应当被认可的,所以说“即使以身造作,也被称为造作”。因此世尊说:“阿难,或者有身时,以身思为因,内生起乐、苦。”对于“语”的情况,道理也是一样。“以意”指已经显现出来的意,而不是单纯的意。“自己”指不是由他人劝发。“由他”指由他人劝发。“正知”指以与智相应之心了知。“不正知”指不是这样了知。“彼”指乐、苦。“以身思为因”是以身业为相,意思是由于已经造作、已经累积的身业。对于其余的思,道理也是一样。与掉举相应的思在生起时也会产生果报,所以说“得到二十种思”。同样地,对于语门,这里用“同样”这个词来承接“以欲界善不善而言,得到二十种思”。对于色界、无色界的思,则是指色界、无色界的善思。其果报相应如此,这是意图所在。那些思也是以无明为缘,如前所说,共十九种思;善思也不例外,因为它们是依止无明而生起的,否则就不会生起。如前所说的思的分类,就是前面说的身思等区分。不由他人劝发,只依自己的本性而生起。由他人所作,就是受到他人劝发之后而造作。即使知道,也是通过传闻等而知道。那时只知道自己在造作那个业本身。巴利
25.Purimasutteti anantare purime sutte. Vuttanayeneva veditabbanti padatthe tato visiṭṭhaṃ aniddisitvā itaraṃ atthato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ pana viseso’’tiādimāha. Na kevalaṃ phassapaccayā uppajjati, atha kho phassassa sahakārīkāraṇabhūtaaññapaccayā ca uppajjatīti. Kāyenāti copanakāyena, kāyaviññattiyāti attho. Sā hi kāmaṃ paṭṭhāne āgatesu catuvīsatiyā paccayesu kenaci paccayena cetanāya paccayo na hoti. Yasmā pana kāye sati eva kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti, nāsati, tasmā sā tassā sāmaggiyabhāvena icchitabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyatī’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘kāye vā, hānanda, sati kāyasañcetanāhetu uppajjati ajjhattaṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’nti. Vācāyapīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Manasāti pātubhūtena manasā, na manamattenāti. Attanā parehi anussāhitena. Parenāti parena anussāhena. Sampajānenāti ñāṇasampayuttacittavasena pajānantena. Asampajānenāti tathā na sampajānantena. Tassāti sukhadukkhassa. Kāyasañcetanāhetūti kāyakammanimittaṃ, kāyikassa kammassa katattā upacitattāti attho. Esa nayo sesasañcetanāsupi. Uddhaccasahagatacetanā pavattiyaṃ vipākaṃ detiyevāti ‘‘vīsati cetanā labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā vacīdvāreti ettha ‘‘kāmāvacarakusalākusalavasena vīsati cetanā labbhantī’’ti idaṃ tathā-saddena upasaṃharati. Rūpārūpacetanāhīti rūpāvacarārūpāvacarakusalacetanāhi. Tappaccayaṃ yathārahanti adhippāyo. Tāpi cetanāti yathāvuttā ekūnavīsati cetanā avijjāpaccayā honti kusalānampi pageva itarādhiṭṭhahitāvijjasseva uppajjanato, aññathā anuppajjanato. Yathāvuttacetanābhedanti yathāvuttaṃ kāyacetanādivibhāgaṃ. Parehi anussāhito saraseneva pavattamāno. Parehi kāriyamānoti parehi ussāhito hutvā kayiramāno. Jānantopīti anussavādivasena jānantopi. Kammameva jānantoti tadā attanā kariyamānakammameva jānanto.
在“四种”当中,指的是在这样说的四种情形里:“自己或他人,有正知或无正知”。对于前面所说的十九种思法,按无行与有行、有正知与无正知来分,各成四倍,所以说“七十六种思法,或二百种思法”。对于那些能获得俱生分的法,它们也一定能获得亲依止分,因此就说“被亲依止分追随”。这里的“它们”就是指前面所说的一切法。关于“那个身不存在”,这里连净色身也要包括进去。因此说“当那个身存在时”等等。“那个身不存在”是说那个身由缘灭而不存在。“语”是指音声语言,“意”是指任何识。现在仅依业来配合,所以说“然而”等等。同样的道理,“语也是门,意也是门”。漏尽者的语如何不存在?其意是不存在身业等之决意。由于无果报,即由于无果报法之义。说“身不存在”,是因为不作业的缘故。巴利
Catūsūti ‘‘sāmaṃ vā pare vā sampajāno vā asampajāno vā’’ti evaṃ vuttesu catūsu ṭhānesu. Yathāvutte ekūnavīsaticetanādhamme asaṅkhārikasasaṅkhārikabhāvena sampajānakatāsampajānakatabhāvena catuguṇe katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘chasattati dvesatā cetanādhammā’’ti. Yesaṃ sahajātakoṭi labbhati, tesampi upanissayakoṭi labbhatevāti ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā anupatitā’’tiicceva vuttā. Teti yathāvuttā sabbepi dhammā. So kāyo na hotīti ettha pasādakāyopi gahetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘yasmiṃ kāye satī’’tiādi. So kāyo na hotīti so kāyo paccayanirodhena na hoti. Vācāti saddavācā. Manoti yaṃ kiñci viññāṇaṃ. Idāni kammavaseneva yojetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo ‘‘vācāpi dvārabhūtā manopi dvārabhūto’’ti. Khīṇāsavassa kathaṃ kāyo na hoti, na tassa kāyakammādhiṭṭhānanti adhippāyo. Avipākattāti avipākadhammattāti attho. Kāyo na hotīti vuttaṃ akammakaraṇabhāvato.
那就是业。所谓“田不存在”,是因为那里是苦不能生长的地方。生长处等说法,是从排除的角度来说的,所以说“不存在”。“以因的意义”,是指作为依止的因。“以思为根本”,就是以思为标志。这是针对“以生长的意义”等所说的义理。通过这些生长等特性,受被称为“乐受、苦受”,但这里并不是指明显的苦乐特征,因为这里指的是没有直接作用的乐和苦。这里的舍受,实际上就是具有柔和乐性质的果报受。巴利
Tanti kammaṃ. Khettaṃ na hotīti tassa dukkhassa aviruhanaṭṭhānattā. Viruhanaṭṭhānādayo byatirekavasena vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘na hotī’’ti. Kāraṇaṭṭhenāti ādhārabhūtakāraṇabhāvena. Sañcetanāmūlakanti sañcetanānimittaṃ. Viruhanādīnaṃ atthānanti ‘‘viruhanaṭṭhenā’’tiādinā vuttānaṃ atthānaṃ. Iminā viruhanādibhāvena vedanā ‘‘sukhadukkhavedanā’’ti kathitā, nayidha jeṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ nippayojakassa sukhassa dukkhassa ca adhippetattā. Upekkhāvedanāpettha sukhasaṇhasabhāvavipākabhūtā vedanāva.
6. 《优波婆那经》的注释巴利
6. Upavāṇasuttavaṇṇanā
26 这里说的正是轮回之苦,因为其他苦也作为果报被包含在内。巴利
26.Vaṭṭadukkhamevakathitaṃ itaradukkhassapi vipākassa saṅgaṇhanato.
第7篇 缘经的注释巴利
7. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
27 “按次第”,就是依照顺序来安立。为了说明与四谛的关联,开示是从末尾说到开头。从苦谛的角度来说,就是从应当被遍知的层面来说。因为借着老死这个说法,其实已经讲到了五取蕴,而这些五取蕴并不是它们自身果报的缘。正是针对这一点,才说“了知缘”。在这里,开示是随顺所化众生的意乐而说的。“具足”,就是具备。“已来”,就是已经到达,意思是已经证得。“见”,是用省察智当面看见,也就是以道慧这样无迷乱地通达而见。这只是以道智见,不是以果智见。“入法流”,就是正确地进入、到达了圣法之流。因为他不趣向灾祸,行走在正道中,连同天神在内的世间都认为他“不再需要皈依处”,所以他归向圣者一边,已经超越了凡夫的境地。“以决择慧”,就是以能穿透四圣谛的智慧。在道刹那,智慧触及并安住于目标;在果刹那,则称为已触及目标而安住。巴利
27.Paṭipāṭiyāti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapanena. Catusaccayojanaṃ dassetuṃ pariyosāna…pe… ādi vuttaṃ. Dukkhasaccavasenāti pariññeyyabhāvavasena. Jarāmaraṇāpadesena hi pañcupādānakkhandhā vuttā, te cassa attano phalassa paccayā na honti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayaṃ jānātī’’ti. Vineyyajjhāsayavasena hettha desanā pavattā. Sampannoti samannāgato. Āgatoti upagato, adhigatoti attho. Passatīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena paccakkhato passati, maggapaññāya evaṃ asammohapaṭivedhavasena passati. Maggañāṇeneva, na phalañāṇena. Dhammasotaṃ samāpannoti ariyadhammasotaṃ sammadeva āpanno patto. Anaye nairiyanato, aye ca iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti akaraṇīyato ariyapakkhaṃ bhajanto puthujjanabhūmiṃ atikkanto. Nibbedhikapaññāyāti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ nibbijjhanakapaññāya. Āhacca tiṭṭhati maggakkhaṇe, phalakkhaṇe pana āhacca ṭhito nāma.
第8章《比丘经》的注释巴利
8. Bhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
28 “浅显易懂”是指完全明白易懂,因为这一道理在第七经中已经出现过。其实,这部经是世尊为了随顺应受教化者的心意,在另一个座位上开示的。会众散去之后,有人说法:“世尊的这次开示是有利益的。”这样一来,这次开示就取决于接受的人了,他们正是出于对法的恭敬,才把它收入结集。巴利
28.Uttānameva sabbasova sattame āgatanayattā, vineyyajjhāsayavasena hi idaṃ suttaṃ satthārā aññasmiṃ āsane desitaṃ, parisāya vivaṭṭena sātthikāti satthu desanā āgatāti ayaṃ paṭiggāhakādhīnā hotīti dhammagāravena saṅgahaṃ āropentiyeva.
第9篇 《沙门婆罗门经》的注释巴利
9. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
29 “说字者”是指喜欢文字的人。他们也喜欢通过前缀来增加词句。所以才说“因为他们……”等等。巴利
29.Akkharabhāṇakānanti akkhararucīnaṃ. Upasaggena padavaḍḍhanampi ruccanti. Tenāha ‘‘te hī’’tiādi.
《第二沙门婆罗门经》的注释巴利
10. Dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
30 在二经中,指的是第九经和第十经。巴利
30.Dvīsu suttesūti navamadasamasuttesu.
迦罗罗刹帝利品巴利
4. Kaḷārakhattiyavaggo
已生经的注释巴利
1. Bhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
31 31. “阿逸多学童”:指的是在婆罗利婆罗门的十六位侍者中,那位名叫“阿逸多”的学童。“数”指的就是慧。那些已经以慧数知、遍知诸法的人,就是“已知法者”,也就是已通达真谛、诸漏已尽的人。然而有学因为还没有遍知果报,所以不被称为“已知法者”。他们因为具有有学的诸法,所以是有学。虽然从补特伽罗的类别来说,他们可以有几千人之多,但若就四道中下三果的具足者这一共同性来说,则不超过七种人,因此世尊为了限定并特别指出,说“七人”。“防护者”:既能防护自身远离杂染,又能像防护自身那样,守护应当调御的世间,如此妥善守护,所以叫“防护者”;这种状态就是“防护性”,也就是慧。因此说:“‘防护性’称为慧,因为具足此慧,所以是‘防护者’。”巴利
31.Ajitamāṇavenāti soḷasasu bāvariyabrāhmaṇaparicārakesu ‘‘ajito’’ti laddhanāmena māṇavena. Saṅkhā vuccati paññā, saṅkhātā pariññātā dhammā yesaṃ te saṅkhātadhammā, paṭividdhasaccā khīṇāsavā. Sekkhā pana vipākassa apariññātattā ‘‘saṅkhātadhammā’’ti na vuccanti. Sekkhadhammasamannāgamena te sekkhā. Te pana kāmaṃ puggalapaṭilābhavasena anekasahassāva honti, catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayassa pana vasena taṃsamaṅgitāsāmaññena na sattajanato uddhanti āha ‘‘satta jane’’ti niyametvā viseseti. Saṃkilesavajjaṃ, tato vā attānaṃ viya vineyyalokaṃ nipāti rakkhatīti nipako, tassa bhāvo nepakkaṃ, ñāṇanti āha ‘‘nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, tāya samannāgatattā nipako’’ti.
心里想“这个问题到底是什么意思呢”,这就叫对问题有疑惑。心里想“我该怎么回答,才不违背老师的意趣呢”,这就叫对意趣有疑惑。这里说的“疑”,是把容易理解的含义分辨清楚之后的那种思考,而不是真正的疑结。因为这位大长老早在阿说示大长老面前就已经断除了疑结,所以这里的疑只应当看作是一种探究性的、类似懊悔的审察而已。“持钵而行”,是显示他出家身份的特征。或者也可以这样理解:作为法将,我秉承所证得的法,为开示的机缘而游化——这里应当取这个意思。巴利
‘‘Ko nu kho imassa pañhassa attho’’ti cintento pañhāya kaṅkhati nāma. ‘‘Kathaṃ byākaramāno nu kho satthu ajjhāsayaṃ na virodhemī’’ti cintento ajjhāsayaṃ kaṅkhati nāma. Sujānanīyatthaparicchedaṃ katvā cintanā hettha ‘‘kaṅkhā’’ti adhippetā, na vicikicchāti. Pahīnavicikiccho hi mahāthero āyasmato assajimahātherassa santikeyeva, vicinanabhūtaṃ kukkuccasadisaṃ panetaṃ vīmaṃsanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pattaṃ ādāya carantoti pabbajitabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammasenāpatibhāvena vā mama pattadhammadesanāvāraṃ ādāya carantoti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“生”是指随其应得的缘而生起,意思就是“有为”。“问题的解答现前”是指对问题的解答能力显现出来。经文读作“以正慧观察”,但注疏中提取出“以正慧观察者”这个词,解释为“正在观察的人”。这与“真实……已行道”这段经文对不上,所以还是按照经文所呈现的读法才合适。直到阿拉汉道为止,都是为了厌离等目的——这是依据止息期望之法而说的。“食所生”是指以缘为因。“有学行道”被说为“为了厌离、为了离贪、为了灭而行道”,这是依据这段经文所说。说到“灭”的部分时,这个道理同样适用。“厌离”是工具格中的反身表达,“离贪”“灭”是工具格中的从格表达——因此说“一切都是原因格之语”。“无取”就是“不执取”。他说“此是真实”等语,是为了让整部经都成为直说之语,即佛陀之言。巴利
Jātanti yathārahaṃ paccayato uppannaṃ, saṅkhatanti attho. Pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsīti pañhassa byākaraṇatā paṭibhāsi. ‘‘Sammappaññāya passatī’’ti pāṭho, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sammappaññāya passato’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘passantassā’’ti attho vutto. Taṃ ‘‘bhūtanti…pe… paṭipanno hotī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā na sameti, tasmā yathādassitapāṭho eva yutto. Yāva arahattamaggā nibbidādīnaṃ atthāyāti samitāpekkhadhammavasā padaṃ vadanti. Āhārasambhavanti paccayahetukaṃ. Sekkhapaṭipadā kathitā ‘‘nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya paṭipanno hotī’’ti vacanato. Esa nayo nirodhavārepi. Nibbidāti karaṇe paccattavacanaṃ, virāgā nirodhāti karaṇe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘sabbāni kāraṇavacanānī’’ti. Anupādāti anupādāya. Bhūtamidantiādimāha sabbasuttaṃ āhaccabhāsitaṃ jinavacanameva karonto.
2. 《咖喇拉经》的注释巴利
2. Kaḷārasuttavaṇṇanā
32 这位长老的名字是从他的出身得来的。“退转者”(Nivatto):先前他已经开始逆着轮回之流往上走,但还做不到,只能顺着流走,于是就从那里退转回来;如今他已从烦恼的扰乱中脱离开来,不再混杂其中,获得解脱。这里的“思”也可以指安息。“卑下退转”是指对诸欲还有所期待;为了说明他因证得第三道而对诸欲已无所期待,所以说了“三道”等话。声闻波罗蜜智因为这位长老证得阿罗汉果而得以圆满,所以说这是他最高处的安息。“已打开”(Ugghāṭitāti):就是已敞开,意思是已寂止。那里指证得阿罗汉果之时。“无疑的状态”(Vicikicchābhāvanti):就是没有犹豫的状态。巴利
32.Tassa therassa nāmaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ. Nivattoti pubbe vaṭṭasotassa paṭisotaṃ gantuṃ āraddho, taṃ avisahanto anusotameva gacchanto, tato nivatto pariklesavidhame asaṃsaṭṭho viyutto hoti. Ettha cetanāti vā assāso. Hīnāyāvattanaṃ nāma kāmesu sāpekkhatāya, tattha ca nirapekkhatā tatiyamaggādhigamenāti dassento ‘‘tayo magge’’tiādimāha. Sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ therassa arahattādhigamena nipphannaṃ, tasmā tassa taṃ uparimakoṭiyā assāso vutto. Ugghāṭitāti vivaṭā, vūpasamitāti attho. Tatthāti arahattappattiyaṃ. Vicikicchābhāvanti nibbematikataṃ.
不是这样记说的:像“生已尽”这类直白的说法,并不是这样记说的;不过从间接的意义上,可以说是这样记说的。“以任何”:就是以任何一种理由。将会这样直白地记说。巴利
Naevaṃ byākatāti ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādikā evaṃ uttānakaṃ na byākatā, pariyāyena pana byākatā. Kenacīti kenacipi kāraṇena. Evaṃ uttānakaṃ byākarissati.
那个缘的灭尽,是指那个叫作业有的缘——它被包含在无明的协助作用里——的灭尽、不再生起、止息。在已灭尽之中,是指在灭尽的状态里。通过不再生起的灭而灭尽时,对于如前所说的生的缘而言,叫作生的那个果已经灭尽,达到了不再生起的法性。已了知,就是已经知道、已经明白。遍知:通过下分道已经了知的四圣谛,不超越它们而通达,所以了知指的是无上道。依其邻近用法,无上果在这里就叫作了知。缘:是导致有转生的缘,也就是缘起。巴利
Tassa paccayassa khayāti tassa kammabhavasaṅkhātassa paccayassa avijjāya sahakāritāyaṃ saṅgahitassa khayā anuppādā nirodhā. Khīṇasminti khīṇe. Anuppādanirodhena niruddhe jātiyā yathāvutte paccaye. Jātisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ khīṇaṃ anuppattidhammataṃ āpāditanti. Viditaṃ ñātaṃ. Ājānāti catusaccaṃ heṭṭhimamaggehi ñātaṃ anatikkamitvāva paṭivijjhatīti aññā aggamaggo. Tadupacārena aggaphalaṃ idha ‘‘aññā’’ nāma. Paccayoti bhavūpapattiyā paccayo paṭiccasamuppādo.
“我”是指由我。“他遍知”:通过取相而了知心的行境。“以彼”:指由世尊。这个记说被随喜,因为对问题的记说已成为其所缘的范围。巴利
Meti mayā. Aññāsi ākāraggahaṇena cittācāraṃ jānāti. Tenāti bhagavatā. Byākaraṇaṃ anumoditaṃ pañhabyākaraṇassa visayakatabhāvato.
“这是他的所缘范围”:这里的受就是舍利弗尊者的所缘范围,因为他在其中是以所缘的方式生起的。“虽然”:虽然乐受以住立为乐,苦受以变易为乐,不苦不乐受以智为乐。“以变易的终极”:由于无常性,一切受都叫作苦。因为即使从排斥乐的角度来看,乐受之所以称为乐,是由于喜乐的遍满,所以稍微锐利地说,它就是变易苦——因为它由变易而归于无有,仅仅停留在乐灭尽的那一刹那。正如《破斥迷执》所说:“乐受的存在是乐。”想求乐的人会忍受痛苦。对于还没有遍知事处的人,乐受的止息会呈现为苦,所以应当通过辨析来阐明这个道理。“苦受以变易为乐”这一句,也是同样的道理。又《破斥迷执》中说:“苦受的不存在是乐。”因为如前所说,苦受的止息对这些人来说呈现为乐。当那种结合止息时,心中便会生起“啊,多么快乐!”而对中性受的觉知状态——如实醒悟——那才是乐。不苦不乐受,对于正在细心了知的人而言也是乐,因为它微细而可以被认知。就像对色法与无色法,从自相和共相两方面都正确地通达,那才是最高的乐。因此说——巴利
Ayamassa visayoti ayaṃ vedanā assa sāriputtattherassa savisayo tattha visayabhāvena pavattattā. Kiñcāpīti kiñcāpi sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā dukkhā vedanā vipariṇāmasukhā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā. Vipariṇāmakoṭiyāti aniccabhāvena sabbāva vedanā dukkhā nāma. Sukhapaṭikkhepatopi hi sukhapītiyā pharaṇatāya sukhāti tikkhamattena vipariṇāmadukkhāti vipariṇāmato abhāvādhigamena sukhanirodhakkhaṇamattena. Tathā hi vuttaṃ papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Sukhakāmo dukkhaṃ titikkhati. Apariññātavatthukānañhi sukhavedanuparamo dukkhato upaṭṭhāti, tasmāyamattho viyogena dīpetabbo. ‘‘Dukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tathācāha papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya natthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Dukkhavedanuparamo hi vuttānaṃ sukhato upaṭṭhāti evāti vadanti. Tassa yogassa vūpasamena ‘‘aho sukhaṃ jāta’’nti majjhattavedanāya jānanabhāvo yāthāvato avabujjhanaṃ sukhaṃ. Adukkhamasukhāpi vedanā vijānantassa sukhaṃ hoti tassa sukhumatāya viññeyyabhāvato. Yathā rūpārūpadhammānaṃ salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca sammadeva avabodho paramaṃ sukhaṃ. Tenāha –
无论从哪个角度去如实观察,他都能看清诸蕴的生起与灭去;
他就能得到喜悦和欢欣,对于有智慧的人来说,那就是不死。巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374);
“无智之苦”是指:由于不了知,而对不苦不乐受所产生的苦。以正确分别了知的体性,就是智的生起。因为与智相应、以智为近缘的不苦不乐受,具有殊胜的行相,所以它既是可意的,也能带来可意的果报。这里说的“不了知的状态”,应当从前面所说的反面来理解它的含义。巴利原文是“了知为苦”,但注释中只把“已了知”这个词单独提出来,这应当看作只是为了显示其含义而已。巴利
Aññāṇadukkhāti ajānanabhāvo adukkhamasukhāvedanāya dukkhaṃ. Sammā vibhāgajānanasabhāvo ñāṇassa sambhavo. Ñāṇasampayuttā hi ñāṇūpanissayā adukkhamasukhā vedanā pasatthākārā, yato sā iṭṭhā ceva iṭṭhaphalā cāti. Ajānanabhāvoti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. ‘‘Dukkhanti vidito’’ti pāḷi, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana viditanti paduddhāro kato, taṃ atthadassanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对受的区分加以了知,就是像“有这三种受”这样,按区分去了知。什么时候了知?有人说是在佛陀说法的那个时候,但更合理的说法是在证悟的时候。因为长老在这里所说的受,正是他已经如实通达的。由于这个原因,也就是凭借“凡是无常的,就是苦”这一道理,即通过了知受的无常性就是苦,他对诸受不再生起渴爱。极戏论,就是过于繁琐的展开。包含在苦当中,是因为它属于苦所涵盖的范围。一切感受都是苦,因为一切受都具有行苦的性质。仅仅已知,就是仅仅如实地了悟。渴爱便不住著,就是不再停留,不再生起。巴利
Vedanāparicchedajānaneti ‘‘tisso imā vedanā’’ti evaṃ paricchedato jānane. Aññāsīti kadā aññāsi? Imasmiṃ desanākāleti vadanti, paṭivedhakāleti pana yuttaṃ. Yathāpaṭividdhā hi vedanā idha therena desitāti. Iminā kāraṇenāti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti vedanānaṃ aniccatāya dukkhabhāvajānanasaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Taṃnimittaṃ hissa vedanāsu taṇhā na uppajjati. Atippapañcoti ativitthāro. Dukkhasmiṃ antogadhaṃ dukkhapariyāpannattā. Dukkhanti sabbaṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato. Ñātamatteti yāthāvato avabujjhanamatte. Taṇhā na tiṭṭhatīti na santiṭṭhati nappavattati.
“如何解脱”是指在内、外两类法上获得解脱。这里的从格是表示原因,所以用表示原因的工具格来说明其含义,说“以哪一种解脱”。或者,这里的从格也可以按工具格的意义来理解,因此那样说。“执取倾向”是指观的开始。外部的法也应当被观照,因为一切应当被遍知的法都要被遍知。让智生起之后。“他们”是指内在行。“确定之后”是指依各自的特相加以界定之后。“引向外”是指把智投向外部行。“引向内”是指对内行作观照。在那里,是指在那个四句的范围内。在确定它们的阶段,是指在观照那些内在行的时候。巴利
Kathaṃ vimokkhāti ajjhattabahiddhābhedesu vimuttā. Hetumhi cetaṃ nissakkavacananti hetuatthena karaṇavacanena atthamāha ‘‘katarena vimokkhenā’’ti. Karaṇatthepi vā etaṃ nissakkavacananti tathā vuttaṃ. Abhinivesoti vipassanārambho. Bahiddhādhammāpi daṭṭhabbāyeva sabbassapi pariññeyyassa parijānitabbato. Ñāṇaṃ pavattetvā. Teti ajjhattasaṅkhāre. Vavatthapetvāti salakkhaṇato paricchinditvā. Bahiddhā otāretīti bahiddhāsaṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāreti. Ajjhattaṃ otāretīti ajjhattasaṅkhāre sammasati. Tatra tasmiṃ catukke. Tesaṃ vavatthānakāleti tesaṃ ajjhattasaṅkhārānaṃ vipassanākāle.
“一切取灭尽”,就是一切取彻底灭尽。见取、戒禁取、我语取确实在初道就已灭尽,但欲取要依靠最高的道才灭尽,所以长老依据这一点说“一切取灭尽”,是在记别自己证得了阿罗汉果。因此他说“诸漏不再流出”。“具念”这个词,是显示他已经达到念的圆满。“从眼对色流出”,意思是在眼识的心路过程以及随之生起的意门心路过程中,以诸色为所缘的诸漏持续生起。在那里虽然也有善心等生起,但只有欲漏等像从疮口流出的脓一样,以流淌不净的方式流出来,其余诸门也是如此。因此说“这样”等话,所以那些才被称为“漏”。因为“漏”这个词,在这里固定用来指那些流淌而出的不净之物。由于他说“我不轻视自己”,注疏长老就说“这是宣说了舍弃下劣慢”。应当知道,这是以总括的方式宣说了诸漏。因为如果不舍弃殊胜慢等,仅仅舍弃下劣慢这件事本身也不会发生。“了知”,就是具备了“不再有未来这样的状态”这句话所说的了知。巴利
Sabbupādānakkhayāti sabbaso upādānānaṃ khayā. Kāmaṃ diṭṭhisīlabbataattavādupādānāni paṭhamamaggeneva khīyanti, kāmupādānaṃ pana aggamaggenāti tassa vasena ‘‘sabbupādānakkhayā’’ti vadanto thero attano arahattapattiṃ byākaroti. Tenāha ‘‘āsavā nānussavantī’’ti. Satoti iminā sativepullappattiṃ dasseti. Cakkhuto rūpe savantīti cakkhuviññāṇavīthiyaṃ tadanugatamanoviññāṇavīthiyañca rūpārammaṇā āsavā pavattantīti. Kiñcāpi tattha kusalādīnampi pavatti atthi, kāmāsavādayo eva vaṇato yūsaṃ viya paggharaṇakaasucibhāvena sandanti, tathā sesavāresu. Tenāha ‘‘eva’’ntiādi, tasmā te eva ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Tattha hi paggharaṇakaasucimhi niruḷho āsavasaddo. ‘‘Attānaṃ nāvajānāmī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘omānapahānaṃ kathita’’nti āha. Tena āsavesu samudāyupalakkhaṇaṃ kathitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi seyyamānādippahānena vinā hīnamānaṃyeva pajahati. Pajānanāti ‘‘nāparaṃ itthattāyā’’ti vuttapajānanasampanno hotīti.
从自性差别来说,也就是以“四”这样来限定数量。世尊为了说明这一点而作了开示,应当这样联系上下文来理解。而“此”这个说法,是指“此亦确实……”等话语而说的。巴利
Sarūpabhedatopīti ‘‘cattāro’’ti evaṃ parimāṇaparicchedatopi. Idaṃ bhagavā dassento āhāti sambandho. Idanti ca ‘‘ayampi kho’’tiādivacanaṃ sandhāyāha.
“完全没有分开”,意思就是就像坐着没起身那样,始终没有离开原位。“为了赞叹人的目的”:是为了称赞、抬高那些擅长说法的阿难长老等人。“为了赞叹法的目的”:是为了称赞修行之法。“那些”:也指阿难长老等比丘们。领受法的比丘们。“于义”:指戒等义理;“于法”:指巴利法藏。巴利
Asambhinnāya evāti yathānisinnāya eva, avuṭṭhitāya evāti attho. Puggalathomanatthanti desanākusalānaṃ ānandattherādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ pasaṃsanatthaṃ ukkaṃsanatthaṃ. Dhammathomanatthanti paṭipattidhammassa pasaṃsanatthaṃ. Tepīti ānandattherādayo bhikkhūpi. Dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū. Attheti sīlādiatthe. Dhammeti pāḷidhamme.
“他的”,是指世尊的。将通过“纵使世尊只有一天……”等说法来显示他的威德。“他”,是指舍利弗长老。“我也要同样地赞叹”,是通过“确实那些比丘……”等说法来表达。“他这样思惟”,是指以接下来将要开示的“法嗣”教说的思惟方式而思惟。因此说“如同……”等。“以同一意乐”,是指有相同的意向。“以慧”,是指以智慧。“此开示为最上”,是说世尊正是这样从功德方面来推崇法将舍利弗。巴利
Assāti bhagavato. Ānubhāvaṃ karissati ‘‘divasañcepi bhagavā’’tiādinā. Nanti sāriputtattheraṃ. Ahampi tatheva thomessāmi ‘‘sā hi bhikkhū’’tiādinā. Evaṃ cintesīti evaṃ vakkhamānena dhammadāyādadesanāya cintitākārena cintesi. Tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Ekajjhāsayāyāti samānādhippāyāya. Matiyāti paññāya. Ayaṃ desanā aggāti bhagavā dhammasenāpatiṃ guṇato evaṃ paggaṇhātīti katvā vuttaṃ.
“开显”是指:从功德上使它变得明显、被人清楚知道,并且想把这位(舍利弗)安立在一切声闻弟子中最胜的位置上。所谓“以心行”,是依心的力量来转变身体,通过决意“愿这个身体像这个心一样”,也就是决意让身体和心达到同样的行进速度。可是,身体运作迟缓,怎么能和变化迅速的心达到同样的行进速度呢?并不是在一切方面都同样。就像依身体来转变心时,心会在一切方面都和身体同样行进。那时,心并不能舍弃由自性成立的自身刹那,转而按运作迟缓的色法刹那来运行;不过,通过决意“愿这个心像这个身体一样”,心就随顺迟缓的身体而行,直到到达想要去的地方。这样,随着身体的行进而运行、以相续方式生起的心,就叫作被身体的行进所转变。同样,通过决意“愿这个身体像这个心一样”,因为已经由轻快想修成,所以不像未修神足的人那样迟缓,只凭几个轻快的心刹那就能到达想要去的地方。这样,色法相续的运行方式就可以被了解了。巴利
Pakāsetvāti guṇato pākaṭaṃ paññātaṃ katvā sabbasāvakehi seṭṭhabhāve ṭhapetukāmo. Cittagatiyā cittavasena kāyassa pariṇāmanena ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti kāyasamānagatikattādhiṭṭhānena. Kathaṃ pana kāyo dandhappavattiko lahuparivattena cittena samānagatiko hotīti? Na sabbathā samānagatiko. Yatheva hi kāyavasena cittavipariṇāmane cittaṃ sabbathā kāyena samānagatikaṃ hoti. Na hi tadā cittaṃ sabhāvasiddhena attano khaṇena avattitvā dandhavuttikassa rūpadhammassa khaṇena vattituṃ sakkoti, ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ ayaṃ kāyo viya hotū’’ti panādhiṭṭhānena dandhagatikassa kāyassa anuvattanato yāva icchitaṭṭhānappatti hoti, tāva kāyagatianulomeneva hutvā santānavasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ kāyagatiyā pariṇāmitaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhānena pageva sukhalahusaññāya sampāditattā abhāvitiddhipādānaṃ viya dandhaṃ avattitvā yathā lahukatipayacittavāreheva icchitaṭṭhānappati hoti, evaṃ pavattarūpatā viññāyatīti.
这段对世尊的赞叹,本来就是顺着他的意趣而说的。因为“世尊将会问这种性质的义理”,这是我以前不知道、也没看见过的。所谓“为了了知意趣”,意思是:“这样作答的人,就把握住了导师的意趣”,也就是为了了知导师意趣的缘故。世尊在问第二个问题时,对第一个问题表示了随喜;因为就在他问第二个问题的时候,第一个问题的解答已经被接受了。巴利
Adhippāyānurūpameva tassa bhagavato thomanāya katattā. Idaṃ nāma atthajātaṃ bhagavā pucchissatīti pubbe mayā aviditaṃ apassaṃ. Āsayajānanatthanti ‘‘evaṃ byākarontena satthu ajjhāsayo gahito hotī’’ti evaṃ satthu ajjhāsayajānanatthaṃ. Dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto bhagavā paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ anumodi dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanteneva paṭhamapañhavissajjanassa sampaṭicchitabhāvato.
“这曾生起”是说这样的寻思曾生起。“他的”是指迦罗刹帝利比丘的。“安住于法”就是法界,指声闻波罗蜜智;意思是:在声闻的范围内,如实安住于法,不动摇,令其确立。因此他说“法界”等。它只运行于一切知智的范围内。“于所缘法”指作为所缘的所知法。巴利
Etaṃ ahosīti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Assāti kaḷārakhattiyassa bhikkhuno. Dhamme dahatīti dhammadhātu, sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ, sāvakavisaye dhamme dahati yāthāvato ajite katvā ṭhapetīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘dhammadhātū’’tiādi. Sabbaññutaññāṇagatikameva visaye. Gocaradhammeti gocarabhūte ñeyyadhamme.
3. 《智事经》的注释巴利
3. Ñāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
33 智本身就是“智事”,因为它是各种成就的因。“在四种中”,是指在为觉悟四圣谛而说的四种智当中。“第一种”,是指像“对老死有智”这样所说的智,这个智通过执持、反复练习和作意而生起,涵盖了一切。应当知道,这只是积聚智,属于闻所成。而它从自性和缘两方面去把握诸法,应当知道这就是思惟智。在这里,以老死为首,也就等于摄取了具有老死的诸法。“通达智”,是指以不迷乱而通达的智。“以此法”,是表示原因的具格。因为以证得此法为因,这位圣者即使依照过去和未来的方式,也能现观四圣谛法。不过,为了说明道智也像观察过去未来的方式那样,才说了第二种说法:“或以道智法”。因为这样,“无时”才得以成立。巴利
33.Ñāṇameva ñāṇavatthu sampattīnaṃ kāraṇabhāvato. Catūsūti catusaccassa bodhanavasena vuttesu catūsu ñāṇesu. Paṭhamanti ‘‘jarāmaraṇe ñāṇa’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ, yena dhāraṇaparicayamanasikāravasena pavattaṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhi. Sannicayañāṇamayaṃ savanamayaṃ nāmatveva veditabbaṃ. Sabhāvato paccayato cassa pariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃtveva veditabbaṃ. Jarāmaraṇasīsena cettha jarāmaraṇavantova dhammā gahitā. Paṭivedhañāṇanti asammohato paṭivijjhanañāṇaṃ. Iminā dhammenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Imassa hi dhammassa adhigamahetu ayaṃ ariyo atītānāgate nayenapi catusaccadhamme abhisambujjhati. Maggañāṇameva pana atītānāgate nayanasadisaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘maggañāṇadhammena vā’’ti dutiyavikappo vutto. Evañhi ‘‘akālika’’nti samatthitaṃ hoti.
用智眼所见:就是用成为法眼的智眼,以无迷乱的通达,直接照见。以慧已知:就是用道慧同样地了知。因为这样见、这样知、完全达到,就是极大的善巧方便,所以说“已深入”。或者说,“所见”就是看见,意思是见法而安住。“已知”就是了知四圣谛并使它们清楚显现而安住。“无时的”:不是隔一段时间才给果报。“已达到”:因为已经达到四圣谛而安住,所以是达到法。“已深入”:就是深入四圣谛法而安住。于过去未来行推论:就是于过去和未来行推论、引导、推动。不过,这是省察智的作用,而导师因为道智是它的根本,所以把道智说成如同于过去未来行推论。因为对过去道的省察就叫省察,所以说道智被说成如同推论,实际上是以省察智行推论。因此说“在此……”等。为了显示怎样行推论,才说“凡任何……”等。在这里,推论的产生正是推论智的运作方式,所以说“是省察智的作用”。虽然也说了“以此,即道智法”,但道智和果智两者是思惟智与省察智的根本因,而不是推论本身,所以说“以二种智法”并非不合理。同样,由于了知四圣谛法,或者由于被称为道果的法与谛通达相应,所以说“成为推论”,也就是以此智为所缘、与此智相应,并且就是由此智所知。随随:就是随顺法智而觉悟,因为对已见之法随行推论未见之法,又使未见之法成为已见,所以这样说。因此说“是随顺法智的智”。漏尽者的有学地,就是最后道智的刹那。为什么这样说呢?因为“这样了知老死”等说法,是就现在进行的状态而开示的。巴利
Ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhenāti dhammacakkhubhūtena ñāṇacakkhunā asammohapaṭivedhavasena paccakkhato diṭṭhena. Paññāya viditenāti maggapaññāya tatheva viditena. Yasmā tathā diṭṭhaṃ viditaṃ sabbaso pattaṃ mahāupāyo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhenā’’ti. Diṭṭhenāti vā dassanena, dhammaṃ passitvā ṭhitenāti attho. Viditenāti cattāri saccāni viditvā pākaṭāni katvā ṭhitena. Akālikenāti na kālantaravipākadāyinā. Pattenāti cattāri saccāni patvā ṭhitattā dhammaṃ pattena. Pariyogāḷhenāti catusaccadhamme pariyogāhitvā ṭhitena. Atītānāgate nayaṃ netīti atīte ca anāgate ca nayaṃ neti harati peseti. Idaṃ pana paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa kiccaṃ, satthārā pana maggañāṇaṃ atītānāgate nayanasadisaṃ kataṃ taṃmūlakattā. Atītamaggassa hi paccavekkhaṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā maggañāṇaṃ nayanasadisaṃ kataṃ nāma hoti, paccavekkhaṇañāṇena pana nayaṃ neti. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Yathā pana tena nayaṃ neti. Taṃ ākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca nayanuppādanaṃ nayañāṇasseva pavattiviseso. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa kicca’’nti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘imināti maggañāṇadhammena vā’’ti vuttaṃ, duvidhaṃ pana maggaphalañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇapaccavekkhaṇāya mūlakāraṇaṃ, na nayanassāti duvidhena ñāṇadhammenāti na na yujjati. Tathā catusaccadhammassa ñātattā maggaphalasaṅkhātassa vā dhammassa saccapaṭivedhasampayogaṃ gatattā ‘‘nayanaṃ hotū’’ti tena ‘‘iminā dhammenā’’ti ñāṇassa visayabhāvena ñāṇasampayogena tadañātenāti ca attho na na yujjati. Anuayeti dhammañāṇassa anurūpavasena aye bujjhanañāṇe diṭṭhānaṃ adiṭṭhānayanato adiṭṭhassa diṭṭhatāya ñāpanato ca. Tenāha ‘‘dhammañāṇassa anugamane ñāṇa’’nti. Khīṇāsavassa sekkhabhūmi nāma aggamaggakkhaṇo . Kasmā panetaṃ evaṃ vuttanti ce? ‘‘Evaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā vattamānavasena desanāya pavattattā.
《第二智事经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyañāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
34 “七十七”这个词,是把 ta 音替换成了 ra 音来说的。或者,sattari 这个词和 sattati(七十)意思相同。按照各人对音节的喜好来诵出音节,就叫“音节诵者”。因此说“作多音节”等等。“住”:果依靠它而得以维持运转,所以叫住;具有当下特征的法之住,就是法住。或者,“法”指原因,也就是缘的意思。法之住的那种状态,本身就是法,离开法之外没有别的住,所以叫法住,也就是缘。对它的智,就是法住智。因此法将舍利弗说:“在观察缘的智慧,就是法住智。”(Paṭi. Ma. Mātikā 4)又这样说:“在缘的行相上的智”等等。那里说的“诸法”,是指缘所生诸法。因为是生起运转之住的原因,所以说是生起运转之住的原因。以“生缘老死”等,在三种时世中,以随顺和违背的方式,对生起有六种智。尽,就是灭,也就是彼即破坏。离染、坏灭。灭尽、消失。在每一个中,即在老死等每一个中。前面说“如实智”,是指初观。所以这里也把法住智理解为观,而说“观与反观已说”。巴利
34.Sattarīti ta-kārassa ra-kārādesaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattatisaddena vā samānattho sattarisaddo. Byañjanarucivasena byañjanaṃ bhaṇantīti byañjanabhāṇakā. Tenāha ‘‘bahubyañjanaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Tiṭṭhati tattha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhiti, paccuppannalakkhaṇassa dhammassa ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti. Atha vā dhammoti kāraṇaṃ, paccayoti attho. Dhammassa yo ṭhitisabhāvo, sova dhammato añño natthīti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayo. Tattha ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati – ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 4). Tathā cāha ‘‘paccayākāre ñāṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha dhammānanti paccayuppannadhammānaṃ. Pavattiṭṭhitikāraṇattāti pavattisaṅkhātāya ṭhitiyā kāraṇattā. ‘‘Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādinā addhattaye anvayabyatirekavasena pavattiyā chabbidhassa ñāṇassa. Khayo nāma vināso, sova bhedoti. Virajjanaṃ palujjanaṃ. Nirujjhanaṃ antaradhānaṃ. Ekekasminti jarāmaraṇādīsu ekekasmiṃ. Pubbe ‘‘yathābhūtañāṇa’’nti taruṇavipassanaṃ āha. Tasmā idhāpi dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ vipassanāti gahetvā ‘‘vipassanāpaṭivipassanā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ.
《无明为缘经》的注释巴利
5. Avijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
35 “停止说法”:就是把已经开始讲的教说停下来。当时,佛陀想通过破除在座那位见行者的执见,继续往上讲。因为诸佛一旦开始说法,就没有任何人能打断它来提问。所以说“为了给见行者机会”。这是个难问,因为它是依着“众生可得”的见解来问的。“众生可得之说”这个词,是指“众生、命者可得”这样生起的见解所用的说法。用这个来说,所以叫“说”。不过“见”这个词包含两种意思,这里说的“此见”,就是认为身与命非异的见;“命者”则只是指生命本身。轮转有两种轮转。所谓“令灭”,就是令其达到不再生起的法性。所谓“令断”,就是令其不再现行而截断。因此,这应当由圣道所灭的轮转便灭尽了,这是连接。若“此众生达到毁灭、不存在之后,就完全断灭”这样断灭见的所执方式确实存在、有其真实,那才成立;否则“不存在”就没有意义。而梵行生活在究竟义上就是圣道的修习,所以说“圣道住”。巴利
35.Desanaṃ osāpesīti yathāraddhakathaṃ ṭhapesi. Tattha nisinnassa diṭṭhigatikassa laddhiyā bhindanavasena upari kathetukāmo. Buddhānañhi desanāvāraṃ pacchindāpetvā pucchituṃ samattho nāma koci natthi. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhigatikassa okāsadānattha’’nti. Duppañho eso sattūpaladdhiyā pucchitattā . Sattūpaladdhivādapadenāti ‘‘satto jīvo upalabbhatī’’ti evaṃ pavattadiṭṭhidīpakapadavasena. Vadanti etenāti vādo. Diṭṭhi-saddo pana dvayasaṅgahito, brahmacariyavāso pana paramatthato ariyamaggabhāvanāti āha ‘‘ariyamaggavāso’’ti. Ayaṃ diṭṭhīti anaññe sarīrajīvāti diṭṭhi. ‘‘Jīvo’’ti ca jīvitameva vadanti. Vaṭṭanti duvidhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ. Nirodhentoti anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento. Samucchindantoti appavattiyaṃ pāpanena upacchindanto. Tadetaṃ maggena nirodhetabbaṃ vaṭṭaṃ nirujjhatīti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ satto vināsaṃ abhāvaṃ patvā sabbaso ucchijjatī’’ti evaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiyā gahitākārassa sambhave saccabhāve sati. Na hotīti sātthako na hoti.
“去”是指从身体出来而离去。“令不再转起”的意思是让它不再生起。“不能令不再转起”,是因为对于恒常的事物,不可能让它达到不再生起。邪见损害正见:由于亲近未得定的人而如此生起,也由于不给机会,以及对本应断除的却不予断除,所以损害正见。如同荆棘一般:就像刺一样。它不只是不随顺,还因为用“恒常”等说法来显示法性,所以直接与正见相违。怪异、令人厌恶的颤动、挣扎。多罗树是叶、花、果、嫩芽的依托之处,就像“无实质”这个名称一样。有些人读作“tālavatthukatāni”,意思是把它们弄得像没有实质的多罗树一样。因此说“犹如被截去树顶的多罗树”。“消亡”:就是毁灭。巴利
Gacchatīti sarīrato nikkhamitvā gacchati. Vivaṭṭentoti appavattiṃ karontoti attho. Vivaṭṭetuṃ na sakkoti niccassa appavattiṃ pāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Micchādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhiṃ vijjhati asamāhitapuggalasevanavasena tathā pavattituṃ appadānavasena ca pajahitabbāpajahanavasena sammādiṭṭhiṃ vijjhati. Visūkamivāti kaṇḍako viya. Na kevalaṃ ananuvattakova, atha kho virodhopi ‘‘nicca’’ntiādinā pavattanadhammatāya viññāpanato. Virūpaṃ bībhacchaṃ phanditaṃ vipphanditaṃ. Paṇṇapupphaphalapallavānaṃ avatthubhūto tālo eva tālāvatthu ‘‘asive sivā’’ti vohāro viya. Keci pana ‘‘tālavatthukatānī’’ti paṭhanti, avatthubhūtatāya tālo viya katānīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘matthakacchinnatālo viyā’’ti. Anuabhāvanti vināsaṃ.
第二部《无明缘经》的注释巴利
6. Dutiyaavijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
36 “Iti vā”的意思是“或者这样说”。有人可能会从刹那生灭的角度,来讲“老死”以及“老死的主人”。他因为缺乏自信,不擅长提问,所以变得沉默不语。因此说“不能问”。巴利
36.Iti vāti evaṃ vā. Jarāmaraṇassa ceva jarāmaraṇasāmikassa ca khaṇavasena yo vadeyya. Avisāradadhātuko pucchituṃ acchekatāya maṅkubhāvena jāto. Tenāha ‘‘pucchituṃ na sakkotī’’ti.
第七部《非你们经》的注释巴利
7. Natumhasuttavaṇṇanā
37 “不是你们的”这句话,只是为了显示身体并非我所有。为了说明身体的非我所性,才说了“在自己当中……”等话。如果身体不是我的,那它就可能属于别人;为了说明那也不成立,所以又说“也不属于他人”。“此非旧业”:这里说的“此身体”并不是旧业,因为身体并不是感受的本性。“以缘的名义”,就是通过原因来说。“被造作”等词是中性形式,这是为了跟前面“此是旧业”的中性表达保持一致。“被造作”,就是由相互朝向的诸缘共同造作而成,所以说“应理解为由诸缘所造”。“被故意造作”:就是依那种被造作的状态,以朝向的方式去思、去计划,意思是已经生起。“以思为事”:就是以思为因。“应被感受者”:是对感受有助益的,因为它作为依处或所缘而成为感受的缘,所以说为“感受之事”。巴利
37.Natumhākanti kāyassa anattaniyabhāvadassanameva panetanti yā tassa anattaniyatā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘attani hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadi na attaniyaṃ, parakiyaṃ nāma siyāti, tampi natthīti dassento ‘‘nāpi aññesa’’nti āha. Nayidaṃ purāṇakammamevāti ‘‘idaṃ kāyo’’ti vuttasarīraṃ purāṇakammameva na hoti. Na hi kāyo vedanāsabhāvo. Paccayavohārenāti kāraṇopacārena. Abhisaṅkhatantiādi napuṃsakaliṅgavacanaṃ. Purimaliṅgasabhāgatāyāti ‘‘purāṇamidaṃ kamma’’nti evaṃ vuttapurimanapuṃsakaliṅgasabhāgatāya. Aññamaññābhimukhehi samecca paccayehi kato abhisaṅkhatoti āha ‘‘paccayehi katoti daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Abhisañcetayitanti tathā abhisaṅkhatattasaṅkhātena abhimukhabhāvena cetayitaṃ pakappitaṃ, pavattitanti attho. Cetanāvatthukoti cetanāhetuko. Vedaniyanti vedanāya hitaṃ vatthārammaṇabhāvena vedanāya paccayabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘vedaniyavatthū’’ti.
第八《思经》注释巴利
8. Cetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
38 这里“Yaṃ ca”中的“ca”字用得不合适。它要说明的是:就像思一样,计划和随眠对识的住立来说,也成为没有区别的所缘状态,这一点接下来就会讲到。虽然在三处里都说了“转起”的意思,但思、计划、随眠各自的“转起”之义,应依次理解为思惟、计划、随眠这些不同的具体含义。选取三地中的善与不善思,是为了确定业识的缘。渴爱与邪见的计划,则随各自相应的情况被取用,用意就在这里:因为在八个与贪俱行的心中,有渴爱的计划;而其中只有四个心有邪见的计划。随眠虽然也潜藏在世间善思里,但在不善心中,它的现行更明显,所以说“十二种思”。所谓“俱生分”:这是说现前存在的欲贪等也被称为随眠,因为它们与随眠相似。因为特相并不会因为时间不同而有所不同。严格来说,只有未来的欲贪等才适合称为“随眠”。“缘已生起”是合理的说法,所以说“所缘是缘”。“对于业识的住立”,就是指业识的转起。“当那个缘存在时”,就是当称为思、计划、随眠的缘存在时,识便得以住立。在相续中,只是有能给予果报的能力,所以说“住立,当它住立时”。以定作思之力而增长。因为“住立”这个词说明了业已作的状态,“增长”这个词说明了已积集的状态。因此说“令业速行”等。其中,因为由先前生起的业思获得了缘,所以由获得力量的定作思,业识便获得住立并增长根本,所以说“生起已生之根”。同样,定作思给予果报时,是以无间生起的方式给予,即生报业。巴利
38.Yañcāti ettha ca-saddo aṭṭhāne. Tena cetanāya viya pakappānānusayānampi viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā vakkhamānaṃyeva avisiṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇabhāvaṃ joteti. Kāmaṃ tīsupi padesu ‘‘pavatteti’’icceva attho vutto, vattanattho pana cetanādīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ cetayanapakappanānusayanarūpo visiṭṭhaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. Tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā gahitā kammaviññāṇassa paccayaniddhāraṇametanti. Taṇhādiṭṭhikappā gahitā yathārahanti adhippāyo. Aṭṭhasupi hi lobhasahagatacittesu taṇhākappo, tattha catūsveva diṭṭhikappoti. Kāmaṃ anusayā lokiyakusalacetanāsupi anusentiyeva, akusalesu pana pavatti pākaṭāti ‘‘dvādasannaṃ cetanāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sahajātakoṭiyāti idaṃ paccuppannāpi kāmarāgādayo anusayāva vuccanti taṃsadisatāyāti vuttaṃ. Na hi kālabhedena lakkhaṇappabhedo atthīti. Anāgatā eva hi kāmarāgādayo nippariyāyato ‘‘anusayā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahanti. Paccayuppanno vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ paccayo’’ti. Kammaviññāṇassa ṭhitatthanti kammaviññāṇasseva pavattiyā. Tasmiṃ paccaye satīti tasmiṃ cetanāpakappanānusayasaññite paccaye sati patiṭṭhā viññāṇassa hoti. Santāne phaladānasamatthatāyeva hotīti ‘‘patiṭṭhā hoti, tasmiṃ patiṭṭhite’’ti vuttaṃ. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāvasena viruḷheti. Patiṭṭhiteti hi iminā kammassa katabhāvo vutto, ‘‘viruḷhe’’ti iminā upacitabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ javāpetvā’’tiādi. Tattha puretaraṃ uppannāhi kammacetanāhi laddhapaccayattā balappattāya sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya kammaviññāṇaṃ laddhapatiṭṭhaṃ viruḷhamūlañca hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbattamūle jāte’’ti. Tathā hi sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā vipākaṃ dentaṃ anantare jātivasena deti upapajjavedanīyakammanti.
“三地思”是指三地中的善与不善思。“不转起的刹那”在这里是指转起的刹那、正在生起的刹那。并不是说正在生起的刹那就是不转起的刹那,也不只是坏灭的刹那,因为这里要表达的是随眠尚未被断除的情况。“未被断除的分位”是指尚未被断除的状态。这就是说,当三地中的善与不善思不转起时,随眠并不以俱生分等方式转起;但在异熟果等情况下,则依未被断除的分位而转起,因为并没有一个造作者存在,所以才这样说。“未被遮止”是指未被对治法所遮止,是指没有障碍。它正是识住立的缘。巴利
Tebhūmakacetanāyāti tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanāya. Appavattanakkhaṇoti idha pavattanakkhaṇo jāyamānakkhaṇo. Na jāyamānakkhaṇo appavattanakkhaṇo na kevalaṃ bhaṅgakkhaṇo appahīnānusayassa adhippetattā. Appahīnakoṭiyāti asamucchinnabhāvena. Tadidaṃ tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanāsu appavattamānāsu anusayānaṃ sahajātakoṭiādinā pavatti nāma natthi, vipākādīsu appahīnakoṭiyā pavattati karontassa abhāvatoti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Avāritattāti paṭipakkheti avāritabbattā. Paccayova hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā.
通过第一和第二种解说方式显示了轮回流转,接着在第三种解说方式中,以“如果不……”等语句显示了还灭,因此论中说“在第一句中,三地的善与不善思已被止息”等等。这里“已被止息”是指因为不再造作,所以不再生起、已经离去。“渴爱与邪见已被止息”应当这样连接理解。“在所说的各种方式中”,就是指前面所说的“在三地异熟果等”情形中。巴利
Paṭhamadutiyavārehi vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā tatiyavāre ‘‘no ce’’tiādinā vivaṭṭaṃ dassitanti ‘‘paṭhamapade tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā nivattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nivattāti akaraṇato appavattiyā apagatā. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyo nivattāti yojanā. Vuttappakāresūti ‘‘tebhūmakavipākesū’’tiādinā vuttappakāresu.
这里说的“在此”,就是指这部经里。在这里,是依照思和计画的运作方式来说明法的分类,所以指出:“所谓‘思’,就是取三地中的善思和不善思”等等,这个说法正是在这里要说明的。所谓“四种”,就是与两种嗔和痴根相应而合起来的四种不善思。所谓“在四种不善思中”,就是指前面所说的那四种不善思;至于其他的不善思,则通过“不计画”这个否定说法而被排除掉了。所谓“排除经中所说”,就是把经中以否定方式说的“也不计画”排除掉。因为通过“不计画”,就止息了在八种贪俱心中以俱生方式运作的随眠;由于那些心不运作,所以要去掉那种情况。后面的部分应像前面一样,按照先前所说的方式来理解,因为这都是对法的分类。巴利
Etthāti imasmiṃ sutte. Ettha cetanāpakappanānaṃ pavattanavasena dhammaparicchedo dassitoti ‘‘cetetīti tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā gahitā’’tiādinayo idheva hotīti dassito. Catassoti paṭighadvayamohamūlasamāgatā catasso akusalacetanā. Catūsu akusalacetanāsūti yathāvuttāsu eva catūsu akusalacetanāsu, itarā pana ‘‘na pakappetī’’ti iminā paṭikkhepena nivattāti. Sutte āgataṃ vāretvāti ‘‘no ca pakappetī’’ti evaṃ paṭikkhepavasena sutte āgataṃ vajjetvā. ‘‘Na pakappetī’’ti hi iminā aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittesu sahajātakoṭiyā pavattaanusayo nivattito tesaṃ cittānaṃ appavattanato, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvāti attho. Purimasadisova purimanayesu vuttanayena gahetabbo dhammaparicchedattā.
“Tadappatiṭṭhite”这个词,因为属于复合词,所以省略了格尾;又依照连音规则插入了da音。它的意思是“那无住立”,即“那个无住立”;也就是“在那个无住立当中”。这里的复合词构成应当这样理解。“在此”是指在第三种解说中,说的是阿罗汉道的作用,因为它从一切方面彻底断除了随眠的生起。也可以说,这是漏尽者所作之事,因为它完全遮止了感受等。也可以说,这是九种出世间法,因为依照道的次第断除随眠,道之后紧接着有果,而这两者都以涅槃为所缘。“识的”是指业识。以“后有”为首,包含了无间有的名色,或者直接指结生识,所以说“在中有与后有的中间有一个连接”。“有与生”在这里应当按辗转相续的方式来理解,也就是“第二有的第三有之生”等等。不过,通过把取“未来后有的再生”,就包含了非无间的业有;这里其实已经说明了生的因与果的成立。再者,世尊在第二种解说中说:“诸比丘,如果不思、不计画,只是随眠。”这是为了显示:即使先前没有造作能引生有的善与不善业,也没有计画,对于已在诸有中见过过患的修行者来说,由于随眠为缘,连观禅的思也能成为结生之因;也是为了显示:即使善与不善没有现行,那时在现有的各地域果报等法中,由于随眠烦恼以未断除的形态存在,所以不堕入有的业识仍然得以住立。这里没有采用“不思、计画、随眠”这一说法,因为没有思就没有计画。巴利
Tadappatiṭṭhiteti samāsabhāvato vibhattilopo, sandhivasena da-kārāgamo, tassa appatiṭṭhitaṃ tadappatiṭṭhitaṃ, tasmiṃ tadappatiṭṭhiteti evamettha samāsapadasiddhi daṭṭhabbā. Etthāti etasmiṃ tatiyavāre arahattamaggassa kiccaṃ kathitaṃ sabbaso anusayanibbattibhedanato. Khīṇāsavassa kiccakaraṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati sabbaso vedanādīnaṃ paṭikkhepabhāvato. Nava lokuttaradhammātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati maggapaṭipāṭiyā anusayasamugghāṭanato maggānantarāni phalāni, tadubhayārammaṇañca nibbānanti. Viññāṇassāti kammaviññāṇassa. Punabbhavasīsena anantarabhavasaṅgahitaṃ nāmarūpaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vā gahitanti āha ‘‘punabbhavassa ca antare eko sandhī’’ti. Bhavajātīnanti ettha ‘‘dutiyabhavassa tatiyabhave jātiyā’’ti evaṃ paramparavasena gahetabbaṃ. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattigahaṇena pana nānantariyato kammabhavo gahito, jātihetuphalasiddhipettha vuttā evāti veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘no ce, bhikkhave, ceteti no ca pakappeti, atha kho anusetī’’ti evaṃ bhagavatā dutiyanaye pubbabhāge bhavanibbattakakusalākusalāyūhanaṃ, pakappanañca vināpi bhavesu diṭṭhādīnavassa yogino anusayapaccayā vipassanācetanāpi paṭisandhijanakā hotīti dassanatthaṃ kusalākusalassa appavatti cepi, tadā vijjamānatebhūmakavipākādidhammesu appahīnakoṭiyā anusayitakilesappaccayā bhavavajjassa kammaviññāṇassa patiṭṭhitatā hotīti dassanatthañca vutto. ‘‘Na ceteti pakappeti anusetī’’ti ayaṃ nayo na gahito cetanaṃ vinā pakappanassa abhāvato.
第九部《第二思经》的注释巴利
9. Dutiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
39 在识与名色之间有一个连接,这就是因果的连接,因为“识”这个词已经包含了业识。而名色则只是果报名色,这一点很清楚。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
39.Viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃantare eko sandhīti hetuphalasandhi viññāṇaggahaṇena kammaviññāṇassa gahitattā. Nāmarūpaṃ pana vipākanāmarūpamevāti pākaṭameva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第十部《第三思经》的注释巴利
10. Tatiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
40 在色等六种所缘中。因此这里涵盖了三有,因为一切都包含在六所缘之内。对这三有的渴求,以发愿等方式而称为倾向。来:在来处的说法中,以趣为现起的状态,朝向趣的流转便称为来,也就是业等相。在其中,结生识的趣、流转、出生便发生。因此说在所来处等。死与再生:死即命终,死亡。再生即出生,再次生起。从死之后再生,即是再次出现。因此说如是,对于识等。由此是指从导致再生的有;在那里是指在名为后有的未来有中。一个连结:即这里所说的唯一的因果连结。巴利
40.Rūpādīsu chasu ārammaṇesu. Tena cettha bhavattayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti chaḷārammaṇapariyāpannattā. Tasseva bhavattayassa patthanā paṇidhānādivasena nati nāma. Āgatimhi gatīti paccupaṭṭhānavasena abhimukhaṃ gati pavatti etasmāti āgati, kammādinimittaṃ. Tasmiṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa gati pavatti nibbatti hoti. Tenāha ‘‘āgate’’tiādi. Cutūpapātoti cavanaṃ cuti, maraṇaṃ. Upapajjanaṃ nibbatti, upapāto. Cutito upapāto punaruppādo. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ viññāṇassā’’tiādi. Itoti nibbattabhavato. Tatthāti punabbhavasaṅkhāte āyatibhave. Ekova sandhīti eko hetuphalasandhi eva kathito.
《五怖畏经》的注释巴利
1. Pañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
41 41.「Yato」是指某个时候。这里的「to」这个字就像「dā」一样,在此处是表示时间的范围,所以说「yadā」(当……时)。「bhayaveracetanāyo」(恐惧与怨敌之思):因为具有可怖畏的含义而称为「bhaya」(恐惧),因为具有产生怨敌的含义而称为「vera」(怨敌)——这些思就是这样得名的。因为,杀生等恶业在谁身上生起,又是为了谁而生起,这两者都带有恐惧与怖畏,所以这些思正是可怖畏的恐惧与怨敌的制造者。从圣道最初开始修行而证得,就是入流;为了这个目的而安住其中者所具备的支,就是入流支。合这两者来说,所以说「入流支有两种」,意思是「入流目的的支」。所谓「yaṃ pubbabhāge」(在前分阶段),是指在亲自证得入流道果之前,为了那个目标而起作用的前行阶段。那么那是什么呢?他说「亲近善士」等等。亲近佛陀等具足圣智之名的善士;听闻正法,即听闻四谛之法;如理作意,即从无常等方面以正确方法作意;法随法行,即激励自己而随法修行。这些就是入流的支。不过,注释书中针对「入流支」这个词,说「如此而来」。这是指安住者的支。入流者以此而被了知、被认识,所以也称为入流者的支。这是后来所说的支。远离诸过失,所以是圣者,因此说「无过失」。如何说无明是行的缘等等,因为不被任何人所驳斥,所以是无可驳斥的。针对智而说「无过失」,针对缘起而说「无可驳斥」。另一些人则说,这是针对两者而说的。这里所指的是缘起。因为这样说:「对于次第生起的观智」。因为道智并不是观智。由于方法正确,所以对于缘起所生之法能如实了知,这就是「ñāya」,即缘起。而智则以此而被了知,所以是「ñāya」。巴利
41.Yatoti yasmiṃ kāle. Ayañhi to-saddo dā-saddo viya idha kālavisayo. Tenāha ‘‘yadā’’ti. Bhayaveracetanāyoti bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayaṃ, verapasavanaṭṭhena veranti ca laddhanāmā cetanāyo. Pāṇātipātādayo hi yassa pavattanti, yañca uddissa pavattiyanti, ubhaye sabhayabheravāti te eva bhāyitabbabhayaverajanakāvāti. Sotassa ariyamaggassa ādito paṭṭhāya paṭipattiadhigamo sotāpatti , tadatthāya tattha patiṭṭhitassa ca aṅgāni sotāpattiyaṅgāni, tadubhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘duvidhaṃ sotāpattiyā aṅga’’nti, sotāpattiatthaṃ aṅganti attho. Yaṃ pubbabhāgeti yaṃ sayaṃ sotāpattimaggaphalapaṭilābhato pubbabhāge tadatthāya saṃvattati. Kiṃ pana tanti āha ‘‘sappurisasaṃsevo’’tiādi. Sappurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyañāṇasaññāṇajātā payirupāsanā, saddhammassavanaṃ catusaccadhammassavanaṃ, yoniso upāyena aniccādito manasi karaṇaṃ yoniso manasikāro, ussukkāpentena dhammassa nibbānassa anudhammapaṭipajjanaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipattīti etāni sotāpattiyā aṅgāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana sotāpattiaṅganti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘evaṃ āgata’’nti vuttaṃ. Ṭhitassa puggalassa aṅgaṃ. Sotāpanno aṅgīyati ñāyati etenāti sotāpannassa aṅgantipi vuccati. Idaṃ pacchā vuttaṃ aṅgaṃ. Dosehi ārakāti ariyoti āha ‘‘niddoso’’ti. Kathaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayotiādinā kenacipi anupārambhiyattā nirupārambho. Ñāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘niddoso’’ti vuttaṃ, paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘nirupārambho’’ti vadanti. Ubhayampi pana sandhāya ubhayaṃ vuttanti apare. Paṭiccasamuppādo ettha adhippeto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘aparāparaṃ uppannāya vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti. Na hi maggañāṇaṃ vipassanāpaññāti. Sammā upāyattā tassa paṭiccasamuppanne yāthāvato ñāyatīti ñāyo, paṭiccasamuppādo. Ñāṇaṃ pana ñāyati so etenāti ñāyo.
其中,“在那里”指在地狱里。“道流”就是道的流。“进入”就是证得。他具有在恶趣中受生这种堕落的性质,所以叫有堕落性质者;没有堕落性质,就叫无堕落性质者。“超越感官所及”意思是:必须极其超越感官所及的范围,去了知、觉悟。因为某些词根既有“去”的含义,也有“智”的含义。因此说“决定完全觉悟者”。巴利
Tatthāti niraye. Maggasotanti maggassa sotaṃ. Āpannoti adhigato. Apāyesu uppajjanasaṅkhāto vinipātadhammo etassāti vinipātadhammo, na vinipātadhammo avinipātadhammo. Paraṃ ayananti ativiya savisaye ayitabbaṃ bujjhitabbaṃ. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tenāha ‘‘avassaṃ abhisambujjhanako’’ti.
杀生业的原因,就是造作被称为杀生的恶业的原因。“怨敌”说的是对立,正因为它是可怕的对象,所以就是恐惧,因此说“恐惧和怨敌在意义上是一回事”。这个称为外在的怨敌,因为对于作为那怨敌根源的造怨者来说,它是外在的。正因如此,针对那造怨者心中生起的怨敌,才说“这称为内在的怨敌”。意思是:依附于那怨敌、作为怨敌根源的造怨者的思生起,即使没有能力动手反击也是如此。因为地狱众生确实无力对地狱卒反击,而地狱卒的思会生起,这就表明“地狱中有地狱卒”。然而所谓“外在怨敌”,是指现世和来世的外在怨敌。说“个人怨敌”,是因为不能达成自己的目的,仅仅是在其他个人身上生起的怨敌而已。从意义上说,两者其实是一回事,因为特别指明是“心所”。在其余语句中,即在“由不与取为缘”等所说的其余部分中。意义被破坏,就是意义被摧毁。由已证得的,即由已证得的道。也有读作“abhigatena”的,意思是已遍知。因此他说“以不动摇的净信”。巴利
Pāṇātipātakammakāraṇāti pāṇātipātasaṅkhātassa pāpakammassa karaṇahetu. Veraṃ vuccati virodho, tadeva bhāyitabbato bhayanti āha ‘‘bhayaṃ veranti atthato eka’’nti. Idaṃ bāhiraṃ veraṃ nāma tassa verassa mūlabhūtato verakārapuggalato bahibhāvattā. Teneva hi tassa verakārapuggalassa uppannaṃ veraṃ sandhāya ‘‘idaṃ ajjhattikaveraṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, tannissitassa verassa mūlabhūtā verakārapuggalacetanā uppajjati paharituṃ asamatthassapīti adhippāyo. Na hi nerayikā nirayapālesu paṭipaharituṃ sakkonti. Nirayapālassa cetanā uppajjatīti etena ‘‘atthi niraye nirayapālā’’ti dasseti. Yaṃ panetaṃ bāhiraveranti yamidaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ samparāyikañca bāhiraṃ veraṃ. Puggalaveranti vuttaṃ attakiccaṃ sādhetuṃ asakkonto kevalaṃ parapuggale uppannamattaṃ veranti katvā. Atthato ekameva ‘‘cetasika’’nti visesetvā vuttattā. Sesapadesūti ‘‘adinnādānapaccayā’’tiādinā āgatesu sesakoṭṭhāsesu. Attho bhaggoti attho dhaṃsito . Adhigatenāti maggena adhigatena. ‘‘Abhigatenā’’tipi pāṭho, adhivuttenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘acalappasādenā’’ti.
第二部《五怖畏经》的义注巴利
2. Dutiyapañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
42 用“只是对比丘们宣说这一点,就是差别”这句话,他要说明的是:有些教法是导师对某些人讲的,后来在另一个时候,那位善于调伏应调伏者的导师又对另外一些人讲了同样的教法;结集法的人为了不让导师的教法因为没有被人完整接受而消失,就把这些教法分别归入不同的结集。巴利
42.Bhikkhūnaṃ kathitabhāvamattameva visesoti etena yā satthārā ekaccānaṃ desitadesanā, puna tadaññesaṃ veneyyadamakusalena kālantare teneva desitā, sā dhammasaṃgāhakehi ‘‘mā no satthudesanā sampaṭiggahaṃ vinā nassatū’’ti visuṃ saṅgahaṃ āropitāti dasseti.
3. 《苦经》的义注巴利
3. Dukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
43 43. “集起就是集”,以及“从这里生起,所以是集”——应当知道,这两种集在意义上也有这样的差别。缘本身就是缘集。已经开始修观的比丘,观察到“依靠这个和那个缘的和合,这些法在每一刹那中生起”,这就被称为“正在观察缘集的人也在观察刹那集”,因为他是通过观察缘而见到了生起的那一刹那。不过,当他开始观察诸行在每一刹那中生起时,他观察到“就是由这些缘而生起”。他们说:“正在观察刹那集的人,就是在观察缘。”然而,因为从缘观察诸行的生起时,也就从刹那见到了它们的生起;而从刹那观察这些法的生起时,由于缘已经被很好地把握,从缘来观察就更容易成功,所以才说“正在观察缘集的人”等等。观察灭去时也是同样的道理。“究竟灭尽”是指不再转起的灭,也就是涅槃。“坏灭尽”是指刹那灭。在前期阶段,通过把握、反复询问等方式观察这两者时,只要见到其中一种,另一种的见到也就自然成立;而在前期阶段,以所缘的方式,在从坏灭、以毗婆舍那观察等时候,观察坏灭尽,同时也通过听闻等方式更多地观察究竟灭尽。但在道的那一刹那,他依所缘观察究竟灭尽,也以不迷惑而观察另一种。针对这一点,才说“正在观察究竟灭尽的人”等等。“集与灭”是指生起与坏灭,也就是以集为名的生起和以灭为名的坏灭。“依止方面”是指以眼为依止而作为缘。“所缘方面”是指以色为所缘。这里应当说的内容,应按照《蜜丸经注》中所说的方式来理解。“三法的会和就是触”,即“眼、色、识”这三法的会和、聚集时生起触,所以说“三法的和会就是触”。说“三”是依明显的缘来说的,但其他如作意等也确实是触的缘。“如是”是指依爱等无余离欲、灭尽的次第。“被破坏”是指以不生起之灭而息灭。因此说“无结生”。巴利
43. Samudayanaṃ samudayo, samudeti etamhāti samudayo, evaṃ ubhinnaṃ samudayānamatthatopi bhedo veditabbo. Paccayāva paccayasamudayo. Āraddhavipassako ‘‘imañca imañca paccayasāmaggiṃ paṭicca ime dhammā khaṇe khaṇe uppajjantī’’ti passanto ‘‘paccayasamudayaṃ passantopi bhikkhu khaṇikasamudayaṃ passatī’’ti vutto paccayadassanamukhena nibbattikkhaṇassa dassanato. So pana khaṇe khaṇe saṅkhārānaṃ nibbattiṃ passituṃ āraddho ‘‘imehi nāma paccayehi nibbattatī’’ti passati. ‘‘So khaṇikasamudayaṃ passanto paccayaṃ passatī’’ti vadanti. Yasmā pana paccayato saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ passanto khaṇato tesaṃ udayadassanaṃ hoti, khaṇato etesaṃ udayaṃ passato pageva paccayānaṃ suggahitattā paccayato dassanaṃ sukhena ijjhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayasamudayaṃ passantopī’’tiādi. Atthaṅgamadassanepi eseva nayo. Accantatthaṅgamoti appavatti nirodho nibbānanti. Bhedatthaṅgamoti khaṇikanirodho. Tadubhayaṃ pubbabhāge uggahaparipucchādivasena passanto aññatarassa dassane itaradassanampi siddhameva hoti, pubbabhāge ca ārammaṇavasena khayato vayasammasanādikāle bhedatthaṅgamaṃ passanto atirekavasena anussavādito accantaṃ atthaṅgamaṃ passati. Maggakkhaṇe panārammaṇato accantaatthaṅgamaṃ passati, asammohato itarampi passati. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘accantatthaṅgamaṃ passantopī’’tiādi. Samudayatthaṅgamaṃ nibbattibhedanti samudayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbattiṃ atthaṅgamasaṅkhātaṃ bhedañca. Nissayavasenāti cakkhussa sannissayavasena paccayaṃ katvā. Ārammaṇavasenāti rūpe ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ madhupiṇḍikasuttaṭīkāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phassoti ‘‘cakkhu rūpāni viññāṇa’’nti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati samāgame nibbatti phassoti vuttoti āha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phasso’’ti. Tiṇṇanti ca pākaṭapaccayavasena vuttaṃ, tadaññepi pana manasikārādayo phassapaccayā hontiyeva. Evanti taṇhādīnaṃ asesavirāganirodhakkamena. Bhinnaṃ hotīti anuppādanirodhena niruddhaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘appaṭisandhiya’’nti.
第4篇 世间经的注释巴利
4. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
44 这里所说的差别,是指“这是世间的”等,显示的是集与灭的差别。在这里,第四经和第三经的差别就在这一点上。巴利
44.Ayamettha visesoti ‘‘ayaṃ lokassā’’ti samudayatthaṅgamānaṃ visesadassanaṃ. Ettha catutthasutte tatiyasuttato viseso.
《亲戚经》的注释巴利
5. Ñātikasuttavaṇṇanā
45 45. 两个亲族彼此之间的村庄被称为“亲族村”,所以他说“在两个亲族的村庄里”。“砖”就是烧制的砖块,完全用砖块建成的住所就叫“砖堂”。据说那住所建得完全不需要用灰泥涂抹,只用砖块垒砌、盖上屋顶就完成了。世尊因为认可那种屋顶,所以开许了砖瓦屋顶。因此说“在砖造的大殿中”。不过,那里面的门闩、门板等部分仍然是木制的。“法门”:它把握自身的果之后而运转,所以叫“门”,也就是原因;因此说“法门就是法的因”,意思是作为教法的法,是证得殊胜成就的因。“近听”是指靠近了听,所以说“近听就是靠近听闻的地方”。所谓“自己的事务”,是指为了那件事才去那里,也就是打扫精舍周围的工作。“放弃”就是没有去做。这确实有大利益,因为能站在解脱处的顶端来听法,就能带来大利益。“成为一片空地”是指一切都敞开无遮。因为当世尊以缘起的方式作意三界中属于行的一切法时,那一切法毫无遗漏地全部显现在他的智境面前。因此说“直到有顶,成为一片空地”。以诵经的方式用言语把那个意思念出来,就说他是“用言语诵习”。又按因与因所生之法来把握其义,并通过它们的灭尽而证得还灭,所以说“随顺理路”。他以智慧之眼看见了。巴利
45. Aññamaññaṃ dvinnaṃ ñātīnaṃ gāmo ñātikoti vuttoti āha ‘‘dvinnaṃ ñātakānaṃ gāme’’ti. Giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhi eva kato āvasatho giñjakāvasatho. So kira āvāso yathā sudhāparikammena payojanaṃ natthi, evaṃ iṭṭhakāhi eva cinitvā chādetvā kato. Tādisañhi chadanaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā iṭṭhakāchadanaṃ anuññātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iṭṭhakāhi kate mahāpāsāde’’ti. Tattha dvārabandhakavāṭaphalakādīni pana dārumayāniyeva. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti āha ‘‘dhammapariyāyanti dhammakāraṇa’’nti, pariyattidhammabhūtaṃ visesādhigamassa hetunti attho. Upecca suyyati etthāti upassutīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upassutīti upassutiṭṭhāna’’nti. Attano kammanti yadatthaṃ tattha gato, taṃ pariveṇasamajjanakiriyaṃ. Pahāyāti akatvā. Evaṃ mahatthañhi vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā suṇantassa mahato atthāya saṃvattati. Ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosīti sabbaṃ vivaṭaṃ ahosi. Tīsu hi bhavesu saṅkhāragataṃ paccayuppannavasena manasikaroto bhagavato kiñci asesetvā sabbampi taṃ ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ upagacchi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvabhavaggā ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosī’’ti. Tantivasena tamatthaṃ vācāya nicchārento ‘‘vacasā sajjhāyaṃ karonto’’ti vutto. Paccayapaccayuppannavasena ca atthaṃ āharitvā tesaṃ nirodhena vivaṭṭassa āhatattā ‘‘yathānusandhinā’’ti vuttaṃ. Addasa ñāṇacakkhunā.
用心默诵的人,就被称为“默然而学熟者”。“句随句”就是句和随句。前一句叫“句”,紧接在它后面的叫“随句”。把它们连接起来、建立关联、不中断。“遍取”就是学习、掌握。“成为所依”是指法已成为心相续的所依,因为达到了不忘失的状态,所以叫“成为所依”。“依止于因”是指依止于出世法的因。“初梵行”就是最初的梵行,那个本身就是初梵行。这是为了与“法门”一词的语法性别相呼应,才用阳性来表达。“在这三部中”是指在第三、第四、第五这三部经中。巴利
Manasā sajjhāyaṃ karonto ‘‘tuṇhībhūtova paguṇaṃ karonto’’ti vutto. Padānupadanti padañca anupadañca. Purimañhi padaṃ nāma, tadanantaraṃ anupadaṃ. Ghaṭetvā sambandhaṃ katvā avicchinditvā. Pariyāpuṇātīti ajjhayati. Ādhārappattanti ādhāraṃ cittasantānappattaṃ appamuṭṭhaṃ gatattā ādhārappattaṃ nāma. Kāraṇanissitoti lokuttaradhammassa kāraṇasannissito. Ādibrahmacariyakoti ādibrahmacariyaṃ, tadeva ādibrahmacariyakaṃ. Dhammapariyāyāpekkhāya pulliṅganiddeso. Tīsupi imesūti tatiyacatutthapañcamesu tīsu suttesu.
某婆罗门经的注释巴利
6. Aññatarabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
46 因为名字、族姓和名声而不为人所知,所以才说“凭种姓称为婆罗门”。巴利
46.Nāmavasenāti gottanāmavasena ca kittivasena ca apākaṭo, tasmā ‘‘jātivasena brāhmaṇo’’ti vuttaṃ.
7. 《生闻经》注释巴利
7. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā
47 “这样得到名字”的意思是:他名叫“生闻”,这个名字是从国王那里得到的。巴利
47.Evaṃladdhanāmoti ‘‘jāṇussoṇī’’ti evaṃladdhanāmo rañño santikā adhigatanāmo.
《顺世论者经》的注释巴利
8. Lokāyatikasuttavaṇṇanā
48 48. 众生不为来世的利益而努力,也不为此精勤,所以叫“顺世论”。因为依止这种见解,众生连生起行善的心都没有,更不用说去做了。持有这种见解,或者致力于这种见解的人,就是“顺世论者”。“第一”这个词,因为可以表示起始的意思,也是“最上”的同义词,所以说“第一顺世论”。“世间”这个词虽然是通称,但这里指的是特定的对象,所以注释说“愚昧凡夫的世间”。为了说明这种世间在愚人心中呈现为无常、微小、矮小,以及广大等相,所以说了“广大的”“大的”等话。“小”就是微小。“单一自性”就是同一种自性。因为法性不变易,所以问“是常恒的自性吗”。“与先前的自性不同,成为种种自性”,意思是自性异于先前。“后时不存在”:后时便什么都没有了,因为完全断灭,所以说“这是问断灭”。“单一性”:于一切时都与自我一同生起。按照这样来理解,这两种观点就都成了常见。“没有”就是不存在。“多性”就是多种自性,或者理解为不是单一形态;按照这样来理解,这两种观点就都成了断见。巴利
48. Āyatiṃ hitaṃ tena loko na yatati na īhatīti lokāyataṃ. Na hi taṃ laddhiṃ nissāya sattā puññakiriyāya cittampi uppādenti, kuto payogo, taṃ etassa atthi, tattha vā niyuttoti lokāyatiko. Paṭhamasaddo ādiatthavācakattā jeṭṭhavevacanoti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ lokāyata’’nti. Sādhāraṇavacanopi lokasaddo visiṭṭhavisayo idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘bālaputhujjanalokassā’’ti. Ittarabhāvena lakuṇḍakabhāvena tassa vipulādibhāvena bālānaṃ upaṭṭhānamattanti dassento ‘‘āyataṃ mahanta’’ntiādimāha. Parittanti khuddakaṃ. Ekasabhāvanti ekaṃ sabhāvaṃ. Avipariṇāmadhammatāyāti āha ‘‘niccasabhāvamevāti pucchatī’’ti. Purimasabhāvena nānāsabhāvanti purimasabhāvato bhinnasabhāvaṃ. Pacchā na hotīti pacchā kiñci na hoti sabbaso samucchijjanato. Tenāha ‘‘ucchedaṃ sandhāya pucchatī’’ti. Ekattanti sabbakālaṃ attasambhavaṃ. Tathā ceva gahaṇena dvepi vādā sassatadiṭṭhiyo honti. Natthi na hoti. Puthuttaṃ nānāsabhāvaṃ, ekarūpaṃ na hotīti vā gahaṇena dvepi vādā ucchedadiṭṭhiyoti.
第9篇 圣弟子经的注释巴利
9. Ariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
49 显示疑惑生起的方式:不依靠“当什么存在时,什么就发生”这样去追问因与果,而仅仅依据此缘性,显示疑惑生起的方式。“集起”就是聚合而生起的意思,所以说“生起”。巴利
49.Saṃsayuppattiākāradassananti ‘‘kasmiṃ sati kiṃ hotī’’ti kāraṇassa phalassa ca paccāmasanena vinā kevalaṃ idappaccayatāya saṃsayassa uppajjanākāradassanaṃ. Samudayati samudetīti atthoti āha ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti.
第十部《第二圣弟子经》的注释巴利
10. Dutiyaariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
50 两种理趣被合在一起说,是因为第九经所说的“识存在时,名色就存在”这类理趣,已经包含在第十经所说的“无明存在时,诸行就存在”这类理趣之中。“差异”是指第十经与前面的第九经之间的不同。巴利
50.Dvepi nayā ekato vuttāti idaṃ ‘‘viññāṇe sati nāmarūpaṃ hotī’’tiādinā navame vuttassa nayassa ‘‘avijjāya sati saṅkhārā hontī’’tiādinā dasame vuttanaye antogadhattā. Nānattanti purimato navamato dasamassa nānattaṃ.
《审察经》的注释巴利
1. Parivīmaṃsanasuttavaṇṇanā
51 51.“审察”是指衡量流转的因和还灭的因。“然而,这是从哪里来的呢?”因为经中说“正确地灭尽苦”。确实,如果不全面审察一切苦,就不可能正确地灭尽苦。接着问“为什么”等,是在问只取老死的原因。意思是:生等诸支的流转也是苦性。因为取了老死,也就取了生;如果没有生,老死本身也就不存在。这个道理对有等诸支也同样适用。这样,乃至具有生法者,在取老死时就已经被取了;以老死这一名目,一切具有变坏性质的三地诸行都被取了。因此说“取了它,就是取了一切苦”。种种:多种类型、多个部分。或者说“种种”是读法。“种种”是复数。样态:以破碎、破裂等而成为相反的部分。种种样态:由此而具有种种样态。如沐浴后站立之人一样,是针对愚人显现为清净相的自体而说的。巴利
51.Upaparikkhamānoti pavattipavattihetuṃ, nivattinivattihetuñca paritulento. Kuto panetanti? ‘‘Sammā dukkhakkhayā’’ti vacanato. Na hi sabbadukkhaparivīmaṃsaṃ vinā sammā dukkhakkhayo sambhavati. Kasmātiādinā jarāmaraṇasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Jātiādīnampi pavatti dukkhabhāvinīti adhippāyo. Yasmā jarāmaraṇe gahite sati jātipi gahitā hoti, tassā abhāve jarāmaraṇasseva abhāvato. Esa nayo bhavādīsupi. Evaṃ yāva jātidhammo jarāmaraṇe gahite gahitova hoti, jarāmaraṇapadesena tabbikāravanto sabbe tebhūmakā saṅkhārā gahitāti evampi jarāmaraṇaggahaṇena sabbampi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ gahite sabbadukkhassa gahitattā’’ti. Anekavidhanti bahuvidhaṃ bahukoṭṭhāsaṃ. ‘‘Aneka’’nti vā pāṭho . Anekanti bahulavacanaṃ. Vidhanti khaṇḍiccapāliccādivasena viparītakoṭṭhāsaṃ. Nānappakārakanti tato eva nānappakāraṃ. Nhatvā ṭhitaṃ purisaṃ viyāti bālānaṃ attabhāvassa subhākārena upaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha.
有人已经讲了“以适当之德”这句话,接着问:是不是在一切方面都以适当之德呢?回答说:是因为无杂染、因为清净。因为涅槃并不是以无为等状态而跟它相似的。“已行道者”,是指面向着道、以加行为首要,已经行道、已经证得。“已随顺者”,是指以契合的方式而趣入;就像涅槃的证得那样,是以随顺其性的方式而趣入。在这里,经中的“了知”,是依前分而说的;“而成为如是行道者”,是依决定分而说的。另一些人说是“依后分”。不过也有人讲:就像行道者的老死归于灭尽那样,而成为那样的行道者。对词句的审察,应当理解为依前分而说,不是依道的刹那而说。“为了行的还灭”这里,并不是指执取无明缘的行,而是指执取一切有为行,所以注释说:“为了行苦的还灭”。因此注释说:“至此,乃至阿拉汉果的开示已经说完。”巴利
‘‘Sāruppabhāvenā’’ti vuttaṃ, kiṃ sabbathā sāruppabhāvenāti āha ‘‘nikkilesatāya parisuddhatāyā’’ti. Na hi tassesā asaṅkhatatādibhāvena sadisā. Paṭipannoti paṭimukho abhisaṅkhāramukho hutvā panno adhigato. Anugatanti anucchavikabhāvena gataṃ, yathā ca nibbānassa adhigamo hoti, evaṃ tadanurūpabhāvena gataṃ. Ettha ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pajānātī’’ti pubbabhāgavasena pajānanā vuttā, ‘‘tathā paṭipanno ca hotī’’ti niyatavasena. ‘‘Aparabhāgavasenā’’ti apare. Keci pana ‘‘yathā paṭipannassa jarāmaraṇaṃ nirujjhati, tathā paṭipanno’’ti vadanti. Padavīmaṃsanā pubbabhāgavasena veditabbā, na maggakkhaṇavasena. Saṅkhāranirodhāyāti ettha nayidaṃ avijjāpaccayasaṅkhāraggahaṇaṃ, atha kho saṅkhatasaṅkhāraggahaṇanti āha ‘‘saṅkhāradukkhassa nirodhatthāyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ettāvatā yāva arahattā desanā kathitā’’ti.
通过“各自般涅槃”等语句,开示了阿拉汉果的省察;通过“他感受乐受”等语句,开示了常住安住。这样开示之后,应当从一切流转的开示方式中回转出来。在“无明所近取者”这句中,iti这个词是“等等”的意思,因此它再次涵盖了这类流转与还灭的论述。补特伽罗这个词能表达其余两种本性,为了把它与那两种区分开来,在执取时只显示第一种本性,所以说“人补特伽罗”,因此注释说“人即是补特伽罗”。“由两者”是指由“人补特伽罗”这一执取。当某事物在世俗上不存在时,对它的谈论和开示就是世俗论;对胜义的谈论和开示就是胜义论。“在那里”是指在世俗论和胜义论中,而不是在世俗和胜义本身中。因此注释说“如此进行的,称为世俗论”等等。这里,世俗和胜义的特征是这样的:当某事物被破坏,或者以智慧对它作部分分解之后,它就不再保有原来的名称,比如瓶、布等各类别,这就是世俗;与此相反的,就是胜义。因为在具有坚硬、能触等自性的法中,找不到这种划分方式。在那里,对于色等法,依据它们的聚合和相续而生起,在此基础上假立“众生”等说法,因此注释说“众生、人……乃至称为世俗论”。因为色等胜义法被称为“蕴、界”等,而不是仅仅假立,所以说“蕴……乃至称为胜义论”。难道蕴论不也是世俗论吗?因为世俗就是约定,“蕴”之义、“聚”之义或“部分”之义?确实如此,然而这个“蕴”的名称,如同触等法上的彼所施设一样,是依于胜义的,比“人”等名称更接近它,不像“人”等名称那样遥远,因此被说为胜义所摄。或者,以蕴为首,那些具有自性的法本身就被执取了。难道一切具有自性的法不都是通过世俗的方式而进入开示的吗?不是以胜义的方式,那么一切开示岂不都成了世俗开示?并非如此,因为开示的区分是依于所应开示之法的区分而设定的,而且声音若没有某种生起的因由,就不能表明意义。因此注释说“即使说胜义,也不舍弃世俗而说”。他们说的只是真实、不错乱。巴利
‘‘Paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatī’’tiādinā arahattaphalapaccavekkhaṇaṃ, ‘‘so sukhañca vedanaṃ vedayatī’’tiādinā satatavihārañca dassetvā desanā sabbathāva vaṭṭadesanāto nivattetabbā siyā. Avijjāgatoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, tena evamādikaṃ idaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭakathanaṃ puna gaṇhāti. Puggalasaddo itarāsaṃ dvinnaṃ pakatīnaṃ vācakoti tato visesetvā gahaṇe paṭhamapakatimeva dassento ‘‘purisapuggalo’’ti avocāti āha ‘‘purisoyeva puggalo’’ti. Ubhayenāti purisapuggalaggahaṇena. Sammutiyā avijjamānāya kathā desanā sammutikathā. Paramatthassa kathā desanā paramatthakathā. Tatthāti sammutiparamatthakathāsu, na sammutiparamatthesu. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ pavattā sammutikathā nāmā’’tiādi. Tatridaṃ sammutiparamatthānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yasmiṃ bhinne buddhiyā vā avayavavinibbhoge kate na taṃsamaññā, sā ghaṭapaṭādippabhedā sammuti, tabbipariyāyato paramattho. Na hi kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāve ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Tattha rūpādidhammaṃ samūhasantānavasena pavattamānaṃ upādāya ‘‘satto’’tiādi vohāroti āha ‘‘satto naro…pe… sammutikathā nāmā’’ti . Yasmā rūpādayo paramatthadhammā ‘‘khandhā dhātuyo’’tiādinā vuccanti, na vohāramattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘khandhā…pe… paramatthakathā nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu khandhakathāpi sammutikathāva, sammuti hi saṅketo khandhaṭṭho rāsaṭṭho vā koṭṭhāsaṭṭho vāti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana khandhasamaññā phassādīsu tajjāpaññatti viya paramatthasannissayā tassa āsannatarā puggalasamaññādayo viya na dūreti paramatthasaṅgahatā vuttā. Khandhasīsena vā tadupādānā sabhāvadhammā eva gahitā. Nanu ca sabbepi sabhāvadhammā sammutimukheneva desanaṃ ārohanti, na sammukhenāti sabbāpi desanā sammutidesanāva siyāti? Nayidamevaṃ desetabbadhammavibhāgena desanāvibhāgassa adhippetattā, na ca saddo kenaci pavattinimittena vinā atthaṃ pakāsetīti. Tenāha ‘‘paramatthaṃ kathentāpi sammutiṃ amuñcitvāva kathentī’’ti. Saccameva aviparītameva kathenti.
“世俗”就是共称。“最高的、最上的义”就是胜义,也就是诸法如实存在的自性。那自性就是胜义,而世俗则只是世间约定所成立的。如果是这样,为什么世俗论也是真实的呢?回答说“世间世俗之因”,因为它是依着世间的共称而进行的。因为,如果不执著世间的共称,施设就像听到某种名称一样,并不是虚假的,也不应被越过。所以世尊说:“不应执著地方方言,不应越过共称。”“诸法”就是具有自性的诸法。“真实相”就是显示真实存在之相,因此这样说。巴利
Sammutīti samaññā. Paramo uttamo atthoti paramattho, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvo. Taṃ paramatthaṃ, sammuti pana lokassa saṅketamattasiddhā. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sammutikathāya saccatāti āha ‘‘lokasammutikāraṇa’’nti lokasamaññaṃ nissāya pavattanato. Lokasamaññāya hi abhinivesanaṃ vinā paññāpanā ekaccassa sutassa sāvanā viya, na musā anatikkamitabbato tassā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’’ti. Dhammānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ. Bhūtalakkhaṇaṃ bhāvassa lakkhaṇaṃ dīpentīti katvā.
“十三种思的分类”,是指八种欲界善思和五种色界善思的分类。它能令自己的相续再次生起,又能造作应受供养的果报,所以叫“福行”。“以业为福”,就是以业为体的福。“以异熟为福”,就是以异熟为体的福。福的果报,因为省略了后一个词,也被称为“福”,就像“这样福德增长”等说法一样。“识行于非福”这一句,和“识行于福”所说的道理相同,所以不再另外引出。非福的果报,因为省略了后一个词,就被称为“非福”。把握了“行”之后,通过“此无明所近取者”这一句,就把握了行的缘;通过“识行于福”等说法,就把握了缘所生的识。把握了识,名色等一切支也就都被把握了。因此注释说:“十二支的缘起关联已经全部把握了。”巴利
Terasacetanābhedanti aṭṭhakāmāvacarakusalacetanāpañcarūpāvacarakusalacetanābhedaṃ. Attano santānassa punanato pujjabhavaphalassa abhisaṅkharaṇato puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ. Kammapuññenāti kammabhūtena. Vipākapuññenāti vipākasaṅkhātena. Puññaphalampi hi uttarapadalopena ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu viya. ‘‘Apuññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’nti idaṃ ‘‘puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’nti ettha vuttanayamevāti na uddhataṃ. Apuññaphalaṃ uttarapadalopena ‘‘apuñña’’nti vuccati. Saṅkhāranti saṅkhārassa gahitattā ‘‘avijjāgatoya’’nti iminā saṅkhārassa paccayo gahito, ‘‘puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’ntiādinā paccayuppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Tasmiñca gahite nāmarūpādi sabbaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘dvādasapadiko paccayākāro gahitova hotī’’ti.
“明”是指以最殊胜的方式所说的阿拉汉道智。因为当它生起时,无明就彻底被断除了。“首先”这句话,是为了说明无明的断除与明的生起是同时发生的。因此说“然而正如”等话。“以灯光”:是指以灯光燃起之因为因,同时发生。“明的生起”:是指明的生起之因;即便如此,意思仍然是说二者同时。“不执取”:就是不以“这是我的”等方式去执取。他不渴爱、不恐惧,因为渴爱之说已不存在,恐惧的对象也因此不存在。巴利
Vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesena. Tassā hi uppādā sabbaso avijjā pahīnā hoti. Paṭhamamevāti idaṃ avijjāpahānavijjuppādānaṃ samānakālatādassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Padīpujjalenāti padīpujjalanahetunā saheva. Vijjuppādāti vijjuppādahetu, evaṃ satīpi samakālatteti adhippāyo. Na gaṇhātīti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā na gaṇhāti. Na taṇhāyati na bhāyati taṇhāvuttino abhāvā, tato eva bhayavatthuno ca abhāvā.
吞下之后使之完成,意思是:就像吞下之后,使之成为别人无法触及的对象那样,使之完成。因为带有染着的乐伴随着无数苦,而且欢喜乐的人以乐为苦因,所以欢喜乐的人就叫做欢喜苦——就像想要火烤之乐的人,免不了要受烟熏之苦一样。在“遇到苦之后还希求乐”这句话里,应当以体弱讨食的人等作为例子来理解。因为他们一直到傍晚都没吃东西,在准备晚饭等的时候,先让饥饿等生起,然后才吃。由于乐会变坏而成苦,所以欢喜乐的人就叫做欢喜苦。这是连接。然而有些人说:由于无苦、由变坏乐,所以欢喜彼乐的人就叫做欢喜苦。那不对,因为不曾见任何人欢喜那样的乐相而成苦,却见有人欢喜作为苦因的有染之乐。欢喜作为苦因的有染之乐,在意义上就叫做欢喜苦,这是所说的义理。“身”是指五门身,它是此受的边际、终点,所以说“以身为边际”。因此说“五门身运转多久,就运转多久”。“以命为边际”在这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvāti gilitvā viya aññassa avisayaṃ viya karaṇena pariniṭṭhāpetvā. Sāmisasukhassa anekadukkhānubandhabhāvato, sukhābhinandassa dukkhahetubhāvato ca sukhaṃ abhinandantoyeva dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāma aggisantāpasukhaṃ icchanto dhūmadukkhānuññāto viya. Dukkhaṃ patvā sukhaṃ patthanatoti ettha dubbalagahaṇikādayo nidassanabhāvena veditabbā. Te hi yāva sāyanhasamayāpi abhutvā sāyamāsādīni karonto jighacchādiṃ uppādetvā bhuñjanādīni karonti. Sukhassa vipariṇāmadukkhato sukhaṃ abhinandanto dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti yojanā. Keci pana dukkhassa abhāvato vipariṇāmasukhato taṃ sukhaṃ abhinandanto dukkhaṃ abhinandatīti vadanti. Taṃ na, na hi tādisaṃ sukhanimittaṃ koci dukkhaṃ abhinandanto diṭṭho, dukkhahetuṃ pana sāmisaṃ sukhaṃ abhinandanto diṭṭho. Dukkhahetuṃ sāmisaṃ sukhaṃ abhinandanto atthato dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti vuttovāyamattho. Kāyoti pañcadvārakāyo, so pariyanto avasānaṃ etassāti kāyapariyantikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yāva pañcadvārakāyo pavattati, tāva pavatta’’nti. Jīvitapariyantikanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
后来生起却先灭去,意思是:在同一个生命体里,它比意门受更晚生起,却又比它先灭去。为了用它的本来面目直接显示这个已经成立的道理,所以说“意门受先生起,而后灭去”。现在,为了把前面简要说的内容展开说明,就说了“它确实……”等话。直到三十三岁,都还属于第一阶段。所谓“五十岁的时候”,是指从第一阶段一直到五十岁这段时间,它都保持存在,也就是没有经历增长和减退,而是以自身的状态保持着。“迟缓”是指柔软、不特别锐利。“那时”是指八十岁、九十岁的时候。同样,在长时间反复思虑时也是如此。已经破碎、失去活力、彻底崩坏、虚弱无力。“只到心基为止”:不再在眼等依处生起,因为那些依处已经耗尽,所以只停留在作为终点的有心基依处。只要这种受还在运行。巴利
Pacchā uppajjitvā paṭhamaṃ nirujjhatīti ekasmiṃ attabhāve manodvārikavedanāto pacchā uppajjitvā tato paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati, tato eva siddhamatthaṃ sarūpeneva dassetuṃ ‘‘manodvārikavedanā paṭhamaṃ uppajjitvā pacchā nirujjhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni tameva saṅkhepena vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘sā hī’’tiādimāha. Yāva tettiṃsavassāpi paṭhamavayo. Paṇṇāsavassakāleti paṭhamavayato yāva paññāsavassakālā, tāva ṭhitā hotīti vuḍḍhihāniyo anupagantvā sarūpeneva ṭhitā hoti. Mandāti mudukā atikhiṇā. Tadāti asītinavutivassakāle. Tathā ciraparivitakkepi. Bhaggā nittejā bhaggavibhaggā dubbalā. Hadayakoṭiṃyevāti cakkhādivatthūsu avattetvā tesaṃ khīṇattā koṭibhūtaṃ hadayavatthuṃyeva. Yāva esā vedanā vattati.
水池是指大池塘。具足五水道,就是具备五种水流入和流出的通道。水从各处流出来,因为完全充满了。巴利
Vāpiyāti mahātaḷākena. Pañcaudakamaggasampannanti pañcahi udakassa pavisananikkhamanamaggehi yuttaṃ. Tato tato vissandamānaṃ sabbaso puṇṇattā.
第一,“天最初降雨”等,是把譬喻和法义对应起来。这里说的“关于此受”,是指前面所说的、已经达到终点的意门受。巴利
Paṭhamaṃdeve vassantetiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Imaṃ vedanaṃ sandhāyāti imaṃ yathāvuttaṃ pariyosānappattaṃ manodvārikavedanaṃ sandhāya.
“身坏”是指有身的毁灭。巴利原文是“乃至寿命灭尽”,不过在注疏里,是把“寿命灭尽之后”这个短语提出来作了解释。意思是说,不再以他世的方式前往。诸受的清凉,就是指诸行热恼状态的平息,而这是从不再转起的角度说的,所以经文说“转起……将会存在”。“界身”是指被称为骸骨的界身,因为在身体的某个部分,也有“身”这个称呼。巴利
Kāyassa bhedāti attabhāvassa vināsato. ‘‘Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā’’ti pāḷi, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana jīvitapariyādānā uddhanti paduddhāro kato. Paralokavasena agantvā. Vedanānaṃ sītibhāvo nāma saṅkhāradarathapariḷāhabhāvo, so panāyaṃ appavattivasenāti āha ‘‘pavatti…pe… bhavissantī’’ti. Dhātusarīrānīti aṭṭhikaṅkalasaṅkhātadhātusarīrāni. Sarīrekadese hi sarīrasamaññā.
“陶匠的窑”:就是从陶匠的窑那里。这里,“烧”是烧制的地方,也就是烧制之处。他们依烧制之用而住在那里,所以叫“住处”,因此是从陶匠的住处那里。把还没有完全冷却、仍处于造作状态的罐子取出来放置时,如果有灰,就以覆盖的方式放置。所说的这种放置,是针对“会存放”而说的。因为属于罐的一部分,所以结合的各个部分被称为“罐的碎片”,并不是指已经断裂破碎的残片。因为是通过部分来说明整体,所以那里瓦片的集合就是罐。因此说“以口缘结合为一体”。“会存放”是指失去了特殊色泽和热性的罐子本身留在那里。“燃烧……”应当把三有看作被十一种火燃烧的状态。就像陶匠观察燃烧着的陶匠住处一样,这位已发起修观的瑜伽行者观察三有被贪等燃烧,所以说“如陶匠的瑜伽行者”。“取出之杖”指阿拉汉道智,因为它从三有之窑中取出。“如平坦地”比喻涅槃之地,因为一切不平都已退除。巴利
Kumbhakārapākāti kumbhakārapākato. Ettha paccatīti pāko, pacanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadeva pācanavasena āvasanti etthāti āvāso, tasmā kumbhakārāvāsato. Avigatavūpasamaṃ saṅkharitaṃ kumbhaṃ uddharitvā ṭhapento chārikāya sati pidhānavasena ṭhapeti. Tathā ṭhapanaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisisseyyā’’ti. Kumbhassa padesabhūtatāya ābaddhā avayavā ‘‘kumbhakapālānī’’ti adhippetāni, na chinnabhinnāni. Avayavamukhena hi samudāyo vutto. Tattha kapālasamudāyo hi ghaṭo. Tenāha ‘‘mukhavaṭṭiyā ekabaddhānī’’ti. Avasisseyyunti vaṇṇavisesauṇhabhāvāpagatā ghaṭakārāneva tiṭṭheyyunti. Āditta…pe… tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvato. Yathā kumbhakāro kumbhakārāvāsaṃ ādittaṃ paccavekkhati, evaṃ āraddhavipassakopesa bhavattayaṃ rāgādīhi ādittanti āha ‘‘kumbhakāro viya yogāvacaro’’ti. Nīharaṇadaṇḍakoviya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ bhavattayapākato nīharaṇato. Samo bhūmibhāgo viya nibbānatalaṃ sabbavisamā nivattanato.
以“从执取与放下,从年岁增长与衰亡,从食所生,从时节所生,从心等起,从业所生,从法性色”这七种方式反复审察的人,叫做观色七法。以“从聚,从对,从刹那,从次第,从见之破除,从慢之破除,从欲贪之遍尽”这七种方式反复审察的人,叫做观无色七法。因此,对于引出上述色七法和无色七法而修观的人来说。虽然阿罗汉的生命体已从一切有中拔除,但只要还没有到达无余涅槃界,就仍然可说他还安住在善趣有中,所以这里只说“把生命体从四恶趣中拔除”。因此才说了“然而漏已尽者……”等。后面也将这样说:“对于已在无余涅槃界般涅槃者,应当知道轮回的止息。”这里的意思并不是说在无余涅槃界般涅槃;而在有余涅槃界,所谓般涅槃就是证得阿罗汉果。在此,由于炽热的止息是从造作之因的止息这个意义上说的,所以热罐冷却的比喻在这里也不矛盾。“无执取的身体”:他们说这是指时节等起的色聚。“诸比丘”:这里的“诸”字有开头的意义。而这句话本身是经文。“为了提出质问”:是为了提出这样的问题——正感受着以身命为边际的受时,漏已尽者是否还会造作福行等业呢?或者,“为了提出质问”是说为了以“漏已尽的比丘是否还会造作福行呢”等方式提出质问,意思是:并非要在此就把已开始的教说讲完。巴利
‘‘Ādānanikkhepanato, vayovuddhatthaṅgamato, āhāramayato, utumayato, cittasamuṭṭhānato, kammajato, dhammatārūpato’’ti (visuddhi. 2.706) imehi sattahi ākārehi sammasanto rūpasattakaṃ vipassati nāma. ‘‘Kalāpato, yamakato, khaṇikato, paṭipāṭito, diṭṭhiugghāṭanato, mānasamugghāṭato, nikantipariyādānato’’ti (visuddhi. 2.717) imehi sattahi ākārehi sammasanto arūpasattakaṃ vipassati nāma, tasmā yathāvuttaṃ imaṃ rūpasattakaṃ arūpasattakañca nīharitvā vipassantassa. Yadipi arahato attabhāvo sabbabhavehipi uddhaṭo, yāva pana anupādisesaparinibbānaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva tasmimpi sugatibhave ṭhitoyevāti vattabbataṃ labbhatīti ‘‘catūhi apāyehi attabhāvaṃ uddharitvā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khīṇāsavo panā’’tiādi. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa vaṭṭavūpasamo veditabbo’’ti. Na parinibbāti anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti adhippāyo, saupādisesāya pana nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānaṃ arahattappattiyeva. Abhisaṅkhārahetuto hettha pariḷāhavūpasamassa upasamabhāvena adhippetattā uṇhakumbhanibbānanidassanampi na virujjhati. Anupādinnakasarīrānīti utusamuṭṭhānikarūpakalāpe vadanti. Bhikkhaveti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Idaṃ pana vacanaṃ. Anuyogāropanatthanti kāyapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno khīṇāsavo api nu puññābhisaṅkhārādikammaṃ kareyyāti pañhaṃ kātuṃ. Atha vā anuyogāropanatthanti ‘‘api nu kho khīṇāsavo bhikkhu puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ vā abhisaṅkhareyyā’’tiādinā anuyogaṃ āropetuṃ vuttaṃ, na tāva yathāraddhadesanaṃ niṭṭhāpetunti attho.
结生识一旦成立,在那个有当中,那些可能生起的识就有生起的可能,而不是没有,所以经中说“识应被了知”,意思就是结生识应被了知。如果一切行完全不存在,结生识还能被了知吗?如果那个结生识不被了知,那么一切识就都不被了知了。“诸长老”指的是世尊以“诸比丘”称呼的那些长老。他对问题的解答表示随喜,因为这个解答与他的遍知智相契合。“不了知”就是不被了知。用“等”字还包括了“如果没有识,名色就不被了知”等这一类意思。“称为确信”:是指以信受的方式生起的确信。“胜解”是指以决断为相的解脱,以及信解脱。所以巴利经典中说:“诸比丘,你们应当信受此事。”正因为与信相伴的决断相解脱,这里才说它是“称为确信的胜解”。“终”就是边际。“分界”:因为在这里四周都被切割划分开来,所以叫分界。巴利
Paṭisandhiviññāṇe siddhe tasmiṃ bhave uppajjanārahānaṃ viññāṇānaṃ siyā sambhavo, nāsatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘viññāṇaṃ paññāyethāti paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ paññāyethā’’ti. Sabbaso saṅkhāresu asantesu paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ api nu kho paññāyeyya. Tasmiñhi apaññāyamāne sabbaṃ viññāṇaṃ na paññāyeyya. Therānanti ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti ālapitattherānaṃ . Pañhabyākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsati tassa sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsandanato. Appaññāṇanti appaññāyanaṃ. Ādi-saddena viññāṇe asati nāmarūpassa appaññāṇanti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātanti saddahanākārena pavattasanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ. Adhimokkhanti nicchayākāravimokkhaṃ saddhāvimokkhañca. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘saddahatha metaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti. Saddhāsahitañhi nicchayākāravimokkhaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ adhimokkha’’nti. Antoti pariyanto. Parito chijjati etthāti paricchedo.
《取经》的注释巴利
2. Upādānasuttavaṇṇanā
52 52. 因为以所缘等方式而转起,所以对诸取有利益作用的,就是取所取;在这些取所取当中。因此说“在四种取的缘中”。“随观乐味的人”,是指用邪智去随观那些可作为乐味之物。“以此为食”:十六种、二十种、三十种、四十种或五十种食是它的缘,所以叫“以此为食”。就像大火堆一样,三有被十一种火燃烧,这三有本身就是如此。火……凡夫因为被像大火堆一样的三有所束缚。巴利
52. Ārammaṇādibhāvena saṃvattanato upādānānaṃ hitāni upādāniyāni, tesu upādāniyesu. Tenāha ‘‘catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ paccayesū’’ti. Assādaṃ anupassantassāti asādetabbaṃ micchāñāṇena anupassato. Tadāhāroti soḷasa vā vīsaṃ tiṃsaṃ cattālīsaṃ paññāsaṃ vā āhāro paccayo etassāti tadāhāro. Aggikkhandho viya tayo bhavā ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvato etadeva bhavattayaṃ. Aggi…pe… puthujjano aggikkhandhasadisassa bhavattayassa paribandhanato.
“业处”是指观禅的业处。因此说“在三地诸法中”。“法殿”是指出世间法殿。因为它以极为高耸之义而被称为“殿”。在念处的大道中,于果的刹那生起时。巴利
Kammaṭṭhānassāti vipassanākammaṭṭhānassa. Tenāha ‘‘tebhūmakadhammesū’’ti. Dhammapāsādanti lokuttaradhammapāsādaṃ. So hi accuggataṭṭhena ‘‘pāsādo’’ti vuccati. Satipaṭṭhānamahāvīthiyaṃ phalakkhaṇe pavattāyāti.
《结经二则》的注释巴利
3-4. Saṃyojanasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
53-54 53-54. 因为是以大轮回相续的比喻来说明,取来油灯,所以说“拿着大灯芯”。依照前面的方式,就是依照前面《可取经》中所说的方式。同样地,这些经之所以有这样的说法、这样的开示,是随顺所应调伏的人的意乐。这个道理也适用于此后的诸经。巴利
53-54. Mahantavaṭṭappabandhaopammabhāvena telapadīpassa āhatattā ‘‘mahantañca vaṭṭikapālaṃ gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Purimanayenevāti purimasmiṃ upādāniyasutte vuttanayeneva. Tathā vinetabbānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena hi imesaṃ suttānaṃ evaṃ vacanaṃ evaṃ desanā. Esa nayo ito paresupi.
《大树经》二则的注释巴利
5-6. Mahārukkhasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
55-56 树根把地界和水界里的精华往上输送,就像人身体里输送味道的管道一样。它们这样输送,是通过“以养分……”等说法来说明。高达一百肘:也就是高一百肘。在这里:指在这段轮回的讲述中。业生起:就是以业为缘。巴利
55-56.Ojaṃ abhiharantīti rasaharaṇiyo viya purisassa sarīre rukkhamūlāni rukkhassa pathavīāporase upari āropenti. Tesaṃ tathā āropanaṃ ‘‘ojāyā’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Hatthasatubbedhamassāti hatthasatubbedho, hatthasataṃ ubbiddhassapi. Etthāti etissaṃ vaṭṭakathāyaṃ. Kammārohananti kammapaccayo.
再说“在这里”,是指在前面这段讲离轮回的内容里。对那些想灭掉轮回之苦、已经生起强烈悚惧智的人,就针对这种智说“像锄头一样”。从那里生起的智,是依靠安住在定前面的智而应当持续修起的观起始智。说“像砍树的斧头一样”,意思是:具有这种性质的观,必定能断掉轮回,所以说“树……对作意者的慧”。其中“业处”,就是观业处。它按四种界的区分方式,在四十二个部分中显现,也就是:二十个地界部分、十二个水界部分、四个火界部分、六个风界部分。“以及识的”这里的“iti”一词,有“等”和“种类”的意思。因此它包含了大种色,以及与识相应的诸法。在七种适合的条件下,如果有人得不到,他的业处就不会清晰地现前,就是针对这种情况说“某种适合的”。剩下的内容很容易理解。巴利
Puna etthāti etissaṃ vivaṭṭakathāyaṃ. Vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nāsetukāmassa daḷhaṃ uppannasaṃvegañāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kuddālo viyā’’ti āha. Tato nibbattitañāṇaṃ samādhipacchiyā ṭhitaṃ nissāya pavattetabbavipassanārambhañāṇaṃ. Rukkhacchedanapharasu viyāti evaṃbhūtassa vipassanā ekantato vaṭṭacchedāya hotiyevāti āha ‘‘rukkhassa…pe… manasikarontassa paññā’’ti. Tattha kammaṭṭhānanti vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ catubbidhavavatthānavasena vīsati pathavīkoṭṭhāsā, dvādasa āpokoṭṭhāsā, cattāro tejokoṭṭhāsā, cha vāyokoṭṭhāsāti dvecattālīsāya koṭṭhāsesu. Viññāṇassa cāti iti-saddo ādiattho pakārattho ca. Tena bhūtarūpāni viññāṇasampayuttadhamme ca saṅgaṇhāti. Sattasu sappāyesu yassa alabhantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vibhūtaṃ hutvā na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aññataraṃ sappāya’’nti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第七 幼树经注巴利
7. Taruṇarukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
57-59 应围篱:用湿润的方式在四周筑起篱笆。这样做的时候,因为连草、灌木等的根茎都拔掉了,那个地方就算是被清理干净了,所以说应净化。尘土是指能让他增长的东西,意思是外来的尘土。应给予就是投入。因此说到坚硬的等等。依已说的方法,就是像第五经中说的欲毁坏树木的男子那样。第八和第九经文意思浅显,因为同样可以依已说的方法了知。巴利
57-59.Palimajjeyyāti allakaraṇavasena parito pāḷiṃ bandheyya. Tathā karonto yasmā ca tattha tiṇagacchādīnaṃ mūlasantānaggahaṇena taṃ ṭhānaṃ sodheti nāma, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sodheyyā’’ti. Paṃsunti assa pavaḍḍhakārakaṃ, āgantukaṃ paṃsunti attho. Dadeyyāti pakkhipeyya. Tenāha ‘‘thaddha’’ntiādi. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘rukkhaṃ nāsetukāmo puriso viyā’’tiādinā pañcamasutte vuttanayena. Aṭṭhamanavamāni uttānatthāneva vuttanayattā.
第十 因缘经的注释巴利
10. Nidānasuttavaṇṇanā
60 “以复数形式”是指:被称为“俱卢”的是乡间的王子们,他们居住的地方虽然只是一个国土,但依照习惯用法,就以复数形式称为“俱卢”。在世尊没有固定居住处所的地方,因缘故事的常规做法就只是提到他乞食的村庄,比如“住在释迦族中,有一个叫天臂的释迦族城镇”。“具寿”或者“天爱”这类称呼,是亲切的说法,所以说“具寿是亲切之语”。这种亲切之语是出于恭敬而说的,所以说“这是恭敬之语”。太远、太近、正前方、正后方、在上风处、在高处,这六种是坐处的过失。依青、黄、赤、白、深红、光辉而分为六种颜色。巴利
60.Bahuvacanavasenāti kurū nāma jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīvasena ‘‘kurū’’ti evaṃ bahuvacanavasena. Yattha bhagavato vasanokāsabhūto koci vihāro na hoti, tattha kevalaṃ gocaragāmakittanaṃ nidānakathāya pakati yathā ‘‘sakkesu viharati devadahaṃ nāma sakyānaṃ nigamo’’ti. ‘‘Āyasmā’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃ piyo’’ti vā bhavanti vā piyasamudāhāro esoti āha ‘‘āyasmāti piyavacanameta’’nti. Tayidaṃ piyavacanaṃ gāravavasena vuccatīti āha ‘‘garuvacanameta’’nti. Atidūraṃ accāsannaṃ atisammukhā atipacchato uparivāto unnatappadesoti ime cha nisajjadosā. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena chabbaṇṇānaṃ.
为了摄受家族:是出于对家族的怜悯,为了利益家族。就像放下一个价值千金的包裹一样,通过接受他们的乞食,以及接受他们的礼敬等行为,让他们心中生起福德之流。再清扫:对于弟子们已经清扫过的地方,因为做事恭敬,所以又再清扫一遍。从两端开始向中间:从开端开始将受导入观察,再从老死开始将受导入观察,然后进行遍察。三次:就是按照“从开端直至末端”等所说的四种方式,结合三个回合,因此说为十二次遍察。因为我们的世尊是以甚深的方式宣说的,其他佛陀也同样完全如此宣说,这是依于法的传承而说:“被一切佛陀……宣说”。巴利
Kulasaṅgahatthāyāti kulānuddayatāvasena kulānuggaṇhanatthāya. Sahassabhaṇḍikaṃ nikkhipanto viya bhikkhāpaṭiggaṇhanena tesaṃ abhivādanādisampaṭicchanena ca puññābhisandassa jananena. Paṭisammajjitvāti antevāsikehi sammaṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ sakkaccakāritāya puna sammajjitvā. Ubhayantato paṭṭhāya majjhanti ādito paṭṭhāya vedanaṃ, jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya ca vedanaṃ pāpetvā sammasanamāha. Tikkhattunti ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya anta’’ntiādinā vuttacaturākārupasaṃhite tayo vāre. Tena dvādasakkhattuṃ sammasanamāha. Amhākaṃ bhagavatā gambhīrabhāveneva kathitattā sesabuddhehipi evameva kathitoti dhammanvaye ṭhatvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbabuddhehi…pe… kathito’’ti.
“超越限量”是指“无量”的意思,就像在“乃至世尊以此……”(《长部》1.3)等经文里那样。因为 yāva 这个词正是用来显示超出的状态,所以论中说“意思是极其深奥”。“显现”是指对智慧而言它呈现出来、显露出来、现起。正是针对这种现起,才说“被看见”。难道这缘起不是一向都深奥吗?那为什么还要说它“深奥而显现”呢?确实如此,它一向深奥。但之所以采用“深奥而显现”这个说法,正是为了显示它一向深奥这一性质。因此,为了通过对比的方式指出在其他地方可以找到的四种极端,从而阐明这缘起唯独一向深奥,才说了“一种……”等话。“这不存在”是说:既没有“不深奥”,也没有“不深奥的显现”,这两者都不存在。由此说明,在所举出的四种极端中,只有最后一种极端是成立的。所以论中说“这个……”等。巴利
Pamāṇātikkameti aparimāṇatthe ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ tena bhagavatā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.3) viya. Atirekabhāvajotano hi yaṃ yāva-saddo. Tenāha ‘‘atigambhīroti attho’’ti. Avabhāsati khāyati upaṭṭhāti ñāṇassa. Tathā upaṭṭhānañhi sandhāya ‘‘dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu esa paṭiccasamuppādo ekantagambhīrova, atha kasmā gambhīrāvabhāsatā jotitāti? Saccametaṃ, ekantagambhīratādassanatthameva panassa gambhīrāvabhāsaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā aññattha labbhamānaṃ cātukoṭikaṃ byatirekamukhena nidassetvā tamevassa ekantagambhīrataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Etaṃ natthīti agambhīro agambhīrāvabhāso cāti etaṃ dvayaṃ natthi. Tena yathādassite cātukoṭike pacchimā ekakoṭi labbhatīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi.
缘起在哪些甚深的意义上被称为“甚深”呢?为了用四种譬喻把这些甚深之处标示出来,经中说了“为了抓住有顶……”等话。就像一个人伸出手想抓住有顶,却因为距离太远而抓不到;同样,诸行等法从无明等缘所生、所集起的意义,用凡夫的自然智是抓不到、无法了知的。就像普通人没法劈开须弥山,把山里的精髓和山味取出来;同样,对缘起所摄的诸法义理等,用自然智没法劈开、分析,以通达的方式去了知。就像普通人没法靠两条手臂横渡大海到达彼岸;同样,缘起在广大这一意义上好比大海,用自然智没法通过教说来通晓、掌握。就像普通人没法翻转大地取出地味;同样,“无明等是诸行的缘”——这样的缘起自性,用自然智没法取出、掌握。这样,应当用这四种甚深来配合四种譬喻。这里依“自然智”来作义理配合,是因为已见谛的圣者们对此是有所通达的。但即便如此,由于声闻和独觉佛对此只有部分智,只有诸佛才是圆满无余的智,所以才说“这是属于佛陀境界的问题”。巴利
Yehi gambhīrabhāvehi paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘gambhīro’’ti vuccati, te catūhi upamāhi ulliṅgento ‘‘bhavaggaggahaṇāyā’’tiādimāha. Yathā bhavaggaggahaṇatthaṃ hatthaṃ pasāretvā gahetuṃ na sakkā dūrabhāvato, evaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ avijjādipaccayasambhūtasamudāgatattho pakatiñāṇena gahetuṃ na sakkā. Yathā sineruṃ bhinditvā miñjaṃ pabbatarasaṃ pākatikapurisena nīharituṃ na sakkā, evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādagate dhammatthādike pakatiñāṇena bhinditvā vibhajja paṭivijjhanavasena jānituṃ na sakkā. Yathā mahāsamuddaṃ pakatipurisassa bāhudvayavasena pāraṃ tarituṃ na sakkā. Evaṃ vepullaṭṭhena mahāsamuddasadisaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ pakatiñāṇena desanāvasena pariharituṃ na sakkā. Yathā pathaviṃ parivattetvā pākatikapurisassa pathavojaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā, evaṃ itthaṃ avijjādayo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayā hontīti tesaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasabhāvo pākatikañāṇena nīharitvā gahetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ catubbidhagambhīratāvasena catasso upamā yojetabbā. Pākatikañāṇavasena cāyamatthayojanā katā diṭṭhasaccānaṃ tattha paṭivedhasabbhāvato, tathāpi yasmā sāvakānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca tattha sappadesameva ñāṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva nippadesaṃ. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhavisayaṃ pañha’’nti.
“莫”是遮止词。这句话是针对“看起来好像很浅显”这个说法而说的,所以解释说“意思是不要说”。抬高:就是以智慧来称赞的意思。贬低:就是呵斥、压制,也就是责备的意思。因此:是因为具有大智慧的缘故。巴利
Māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Svāyaṃ ‘‘uttānakuttānako viya khāyatī’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttoti āha ‘‘mā bhaṇīti attho’’ti. Ussādentoti paññāvasena ukkaṃsantoti attho. Apasādentoti nibbhacchanto, niggaṇhantoti attho. Tenāti mahāpaññabhāvena.
关于“在那里”这句话:长老自己虽然觉得缘起很浅显,但对其他人来说,缘起却是很深奥的。“以美好的食物滋味滋养的”:意思是被美好的饮食滋味所养育。“已经勤修过的”:意思是对于角力训练已经熟练、已经积累了很久的修习。“末罗人的石头”:意思是只有像末罗人那样力气极大的人才能扔出去的石头。“这块石头的重处在哪儿呢”:意思是“这块石头比较重的那一边在哪里?”他这样问,是为了说明自己举起那块石头很轻松。巴利
Tatthāti therassa satipi uttānabhāve paṭiccasamuppādassa aññesaṃ gambhīrabhāve. Subhojanarasapuṭṭhassāti sundarena bhojanarasena positassa. Katayogassāti nibbuddhapayoge kataparicayassa. Mallapāsāṇanti mallehi mahābaleheva khipitabbapāsāṇaṃ. Kuhiṃ imassa bhāriyaṭṭhānanti kasmiṃ passe imassa pāsāṇassa garutarapadesoti tassa sallahukabhāvaṃ dīpento vadati.
用“吞舟大鱼”等来比喻说明,是因为它的身体极其庞大。所以经文才说“据说他的……”等等。“沸腾般地翻滚”:意思是像沸腾一样地翻转、回旋、绕着转。这是一个描述特征的词。“背上的小骨片”:就是背部的骨片,也就是背脊骨。“具身者”:指拥有巨大身体的,意思就是大身。“一堆羽毛”:指一束羽毛团。“金翅鸟之风”:指金翅鸟在抓龙等时,拍打翅膀所产生的大风。巴利
Timirapiṅgalenevadīpenti tassa mahāvipphārabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Pakkuthatīti pakkuthantaṃ viya parivattati parito vattati. Lakkhaṇavacanañhetaṃ. Piṭṭhiyaṃ sakalikaaṭṭhikā piṭṭhipattaṃ. Kāyūpapannassāti mahatā kāyena upetassa, mahākāyassāti attho. Piñcha vaṭṭīti piñcha kalāpo. Supaṇṇavātanti nāgaggahaṇādīsu pakkhapapphoṭanavasena uppajjanakavātaṃ.
为了详细解说“宿世依止的成就”等前面列举的原因,就说“据说从这里……”等等。其中,“从这里”是指从这个贤劫以来。“十万”是指十万大劫。“天鹅城”是他的出生之城。“外层叶片”是指外面的叶子,也就是那些又长又宽的叶片。巴利
‘‘Pubbūpanissayasampattiyā’’tiādinā uddiṭṭhakāraṇāni vitthārato vivarituṃ ‘‘ito kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itoti ito bhaddakappato. Satasahassimeti satasahassame. Haṃsavatī nāma nagaraṃ ahosi jātanagaraṃ. Dhurapattānīti bāhirapattāni, yāni dīghatamāni.
“最小的弟弟”:指同父异母的弟弟中年纪最小的,就像我们世尊的难陀长老那样。因为诸佛并没有同父同母的兄弟。在那种情况下,连哥哥都不会出生,弟弟就更不可能有了。“财富”:指财产。“已安宁”:指那个地方因为盗贼引起的骚乱已经平息,所以安宁了。巴利
Kaniṭṭhabhātāti vemātikabhātā kaniṭṭho yathā amhākaṃ bhagavato nandatthero. Buddhānañhi sahodarā bhātaro nāma na honti. Tattha jeṭṭhā tāva nuppajjanti, kaniṭṭhānaṃ pana asambhavo eva. Bhoganti vibhavaṃ. Upasantoti corajanitasaṅkhobhavūpasamena upasanto janapado.
把两件衣穿在身上,意思是只把两件衣当作自己随身受用的衣物,其余所有资具都让自己舍弃掉。巴利
Dvesāṭake nivāsetvāti sāṭakadvayameva attano kāyaparihāriyaṃ katvā, itaraṃ sabbasambhāraṃ attanā mocetvā.
“为了拿钵”:因为钵里装了热食,当他把钵在两手之间来回倒换时,是为了能轻松舒服地拿住钵。“上衣”:指他自己披在上身的外衣。“这些是众所周知的事”:这些如前所说的内容,在世尊的教法中是众所周知的,是长老以佛和佛弟子为对象来积福的地方;而长老以独觉佛和菩萨为对象来积福的地方,那还有很多很多。巴利
Pattaggahaṇatthanti antopakkhittauṇhabhojanattā pattassa aparāparaṃ hatthe parivattentassa sukhena pattaggahaṇatthaṃ. Uttarisāṭakanti attano uttariyaṃ sāṭakaṃ. Etāni pākaṭaṭṭhānānīti etāni yathāvuttāni bhagavato desanāya pākaṭāni buddhe buddhasāvake ca uddissa therassa puññakaraṇaṭṭhānāni, paccekabuddhaṃ pana bodhisattañca uddissa therassa puññakaraṇaṭṭhānāni bahūniyeva.
就在我们的菩萨入胎结生的那一天,他也同样取得了结生。巴利
Paṭisandhiṃ gahetvāti amhākaṃ bodhisattassa paṭisandhiggahaṇadivaseyeva paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā.
学习,就是学习巴利圣典的文句;听闻,就是听闻其中的义理;遍问,就是在有疑难的地方把义理问清楚;受持,就是把巴利圣典的文句和它的义理放在心里。这一切在这里都应该依照缘起来理解,也可以依照全部佛语来理解。对入流者来说……它之所以现前,是因为去除了迷惑,以亲自证见的方式让“凡是集起之法,那一切都属于灭尽之法”这句话现前。名色分别,就是连同缘一起,对名色加以区分并通达。以四种,就是用法甚深等四种甚深,涵盖了一切甚深。巴利
Uggahanaṃ pāḷiyā uggaṇhanaṃ, savanaṃ atthasavanaṃ, paripucchanaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānesu atthaparipucchanaṃ, dhāraṇaṃ pāḷiyā pāḷiatthassa ca citte ṭhapanaṃ. Sabbañcetaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādavasena veditabbaṃ, sabbassapi buddhavacanassa vasenātipi vaṭṭati. Sotāpannānañca…pe… upaṭṭhāti tattha sammohavigamena ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti attapaccakkhavasena upaṭṭhānato . Nāmarūpaparicchedoti saha paccayena nāmarūpassa paricchijja avabodho. Catūhīti dhammagambhīrādīhi catūhi gambhīratāhi sabbāpi gambhīratā.
弟子们所宣说的教导,也仍然是导师的教导,所以论主说“立足于我所给出的理则”。有人说“有学圣者并没有以一切方式通达涅槃”,这并不是说他已经清楚见到了涅槃的甚深,像清楚见到甚深执取的甚深那样。因此论主说:“这涅槃本身才是甚深的,而缘的理则反倒显得浅显了。”因为涅槃,一切无学圣者都能完全通达,因为它没有部分;而缘的理则,只有正自觉者才能毫无遗漏地通达,其他人不能。所以,驳斥那位长老的人,就依缘的理则说“他在这里搞错了”。正是为了说明他不能毫无遗漏地通达,才说了“那么,为什么……”等话。虽然在法性上并没有差别,但依结缚的意义和随眠的意义,取它们可以被区分的那一面,说“这四种烦恼”。因为它们起束缚作用的意义是一回事,它们强力现行的意义是另一回事。这个道理也适用于其余的情况。意思是说:由于这些烦恼没有断除,他没有修成那种依止,所以绝不应该说那无上的法是浅显的。四阿僧祇劫、八阿僧祇劫、十六阿僧祇劫或无数劫:这是显示诸大菩萨相续中,令菩提成熟的诸法,因利根、中根、钝根的差别而有所不同,而这是从大誓愿开始算起的。以这些:即以如上所说的佛陀、声闻、上首声闻、辟支佛、正自觉者的殊胜证得。相违的:即违背的、对立的。从一切方面通达缘的理则,就是证得正自觉,所以说“正在努力通达缘的理则时”。以九种方式:即以生起等九种缘的理则。这在《无碍解道》中已经说过——巴利
Sāvakehi desitā desanāpi pana satthu eva desanāti āha ‘‘mayā dinnanaye ṭhatvā’’ti. ‘‘Sekkhena nāma nibbānaṃ sabbākārena paṭividdhaṃ na hotī’’ti na tassa gambhīratāti tassa gambhīrassa upādānassa gambhīratā viya suṭṭhu diṭṭhā nāma hoti. Tasmā āha ‘‘idaṃ nibbānameva gambhīraṃ, paccayākāro pana uttānako jāto’’ti. Nibbānañhi sabbepi asekkhā sabbaso paṭivijjhanti nippadesattā, paccayākāraṃ pana sammāsambuddhāyeva anavasesato paṭivijjhanti, na itare. Tasmā paccayavasena ‘‘idaṃ aparaddha’’nti vuttaṃ theraṃ apasādentena. Tameva hissa anavasesato paṭivedhābhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘atha kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asatipi dhammato bhede saṃyojanatthaanusayatthavasena pana tesaṃ labbhamānabhedaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ime cattāro kilese’’ti vuttaṃ. Añño hi tesaṃ bandhanattho, añño thāmagamanaṭṭhoti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Iti imesaṃ kilesānaṃ appahīnattā tathārūpaṃ upanissayasampadaṃ abhāvayatova anuttānameva dhammaṃ uttānanti na vattabbamevāti adhippāyo. Cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyānīti idaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ santāne bodhiparipācakadhammānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvasiddhakālavisesadassanaṃ, tañca kho mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāyāti vadanti. Etehīti yathāvuttabuddhasāvakaaggasāvakapaccekabuddhasammāsambuddhānaṃ visesādhigamehi. Paccanīkanti paṭikkūlaṃ viruddhaṃ. Sabbathā paccayākārapaṭivedho nāma sammāsambodhiyādhigamo evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantassevā’’ti. Navahi ākārehīti uppādādīhi navahi paccayākārehi. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.45) –
无明对于行,有九种作用方式:作为生起的依止、作为转起的依止、作为相状的依止、作为积聚的依止、作为结合的依止、作为障碍的依止、作为集起的依止、作为因的依止、作为缘的依止。以这九种方式,无明是行的缘,行是依缘而生的。巴利
‘‘Avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhiti ca pavattaṭṭhiti ca nimittaṭṭhiti ca āyūhanaṭṭhiti ca saṃyogaṭṭhiti ca palibodhaṭṭhiti ca samudayaṭṭhiti ca hetuṭṭhiti ca paccayaṭṭhiti ca, imehi navahākārehi avijjā paccayo, saṅkhārā paccayasamuppannā’’tiādi.
在这里,“以九种行相”是指以九种成为缘的方式。“生起”的意思是:果从它而生起,也就是果生起的因。有无明时,行就生起;无无明时,就不生起,所以无明就是行的生起。同样地,有无明时,行会运转,也会被取相。就像无明把它们投向有等各处一样,无明成为它们的缘;同样地,它们也积聚、为果的生起而努力、与自己的果相结合。在它们自身生起的那个相续中,它们系缚;在其他缘和合时,它们生起、出现。无明也达到成为行之因的状态。依于无明,行如此运转。应当这样理解无明成为行之因的种种差别,即“生起”等。“为生起而安住”:凭它而安住,就是“住”,也就是原因。生起本身就是住,所以叫“为生起而安住”。其余的也这样理解。而且,这种对缘的理则的照见,就像过去诸佛在菩提树下所运用的一样,我们的世尊也运用了。为了说明“才一见……”等,显示被那惊人的震撼所击中,一万个世界都震动、大震动。巴利
Tattha navahākārehīti navahi paccayabhāvūpagamanehi ākārehi. Uppajjati etasmā phalanti uppādo, phaluppattiyā kāraṇabhāvo. Sati ca avijjāya saṅkhārā uppajjanti, nāsati, tasmā avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādo hoti. Tathā avijjāya sati saṅkhārā pavattanti ca nimiyanti ca. Yathā ca bhavādīsu khipanti, evaṃ tesaṃ avijjā paccayo hoti, tathā āyūhanti phaluppattiyā ghaṭenti saṃyujjanti attano phalena. Yasmiṃ santāne sayaṃ uppannā, taṃ palibundhanti paccayantarasamavāye udayanti uppajjanti, hinoti ca saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ upagacchati. Paṭicca avijjaṃ saṅkhārā ayanti pavattantīti evaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvūpagamanavisesā uppādādayo veditabbāti. Uppādaṭṭhitīti ca tiṭṭhati etenāti ṭhiti, kāraṇaṃ. Uppādo eva ṭhiti uppādaṭhiti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Idañca paccayākāradassanaṃ yathā purimehi mahābodhimūle pavattitaṃ, tathā amhākaṃ bhagavatāpi pavattitanti acchariyavegābhihatā dasasahassilokadhātu saṅkampi sampakampīti dassento ‘‘diṭṭhamatte’’tiādimāha.
对于这个法,也就是这个被称为缘起的法。不过,从义理上说,它就是那些由因所生之法的因。因此他说“这个缘法”,意思是生等法是老死的缘。对名色的分别以及对它的缘的把握,不是仅凭最初的信解就能完成,而是要在那里反复地随觉,也就是让智慧一再生起。为了显示这两者的状态,他说“以知遍知的方式而不随觉”。以舍弃常想等而转起的观法,确实能通达,因为它通过镇伏对立面而变得锐利、明净;而作为其基础的审察遍知和圣道,因为是以遍知、断、现证的方式转起,所以被归入审察遍知和断遍知。因此,为了显示缺少这两种通达,他说“以审察遍知和断遍知的方式而不通达”。所谓“经线”,是指为了织布而把线拉紧绷直并缠绕起来;然而,因为经线会变得杂乱,这里就取它杂乱的样子作比喻,所以说“像经线一样变得杂乱”。为了详细说明这略说的意思,说了“正如”等。使它们一致,是指把前后对齐,让它变直,也就是让它不歪斜、保持笔直的意思。或者,那杂乱的经线就是“经乱”,像经乱一样生起、成为的,就是“经乱生”。不走上中道,而是落入两种极端,在缘的理则上跌倒,变得杂乱不堪;正因为落入这两种极端,他们随着各种见解的执取而轮转,不知道通达那笔直的法的安立之经线。因此他说“不能把缘的理则弄直”。两位菩萨,是指独觉菩萨和大菩萨。以自己的法性,是指以自己的本性,也就是不靠别人的教导。在那里那里结成的,是指在那个那个地方结成的线团、线球。正因为如此,才说“结成结的”。在诸缘上跌倒,是指在无常、苦、无我等自性的诸缘法上,以常等的样子跌倒。不能把诸缘弄直,是指因为不放弃那常等的执取,不能把自己的见弄直去符合缘法的相,所以以执取“这是真实”的身结而成为结。因此他说“六十二……结成结的”。巴利
Etassa dhammassāti etassa paṭiccasamuppādasaññitassa dhammassa. So pana yasmā atthato hetuppabhavānaṃ hetu. Tenāha ‘‘etassa paccayadhammassā’’ti . Jātiādīnaṃ jarāmaraṇapaccayatāyāti attho. Nāmarūpaparicchedo tassa ca paccayapariggaho na paṭhamābhinivesamattena hoti, atha kho tattha aparāparaṃ ñāṇuppattisaññitena anu anu bujjhanena. Tadubhayabhāvaṃ pana dassento ‘‘ñātapariññāvasena ananubujjhanā’’ti āha. Niccasaññādīnaṃ pajahanavasena pavattamānā vipassanādhamme paṭivijjhati eva nāma hoti paṭipakkhavikkhambhanena tikkhavisadabhāvāpattito, tadadhiṭṭhānabhūtā ca tīraṇapariññā ariyamaggo ca pariññāpahānābhisamayavasena pavattiyā tīraṇappahānapariññāsaṅgaho cāti tadubhayapaṭivedhābhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘tīraṇappahānapariññāvasena appaṭivijjhanā’’ti āha. Tantaṃ vuccati paṭavīnanatthaṃ tantavāyeti tantaṃ āvañchitvā pasāritasuttavaṭṭitaṃ nīyatīti katvā, taṃ pana tantākulatāya nidassanabhāvena ākulameva gahitanti āha ‘‘tantaṃ viya ākulajātā’’ti. Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samānetunti pubbenāparaṃ samaṃ katvā ānetuṃ, avisamaṃ ujuṃ kātunti attho. Tantameva vā ākulaṃ tantākulaṃ, tantākulaṃ viya jātā bhūtā tantākulakajātā. Majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ anupagantvā antadvayapakkhandena paccayākāre khalitvā ākulabyākulā honti, teneva antadvayapakkhandena taṃtaṃdiṭṭhiggāhavasena paribbhamantā ujukaṃ dhammaṭṭhititantaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na jānanti. Tenāha ‘‘na sakkonti paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātu’’nti. Dve bodhisatteti paccekabodhisattamahābodhisatte. Attano dhammatāyāti attano sabhāvena, paropadesena vināti attho. Tattha tattha guḷakajātanti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne jātaguḷakaṃ piṇḍisuttaṃ. Tato eva gaṇṭhibaddhanti vuttaṃ. Paccayesu pakkhalitvāti aniccadukkhānattādisabhāvesu paccayadhammesu niccādibhāvavasena pakkhalitvā. Paccaye ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontoti tasseva niccādigāhassa avissajjanato paccayadhammanimittaṃ attano dassanaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkonto idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthavasena gaṇṭhikajātā hontīti āha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi…pe… gaṇṭhibaddhā’’ti.
有些沙门或婆罗门,执著、依附于常见等见解,就像“家结”一样。“家”是指纺织,也就是因为阴性词而得到“织工”这个名称的人所打的结,所以叫做“家结”。这是说,由于缠杂混乱,无论从顶端还是从根部,都很难辨认出它的各个部分,是一条打错了结的线。注释说:“所谓‘家结’,就是织工的经线。”“雌鸟”是指鹌鹑。这种鸟把巢悬在树枝上。它从各处衔来草等材料,这样那样地编织鸟巢,就像那些织工的经线一样,无论从顶端去对顶端,还是从根部去对根部,都没办法对齐或分辨清楚。因此注释说“正如”等等。“这两者”是指所说的“家结”即经线,以及鸟巢。“依照前面的方式”是指像前面“正如这些众生”等所说的那样。巴利
Ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sassatadiṭṭhiādi diṭṭhiyo nissitā allīnā, vinanato kulāti itthiliṅgavasena laddhanāmassa tantavāyassa gaṇṭhikaṃ nāma ākulabhāvena aggato vā mūlato vā duviññeyyāvayavaṃ khalitabandhasuttanti āha ‘‘kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjiyasutta’’nti. Sakuṇikāti vaṭṭacāṭakasakuṇikā. Sā hi rukkhasākhāsu olambanakulāvakā hoti. Tañhi sā kulāvakaṃ tato tato tiṇahīrādike ānetvā tathā tathā vinandhati, yathā tesaṃ pesakārakañjiyasuttaṃ viya aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ vivecetuṃ vā na sakkā. Tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Tadubhayampīti kulāgaṇṭhikanti vuttaṃ kañjiyasuttaṃ kulāvakañca. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘evameva sattā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayeneva.
确实,文阇草和芦苇草虽然本来就是那样生长的,但倒伏在树林里之后,互相缠绕,乱成一团地待着;然而为了说明它们同样难以分辨,就像绳子一样,所以说了“正如”等话。这里剩下的部分,和前面所说的方法一样。巴利
Kāmaṃ muñjapabbajatiṇāni yathājātānipi dīghabhāvena patitvā araññaṭṭhāne aññamaññaṃ vinandhitvā ākulāni hutvā tiṭṭhanti, tāni pana tathā dubbiveciyāni yathā rajjubhūtānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
所谓苦界,就是远离了快乐,也远离了快乐的因。因为它是苦的去处,也就是恶道之苦发生和存在的场所。所谓从福乐中坠落,意思是“从兴盛中掉落”,也就是颠倒地掉落;由于这样颠倒地掉落,以那种生命状态就无法拥有福乐的积聚。另一个是轮回——难道“苦界”等说法所说的不也是轮回吗?确实如此,不过为了显示地狱等处具有极其重大的苦,才举出苦界等说法。这个意思应当通过牛和公牛的比喻来理解。诸蕴的次第,是指五蕴以因果的方式一次又一次地生起。无间断地转起,是指没有中断地持续生起。巴利
Apāyoti ayena sukhena, sukhahetunā vā virahito. Dukkhassa gatibhāvatoti apāyikassa dukkhassa pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Sukhasamussayatoti ‘‘abbhudayato vinipatitattā’’ti virūpaṃ nipatitattā yathā tenattabhāvena sukhasamussayo na hoti, evaṃ nipatitattā. Itaroti saṃsāro nanu ‘‘apāya’’ntiādinā vuttopi saṃsāro evāti? Saccametaṃ, nirayādīnaṃ pana adhimattadukkhabhāvadassanatthaṃ apāyādiggahaṇaṃ gobalibaddañāyena ayamattho veditabbo. Khandhānañca paṭipāṭīti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ hetuphalabhāvena aparāparuppatti. Abbhocchinnaṃ vattamānāti avicchedena pavattamānā.
“这一切”指的是前面从“苦界”等所说的全部内容,也就是苦界之苦和轮回之苦。应当知道,“就像大海中被风吹动的船”这个比喻,是为了说明轮回流转的处所极其广大,也是为了说明轮回流转不会停止、不会退回。剩下的部分和前面所说的方法一样。巴利
Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ ‘‘apāya’’ntiādinā vuttaṃ sabbaṃ apāyadukkhañceva vaṭṭadukkhañca. Mahāsamudde vātakkhittā nāvā viyāti idaṃ paribbhamanaṭṭhānassa mahantabhāvadassanatthañceva paribbhamanassa anavattitadassanatthañca veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
《无闻者经》的注释巴利
1. Assutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
61 “无闻者”是指通过耳门所领受的,或者拥有这种领受,就叫作“有闻者”;否定这一点,就是没有闻,所以叫“无闻者”。这里的“vā”一词表示称赞,或者表示殊胜。因此,如果有人拥有值得称赞的、或者特别殊胜的闻,他能够摧毁杂染、熟习教法义理,那么通过“听闻了那法之后,为了达到如实的状态而修行,所以叫有闻者”这句话,就开显了这一点。或者,与应当听闻的法相应,听闻之后完成应作的成就,就叫作有闻者;否定这一点,就是没有闻,所以叫无闻者。因此古人说:“因为没有教法通达和证得通达,应当知道他是无闻者。”同样也说:“他与蕴、界……中略……抉择无关。”其中,让文句在心中生起是“领受”,对此反复遍问是“遍问”,与善知识一起通过诘问与答辩而作出判断是“抉择”。“众多”就是很多。对于烦恼以及烦恼所造作的种种,应当依照《无碍解道》中所说的方法详细阐述。由于提到“没有能力厌离”等,这里指的是凡夫。“此”字有靠近、现前可见的意思,因此说:“‘于此’,是要指出当下现前、可见的身体。”与四大相关的,称为“由四大所成的”。不过,就像用泥做出来的东西称为“泥造品”一样,这个由四大所产生的身体,就叫作“四大所造”。“厌离”就是达到厌离。所谓的厌离,是一种感到嫌弃、不喜爱的状态,因此说为“会感到嫌弃”。“离染”就是成为离贪者。因此说“不会染着”。“解脱”在这里指的是彻底的、究竟的解脱,因此解释说“会想要解脱”。由四种能产生色的缘所累积而成,叫作“积集”,也就是增长。从积集的状态中离散,叫作“损减”,也就是衰退。“执取”就是抓取,指在结生时产生。“坏灭”就是诸蕴的破散。据说,这就是把躯体丢弃,所以说:“‘舍置’,就是坏灭。”巴利
61.‘‘Assutavā’’ti sotadvārānusārena upadhāritaṃ, upadhāraṇaṃ vā sutaṃ assa atthīti sutavā, tappaṭikkhepena na sutavāti assutavā. Vā-saddo cāyaṃ pasaṃsāyaṃ, atisayassa vā bodhanako, tasmā yassa pasaṃsitaṃ, atisayena vā sutaṃ atthi, so ‘‘sutavā’’ti saṃkilesaviddhaṃsanasamattho pariyattidhammaparicayo ‘‘taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipatti ca sutavā’’ti iminā padena pakāsito. Atha vā sotabbayuttaṃ sutvā kattabbanipphattiṃ suṇīti sutavā. Tappaṭikkhepena na sutavāti assutavā. Tenāhu porāṇā ‘‘āgamādhigamābhāvā, ñeyyo assutavā itī’’ti. Tathā cāha ‘‘khandhadhātu…pe… vinicchayarahito’’ti. Tattha vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho, tattha paripucchanaṃ paripucchā, kusalehi saha codanāpariharaṇavasena vinicchayassa kāraṇaṃ vinicchayo. Puthūnanti bahūnaṃ. Kilesādīnaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ paṭisambhidāmagganiddesesu (mahāni. 51, 94) āgatanayena. Andhaputhujjano gahito ‘‘nālaṃ nibbinditu’’ntiādivacanato. Āsannapaccakkhavācī idaṃ-saddoti āha ‘‘imasminti paccuppannapaccakkhakāyaṃ dassetī’’ti. Catūsu mahābhūtesu niyuttoti cātumahābhūtiko. Yathā pana mahāmattikāya nibbattaṃ mattikāmayaṃ, evamayaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbatto ‘‘catumahābhūtamayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Nibbindeyyāti nibbindanampi āpajjeyya. Nibbindanā nāma ukkaṇṭhanā anabhiratibhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ukkaṇṭheyyā’’ti. Virajjeyyāti vītarāgo bhaveyya. Tenāha ‘‘na rajjeyyā’’ti. Vimucceyyāti idha pana accantāya vimuccanaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘muccitukāmo bhaveyyā’’ti. Catūhi ca rūpajanakapaccayehi āgato cayoti, ācayo, vuddhi. Cayato apakkamoti apacayo, parihāni. Ādānanti gahaṇaṃ, paṭisandhiyā nibbatti. Bhedoti khandhānaṃ bhedo. So hi kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti vuttoti āha ‘‘nikkhepananti bhedo’’ti.
“被了知”是指以各种方式被认知。为了执取色,也以执取的方式把色作为所缘。他们把不合适的色当作对象之后,又用渴爱等去执取无色;由于无色对这些比丘来说是适合的,他们便把无色变成适合执取的对象。因此说“为什么”等话。“正在拔出”是指从那种执取中把心拉出来。巴利
Paññāyantīti pakārato ñāyanti. Rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ pariggaṇhanavasenapi rūpaṃ ālambituṃ. Ayuttarūpaṃ katvā taṇhādīhi pariggahetuṃ arūpaṃ pariggaṇhituṃ yuttarūpaṃ karoti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sappāyabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Nikkaḍḍhantoti tato gāhato nīharanto.
这个“意处”的名称,并不像“定”“慧”那样的施设名称,也不像“修习心与慧”“质多居士”等语境中的用法。应当被尊重、被用心对待的事物,就是“心所依处”;这种状态就是心所依处性,因此称为心的状态。由于心所行境的多样性,也就是心会朝向种种净妙或不净妙的对象。由于相应法的心性,也就是与贪、信等相应法俱起的心之本性。因此,由这种心的本性,而说为“心所造”。这是就“了别的意义”,即认知的意义来说的。“被执著了”:就是被已生起执著的渴爱抓住了。因此说“被渴爱”等。“以颠倒相触受之后”:就是超越了法的真实状态,例如无常等,而后从另一方面以常等执取。“一百零八”:即一百加八。“九种慢”:即依“我胜”等而来的九种慢。“梵网经中所说的常见论等六十二见”。“如是”:即如前所说之方式。因为凡夫以渴爱、慢、恶见取着而坚固执取,所以他对那些不能厌离,不能生起厌离智。巴利
Manāyatanassevanāmaṃ, na samādhipaññattīnaṃ ‘‘cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 1.9.9), citto gahapatī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 74) viya. Cittīkātabbabhūtaṃ vatthu etassāti cittavatthu, tassa bhāvo cittavatthutā, tena kāraṇena cittabhāvamāha. Cittagocaratāyāti cittavicittavisayatāya. Sampayuttadhammacittatāyāti rāgādisaddhādisampayuttadhammavasena cittasabhāvattā. Tena cittatāya cittattamāha. Vijānanaṭṭhenāti bujjhanaṭṭhena. Ajjhositanti ajjhosābhūtāya taṇhāya gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāyā’’tiādi. Parāmasitvāti dhammasabhāvaṃ aniccatādiṃ atikkamitvā parato niccādito āmasitvā. Aṭṭhasatanti aṭṭhādhikaṃ sataṃ. Nava mānāti seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā āgatā navavidhamānā. Brahmajāle āgatā sassatavādādayo dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo. Evanti vuttākārena. Yasmā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhavasena puthujjanena daḷhaggāhaṃ gahitaṃ, tasmā so tattha nibbindituṃ nibbidāñāṇaṃ uppādetuṃ na samattho.
“诸比丘”这句话里,iti 这个词有“等等”的意思,用它把“善哉”这一类词也包括进来。这是承接前后的话,为了说明“为什么这样说”而追问原因。所以说“首先,确实”等等。指的是没有听闻过佛法的凡夫。由此,也就是由世尊。做了不恰当的事,因为通过“应当厌离”等话已经显示了他的过患。但对于无色,因为没有同样显示过患,所以说“适合执取无色”,意思是好像把它当成了恰当的事。执取,就是渴爱、慢、见的执取。“从色中出离后,进入了无色”,这是世尊在显示过患之后,否定了对色的执取,但没有否定对无色的执取,所以对于那些错误地认为“在那里是否也该那样做”的人,他就像是从色中出离后进入了无色一样,因此这样说。正在安住,就是正在安住。“如同陷入之后”,这是就依其本性而转起的事物,通过“在最初的生命阶段”等话,以色法的坏灭、衰老等来分别显示。巴利
Bhikkhaveti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, tena ‘‘vara’’nti evamādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Idaṃ anusandhivacanaṃ ‘‘kasmā āhā’’ti kathetukāmatāya kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Tenāha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ hī’’tiādi. Assutavatā puthujjanena. Tenāti bhagavatā. Ayuttarūpaṃ kataṃ ‘‘nibbindeyyā’’tiādinā ādīnavassa vibhāvitattā. Arūpe pana tathā ādīnavassa avibhāvitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘arūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ yuttarūpa’’nti, yuttarūpaṃ viya katanti adhippāyo. Gāhoti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāho. ‘‘Nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato’’ti idaṃ bhagavatā ādīnavaṃ dassetvā rūpe gāho paṭikkhitto, na arūpe, tasmā ‘‘kātabbo nu kho so tatthā’’ti micchāgaṇhantānaṃ so tato rūpato nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tiṭṭhamānanti tiṭṭhantaṃ. ‘‘Āpajjitvā viya hotī’’ti sabhāvena pavattamānaṃ ‘‘paṭhamavaye’’tiādinā rūpassa bhedaṃ vayādīhi vibhajitvā dasseti.
抬脚:就是把已经放好的脚抬起来。往前移:就是把抬起的脚移过原来站着的位置。横着移过去:就是抬起的脚不碰到站着的那只脚,稍微往外侧转一点再移过去。放下:就是这样越过另一只脚之后,为了放到地上而松开下落。平放:就是松开之后,让脚平稳地落到地上、安放好。停息:就是放好的脚完全停住、压稳。就在每一处:就是在每一个阶段本身,比如最初阶段等。用这个限定,说明它们不会转到别的阶段去。分节:就是状态;节:就是关节。如发啪啪声响:如同发出“啪嗒啪嗒”声响,以此显示它们转起的刹那极为短暂。此:这些色法如前所述,在每一阶段中即于彼处坏灭,正是如此所说的情形。灯焰聚:就是灯焰的焰群、焰团。因为那灯焰不越过灯焰的焰群,就在那里坏灭。以相续连接来说:就是以相续之义来说。巴利
Pādassa uddharaṇeti yathā ṭhapitassa pādassa ukkhipane. Atiharaṇanti yathāuddhataṃ yathāṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā haraṇaṃ. Vītiharaṇanti uddhato pādo yathāṭṭhitaṃ pādaṃ yathā na ghaṭṭeti, evaṃ thokaṃ passato pariṇāmetvā haraṇaṃ. Vossajjananti tathā parapādaṃ vītisāretvā bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipanatthaṃ avossajjanaṃ. Sannikkhepananti vossajjetvā bhūmiyaṃ samaṃ nikkhipanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ. Sannirujjhananti nikkhittassa sabbaso nirujjhanaṃ uppīḷanaṃ. Tattha tatthevāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ paṭhamavayādike eva. Avadhāraṇena tesaṃ koṭṭhāsantarasaṅkamanābhāvamāha. Odhīti bhāvo, pabbanti sandhi. Paṭhamavayādayo eva hettha odhi pabbanti ca adhippetā. Paṭapaṭāyantāti ‘‘paṭapaṭā’’iti karontā viya, tena nesaṃ pavattikkhaṇassa ittarataṃ dasseti. Etanti etaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ yathāvuttaṃ tattha tattheva bhijjanaṃ evaṃ vuttappakārameva. Vaṭṭippadesanti vaṭṭiyā pulakaṃ barahaṃ. Tañhi vaṭṭiyā pulakaṃ anatikkamitvāva sā dīpajālā bhijjati. Paveṇisambandhavasenāti santativasena.
“夜间”就是指在夜里。这里的“业格”其实是表达“依格”的意思。但不能这样理解它的含义,因为未生起的东西不存在灭去。“从先前的相续”是指从在诸色中已经说过的相续。“无数万亿心”生起:为了用长老的主张来说明所说的这个意思,所以说了“此也已被说”等话。“半顶”:就是比一半略少一点,再从那一半中多出一些,可以理解为“车乘的百数”。有人说是“十四半”,另有人说是“第四半”。那些坚持说“一又半百有余车乘”的人,这值得考察。“四升为一桶”:桶。由于是大森林,增长起来的林子称为“大林”,所以说“大林:在大森林中”。“那”是指最初抓住的树枝。“此义”:这不落地面而抓住仍站立的树枝,名为抓取之义。世尊正是为了这个意思,虽然说了“林中”,又说“大林”。巴利
Rattinti rattiyaṃ. Bhummatthe hetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Evaṃ pana attho na gahetabbo anuppannassa nirodhābhāvato. Purimapaveṇitoti rūpe vuttapaveṇito. Anekāni cittakoṭisatasahassāni uppajjantīti vuttamatthaṃ theravādena dīpetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Aḍḍhacūḷanti thokena ūnaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ, tassa pana upaḍḍhaṃ adhikārato vāhasatassāti viññāyati. ‘‘Aḍḍhacuddasa’’nti keci, ‘‘aḍḍhacatuttha’’nti apare. ‘‘Sādhikaṃ diyaḍḍhasataṃ vāhā’’ti daḷhaṃ katvā vadantīti vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Catunāḷiko tumbo. Mahāraññatāya pavaddhaṃ vanaṃ pavananti āha ‘‘pavaneti mahāvane’’ti. Tanti paṭhamaṃ gahitasākhaṃ. Ayamatthoti ayaṃ bhūmiṃ anotaritvā ṭhitasākhāya eva gahaṇasaṅkhāto attho. Etadatthameva hi bhagavā ‘‘araññe’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘pavane’’ti āha.
就像在阿兰若处的大森林中一样。所缘的执持,就是对所缘的执取。不能说没有所缘缘也能生起,因为缺少所缘缘就不会生起。属于同一类,就是色等、青等具有同一种自性。当说“诸比丘,可见此四大所造之身有积聚也有减损”时,就是把执取从色法方面引出,而安立在无色上;当说“诸比丘,无闻凡夫更善”等时,就是把执取从无色方面引出,而安立在色上。巴利
Araññamahāvanaṃ viyāti araññaṭṭhāne brahāraññe viya. Ārammaṇolambananti ārammaṇassa avalambanaṃ. Na vattabbaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena vinā anuppajjanato. Ekajātiyanti rūpādinīlādiekasabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Dissati, bhikkhave, imassa cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa ācayopi apacayopī’’ti vadantena rūpato nīharitvā arūpe gāho patiṭṭhāpito nāma, ‘‘varaṃ, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano’’tiādiṃ vadantena arūpato nīharitvā rūpe gāho patiṭṭhāpito nāma.
“那”是指执取。从两方面,就是从色与无色两方面。“我将引出”,就是我将取出来。念诵咒语后,就是诵咒之后。向耳朵吹气后,就是朝耳朵吹气。它的,是指毒的。彻底揉搓后,就是彻底揉压,意思是取出来。巴利
Nanti gāhaṃ. Ubhayatoti rūpato ca arūpato ca. Harissāmīti nīharissāmi. Parivattetvāti mantaṃ jappitvā. Kaṇṇe dhumetvāti kaṇṇe dhametvā. Assāti visassa. Nimmathetvāti nimmadditvā, nīharitvāti adhippāyo.
所谓“道”,指的是出世间道。这里用“厌离”这个词,说的是强有力的观。巴利
Maggoti lokuttaramaggo. ‘‘Nibbinda’’nti iminā balavavipassanā kathitā.
第二部《无闻者经》的注释巴利
2. Dutiyaassutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
62 62. 以缘的方式,能利益乐受的,就是“乐受之”。因此他说“乐受的缘”。这里的缘属于亲依止这一类,不是俱生这一类。因此他说“难道不是……”等话。“速行受”指与速行心俱生的受。“关于那个”指关于那种亲依止缘的状态。“此”指“乐受的缘”这句话。“同样的道理”指用这个方式类推到“难道耳触不是乐受的缘吗”等等说法。那个触是它的生起之处、产生之处,所以是“同类生”,也就是所感受的。然而,因为那受正好与那个触相适应,所以说“那受与那个触相像、与那个触相称”这个意思也被说了。“依所说方式”指依照“乐受的缘”等所说的方式。就像下钻木与上钻木通过摩擦而接触一样,触的接触是结合,而那种接触由于不间断地生起而成为聚集状态,这里称为“和合”,并不是某些两个或三个法同住,因此说“以接触聚集之义”。火星指迸出的火花。“处”指眼等处,由与境的接触而来。正被获得的法就像接触一样被执取,所以说“触如接触”。受如火界,因为其自性是苦。巴利
62. Paccayabhāvena sukhavedanāya hitanti sukhavedaniyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukhavedanāya paccaya’’nti. Paccayabhāvo ca upanissayakoṭiyā, na sahajātakoṭiyā. Tenāha ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādi. Javanavedanāyāti javanacittasahagatāya vedanāya. Taṃ sandhāyāti taṃ upanissayapaccayataṃ sandhāya. Etanti etaṃ ‘‘sukhavedanāya paccaya’’nti vacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Eseva nayoti iminā ‘‘nanu ca sotasamphasso sukhavedanāya paccayo na hotī’’ti evamādiṃ atidisati. So samphasso jāti uppattiṭṭhānaṃ etassāti tajjātikaṃ, vedayitaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā tassa phassassa anucchavikameva hoti, tasmā tassāruppaṃ tassa phassassa anurūpanti ca attho vutto. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘sukhavedanāya paccayo’’tiādinā vuttavidhianusārena. Adharāraṇiyaṃ uttarāraṇiyā mantanavasena ghaṭṭanaṃ iva saṅghaṭṭanaṃ phassena yugaggāho, tassa pana ghaṭṭanassa nirantarappavattiyā piṇḍitabhāvo idha samodhānaṃ, na kesañci dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā sahāvaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanasampiṇḍanenāti attho’’ti. Aggicuṇṇoti vipphuliṅgaṃ. Vatthūti cakkhādivatthu visayasaṅghaṭṭanato. Labbhamānova dhammo saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya gayhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya phasso’’ti. Usmādhātu viya vedanā dukkhasabhāvattā.
3.《子肉喻经》的注释巴利
3. Puttamaṃsūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
63 “按照所说的方式”就是指前面《食相应》第一经里已经讲过的方式。有些人说:“以利养恭敬”,是指以被称为利养恭敬的这种事件为缘;另一些人说:是在利养恭敬中的事件缘。因为有些比丘由于贪著利养恭敬,对资具没有省察就受用,世尊就是以此事为缘,开示了这部教法。“双重大云”:下方下垂、上方上涌,成对出现的百层、千层巨大云聚。巴利
63.Vuttanayamevāti heṭṭhā āhāravaggassa paṭhamasutte vuttanayameva. Lābhasakkārenāti lābhasakkārasaṅkhātāya aṭṭhuppattiyāti keci. Lābhasakkāre vā aṭṭhuppattiyāti apare. Yo hi lābhasakkāranimittaṃ paccayesu gedhena bhikkhūnaṃ apaccavekkhitaparibhogo jāto, taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavā imaṃ desanaṃ nikkhipi. Yamakamahāmeghoti heṭṭhā olambanaupariuggamanavasena satapaṭalasahassapaṭalo yugaḷamahāmegho.
世尊固定住在某处时,他们也住在那里;世尊外出游行时,他们也跟着走。比丘们大多数已经在百千劫甚至更久的时间里,圆满了布施波罗蜜的积累,所以那时比丘僧团也生起了极大的利养和恭敬,因此说“比丘僧团也是如此”。“受到恭敬”就是得到了恭敬。“受到尊重”就是得到了尊重。“受到敬重”就是被众人放在心上、内心喜爱。“受到供养”就是被人用花鬘等供养以及四种资具来供奉。“受到礼敬”就是得到了礼敬。具体来说:如果有人恭敬地备好精美殊胜的四种资具送上来,他就是“受到恭敬”;如果有人怀着尊重的心布施,他就是“受到尊重”;如果有人内心喜爱他、多方看重他,他就是“受到敬重”;如果有人以一切供养的方式对待他,他就是“受到供养”;如果有人以问讯、起迎、合掌等最高的顺从举动来表达敬意,他就是“受到礼敬”。对于世尊和比丘僧团,世人就是这样做的。因此说“那时……资具”。“达到利养和名声的最高处”就是达到了利养和名声的顶点、最胜处。巴利
Tiṭṭhanti ceva bhagavati katthaci nibaddhavāsaṃ vasante, cārikampi gacchante anubandhanti ca. Bhikkhūnampi yebhuyyena kappasatasahassaṃ tato bhiyyopi pūritadānapāramisañcayattā tadā mahālābhasakkāro uppajjatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassapī’’ti. Sakkatoti sakkārappatto. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti bahumato manasā piyāyito ca. Pūjitoti mālādipūjāya ceva catupaccayābhipūjāya ca pūjito. Apacitoti apacāyanappatto. Yassa hi cattāro paccaye sakkatvā suabhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte upanenti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti bahumaññanti, so bahumato. Yassa sabbametaṃ pūjāvasena karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Bhagavati bhikkhusaṅghe ca loko evaṃ paṭipanno. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayena…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti (udā. 14; saṃ. ni. 2.70). Lābhaggayasaggappattanti lābhassa ca yasassa ca aggaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pattaṃ.
第一食的注释巴利
Paṭhamāhāravaṇṇanā
“他的”是指世尊的。以思惟法的自性为所缘而生起、与惭愧相应的智慧,就是法的悚惧。对众生来说,受用食物是长期惯常执著的地方,因此世尊的意趣是:不能仅仅因为不省察,就制定波罗夷罪。“食”等语,是参照先前在“缘”等论述中关于食所说的方法而说的。现在,针对在那里应当做的义理阐释,所以说“就是前面已说的义理”。巴利
Assāti bhagavato. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego. Dhuvapaṭisevanaṭṭhānañhetaṃ sattānaṃ, yadidaṃ āhāraparibhogo, tasmā na tattha apaccavekkhaṇamattena pārājikaṃ paññapetuṃ sakkāti adhippāyo. Āhārāti ‘‘paccayā’’tiādinā pubbe āhāresu vuttavidhiṃ sandhāya āha ‘‘āhārā’’tiādi. Idāni tattha kattabbaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘heṭṭhā vuttatthamevā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“过患”就是过失。“妻”就是妻子。“夫”就是丈夫。这两个词就像“父子”这类词一样,不过在巴利语里把“ā”音缩短并带上鼻音,所以说成“夫妻”。“资粮”的意思是能正确带来果实,也就是能带来安乐。因此它被称为“路上的利益”,也就是旅费。因为道路属于荒野,所以说“像荒野一样的道路”。那里很难找到水,却能让人通过,所以叫“荒野”,也就是没有水的广阔森林。按照习惯用法,别的广阔森林也这样叫,所以说“贼难荒野”等等。此外,因为敌国国王、仇敌等而令人恐惧的森林,也归在这里面,所以说是五种。巴利
Ādīnavanti dosaṃ. Jāyāti bhariyā. Patīti bhattā. Apekkhāsaddā cete pitāputtasaddā viya, pāḷiyaṃ pana ā-kārassa rassattaṃ sānunāsikañca katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti. Sammā phalaṃ vahatīti sambalaṃ, sukhāvahanti attho. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘pathe hitanti pātheyya’’nti vuccati. Maggassa kantārapariyāpannattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kantārabhūtaṃ magga’’nti. Dullabhatāya taṃ udakaṃ tattha tāretīti kantāraṃ, nirudakaṃ mahāvanaṃ. Ruḷhīvasena itarampi mahāvanaṃ tathā vuccatīti āha ‘‘corakantāra’’ntiādi. Pararājūnaṃ veriādīnañca vasena sappaṭibhayampi araññaṃ ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcavidha’’nti.
“厚实部位”是指肉长得又厚又粗、堆成一块一块的地方。那种肉拿来晒干,就成了肉干。串在铁签上烤的肉,就是串烤肉。他们坐在稀疏的树荫下,是因为走不动了。通过牛行、狗行等苦行,以及向天神祈愿等誓愿行为,承受了巨大的痛苦。巴利
Ghanaghanaṭṭhānatoti maṃsassa bahalabahalaṃ thūlathūlaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato. ‘‘Tādisañhi maṃsaṃ gahetvā sukkhāpitaṃ vallūraṃ. Sūle āvunitvā pakkamaṃsaṃ sūlamaṃsaṃ. Viraḷacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu gantuṃ asamattho hutvā. Govatakukkuravatadevatāyācanādīhīti govatakukkuravatādivatacaraṇehi ceva devatāyācanādīhi paṇidhikammehi ca mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhūtaṃ.
世尊在这里用比喻来说明,在教法中正确修行的比丘受用食物这件事,引用了那对夫妻吃儿子肉的例子。所以,为了从各种角度把比喻的含义讲清楚,就开始了“他们以儿子的肉为食”等这一段话。
其中,“因为是同种之肉”,意思是同一种类的肉,也就是人肉。因为人肉对良家出身的人来说,既不习惯,又让人觉得可鄙,所以接着说了“乃至是亲属等的肉”等等。“因为是幼嫩之肉”等等,则是从肉本身的性质以及没有经过调味的角度来说的,“因为未经熏制”是指未熏制的状态。住于中立本身。因此就说了“住于无欲无贪的受用”,这是出于想要从旷野中解脱的意愿。现在,那些未除去的食物、不随心所欲地受用、远离悭吝之垢、无有愚痴、对未来没有希求、不储藏、不舍弃则无意义、不嗔害、无诤受用,这些在比喻中可得的种种差别,为了把它们如此提取出来并对应于所喻而显示,就说了“不是依止于骨、筋、皮之处”等等。“那个原因”是指那对夫妇纯粹为走出旷野而受用子肉的原因。巴利
Yasmā pana sāsane sammāpaṭipajjantassa bhikkhuno āhāraparibhogassa opammabhāvena tesaṃ jāyampatikānaṃ puttamaṃsaparibhogo idha bhagavatā ānīto, tasmāssa nānākārehi opammattaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ so puttamaṃsāhāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sajātimaṃsatāyāti samānajātikamaṃsabhāvena, manussamaṃsabhāvenāti attho. Masussamaṃsañhi kulappasutamanussānaṃ amanuññaṃ hoti aparicitabhāvato gārayhabhāvato ca, tato eva ñātiādimaṃsatāyātiādi vuttaṃ. Taruṇamaṃsatāyātiādi pana sabhāvato anabhisaṅkhārato ca amanuññāti katvā vuttaṃ. Adhūpitatāyāti adhūpitabhāvato. Majjhattabhāveyeva ṭhitā. Tato eva nicchandarāgaparibhoge ṭhitāti vuttaṃ kantārato nittharaṇajjhāsayatāya. Idāni ye ca te anapanītāhāro, na yāvadatthaparibhogo vigatamaccheramalatā sammohābhāvo āyatiṃ tattha patthanābhāvo sannidhikārābhāvo apariccajanamadatthābhāvo ahīḷanā avivādaparibhogo cāti upamāyaṃ labbhamānā pakāravisesā, te tathā nīharitvā upameyye yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘naaṭṭhinhārucammanissitaṭṭhānānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ kāraṇanti taṃ tesaṃ jāyampatīnaṃ yāvadeva kantāranittharaṇatthāya puttamaṃsaparibhogasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ.
即使是在观察“食的过患令人厌离”时,他也是在思择抟食。像“正如那对夫妇”等,是把比喻和所喻对应起来。“应受用的食”这一句要引进来连接上下文。从这以后各句的道理也是这样。“没有丢弃”,就是没有拿走。“像鹌鹑,像鸡”,这是不相似的比喻。“不设定范围”,就是不按大量摄取来设定范围。“像狮子”,这是相似的比喻。据说,狮子是逐块逐块地吃的。巴利
Nissandapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ parivīmaṃsati. Yathā te jāyampatikātiādipi opammasaṃsandanaṃ. ‘‘Paribhuñjitabbo āhāro’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Apaṭikkhipitvāti anapanetvā. Vaṭṭakena viya kukkuṭena viya cāti visadisūdāharaṇaṃ. Odhiṃ adassetvāti mahantaggahaṇavasena odhiṃ akatvā. Sīhena viyāti sadisūdāharaṇaṃ. So kira sapadānameva khādati.
以不贪着、不迷恋等方式来受用,所以说“不悭吝”等。认为自身内部有一个“我”存在,这就是我执之见;与这种见相应的痴,就认为“我在受用食物”。这也是从正念与正知的角度来说的,也就是在“进食、饮用、咀嚼、品尝时,都是具正知而行”这句话里所说的正念与正知。巴利
Agadhitaamucchitādibhāvena paribhuñjitabbato ‘‘amaccharāyitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma atthīti diṭṭhi attūpaladdhi, taṃsahagatena sammohena attā āhāraṃ paribhuñjatīti. Satisampajaññavasenapīti ‘‘asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hotī’’ti ettha vuttasatisampajaññavasenapi.
应当这样理解:既没有生起“啊,真希望我们……能得到……”这样的希求,也没有生起“像昨天一样……却没有得到”这样的懊悔。巴利
‘‘Aho vata mayaṃ…pe… labheyya’’nti patthanaṃ vā, ‘‘hiyyo viya…pe… na laddha’’nti anusocanaṃ vā akatvāti yojanā.
把否定词“不”带进来,连接成:不储藏,不埋在地下,也不用火烧。一切地方都这样理解。巴利
‘‘Sannidhiṃ na akaṃsu, bhūmiyaṃ vā nikhaṇiṃsu, agginā vā jhāpayiṃsū’’ti na-kāraṃ ānetvā yojanā. Evaṃ sabbattha.
应当这样连接理解:受用钵食时,既不轻视钵食,也不轻视施主。他是手持钵的人,就是说那人手里拿着钵。不应轻视,就是不应蔑视。他轻视,意思是越过实际情况去认为,也就是蔑视。巴利
Piṇḍapātaṃ vā ahīḷentena dāyakaṃ vā ahīḷentena paribhuñjitabboti yojanā. Sa pattapāṇīti so pattahattho. Nāvajāniyāti na avajāniyā. Atimaññatīti atikkamitvā maññati, avajānātīti attho.
说了“由三种遍知而遍知”之后,为了说明抟食的遍知方式,就开示了“如何”等句。其中,“依有依处的方面”,是指依有组合物的方面;但从自性来说,色食其实只是食素而已。这就是抟食的相。虽然味所缘撞击在舌净色上,但因为二者不相离,而且舌净色是以取达境的方式取境的,所以才说“以食素为第八法的色法,撞击在哪里”。“它”,指舌净色。“这些法”,指前面所说的诸所造色和大种色。“他把握那个色蕴”:对于那个色蕴,生起了触等第五法的诸法,也就是所有依此确定的、以及与它们同时生起的这一切法。“通过自相和味相”:指从它们各自的作用和相状方面。“对于这些已依名色确立的五蕴,缘即是识”,这样向上攀缘而观:“那些行,以无明为缘”。向下时,则探寻六处等,观察顺逆的缘起。因为六处等也应当按情况确立为色与非色诸法的缘。“由如实见到”:指如此如实地见到:“这是色,这是这么多的色,不会更多;这是名,这是这么多的名,不会更多。”通过无常随观、苦随观、无我随观、厌离随观、离欲随观、灭随观、弃舍随观这七种随观。“它”,指抟食。通过三相等……所谓“以遍知”:即通过证悟无常等三相以及以有相之随观而转起的智。由于名色已被无余地了知,且食为其所属,所以是遍知。因此说“就在那”等。通过牵引贪欲,即舍断贪欲。巴利
‘‘Tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte’’ti vatvā tāhi kabaḷīkārāhārassa parijānanavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘katha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha savatthukavasenāti sasambhāravasena, sabhāvato pana rūpāharaṇaṃ ojamattaṃ hoti. Idañhi kabaḷīkārāhārassa lakkhaṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ rasārammaṇaṃ jivhāpasāde paṭihaññati, tena pana avinābhāvato sampattavisayagāhitāya ca jivhāpasādassa ‘‘ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ kattha paṭihaññatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāti jivhāpasādassa . Ime dhammāti ime yathāvuttabhūtupādāyadhammā. Tanti rūpakhandhaṃ. Pariggaṇhatoti pariggaṇhantassa. Uppannā phassapañcamakā dhammāti sabbepi ye yathāniddhāritā, tehi sahappavattāva sabbepi ime. Sarasalakkhaṇatoti attano kiccato lakkhaṇato ca. Tesaṃ nāmarūpabhāvena vavatthapitānaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ paccayo viññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Tassa saṅkhārā tesaṃ avijjā’’ti evaṃ uddhaṃ ārohanavasena paccayaṃ. Adhoorohanavasena pana saḷāyatanādike pariyesanto anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passati. Saḷāyatanādayopi hi rūpārūpadhammānaṃ yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvena vavatthapetabbāti. Yāthāvato diṭṭhattāti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo, idaṃ nāmaṃ, ettakaṃ nāmaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti ca yathābhūtaṃ diṭṭhattā. Aniccānupassanā, dukkhānupassanā, anattānupassanā, nibbidānupassanā, virāgānupassanā, nirodhānupassanā, paṭinissaggānupassanāti imāsaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena. Soti kabaḷīkārāhāro. Tilakkhaṇa…pe… saṅkhātāyāti aniccatādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ paṭivijjhanavasena lakkhaṇavantasammasanavasena ca pavattañāṇasaṅkhātāya. Pariññāto hoti anavasesato nāmarūpassa ñātattā tappariyāpannattā ca āhārassa. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ yevā’’tiādi. Chandarāgāvakaḍḍhanenāti chandarāgassa pajahanena.
五欲是以它为因的,所以叫“具五欲者”。因此说“从五欲生起”。对一种渴爱的遍知,是“一种遍知”。对一切具五欲之贪的遍知,是“一切遍知”。对这两者共同根源——食的遍知,是“根本遍知”。现在为了分别说明这三种遍知,开始说“那位比丘……”等文句。在舌门遍知一味渴爱,就是在舌尝味之后这样观察:“这里任何一种味,从欲境的角度说,都是以食素为第八法的色法,也就是舌处的净色。它依靠什么?依靠四大种。与它同时生起的色、香、味、食素、命根,这些法就叫色蕴。对那种味产生的味著,就是味渴爱。与它同时生起的触等法,就是四个非色蕴。”诸如此类,一切都应按照注释书里所说的来了知。因此说“由此,具五欲的贪也就被遍知了”。这里的“由此”,是指那位在舌门遍知味渴爱的比丘,由他而遍知。那么,为什么在遍知一门中的渴爱时,五门中的贪就被遍知了呢?于是说“为什么”等文句。“正是对它”,是就渴爱本身,因为同属渴爱这一类,所以从同一性的角度来说。“在那里”,指在五门中。“由于生起”,指以色贪等方式而生起。因为贪就是以爱著为义,所以也叫“渴爱”;以染著为义,所以叫“贪”。因此说“正是那同一的”等文句。现在用譬喻把已经说过的意思总结起来,说“犹如”等文句。“在五道上杀”,指在五条道路上往来行走、杀害行路的人,所以说“在道上杀”。巴利
Pañca kāmaguṇā kāraṇabhūtā etassa atthīti pañcakāmaguṇiko. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇasambhavo’’ti. Ekissā taṇhāya pariññā ekapariññā. Sabbassa pañcakāmaguṇikassa rāgassa pariññā, sabbapariññā. Tadubhayassapi mūlabhūtassa āhārassa pariññā mūlapariññā. Idāni imā tissopi pariññāyo vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Jivhādvāre ekarasataṇhaṃ parijānātīti jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘yo yamettha raso, so vatthukāmavasena ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ hoti jivhāyatanaṃ pasādo. So kiṃ nissito? Catumahābhūtanissito. Taṃsahajāto vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā jīvitindriyanti ime dhammā rūpakkhandho nāma. Yo tasmiṃ rase assādo, ayaṃ rasataṇhā. Taṃsahagatā phassādayo dhammā cattāro arūpakkhandhā’’tiādivasena. Sabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatavasena veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tena pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññātova hotī’’ti. Tattha tenāti yo bhikkhu jivhādvāre rasataṇhaṃ parijānāti, tena. Kathaṃ pana ekasmiṃ dvāre taṇhaṃ parijānato pañcasu dvāresu rāgo pariññāto hotīti āha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Tassāyevāti taṇhāya eva taṇhāsāmaññato ekattanayavasena vuttaṃ. Tatthāti pañcasu dvāresu. Uppajjanatoti rūparāgādibhāvena uppajjanato. Lobho eva hi taṇhāyanaṭṭhena ‘‘taṇhā’’tipi, rajjanaṭṭhena ‘‘rāgo’’tipi vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘sāyeva hī’’tiādi. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādinā upamāya sampiṇḍeti. Pañcamagge hanatoti pañcasu maggesu sañcarittaṃ karontena maggagāmino hananto ‘‘magge hanato’’ti vutto.
在称为团食的、可意的食物聚集之中,也能得到色、声等诸色。为了说明五欲贪在那里出生,所以说了“如何”等文句。以正念正知摄持:以能守护一切分业处的正念正知来摄持。以无欲贪的受用而受用:以由证得圣道所成就的无欲贪之受用来受用。这里的“它”是指五欲贪。巴利
Sabyañjane piṇḍapātasaññite bhattasamūhe manuññe rūpe rūpasaddādayo labbhanti, tattha pañcakāmaguṇarāgassa sambhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Satisampajaññena pariggahetvāti sabbabhāgiyena kammaṭṭhānaparipālakena pariggahetvā. Nicchandarāgaparibhogenāti maggādhigamasiddhena nicchandarāgaparibhogena paribhutte. Soti kāmaguṇiko rāgo.
当抟食存在时,就是指当抟食存在的时候。对它,是指对五欲贪。由于生起的缘故,是指由于它会生起。因为得不到食物时,被饥饿和虚弱所折磨的人,不可能生起受用欲乐的欲求。沉浸对视的心,是指由于贪欲而相互对视的心。巴利
Tasmiṃ satīti kabaḷīkārāhāre sati. Tassāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa. Uppattitoti uppajjanato. Na hi āhārālābhena jighacchādubbalyaparetassa kāmaparibhogicchā sambhavati. Upanijjhānacittanti rāgavasena aññamaññaṃ olokanacittaṃ.
“没有那个结”这句话,是针对五种上分结说的。所以经中说:“以那个贪……没有”。这里的“那个”,指的是欲贪。“以此”:是依据如上所说的开示。“可以讲述”:意思是,讲说这第一食论的法师应当宣说。巴利
Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti pañcavidhampi uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tena rāgena…pe… natthī’’ti. Tenāti kāmarāgena. Ettakenāti yathāvuttāya desanāya. Kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti imaṃ paṭhamāhārakathaṃ kathentena dhammakathikena.
第二食的详细解释巴利
Dutiyāhāravaṇṇanā
“第二”是指在第二种食物上。“皮被撕开”:就是皮被剥掉,意思是皮已经完全去除。“不能”:因为太虚弱,所以不能;就像女人被称为“无力”一样。“石墙等”:用“等”字把砖墙、泥墙等也包括在内。“蜘蛛”:就是蜘蛛。“壁虎”:就是壁虎。所谓“高举肢体的生物”,是指多毛的生物。“依止虚空”:就是行走在虚空中。“拔除后”:就是拔出之后。巴利
Dutiyeti dutiye āhāre. Uddālitacammāti uppāṭitacammā, sabbaso apanītacammāti attho. Na sakkoti dubbalabhāvato, tathā hi itthī ‘‘abalā’’ti vuccati. Silākuṭṭādīnanti ādi-saddena iṭṭhakakuṭṭamattikākuṭṭādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Uṇṇanābhīti makkaṭakaṃ. Sarabūti gharagoḷikā . Uccāliṅgapāṇakā nāma lomasā pāṇakā. Ākāsanissitāti ākāsacārino. Luñcitvāti uppāṭetvā.
三种遍知:就是前面说过的知遍知等三种遍知。以它为根本:就是以触为根本。这个开示一直讲到阿拉汉果,因为当一切受都被遍知时,连烦恼的丝毫残余都不存在。巴利
Tisso pariññāti heṭṭhā vuttā ñātapariññādayo tisso pariññā. Tammūlakattāti phassamūlakattā. Desanā yāva arahattā kathitā sabbaso vedanāsu pariññātāsu kilesānaṃ lesassapi abhāvato.
第三食的解说巴利
Tatiyāhāravaṇṇanā
“炭坑”就是指炭堆。“扬散”的意思是:自己把炭火撒到自己身上。所以说“人们哭着,身体被烧焦”。“人们”指的是男子,不是泛指一般人。“恐惧找到我”的意思是:由于恐惧而行动的人,就是得到了恐惧。“急忙地”就是非常匆忙地跑。“人量”说的是一个人的身高,所以“超过人量”就是超过一个人的身高。因此说“五肘尺那么高”。“那个坑的”指那个炭坑。“当它们不存在时”指那些火焰和烟都不存在时。“确实远离它”就是确实远远地离开它。巴利
Aṅgārakāsunti aṅgārarāsiṃ. Phuṇantīti attano upari sayameva ākirantīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti. Narāti purisāti attho, na manussā. Bhayañhi maṃ vindatīti bhayassa vasena karonto bhayaṃ labhati nāma. Santaramānovāti suṭṭhu taramāno eva hutvā. Porisaṃ vuccati purisappamāṇaṃ, tasmā atirekaporisā purisappamāṇato adhikā. Tenāha ‘‘pañcaratanappamāṇā’’ti. Assāti kāsuyā. Tadabhāveti tesaṃ jālādhūmānaṃ abhāve. Ārakāvassāti ārakā eva assa.
就像火炭坑一样,三界轮回因为十一种火而成为极度灼热之处。凡夫……被那些火所燃烧。二力……业即使对不想要它的人,也会把他推入轮回之苦。造作与牵引的时间差别不必去考虑,因为果报必定会成熟。所以论中说“业确实……”等等。巴利
Aṅgārakāsu viya tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ ekādasannaṃ aggīnaṃ vasena mahāpariḷāhato. Jivi…pe… puthujjano tehi aggīhi dahitabbato. Dve bala…pe… kammaṃ anicchantasseva tassa vaṭṭadukkhe pātanato. Āyūhanūpakaḍḍhanānaṃ kālabhedo na cintetabbo ekantabhāvino phalassa nipphāditattāti āha ‘‘kammaṃ hī’’tiādi.
在“触”那里所说的方式,这里也一样:在那里说的是“触是行蕴”,而在这里应当说“思是行蕴”。其余部分和前面所说的一样。由于经中说“以渴爱为缘而有取,以取为缘而有有”,所以思的根本原因是渴爱,因此说“因为思以渴爱为根本”。由此说了“确实不……”等话。不过有些人认为:因为依于作为思之果的受,渴爱才生起,所以才这样说。巴利
Phasse vuttanayenevāti tattha ‘‘phasso saṅkhārakkhandho’’ti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘manosañcetanā saṅkhārakkhandho’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. ‘‘Taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ, upādānapaccayā bhavo’’ti vacanato manosañcetanāya taṇhā mūlakāraṇanti āha ‘‘taṇhāmūlakattā manosañcetanāyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Keci pana yasmā manosañcetanāya phalabhūtaṃ vedanaṃ paṭicca taṇhā uppajjati, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti vadanti.
第四种食的注释巴利
Catutthāhāravaṇṇanā
因为会带来不可爱的恶果,所以恶降临到具有那个恶的人身上,这就叫罪过;他以身行持那种恶,所以叫恶行者。因此说“恶行者”。巴利
Aniṭṭhapāpanavasena taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ āgacchatīti āgu, pāpaṃ, taṃ carati sīlenāti āgucārī. Tenāha ‘‘pāpacāri’’nti.
业就像国王,因为它具有最高的主宰力。恶行者就像罪犯……凡夫,因为他是苦的所依处。凡夫的结生识,就像被刺入的三百支矛,是凡夫极度病痛、大苦的立足处。因此经中说“矛……苦”。巴利
Rājā viya kammaṃ paramissarabhāvato. Āgucārī puriso viya…pe… puthujjano dukkhavatthubhāvato. Ādinnappahāravaṇāni tīṇi sattisatāni viya puthujjanassa āturamānamahādukkhapatiṭṭhaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tenāha satti…pe… dukkhanti.
以它为根本,因为此后生起的名色以结生识为根本。巴利
Tammūlakattāti paṭisandhiviññāṇamūlakattā ito paraṃ pavattanāmarūpassa.
有贪经的注释巴利
4. Atthirāgasuttavaṇṇanā
64 在第四经的注释中,“so”(它)指的是贪。“以染著的方式”是说,就像染料一样,以让那心随之染上的方式。“以欢喜的方式”是说,因为带着喜悦,以对所缘境随喜的方式。“以渴爱的方式”是说,以对境界生起想要享受的方式。其实贪只有一个,只是按照它生起时的不同表现形态而这样分别说。“已立足”是指已经获得了自身的体性。“在其中”是指在轮回当中。“食”,有些人解释为行作识。“增长”是指通过果的生起而达到增长。因此说“令业加速后”等。其中,“令加速后”是指令果被执取后。因为行作识以俱生等缘以及食缘,对自己俱生的诸法成为缘,并且由于它有能力生起自己的果,所以达到增长。因此说“业在相续中已获得的状态以及达到增长”。作“这是轮回论”后,说“其中”是指三界轮回中的处所。“一切处”是指在一切中。在前一个词中,这是处格,即“ wherever there” 这个处格表达是在前一个又一个词中,作为境界。因为正是针对它,这个“ wherever there” 的处格被说。在这个异熟轮回中,是指在现在的异熟轮回中。关于未来轮回之因的行,说“那里有未来再生有的转起”,因为这样说。而“再生有的转起”是指结生,因此说“那里有未来再生有的转起,那里就有未来的生老死”。这里,“生”是指从母胎出来。在某个地方,是指在某个原因存在时。巴利
64. Catutthe soti lobho. Rañjanavasenāti raṅgajātaṃ viya tassa cittassa anurañjanavasena. Nandanavasenāti sappītikatāya ārammaṇassa abhinandanavasena. Taṇhāyanavasenāti visayakattukāmatāya vasena. Eko eva hi lobho pavattiākāravasena tathā vutto. Patiṭṭhitanti laddhasabhāvaṃ. Tatthāti vaṭṭe. Āhāreti keci. Viññāṇanti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ. Viruḷhanti phalanibbattiyā viruḷhippattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ javāpetvā’’tiādi. Tattha javāpetvāti phalaṃ gāhāpetvā. Abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇañhi attanā sahajātānaṃ sahajātādipaccayehi ceva āhārapaccayena ca paccayo hutvā tassa attano phaluppādane sāmatthiyattā viruḷhippattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ santāne laddhabhāvaṃ viruḷhippattañcassa hotī’’ti. Vaṭṭakathā esāti katvā ‘‘yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhumma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbatthāti sabbesu. Purimapade etaṃ bhummanti ‘‘yattha tatthā’’ti āgataṃ etaṃ bhummavacanaṃ purimasmiṃ purimasmiṃ pade visayabhūte. Tañhi ārabbha etaṃ ‘‘yattha tatthā’’ti bhummavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭeti paccuppanne vipākavaṭṭe. Āyatiṃ vaṭṭahetuke saṅkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti vacanato . Punabbhavābhinibbattīti ca paṭisandhi adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti, atthi tattha āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇa’’nti. Jātīti cettha mātukucchito nikkhamanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Yasmiṃ ṭhāneti yasmiṃ kāraṇe sati.
在这里,应当知道“因”就是指诸行。因为它们就是未来再生有生起的因,也就是渴爱和无明,以及时间、趣向等让业得以圆满的资粮。不过有些人认为,烦恼轮回、业、趣向和时间才是要点,所以说“时间、趣向等是让业圆满的资粮”。由于对种种有的渴求,而如此这般前往的三有,就是三地轮回。因此说“‘其中’是指三地轮回”。也因此说“连同资粮的业,在诸有中使色生起”。这里的“色”,就是有身。巴利
Kāraṇañcettha saṅkhārā veditabbā. Te hi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā hetū, taṇhāavijjāyo, kālagatiādayo ca kammassa sambhārā. Keci pana kilesavaṭṭakammagatikālā cāti adhippāyena ‘‘kālagatiādayo ca kammassa sambhārā’’ti vadanti. Taṃtaṃbhavapatthanāya tathā tathā gato tividho bhavova tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe’’ti. Tathā cāha ‘‘sasambhārakakammaṃ bhavesu rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Rūpanti attabhāvaṃ.
“简略地”是指:不分成三种,而是用识把它归成一个总的概括,这就是它的意思。“一个连接”就是一个因与果的连接。“异熟过程”是指从六处等开始、直到受为止的异熟过程。把“与名色一起”这句话引过来,建立前后关联。或者,“以名色”是表示伴随意义的具格用法。在这里,一个连接就是一个因与果的连接。“未来有”是指未来的受生有。因此,这里的这一个连接,应当理解为因与果的连接。巴利
Saṅkhipitvāti tīsu akatvā viññāṇena ekasaṅkhepaṃ katvāti attho. Eko sandhīti eko hetuphalasandhi. Vipākavidhinti saḷāyatanādikaṃ vedanāvasānaṃ vipākavidhiṃ. ‘‘Nāmarūpena saddhi’’nti padaṃ ānetvā sambandho. Nāmarūpenāti vā sahayoge karaṇavacanaṃ. Idha eko sandhīti eko hetuphalasandhi. Āyatibhavassāti āyatiṃ upapattibhavassa. Tena cettha eko sandhi hetuphalasandhi veditabbo.
对漏尽者来说,因为已经证得最上之道,由道所推动的业失去了同伴,所以业不存在。“像太阳光线一样”:也正是因此,依照前面所说的方式,它就像没有落脚处的太阳光线。这里的“它”指光线。“身等”指身门等。“已作业”:这是依据诸缘所造作的状态来说的,并不是就业的特征而言。因此说“善与不善的名称不存在”。“只是作用”:因为不是异熟法,只是停留在身体动作等运作本身。它们没有异熟,因为对它们来说不存在异熟法。巴利
Khīṇāsavassa aggamaggādhigamanatova pavattakammassa maggena sahāyavekallassa katattā avijjamānaṃ. Sūriyarasmisamanti tato eva vuttanayeneva appatiṭṭhitasūriyarasmisamaṃ. Sāti rasmi. Kāyādayoti kāyadvārādayo. Katakammanti paccayehi katabhāvaṃ upādāya vuttaṃ, na kammalakkhaṇapattato. Tenāha ‘‘kusalākusalaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti. Kiriyamatteti avipākadhammattā kāyikādipayogamatte ṭhatvā. Avipākaṃ hoti tesaṃ avipākadhammattā.
第五 城经注释巴利
5. Nagarasuttavaṇṇanā
65 65. 在第五经中,“诸比丘,在我正觉之前”等语,前面已经解释过了,所以这里不再解释,而为了解释“名色存在时”等开始的部分。其中,在这部经的十二支缘起里,有两支没有被取来,为了问明它们不被取来的原因并加以回答,先说明它们应当被取来的理由,因此说了“在此”等语。先取现前可见的现在有作为第一,接着取未来的作为第二,过去就成了第三,所以说“无明和行是第三有”。不过这里难道不可能取未来有吗?因为依现在有而起的执著已经显示出来了?确实如此,但因为取了因,果也就已经被取了,应当这样理解那句话的意思。而且在这里,未来时在意义上已经被包含进去了,因为“以名色为缘而有六处”等说法是包含未来时的教导;而以四蕴有的方式说“识缘名”时,则有差别。因此说“以五蕴有的方式”。以它们,即作为所缘的无明和行。这是观,即依现在时分,观见生灭而现起的观。“不成立”就是不成功。大……执著:他说了不成立的原因,因为前面已经取过了,所以不再一一别观,这是他的意思。巴利
65. Pañcamasutte ‘‘pubbeva me, bhikkhave, sambodhā’’tiādi heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitamevāti avuttameva saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘nāmarūpe kho satī’’ti āraddho . Tattha dvādasapadike paṭiccasamuppāde imasmiṃ sutte yāni dve padāni aggahitāni, nesaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pucchitvā vissajjetukāmo tesaṃ gahetabbakāraṇaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘etthā’’tiādimāha. Paccakkhabhūtaṃ paccuppannaṃ bhavaṃ paṭhamaṃ gahetvā tadanantaraṃ anāgatassa ‘‘dutiya’’nti gahaṇe atīto tatiyo hotīti āha ‘‘avijjāsaṅkhārā hi tatiyo bhavo’’ti. Nanu cettha anāgatassa bhavassa gahaṇaṃ na sambhavati paccuppannabhavavasena abhinivesassa jotitattāti? Saccametaṃ, kāraṇe pana gahite phalaṃ gahitameva hotīti tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Apicettha anāgato addhā atthato saṅgahito eva yato ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādinā anāgataddhasaṃgāhitā desanā pavattā, catuvokāravasena viññāṇapaccayā nāmanti viseso atthi. Tasmā ‘‘pañcavokāravasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tehīti avijjāsaṅkhārehi ārammaṇabhūtehi. Ayaṃ vipassanāti addhāpaccuppannavasena udayabbayaṃ passantassa pavattavipassanā. Na ghaṭīyatīti na samijjhati. Mahā…pe… abhiniviṭṭhoti na ghaṭane kāraṇamāha, heṭṭhā gahitattā pāṭiyekkaṃ sammasanīyaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo.
“未见的”是指未觉悟的。由于不能通过觉悟四谛而成佛,所以说“不能成为佛陀”。“以此”是指以此大士。“那些”是指无明与行。依有、取、爱的方式,是指从观察有、取、爱的角度。那些已经见到了,因为与它们俱行的只是同等程度的堪忍。不会挖到另外的部分,因为自己想要的那部分已经被取,而另外的部分中并不存在。因此说“对于任何人都不存在”。“回转”就是收回。为了说明回转的理由,说了“那个此”等话。“未破之处”是指未破损之处。巴利
Adiṭṭhesūti anavabuddhesu. Catusaccassa anubodhena na bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘na sakkā buddhena bhavitu’’nti. Imināti mahāsattena. Teti avijjāsaṅkhārā. Bhavaupādānataṇhāvasenāti bhavaupādānataṇhādassanavasena. Diṭṭhāva ‘‘taṃsahagatā’’ti samānayogakkhamattā. Na parabhāgaṃ khaneyya attanā icchitassa gahitattā parabhāge aññassa abhāvato ca. Tenāha ‘‘kassaci natthitāyā’’ti. Paṭinivattesīti paṭisaṃhari. Paṭinivattane pana kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Abhinnaṭṭhānanti akhaṇitaṭṭhānaṃ.
从缘来说,是从因的角度说,行的含义就是如此。当以“究竟有什么存在时才有老死”这样的方式,通过因的相续来讲述果的相续时,以及在探究“究竟有什么存在时才有识”时,在“行存在时识才存在”这一说法中,行被特别取为识的因,于是识就从行这里转起,而不是从一切缘转起。这里“从所缘”是指从无明与行所成的所缘,从过去有所成的所缘。所以他说“名色存在时识才存在”。这里到底什么是被执取的缘呢?是指以俱生等方式成为缘,而不是以业依止缘、现在的方式,因为对现在执取的强调已经显明了。“二者亦”是指结生识与观识。“不超离名色”是指不超离作为缘与作为所缘的名色,因若无此即无转起。因此他说“不从名色之外而去”。在识为名色之缘存在时,即在结生识为名色之缘存在时。在名色为识之缘存在时,即在名色为结生识之缘存在时。应依四蕴有与五蕴有而如其所应地理解此中的连接。然而“两者亦在互为缘存在时”则是依五蕴有而言。以这一点,即如此以识与名色互相资助而转起。无论是“生”还是“再生”,即“有情生、再生”这样的通称,因为离识与名色之外,作为有情假说的执取之法的实体不存在。因此他说“从此”等。正是此,即“识与名色”这二者。巴利
Paccayatoti hetuto, saṅkhāratoti attho. ‘‘Kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hotī’’tiādinā hetuparamparavasena phalaparamparāya kittamānāya, kimhi nu kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotīti ca vicāraṇāya saṅkhāre kho sati viññāṇassa visesato kāraṇabhūto saṅkhāro aggahito, tato viññāṇaṃ paṭinivattati nāma, na sabbapaccayato. Tenevāha ‘‘nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Kiṃ nāma hettha sahajātādivaseneva paccayabhūtaṃ adhippetaṃ, na kammūpanissayavasena paccuppannavasena abhinivesassa jotitattā. Ārammaṇatoti avijjāsaṅkhārasaṅkhātaārammaṇato, atītabhavasaṅkhātaārammaṇato. Atītaddhapariyāpannā hi avijjāsaṅkhārā. Tato paṭinivattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ atītabhavopi paṭinivattati nāma. Ubhayampīti paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ vipassanāviññāṇampi. Nāmarūpaṃ na atikkamatīti paccayabhūtaṃ ārammaṇabhūtañca nāmarūpaṃ na atikkamati tena vinā avattanato. Tenāha ‘‘nāmarūpato paraṃ na gacchatī’’ti. Viññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honteti paṭisandhiviññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honte. Nāmarūpe viññāṇassa paccaye honteti nāmarūpe paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccaye honte. Catuvokārapañcavokārabhavavasena yathārahaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Dvīsupi aññamaññaṃ paccayesu hontesūti pana pañcavokārabhavavasena. Ettakenāti evaṃ viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ aññamaññaṃ upatthambhavasena pavattiyā. Jāyetha vā upapajjetha vāti ‘‘satto jāyati upapajjatī’’ti samaññā hoti viññāṇanāmarūpavinimuttassa sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtassa dhammassa abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘ito hī’’tiādi. Etadevāti ‘‘viññāṇaṃ nāmarūpa’’nti etaṃ dvayameva.
“相续的死与结生”是指以显示相续死与结生的“死、结生”这两个词来说的。“五词”是指“或生”等五个词。难道那里第一、第三与第四、第五在意义上没有差别吗?确实如此,但这是为了显示识与名色一期又一期地生起,才这样说。因此他说“以相续的死与结生”。“至此”是指前面所说的那个意思,也就是用“此即是”等语句把先前用“至此”一词所说的那个意思引出来,再重新说一遍。“以随顺缘起之理”是指先见缘法、再见缘所生法的方式。缘法对自身所生的缘所生法具有缘的性质,这就是此缘性,也就是缘起之理;而它在“无明缘行”等说法中,因为是随顺行等的生起而说的,所以是随顺缘起之理,依此而说。巴利
Aparāparacutipaṭisandhīhīti aparāparacutipaṭisandhidīpakehi ‘‘cavati, upapajjatī’’ti dvīhi padehi. Pañca padānīti ‘‘jāyetha vā’’tiādīni pañca padāni. Nanu tattha paṭhamatatiyehi catutthapañcamāni atthato abhinnānīti? Saccaṃ, viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ aparāparuppattidassanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aparāparacutipaṭisandhīhī’’ti. Ettāvatāti vuttamevatthanti yo ‘‘ettāvatā’’ti padena pubbe vutto, tameva yathāvuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yadida’’ntiādinā niyyātento puna vatvā. Anulomapaccayākāravasenāti paccayadhammadassanapubbakapaccayuppannadhammadassanavasena. Paccayadhammānañhi attano paccayuppannassa paccayabhāvo idappaccayatā paccayākāro, so ca ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā vutto saṅkhāruppattiyā anulomanato anulomapaccayākāro, tassa vasena.
“有水”是指从护城河流来的水。因为城门齐备,住在城里的人进出方便,受用和享用的物品充足,身体和心情都安乐,所以这座城让人喜欢,因此说“四周……可爱”。从前空旷无人,像山林一样,后来有人建造村落、让人居住,这座城才算具备了城的特征,所以说“后来它变得繁荣、富足”。巴利
Āpatoti parikhāgataudakato. Dvārasampattiyā tattha vasantānaṃ pavesananiggamanaphāsutāya upabhogaparibhogavatthusampattiyā sarīracittasukhatāya nagarassa manuññatāti vuttaṃ ‘‘samantā …pe… ramaṇīya’’nti. Pubbe suññabhāvena araññasadisaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ janavāsaṃ karonte nagarassa lakkhaṇappattaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ aparena samayena iddhañceva assa phītañcā’’ti.
“因为先前他的身业、语业和活命就已经非常清净了”,从这句话来说,连同三种离,前分道也应当能得到八支道的名称,所以说“八支观道”。
“在观中已经修习过”:因为观已经反复串习,所以在各处都被这种观所审察、所寻求。
“见到出世间道”:指通过类比等方式见到出世间道。同样,也应该理解为见到涅槃城。
“见时”:指通过证得而见到之时。由道与果所生起的五十多种无过失法,省察智则是确定这些法的。
“令度过”:令其持续运转巴利
‘‘Pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ ājīvo ca suparisuddho’’ti vacanato tīhi viratīhi saddhiṃ pubbabhāgamaggopi aṭṭhaṅgikavohāraṃ laddhuṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgikassa vipassanāmaggassā’’ti. Vipassanāya ciṇṇanteti vipassanāya sañcaritatāya tattha tattha tāya vipassanāya tīrite pariyesite. Lokuttaramaggadassananti anumānādivasena lokuttaramaggassa dassanaṃ. Tathā hi nibbānanagarassa dassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Diṭṭhakāloti adhigamavasena diṭṭhakālo. Maggaphalavasena uppannā paropaṇṇāsa anavajjadhammā, paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ pana tesaṃ vavatthāpakaṃ. Yāpetvāti carāpetvā.
所谓“不转起之义”,是指在无佛出世的世间,任何人的心相续中都没有它生起,所以不是以生起等方式正在转起。正因如此,世尊被赞叹为“使未生之道生起者,使未生之道产生者”等等。往昔的大仙们所遵行的圣道,中间曾被某些人遮蔽,所以说“以遮蔽之义,名为古道”。依于禅那之乐,就是依于禅定的快乐和禅定的喜悦。丰饶,是因为殊胜的法如同甘露,能带来满足。繁花盛开,就是庄严美妙。说“乃至一万轮围世界”,是指“一个世界界”,因为佛刹是有限定的;正因其存在,才有此界限。于此间隔内,在此空间范围之中巴利
Avattamānakaṭṭhenāti buddhasuññe loke kassaci santāne appavattanatova uppādādivasena vattamānavasena. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa sañjanetā’’tiādikehi thomito. Pubbakehi mahesīhi paṭipanno hi ariyamaggo itarehi antarā kehici avaḷañjitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘avaḷañjanaṭṭhena purāṇamaggo’’ti. Jhānassādenāti jhānasukhena jhānapītiyā. Subhikkhaṃ paṇītadhammāmatatāya tittiāvahaṃ. Pupphitaṃ upasobhitaṃ. Yāva dasasahassacakkavāḷeti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekissā lokadhātuyā’’ti paricchinnabuddhakhettattā. Tassa atthitāya hi paricchedo atthi. Etasmiṃ antareti etasmiṃ okāse.
《审察经》的注疏巴利
6. Sammasasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第六经中,“于世尊”是指世尊说的。
“微细”是因为开示了微细、精细的法,所以是微细的。
“被三相所标记”是因为被三种相所标记,意思是宣说无常等相。
“有因”是因为以证得圣法的近依止因作为因,所以是有因的。
为了说明那些具有三因结生慧和教诫神变慧的智者,不只拥有内在支分的圆满,也拥有外在支分的圆满,所以说了“柔软”等话。
“内在”就是指自身之内。
“遍察缘”是指对缘所生起的诸法观察其缘。巴利
66. Chaṭṭhe assāti bhagavato. Saṇhasukhumadhammaparidīpanato sukhumā. Tīhi lakkhaṇehi aṅkiyattā tilakkhaṇāhatā, aniccādilakkhaṇaparidīpinīti attho. Ariyadhammādhigamassa upanissayabhūtena hetunā sahetukā. Tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāya pāṭihāriyapaññāya ca atthitāya paññavanto na kevalaṃ ajjhattikaaṅgasampattiyeva, bāhiraṅgasampattipi nesamatthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘siniddhānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Abbhantaranti ajjhattaṃ. Paccayasammasananti paccayuppannānaṃ paccayavīmaṃsaṃ.
“随顺起始的连结”就是与起始相应的连结。“未到达”就是未具足、未获得。“词句不混杂”就是不相混杂的词句,意思是这种语句在别处没有出现过。因此说:“别处确实没有这样的说法。”“如此”是指把“那么,阿难陀啊”这样的单数说法,和“听啊,作意啊”这样的复数说法合在一起,这样的说法其实并不存在。不过有些人也把这里的“那么,阿难陀啊”读成复数,就像“善哉,阿那律啊”等处一样。“依止”指所执取的对象,苦就依止在这里。“生起”就是获得生起的刹那,也就是显现、住立、得到自体、生起。“安住”就是获得住所、获得空间。因为只生起一次的法很微弱,没法像在处所里那样安立下来;只有当它一再在所缘上转起时,才说得上已安住、已确立。因此说:“安住”就是通过一再转起而确立。巴利
Ārambhānurūpā anusandhi yathānusandhi. Na gatāti na sampattā. Asambhinnapadanti avomissakapadaṃ, aññattha evaṃ anāgataṃ vākyanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘aññattha hi evaṃ vuttaṃ nāma natthī’’ti. Evanti ‘‘tenahānandā’’ti ekavacanaṃ, ‘‘suṇātha manasi karothā’’ti bahuvacanaṃ katvā vuttaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Keci pana ‘‘tenahānandā’’ti idhāpi bahuvacanameva katvā paṭhanti ‘‘sādhu anuruddhā’’tiādīsu viya. Upadhīti adhippetaṃ upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti. Uppajjati uppādakkhaṇaṃ udayaṃ paṭilabhati ‘‘pākaṭabhāvo ṭhitiko, attalābho udayo’’ti. Nivisati nivesaṃ okāsaṃ paṭilabhati. Ekavārameva hi uppannamattassa dhammassa dubbalattena okāse viya patiṭṭhahanaṃ natthi, punappunaṃ ārammaṇe pavattamānaṃ niviṭṭhaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhahatī’’ti.
具有可爱本性的,就是生来就值得喜爱的。具有甘甜本性的,就是生来就令人满意的。深陷的,是被渴爱和执著浸透的。在成就中,是指在生存的成就中。依照取相的随行,是指依照执取影像而随行。就像插入耳孔的银管,又像系在耳上的腰带绳。高耸、高大、修长的鼻子,就是高鼻。自己的鼻子就这样得到了名称。或者也可以读作“得名者”,如果是这样,那就是说那些因为鼻子高耸而得名的众生,与自己的鼻子相关联。这样得名的众生,自己的鼻子,从颜色和形状来说,像红色的毛毯片;从触感来说,柔软细滑;从作用来说,具有细滑甘甜的味道。娑罗树干,就是娑罗树的树干。巴利
Piyasabhāvanti piyāyitabbajātikaṃ. Madhurasabhāvanti iṭṭhajātikaṃ. Abhiniviṭṭhāti taṇhābhinivesena otiṇṇā. Sampattiyanti bhavasampattiyaṃ. Nimittaggahaṇānusārenāti paṭibimbaggahaṇānusārena. Kaṇṇassa chiddapadesaṃ rajatanāḷikaṃ viya, kaṇṇabaddhaṃ pana pāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya. Tuṅgā uccā dīghā nāsikā tuṅganāsā. Evaṃ laddhavohāraṃ attano ghānaṃ. ‘‘Laddhavohārā’’ti vā pāṭho. Tasmiṃ sati tuṅgā nāsā yesaṃ te tuṅganāsā. Evaṃ laddhavohārā sattā attano ghānanti yojanā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya. Samphassato mudusiniddhaṃ kiccato siniddhamadhurarasadaṃ. Sālalaṭṭhinti sālakkhandhaṃ.
他们看见了,就是他们见到了。所谓“如此所说”,是依照“在铜钵中”这种安立称呼来说的。巴利
Addasaṃsūti passiṃsu. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘kaṃse’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ adhiṭṭhānavohārena.
“成就”是指色泽等各方面的功德。“过患”是指以死亡为最终结局的过患。巴利
Sampattinti vaṇṇādiguṇaṃ. Ādīnavanti maraṇaggatato.
所谓“掺入炒麦粉的水”,就是把炒麦粉投进去后搅动过的水。就像四种饮料一样,四条道也能止息对渴爱的贪渴。巴利
Sattupānīyenāti sattuṃ pakkhipitvā ālolitapānīyena. Cattāri pānāni viya cattāro maggā taṇhāpipāsāvūpasamanato.
《芦束经》注疏巴利
7. Naḷakalāpīsuttavaṇṇanā
67 在第七经里,问“为什么问”的意思是:大拘絺罗长老自己在那件事上已经没有疑惑了,为什么还要问呢?这是他的用意。“为了了知意向”这一句,如果用这位大弟子的他心通去了知,那也算不上什么奇特的事,所以他对那并不满意,于是说了“而且……”等话。其中,“两位上首弟子”是指依戒等功德而成为最上等的弟子;因为大拘絺罗长老并没有达到上首弟子的标准,而是达到了大弟子的标准。“刚才我们……”等话,是在不搅乱下面因缘所生法的情况下,把开示引出来,并不是以互为缘的方式来说的。但在这里,大长老是带着某种用意把它搅动、转折之后才说的,大拘絺罗长老正是想通过那个用意来阐明它,所以他说了“刚才我们……”等话。因此说“这位长老……”等。巴利
67. Sattame kasmā pucchatīti mahākoṭṭhikatthero sayaṃ tattha nikkaṅkho samāno kasmā pucchatīti adhippāyo. Ajjhāsayajānanatthanti idampi tassa mahāsāvakassa paracittajānanena appāṭihīraṃ siyā, tena taṃ aparitussanto ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha dve aggasāvakāti sīlādiguṇehi uttamasāvakāti attho, na hi mahākoṭṭhikatthero aggasāvakalakkhaṇappatto, atha kho mahāsāvakalakkhaṇappatto. Idāneva kho mayantiādi heṭṭhā paccayuppannaṃ anāloḷentena dassetvā desanā āhaṭā, na aññamaññapaccayatāvasena, idha pana yenādhippāyena taṃ āloḷetvā nivattetvā kathitaṃ mahātherena, tamevassa adhippāyaṃ teneva pakāsetukāmo mahākoṭṭhikatthero āha ‘‘idāneva kho maya’’ntiādi. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ thero’’tiādi.
“在这个范围内”:从最开始那句“贤友,究竟是怎么回事……”开始,一直到“灭尽”这一句为止,就是在这个范围里。因为开示没有直接取无明和行,而是依“名色为缘而有识”的方式展开,所以说“这是依缘已生的五蕴有而宣说的开示”。所谓“把握了果,就等于把握了因”:把握了识,也就把握了行,而作为行之因的无明同样也被把握了,因此说“在前面已经解答的十二处当中”。“在每一句”就是在每一句里。“依三组三句”:依经中出现的“他为灭尽而开示法、他为灭尽而修行、他为灭尽而成为无取解脱者”这三组,每组三句的格式。像“以十八事”等说法中,这里的“事”是“原因”的另一种说法,所以说“以三十六种原因”。第一种是随喜的方式。说法师的功德,是以不区分对象的施设方式来说的,指的就是观的领域。其余两种里也是同样的道理。第二种是随喜,第三种是随喜:应当依照所对应的含义来说。开示的成就是因为经中说了“为厌离……乃至……开示法”。有学地是因为经中说了“为厌离……乃至……而修行”。无学地是因为经中说了“为厌离……乃至……成为无取解脱者”。巴利
Ettake ṭhāneti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho āvuso’’tiādinā paṭhamārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘nirodho hotī’’ti padaṃ, ettake ṭhāne. Avijjāsaṅkhāre aggahetvā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti desanāya pavattattā ‘‘paccayuppannapañcavokārabhavavasena desanā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Phale gahite kāraṇaṃ gahitamevā’’ti viññāṇe gahite saṅkhārā, tesañca kāraṇabhūtā avijjā gahitā eva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhā vissajjitesu dvādasasu padesū’’ti. Ekekasminti ekekasmiṃ pade. Tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasenāti ‘‘nirodhāya dhammaṃ desesi, nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti, nirodhā anupādāvinimutto hotī’’ti evamāgatānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vārānaṃ vasena. ‘‘Aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhī’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 468) viya idha vatthusaddo kāraṇapariyāyoti āha ‘‘chattiṃsāya kāraṇehī’’ti. Paṭhamo anumodanāvidhi. Dhammakathikaguṇoti vipassanāvisayo abhedopacārena vutto. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo. Dutiyo anumodanā, tatiyaṃ anumodananti abhidheyyānurūpaṃ vattabbaṃ. Desanāsampatti kathitā ‘‘nibbidāya…pe… dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vuttattā. Sekkhabhūmi kathitā ‘‘nibbidāya…pe… paṭipanno hotī’’ti vuttattā. Asekkhabhūmi kathitā ‘‘nibbidā …pe… anupādāvimutto hotī’’ti vuttattā.
第八 憍赏弥经的注释巴利
8. Kosambisuttavaṇṇanā
68 68. 第八经中,“信受他人”是指相信别人的话。因此说“那个人说‘这是真实的’,他就执取它”。因为他依从他人,智慧被他人牵着走。“某个理由”是指自己思考过的对象,也就是一种理由在心中现起,如所假设的对象在心中现前。“喜好”是指按照自己的想法思量“这事将会如此,不会变成别的样子”,从而产生喜好。“由喜好而执取”是指不依从他人,而是自己这样认同、喜好而执取。“传闻”是指“辗转听闻”而来的,也就是从长久流传的传闻中得到的,心里想“这事怎么会这样?为什么这是真实的”,从而以传闻而执取。“由思择”是指思量“这事将会如此”的人的思择。“一个理由现起”是指如所假设的对象在心中现起。“由行相伺察”是指以自己所设想的行相而执取它。“一种见生起”是指坚执“如所设想的任何义理,这事就是这样,不是别的样子”的人,一种坚执生起。“凡他……”是指凡以那种见,对于那个人。“伺察”是指如现前一样确定下来而思量。“堪忍”是指这样执取是堪忍的。因此说“他……乃至……执取”。这些是指信等。因为它们对于可信之事的执取有原因的作用,所以说为“理由”。“有之灭尽即涅槃”是指九种有在此处被证得时灭尽,即有之灭尽,涅槃。这有以五蕴为摄,离了那五蕴则不存在,所以说“五蕴灭尽即涅槃”。“有之灭尽名为涅槃”是指“涅槃名为有之灭尽”这个问题,有学之人也应知道,不只是无学之人。“此义”是指此如实之理。巴利
68. Aṭṭhame parassa saddahitvāti parassa vacanaṃ saddahitvā. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ esa bhaṇati, taṃ bhūtanti gaṇhātī’’ti. Parapattiyo hi eso paraneyyabuddhiko. Yaṃ kāraṇanti yaṃ attanā cintitavatthu. Ruccatīti ‘‘evametaṃ bhavissati, na aññathā’’ti attano matiyā cintentassa ruccati. Ruciyā gaṇhātīti parapattiyo ahutvā sayameva tathā rocento gaṇhāti. Anussavoti ‘‘anu anu suta’’nti evaṃ cirakālagatāya anussutiyā labbhamānaṃ ‘‘kathamidaṃ siyā, kasmā bhūtameta’’nti anussavena gaṇhāti. Vitakkayatoti ‘‘evametaṃ siyā’’ti parikappentassa. Ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhātīti yathāparikappitavatthu cittassa upaṭṭhāti. Ākāraparivitakkenāti attanā kappitākārenā taṃ gaṇhāti. Ekā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti ‘‘yathāparikappitaṃ kiñci atthaṃ evametaṃ, nāññathā’’ti abhinivisantassa eko abhiniveso uppajjati. Yāyassāti yāya diṭṭhiyā assa puggalassa. Nijjhāyantassāti paccakkhaṃ viya nirūpetvā cintentassa. Khamatīti tathā gahaṇakkhamo hoti. Tenāha ‘‘so…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti. Etānīti saddhādīni. Tāni hi saddheyyānaṃ vatthūnaṃ gahaṇahetubhāvato ‘‘kāraṇānī’’ti vuttāni. Bhavanirodho nibbānanti navavidhopi bhavo nirujjhati ettha etasmiṃ adhigateti bhavanirodho, nibbānaṃ. Svāyaṃ bhavo pañcakkhandhasaṅgaho tabbinimutto natthīti āha ‘‘pañcakkhandhanirodho nibbāna’’nti. Bhavanirodho nibbānaṃ nāmāti ‘‘nibbānaṃ nāma bhavanirodho’’ti esa pañho sekkhehipi jānitabbo, na asekkheheva. Imaṃ ṭhānanti imaṃ yāthāvakāraṇaṃ.
“善见”是指:我以正慧如实、正确地见到了“有的灭尽就是涅槃”。因为如实见到了有的压迫性、有为性、灼热性、变坏性,以及有灭尽的出离性、远离性、无为性、不死性。安住于不还果的人,其实就叫做安住于不还道的人,因为他还没有证得更高的道果,所以说“由于安住于不还道的缘故”。这位长老虽然有以涅槃为所缘而生起的智,但它并不是像“观察涅槃”那种被称作观察智的智,所以说“十九种……观察智”。这就表明:这种智不像(无学圣者的)涅槃观察智,而是还带有残余部分的智。这样说明之后,应当看出,这里井的比喻也得到了成立。“以观察智”:是指以观察残余烦恼,或者以观察涅槃本身为对象的观察智。“将来证得阿罗汉果时”:因为将来会成就、会证得阿罗汉果,所以他知道:“我这样寻求它,必将亲自证得涅槃。”巴利
Suṭṭhu diṭṭhanti ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbāna’’nti mayā suṭṭhu yāthāvato diṭṭhaṃ, bhavassa pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhānaṃ, bhavanirodhassa ca nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhatāmataṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya diṭṭhattā. Anāgāmiphale ṭhito hi anāgāmimagge ṭhito eva nāma uparimaggassa anadhigatattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘anāgāmimagge ṭhitattā’’ti. Nibbānaṃ ārabbha pavattampi therassetaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘nibbānaṃ paccavekkhatī’’ti vuttañāṇaṃ viya na hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekūnavīsatiyā…pe… paccavekkhaṇañāṇa’’nti. Etena etaṃ nibbānapaccavekkhaṇā viya na hoti sappadesabhāvatoti dasseti. Evañca katvā idha udapānanidassanampi samatthitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇenāti avasesakilesānaṃ, nibbānasseva vā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena. Upari arahattaphalasamayoti upari sijjhanato arahattapaṭilābho tathā atthi. ‘‘Yenāhaṃ taṃ pariyesato nibbānaṃ sacchikarissāmī’’ti jānāti.
第九部《近行经》的注释巴利
9. Upayantisuttavaṇṇanā
69 第九经中,“在水增长之时”:在所有日子里,大海内部巨大的月光宝珠山被月光触及而受到激发,于是水不断涌出,这就是海水增长的时候。“向上行进”:意思是水越过原本停留的位置,继续往上升。“向上维持”:是说水在那里一层又一层地往上涨。当水这样上涨时,就说它“增长、充满”,所以解释说“意思是增长、充满”。因为缘法在自身果报的聚合条件具备时,由于能令那果报随自己掌控而发生,就仿佛站在那果报之上一样,因此说“无明向上行进”。因为以缘的方式,它才这样说。因此说“能够成为诸行之缘”。“离去”:正在消退、离散。因此说“退落”,即不增长、正在减损的意思。巴利
69. Navame udakavaḍḍhanasamayeti sabbadivasesu mahāsamuddassa anto mahantacandakantamaṇipabbatānaṃ juṇhasamphassena pahatattā jalābhisandanavasena udakassa vaḍḍhanasamaye. Upari gacchantoti pakatiyā udakassa tiṭṭhaṭṭhānassa tato upari gacchantoti attho. Upari yāpetīti udakaṃ tattha uparūpari vaḍḍheti. Tathābhūto ca taṃ brūhento pūrentoti vuccatīti āha ‘‘vaḍḍheti pūretīti attho’’ti. Yasmā paccayadhammā attano phalasamavāyapaccaye honte tassa upari ṭhito viya hoti tassa attano vase vattāpanato, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjā upari gacchantī’’ti. Paccayabhāvena hi sā tathā vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ sakkuṇantī’’ti. Apagacchanto yāyanto. Tenāha ‘‘osaranto’’ti, avaḍḍhanto parihīyamānoti attho.
第10章《须深经》的注释巴利
10. Susimasuttavaṇṇanā
70 受尊重,是因为他达到了那些作为尊贵之因的最胜功德的顶点,以不与他人共有的尊重而受到尊重。受敬仰,是因为他正行而受到敬仰。正是由于那样的行道令智者心生欢喜,所以说“以心被喜爱”。而“以四资具供养而受崇敬”,这只是义释的说法。结集者们为了说明这个意思,在这部经的开头放入了“那时,世尊受尊重……”等语,应当知道这是以标举要义的方式来说的。其余各句也依此类推。“从肩峰处”:指用上衣覆盖双肩后站立时,从右肩峰处,或从两边把衣卸下。他因通达圣典而成为博学的游方者,因此后来才获得殊胜;又因为以种种善巧方式说法,所以被称为“诗魁”。巴利
70. Dasame garukatoti garubhāvahetūnaṃ uttamaguṇānaṃ matthakappattiyā anaññasādhāraṇena garukārena garukato. Mānitoti sammāpaṭipattiyā mānito. Tāya hi viññūnaṃ manāpatāti āha ‘‘manena piyāyito’’ti. Catupaccayapūjāya ca pūjitoti idaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Yadatthaṃ saṃgītikārehi ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hotī’’tiādinā imassa suttassa nidānaṃ nikkhittaṃ, tassa atthassa ulliṅgavasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Aṃsakūṭatoti uttarāsaṅgena ubho aṃsakūṭe paṭicchādetvā ṭhitā dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato, ubhayato vā apanenti. Paricitaganthavasena paṇḍitaparibbājako, yato pacchā visesabhāgī jāto. Vicittanayāya dhammakathāya kathanato ‘‘kaviseṭṭho’’ti āhaṃsu.
有大神力的,就是具大光辉。因为饭前等日常事务有固定的安排,所以被称为致力于规律的人。这里在观相中所说的智,就是指这个。所谓法,是指在各个集会中,长老不在场时所宣说的法。他把它取来而讲说,因为那是从最殊胜者那里领受而来的。巴利
Tejussadoti mahātejo. Purebhattakiccādīnaṃ niyatabhāvena niyamamanuyutto. Vipassanālakkhaṇamhīti ñāṇaṃ tattha kathitaṃ. Dhammanti tassaṃ tassaṃ parisāyaṃ therassa asammukhā desitaṃ dhammaṃ. Āharitvā katheti tathā varassa dinnattā.
须尸摩虽然不像富楼那等人那样自称是导师,但外道们却因为“这位婆罗门出家者有智慧、通达吠陀支”,把他推上教团导师的位置,并且对他如此推崇。因此才说“他自称‘我是导师’”,这并不是因为他持常见。也正因如此,他才能来到世尊面前。巴利
Kiñcāpi susimo pūraṇādayo viya satthupaṭiñño na hoti, titthiyehi pana ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇapabbajito paññavā vedaṅgakusalo’’ti gaṇācariyaṭṭhāne ṭhapito, tathā cassa sambhāvito. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ satthāti paṭijānanto’’ti, na sassatadiṭṭhikattā. Tathā hesa bhagavato sammukhā upagantuṃ asakkhi.
了知是阿拉汉果的名称,因为它在已知根修习圆满之后才生起。听闻其生起,就是听闻了他人所说的了知记别之后。对于须师摩来说,最上无量就是最高的顶点。教师秘意,就是老师紧握不传的法。巴利
Aññāti arahattassa nāmaṃ aññindriyassa ciṇṇante pavattattā. Taṃ pavattinti yaṃ aññabyākaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sutvā. Assa susimassa, paramappamāṇanti uttamakoṭi. Ācariyamuṭṭhīti ācariyassa muṭṭhikatadhammo.
“诸支的寂静”是指:由于盖等敌对法被远离,诸禅支得以寂静。因为一切不安与热恼都已止息,那些禅那才更为殊胜。“所缘的寂静”是指:由于似相消失,所缘变得微细、柔软,以所缘寂静故。从修习增上而成就的微细、柔软类所缘成为寂静的那一刻起,就应当了知禅支的寂静。或者,因所缘寂静,以彼为所缘的诸法也随之寂静,这可以通过以出世间法为所缘的诸省察来说明。“无色解脱”是指无色界禅那的想解脱。这只是以慧而解脱,不是俱分解脱。诸法的安住性,即它们的自性,就是法住,也就是无常、苦、无我性;对它的智就是法住智,所以说“观智”。世尊正是这样说的:“须深,先有法住智,后有涅槃智”等等。巴利
Aṅgasantatāyāti nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vidūrabhāvena jhānaṅgānaṃ vūpasantatāya. Nibbutasabbadarathapariḷāhatāya hi tesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṇītatarabhāvo. Ārammaṇasantatāyāti rūpapatibhāgavigamena saṇhasukhumādibhāvappattassa ārammaṇassa santabhāvena. Yadaggena hi tesaṃ bhāvanātisayasambhāvitasaṇhasukhumappakārāni ārammaṇāni santāni, tadaggena jhānaṅgānaṃ santatā veditabbā. Ārammaṇasantatāya vā tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā. Āruppavimokkhāti arūpajjhānasaññāvimokkhā. Paññāmatteneva vimuttā, na ubhatobhāgavimuttā. Dhammānaṃ ṭhitatā taṃsabhāvatā dhammaṭṭhiti, aniccadukkhānattatā, tattha ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti āha ‘‘vipassanāñāṇa’’nti. Evamāhāti ‘‘pubbe kho, susima, dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, pacchā nibbāne ñāṇa’’nti evamādi.
所谓“即使离定”,这是针对纯观乘者说的:即使没有已达止相、先前成就的定,也能证得。所谓“如是”,就是依照所说的方式。这不是定的等流,不像次第入定那样;不是定的功德利益,不像世间神通那样;不是定的完成,不像到达一切有顶那样。观的完成才是道或果——这里就是这样连接的。巴利
Vināpisamādhinti samathalakkhaṇappattaṃ purimasiddhaṃ vināpi samādhinti vipassanāyānikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evanti vuttākārena. Na samādhinissando anupubbavihārā viya. Na samādhiānisaṃso lokiyābhiññā viya. Na samādhissa nipphatti sabbabhavaggaṃ viya. Vipassanāya nipphatti maggo vā phalaṃ vāti yojanā.
对于色等法,依三种特相转变而作的教导,就是“三转教导”。他提出追问:“须深,不是这样说过吗——如今你通过证得阿罗汉果,已经完全通达缘起的运作方式,并对它远离了迷惑。”为了使之清楚明白:“须深,就像你成为思择者、干观者,善巧安住于对诸漏的灭尽观察,这些比丘也是如此。因此,你不应该用‘然而,尊者们……’这样的话去追问他们。”巴利
Rūpādīsu cetesu tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ parivattanavasena desanā teparivaṭṭadesanā. Anuyogaṃ āropentoti nanu vuttaṃ, susima, idāni arahattādhigamena sabbaso paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhitvā tattha vigatasammohoti anuyogaṃ karonto. Pākaṭakaraṇatthanti yathā tvaṃ, susima, nijjhānako sukkhavipassako ca hutvā āsavānaṃ khayasammasane suppatiṭṭhito, evametepi bhikkhū, tasmā ‘‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto’’tiādinā na te tayā anuyuñjitabbāti.
沙门婆罗门品巴利
8. Samaṇabrāhmaṇavaggo
《老死经》等的注释巴利
1. Jarāmaraṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
71-72 把每一部经单独分开,就成了十一部经。之所以这样分开说,是因为依无明而作的教示还没有出现,也因为这里是以四谛为框架,把每一句都抽出来说明。虽说在别处确实有“由漏的集起而有无明的集起”这样的经文句子,但要知道,这里是随顺所化众生的意乐,所以没有那样说。巴利
71-72.Ekekaṃ suttaṃ katvā ekādasa suttāni vuttāni avijjāya vasena desanāya anāgatattā, tathānāgamanañcassā catusaccavasena ekekassa padassa uddhaṭattā. Kāmañca ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti attheva aññattha suttapadaṃ, idha pana veneyyajjhāsayavasena tathā na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
9. 中间省略品巴利
9. Antarapeyyālavaggo
《导师经》等的注释巴利
1. Satthusuttādivaṇṇanā
73 这位被称为“师”的人,是为了圣道的利益而教导、随教诫解脱法,所以称为“师”。以增上戒等为首,修学共有三种。“瑜伽”就是修习的实践。“欲”是能引导的、想要去做的善欲。“能承受一切”:他能承受修习中的一切危险,或者能承受、运载对它有益的一切,所以叫能承受一切。“不退转”:就是不退缩,所以叫不退转。“热勤”:能克服障碍、消除愚痴的精进,它烧尽烦恼,所以叫热勤。“精进”:因为要按一定方式去策动、去推动,所以叫精进。持续不断转起的修习之业称为相续,因此说“持续之行”。所谓“正是那样的”:正如前面所说的念那样,智也正是那样的,意思是依老、死等而把握四谛的智。巴利
73.Ayaṃsatthā nāmāti ayaṃ ariyamaggassa atthāya sāsati vimuttidhammaṃ anusāsatīti satthā nāma. Adhisīlādivasena tividhāpi sikkhā. Yogoti bhāvanānuyogo. Chandoti niyyānetā kattukamyatākusalacchando. Sabbaṃ bhāvanāya parissayaṃ sahati, sabbaṃ vāssa upakārāvahaṃ sahati vāhetīti sabbasahaṃ. Appaṭivānīti na paṭinivattatīti appaṭivānī. Antarāya sahanaṃ mohanāsanavīriyaṃ ātappati kileseti ātappaṃ. Vidhinā īretabbattā pavattetabbattā vīriyaṃ. Satataṃ pavattiyamānabhāvanānuyogakammaṃ sātaccanti āha ‘‘satatakiriya’’nti. Tādisamevāti yādisī sati vuttā, tādisameva ñāṇaṃ, jarāmaraṇādivasena catusaccapariggāhakaṃ ñāṇanti attho.